City of New Rochelle, New York DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Department of Public Works

515 North Avenue

New Rochelle, NY 10801

(914) 654-2131

City of New Rochelle, New York DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

VOLUME 2

FOR

WILDCLIFF REUSE & H.P.C.G

Project 21-012CProject 21-012PProject 21-012MProject 21-012E

PRC# 20210004731

James. J. Moran, P.E.City Engineer/ Acting Commissioner

City of New Rochelle May 12, 2021 Wildcliff and H.P.C.G.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 1 DIVISION 0 CITY OF NEW ROCHELLE PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS INVITATION TO BIDDERS “SCHEDULE A” TO THE GENERAL AGREEMENT INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS SECTION A – INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS PROCEDURES OF SUBMITTING A BID

Contents Examination of plans, specifications, addenda, etc. Bidding time and form Bid to cover every item Bidding form not to be taken apart Certified check, cashier’s check, bid bond or cash Approximate estimates of quantities Construction conditions Time for completion Rejection of bids

CONDITIONS TO BE MET BY SUCCESSFUL BIDDER Compliance with Contract Provisions Compliance with labor and other laws Insurance required Bond required Bidder to be competent Award of contract Notifications to Contractor – EEO Nondiscrimination and EEO policy statement NYS Affirmative Action Requirements

SECTION B – BIDDER’S PROPOSAL BID SCHEDULE OF PRICES Bid Proposal – General Construction Contract, Project# 21-012C Bid Proposal – Plumbing Contract, Project# 21-012P Bid Proposal – Mechanical Contract, Project# 21-012M Bid Proposal – Electrical Contract, Project# 21-012E SECTION C – GENERAL AGREEMENT GENERAL CONDUCT AND INSPECTION OF WORK COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS AND REGULATIONS PAYMENTS FOR WORK


TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 003132 Geotechnical Report DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: Section Number and Title 011100 Summary 011200 Multiple Contract Summary 012100 Allowances 012200 Unit Prices 012300 Alternates 012500 Substitution Procedures 012600 Contract Modification Procedures 012900 Payment Procedures 013100 Project Management and Coordination 013200 Construction Progress Documentation 013233 Photographic Documentation 013300 Submittal Procedures 014000 Quality Requirements 015000 Temporary Facilities & Controls 016000 Product Requirements 017300 Execution 017419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 017700 Closeout Procedures 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data 017839 Project Record Documents 017900 Demonstration and Training 019113 General Commissioning Requirements VOLUME 2 DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS: Section Number and Title 020110 Mobilization 024113 Site Demolition and Site Preparation 024119 Selective Demolition DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE: Section Number and Title 030132 Repairs by Epoxy Injection 031000 Concrete Forming and Accessories 032000 Concrete Reinforcing 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete


TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY: Section Number and Title 040310 Historic Masonry Cleaning 040342 Historic Stone Masonry Repair 040343 Historic Stone Masonry Repointing 040501 Mortar and Grout 042200 Concrete Unit Masonry 044300 Natural Stone Veneer DIVISION 05 – METALS: Section Number and Title 051200 Structural Steel Framing 054000 Cold-Form Metal Framing 055000 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES: Section Number and Title 061000 Rough Carpentry 061600 Sheathing DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION: Section Number and Title 072100 Thermal Insulation 072500 Weather Barriers 074113.16 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels 074213.13 Formed Metal Wall Panels 074293 Soffit Panels 074646 Fiber-Cement Multipurpose Fiber Cement Panels 075323 Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing 079200 Joint Sealants DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS: Section Number and Title 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 081416 Flush Wood Doors 084113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 087113 Automatic Door Operators 087100 Door Hardware 088000 Glazing 089119 Fixed Louvers


TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES: Section Number and Title 092116 Gypsum Board 093013 Ceramic Tiling 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories 099113 Exterior Painting 099123 Interior Painting DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES: Section Number and Title 101419 Dimensional Letter Signage 101423.16 Room-Identification Panel Signage 101453 Site Signage 102800 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 104413 Fire Protection Cabinets 104416 Fire Extinguishers DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT: Section Number and Title 114000 Food Service Equipment DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION: Section Number and Title 133413 Greenhouses DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING: Section Number and Title 220513 Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment 220516 Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping 220517 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping 220518 Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping 220519 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping 220523.12 Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping 220523.14 Check Valves for Plumbing Piping 220523.15 Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping 220529 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220719 Plumbing Piping Insulation 220800 Commissioning of Plumbing


TABLE OF CONTENTS

221116 Domestic Water Piping 221119 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 221123.21 Inline, Domestic-Water Pumps 221316 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 221319 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 221319.13 Sanitary Drains 221413 Facility Storm Drainage Piping 221423 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties 223300 Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters 224213.13 Commercial Water Closets 224216.13 Commercial Lavatories 224216.16 Commercial Sinks 224713 Drinking Fountains DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC): Section Number and Title 230513 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 230517 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping 230529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230548.13 Vibrations Controls for HVAC 230553 Identifications for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230593 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC 230713 Duct Insulation 230719 HVAC Piping Insulation 230800 Commissioning of HVAC 230923 Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC 230923.12 Control Dampers 230923.27 Temperature Instruments 230923.43 Weather Stations 232113 Hydronic Piping 232300 Refrigerant Piping 233113 Metal Ducts 233300 Air Duct Accessories 233713.13 Air Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 233716 Fabric Air-Distribution Devices 237223.19 Packaged Indoor Fixed Plate Energy Recovery Units 237223.29 Packaged Outdoor Fixed Plate Energy Recovery Units 238129 Variable Refrigerant Flow HVAC Systems 238216.14 Electric-Resistance Air Coils 238219 Fan Coil Units 238223 Convectors 238239.19 Wall and Ceiling Unit Heaters


TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL: Section Number and Title 260519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 260533 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 260544 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems 260572 Overcurrent Protective Device Short-Circuit Study 260573 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study 260574 Overcurrent Protective Device Arc-Flash Study 260800 Commissioning of Electrical Systems 260923 Lighting Control Devices 262416 Panelboards 262726 Wiring Devices 262816 Enclosed Switches 265119 LED Interior Lighting 265219 Emergency and Exit Lighting 265600 Exterior Lighting DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY: Section Number and Title 284621.11 Addressable Fire-Alarm Systems DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK: Section Number and Title 311000 Site Clearing 311400 Strip screen and Stockpile Topsoil 312213 Formation of Subgrade 312316 Earthwork 312333 Trenching 312500 Sediment and Erosion Control DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS: Section Number and Title 321130 Chip Seal Pavement 321200 Bituminous Concrete Pavement 321313 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement and Curbs 321413 Unit Pavers 321726 Detectable Warning Surface 323119 Ornamental Fence


TABLE OF CONTENTS

323500 Refuse Enclosure 329113 Topsoil 329200 Lawn 329300 Landscape Planting 329413 Steel Edging DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES Section Number and Title 331000 Water Distribution 333000 Sanitary Sewer 334000 Storm Drainage

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

City of New Rochelle May 12, 2021 Wildcliff Reuse & H.P.C.G.

020110 Page 1 of 1

SECTION 02 01 10 - MOBILIZATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Under this item, the Contractor shall furnish and set up his necessary general plant, including shop, storage areas, office, and such sanitary and other facilities as are required by City, State, or Federal law or regulation. The cost of required insurance and bonds and/or any other similar significant initial expense required for the initiation of the contract work shall be included in this item. The determination of the adequacy of the Contractor's facilities, except as noted above shall be made by the Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Such materials as are required that are not to be a part of the completed contract shall be as determined by the Engineer, except that they shall conform to any pertinent City, State, or Federal law, regulation, or code.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 METHOD

A. Such work as is done in providing the facilities and services under this item shall be done in safe and workmanlike manner and shall conform with any pertinent City, State or Federal law, regulation, or code. Good housekeeping consistent with safety shall be maintained.

END OF SECTION 020110


024113 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 02 41 13 – SITE DEMOLITION AND SITE PREPARATION

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Special Conditions, apply to this Section.

B. “Standard Specifications” shall mean the State of New York Department of Transportation

Standard Specifications, January 1, 2021, its latest edition and any supplemental specifications. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Review of existing conditions and subsurface data. B. Maintain existing fencing, provide and install new construction fence as necessary. C. Provide and install project signs. D. Demolition and disposal of existing features as shown on the plans.

1.3 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Examine the site and verify the existing conditions. No claim for extra compensation for inaccuracies of existing conditions will be allowed.

1.4 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Contact Dig Safely New York (1.800.962.7962 or 811) to locate underground utilities prior to commencing site preparation operations.

B. No areas under construction shall be left accessible to pedestrians at any time. Take all

necessary steps, as requested or approved by the Engineer, to secure the site. C. When making water, storm drainage or any other utility connections, secure work areas which

occur outside of the proposed construction fence line for the entire time construction is taking place.

D. Use entrances shown on the Drawings for access and egress to the site. All damage to

pavement and grounds to remain caused by vehicular access to the site shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

E. Peripheral areas outside of the limit of work shown shall not be disturbed or used for storing or

stockpiling materials without prior approval.

F. Protect the trees indicated on the plan. PART 2 - PRODUCTS


024113 Page 2 of 3

2.1 PROJECT SIGNS A. Provide one Project Identification Sign where and as directed by the Owner. Owner shall

provide text for the signage. Signs shall be 4'x8', constructed out of 3/4" ACX plywood, exterior grade, five (5) plies - front side to be Medium Density Overlay (M.D.O.), reverse side to be ‘C’ or approved equal.

1. Text and graphics shall be approved by Owner and reviewed by Engineer. Comply with

direction for text content, style of lettering, graphics and design layout. 2. Finish: Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over

exterior primer. Colors to be selected by Owner. 3. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics for Project Identification sign.

C. Posts: pressure-treated 4"x4" posts or galvanized steel posts, minimum 4'-0" depth burial or

other sign attachments as approved by Engineer. Signs shall be rigidly braced and supported. D. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and

visitors as required. Sign material and sizes to be approved by Owner.

1. Finish: Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer. Colors to be selected by Owner.

2. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics for temporary directional and

informational signs. Comply with direction for text content, style of lettering and design layout.

3. Posts: pressure-treated 4"x4" posts or galvanized steel posts, minimum 4'0" depth burial or

other sign attachments as approved by Owner.

E. Submit Shop Drawings of the signs showing all materials and text prior to fabrication. 2.2 CONSTRUCTION FENCE

A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum two (2) inch, 0.148 inch thick, galvanized steel, chain-link

fabric fencing; minimum eight (8) feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8 inch OD line posts and 2-7/8 inch OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8 inch OD top rails.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION FENCE

A. Review the limits of the existing fencing currently on site. Maintain existing fence and/or provide additional temporary fence as required to properly secure the site. Fencing shall be provided and maintained throughout the duration of the Contract.

B. Install fence in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, and other animals from easily entering

site except by entrance gates. C. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized

personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys each.


024113 Page 3 of 3

D. Remove any fencing that was installed only for construction purposes upon completion of the

Contract. Permanent fencing shall remain in place. E. Additional Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code

requirements for erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.

3.2 PROJECT SIGNS

A. Install Project Identification Sign where directed by the Owner. The sign shall be installed prior to the start of construction.

B. Mount sign at a height of at least five feet. C. Install signs as indicated to inform public and persons seeking entrance to Project. Do not

permit installation of unauthorized signs. D. Install temporary directional/information signs as directed by Engineer. E. Maintain signs throughout construction; keep them clean, in proper position and alignment to

give maximum visibility both day and night. F. Signs are the property of the contractor and shall be removed at completion of work.

3.3 DEMOLITION

A. Demolish site features shown on the plans. B. Take care not to damage any features that are to remain. Repair existing features to remain that

are damaged by demolition operations. C. All demolished features will become the property of the contractor except as noted. 3.3 DISPOSAL A. All waste material shall be disposed of legally off site. B. Suitable excess earth materials, as determined by the Engineer, may be used on other parts of

the project. Excess materials not required for construction shall become the property of the Contractor for proper disposal off-site.

C. No burning or burying on-site will be allowed.

END OF SECTION 02 41 13


024119 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures. 2. Section 024119 "Site Demolition and Site Preparation" for site clearing and removal of

above- and below-grade improvements not part of selective demolition.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and store on site.

C. Remove and Salvage for Reuse: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

E. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.


024119 Page 2 of 5

3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building.

B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and, for noise control.

C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Coordinate with sequence of activity outlined in Structural documents

2. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 3. Coordination of Owner's continuing operation of adjacent public park.

D. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage and demolition operations. Comply with Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work begins.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

C. Hazardous Materials: It is unconfirmed if hazardous materials are present and will be encountered in the Work. 1. A limited hazardous material survey will be undertaken by the City of New Rochelle to

occur concurrent with contract award and mobilization. Some amount of hazardous material remediation is may be necessary in the basement of the Wildcliff building. An Allowance has been established in Contract C General Construction to address possible remediation actions.

2. If in the course of work, suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner.

D. Long term storage, or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.


024119 Page 3 of 5

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSP A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building demolition operations.

C. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs or video.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, and confirm utility services are disconnected to building.

1. Owner believes existing utility services to be shut off. 2. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC

systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.


024119 Page 4 of 5

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. Coordinate sequence with requirements of Structural documents.

2. Contract documents call for the salvage and reuse of existing, original stone masonry. Conduct selective demolition of stone walls to be removed with consideration for this reuse, and evaluation of individual stone elements for their suitability for reuse.

3. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

4. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

5. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

6. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 4 hours after flame-cutting operations. 7. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 8. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site. 9. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 10. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 11. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

C. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Evaluate, sort, store and protect stone masonry to be reused in repair of stone walls to remain.

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition.


024119 Page 5 of 5

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that

will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste

Management and Disposal."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.



030123 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 030132 - CRACK REPAIRS BY EPOXY INJECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural repair of cracks in concrete by permanently rebonding the concrete with epoxy

resin adhesive injected under pressure with special equipment. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Concrete Rehabilitation: Section 030131. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seepage of water through cracks repaired under the Work of this Section will be regarded

as defective Work subject to the one year guarantee required by the General Conditions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s printed specifications and installation instructions for

epoxy adhesive and surface seal material. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Test Reports: a. Submit reports for tests specified under Source Quality Control. b. If requested, submit test reports for all specified characteristics and

properties of the epoxy adhesive materials from an Independent Testing Laboratory.

2. Certificates: Epoxy adhesive manufacturer’s written certification that each batch of epoxy adhesive material shipped for this Project complies with the requirements of these specifications.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer’s Qualifications: Epoxy injection shall be performed by a firm that is licensed or

approved by the epoxy adhesive manufacturer to perform such work. In addition, the person supervising the epoxy injection shall be experienced in epoxy injection, and shall have been regularly employed for a minimum of five years by a company specializing in repairing cracks by epoxy injection.

1. If requested, furnish to the Director the names and addresses of five similar projects for which the supervisor has supervised epoxy injection work.

B. Workers’ Qualifications: Workers engaged in the Work of this Section shall have

satisfactorily completed a program of instruction in the epoxy injection process. The instruction shall include this specific method of repairing cracks in concrete, the technical aspects of correct material use, and the operation, maintenance and checking of equipment.


030123 Page 2 of 5

C. Testing Agency: Tests for all specified characteristics and properties of the epoxy adhesive materials shall have been performed by a qualified Independent Testing Laboratory and copies of the test results shall be available. Tests indicated under Source Quality Control shall be performed by the adhesive manufacturer.

D. Source Quality Control: The following quality control tests shall be performed on each

lot of epoxy adhesive materials supplied for this Project. Tests shall be conducted using the test methods indicated in Part 2.

1. Resin viscosity at 77 degrees F and epoxide equivalent weight. 2. Hardener viscosity at 77 degrees F and amine value. 3. Combined components pot life at 77 degrees F. 4. Cured (for 7 days) adhesive ultimate tensile strength and tensile elongation at

break; and slant shear strength for wet/wet concrete cured 3 days. E. Material Container Labels: Material containers shall bear a manufacturer’s label

indicating manufacturer’s name, trade name of product, lot number, shelf life of product, and mix ratio by volume.

F. Equipment for Injection: The injection equipment shall meter and mix the adhesive components, and inject the mixed adhesive into the cracks. Equipment shall be a portable, positive displacement type pump unit with interlock to insure exact ratio control of the two components at the nozzle. Unit shall have metering pumps, electrically or air powered, which will provide in-line metering and mixing of the adhesive components.

1. Discharge Pressure: The injection equipment shall have automatic pressure control capable of discharging the mixed adhesive at any pre-set pressure up to 200 psi (within a tolerance of plus or minus 5 psi), and shall be equipped with a manual pressure control override.

2. Ratio Tolerance: The injection equipment shall have the capability of maintaining the volume ratio for the adhesive, as prescribed by the manufacturer of the adhesive, within a tolerance of plus or minus 5 percent by volume at any discharge pressure up to 200 psi.

3. Automatic Shut-Off Control: The injection equipment shall have sensors on both component reservoirs that will automatically stop the machine when only one component is being pumped to the mixing head.

1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to the site in original, sealed containers bearing manufacturer’s label.

Do not deliver materials which have exceeded shelf life limitation set forth by the manufacturer.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s printed instructions for storing materials in original, sealed

containers at a temperature between 32 degrees F and 90 degrees F. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for

conditions under which materials can be applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS


030123 Page 3 of 5

2.1 MATERIALS A. Epoxy Adhesive: Two component, low viscosity, epoxy resin adhesive system

containing 100 percent solids, with no solvents or non-reactive diluents, which meets the following characteristics and properties:

1. Resin: Blend of epoxy resins. a. Viscosity at 40 + 3 degrees F, cps (Brookfield RVT Spindle No. 4 at 20

rpm): 6,000 - 8,000. b. Viscosity at 77 + 3 degrees F, cps (Brookfield RVT Spindle No. 2 at 20

rpm): 300 - 700. c. Epoxide Equivalent Weight (ASTM D 1652): 160 - 220. d. Ash Content, percent (ASTM D 482): 1 maximum. 2. Hardener: Blend of amine curing agents. a. Viscosity at 40 + 3 degrees F, cps (Brookfield RVT Spindle No. 2 at 20

rpm): 700 - 1,400. b. Viscosity at 77 + 3 degrees F, cps (Brookfield RVT Spindle No. 2 at 20

rpm): 100 - 400. c. Amine Value, mg K0H/g (ASTM D 664): 490 - 560. d. Ash Content, percent (ASTM D 482): 1 maximum. 3. Pot Life of the Combined Components: When mixed in the ratio recommended

by the manufacturer for use, material shall have pot life as follows: a. 60 g at 77 + 3 degrees F: 13 - 55 minutes. 4. Properties of the Cured Adhesive: When cured for 7 days at 77 + 3 degrees F,

material shall have the following properties: a. Ultimate Tensile Strength, psi (ASTM D 638): 5,000 minimum. b. Tensile Elongation at Break, percent (ASTM D 638): 4 maximum. c. Flexural Strength, psi (ASTM D 790): 10,000 minimum. d. Compressive Yield Strength, psi (ASTM D 695): 10,000 minimum. e. Slant Shear Strength, psi (AASHTO T 237, 5,000 psi compressive

strength concrete): 1) Cured 3 days at 40 + 3 degrees F, wet/wet concrete: 3,500

minimum. 2) Cured 7 days at 40 + 3 degrees F, wet/wet concrete: 4,000

minimum. 3) Cured 1 day at 77 + 3 degrees F, dry/dry concrete: 5,000

minimum. NOTE: Minor modifications to the indicated test methods, which are standard industry

procedures for testing epoxy adhesives, may be made. Test reports shall indicate such modifications.

B. Surface Seal: Material with adequate strength and adhesion to hold injection fittings

firmly in place and to prevent leakage of epoxy adhesive during injection. C. Finishing Patching Materials: As required to match performance of adjoining surfaces as

closely as practicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION


030123 Page 4 of 5

A. Clean cracks and adjacent surfaces free of loose material, dust, dirt, grease, oil,

efflorescence, and other foreign matter in accordance with epoxy adhesive manufacturer’s printed instructions and as required for proper bonding of surface seal. Do not use acids or corrosives.

B. Establish entry ports along each crack spaced at intervals not less than the thickness of

the concrete member being repaired. C. Apply surface seal material to the face of each crack between the entry ports as required

to prevent escape of injected epoxy adhesive. For cracks all the way through the concrete member, apply surface seal to both faces of cracks where accessible. Allow sufficient time for the surface seal material to gain adequate strength before proceeding with epoxy injection.

D. If cracks extend into moving joints, plug or seal off the cracks at the joints. 3.2 EPOXY INJECTION A. Set up and check injection equipment and material in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions and as specified. Do not thin epoxy adhesive. B. Beginning at the lowest entry port in the crack, unless otherwise recommended by the

installer because of the configuration of the crack, inject epoxy adhesive in the entry port until there is an appearance of adhesive at the next adjacent entry port. When epoxy adhesive travel is indicated at the next adjacent port, discontinue injection in the port, seal off the port, and resume injection in the next adjacent port. Continue this procedure until the crack has been injected full of epoxy adhesive for its entire length in one continuous operation. For horizontal cracks, proceed from one end of the crack to the other end in the same manner. Seal the last port, and allow the adhesive to cure.

C. If port to port travel of epoxy adhesive does not result after a reasonable amount of

pumping, stop injecting adhesive. Report abnormal conditions (if any) immediately to the Director’s Representative.

3.3 FINISHING A. Remove surface seal and entry port fittings when epoxy adhesive has sufficiently cured to

allow removal without disturbing the adhesive. B. Fill the face of the crack out flush with the concrete surface plane with patching

materials. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Furnish equipment necessary to perform field testing. B. Pressure Test: The mixing head of the injection equipment shall be disconnected and the

two supply lines shall be attached to a pressure check device. The pressure check device shall consist of two independently valved nozzles capable of controlling flow rate and pressure by opening or closing the valve. There shall be a pressure gauge capable of


030123 Page 5 of 5

sensing the pressure build-up behind each valve. The valves on the pressure check device shall be closed and the injection equipment operated until the gauge pressure on each line reads 190 psi. The pumps shall be stopped and the gauge pressure shall not drop below 180 psi within 3 minutes.

C. Ratio Tests: The mixing head of the injection equipment shall be disconnected and the

two adhesive components shall be pumped simultaneously through a ratio check device. The ratio check device shall consist of two independently valved nozzles capable of controlling back pressure by opening or closing the valve. There shall be a pressure gauge capable of sensing the back pressure behind each valve. The discharge pressure shall be adjusted to 180 psi for both adhesive components, and then the components shall be simultaneously discharged into separate calibrated containers. The amounts discharged into the containers during the same time period shall be compared to determine the volumes and the ratio of the components. The test shall be repeated with the discharge pressure adjusted to 0 psi for both adhesive components.

D. Frequency of Pressure and Ratio Tests: A pressure test and ratio tests shall be performed

for each injection equipment unit at the beginning of each shift and after the meal break of each shift that the unit is used.

1. Perform additional tests when directed by the Director’s Representative. E. Records of Tests: Record the date and results of all tests, and furnish a copy of the test

records to the Director’s Representative. 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove adhesive runs and spills from existing surfaces by a method which will not

deface the surfaces being cleaned.

END OF SECTION


031000 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 031000 - CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Form-facing material for cast-in-place concrete. 2. Shoring, bracing, and anchoring.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Prepared by, and signed and sealed by, a qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation, detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of forms.

1. For exposed vertical concrete walls, indicate dimensions and form tie locations. 2. Indicate dimension and locations of construction and movement joints required to

construct the structure in accordance with ACI 301.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Concrete Formwork: Design, engineer, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, shores, and reshores in accordance with ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads, so that resulting concrete conforms to the required shapes, lines, and dimensions.

1. Design wood panel forms in accordance with APA's "Concrete Forming Design/Construction Guide."

2. Design formwork to limit deflection of form-facing material to 1/240 of center-to-center spacing of supports.

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. As-Cast Surface Form-Facing Material:

1. Provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. 2. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 3. Acceptable Materials: As required to comply with Surface Finish designations specified

in Section 033000 "Cast-In-Place Concrete, and as follows:


031000 Page 2 of 4

a. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. b. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with

DOC PS 1, and as follows:

1) APA HDO (high-density overlay). 2) APA MDO (medium-density overlay); mill-release agent treated and edge

sealed. 3) APA Structural 1 Plyform, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. 4) APA Plyform Class I, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

B. Concealed Surface Form-Facing Material: Lumber, plywood, metal, plastic, or another approved material.

1. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF FORMWORK

A. Comply with ACI 301.

B. Construct formwork, so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117 and to comply with the Surface Finish designations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for as-cast finishes.

C. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

1. Minimize joints. 2. Exposed Concrete: Symmetrically align joints in forms.

D. Construct removable forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.

1. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. 2. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 3. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and other accessories, for easy removal.

E. Do not use rust-stained, steel, form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces.

1. Provide and secure units to support screed strips. 2. Use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.


031000 Page 3 of 4

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible.

1. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

2. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work.

1. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. 2. Obtain written approval of Architect prior to forming openings not indicated on

Drawings.

I. Construction and Movement Joints:

1. Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. 2. Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or

as approved by Architect. 3. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. 4. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans.

a. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.

5. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

6. Space vertical joints in walls: Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete.

1. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.


031000 Page 4 of 4

2. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.

3. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.

4. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures, as indicated on Drawings. 5. Clean embedded items immediately prior to concrete placement.

3.3 SHORING AND RESHORING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.

1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.

B. In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.

C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports.

C. Inspections:

1. Inspect formwork for shape, location, and dimensions of the concrete member being formed.

2. Inspect insulating concrete forms for shape, location, and dimensions of the concrete member being formed.



032000 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 032000 - CONCRETE REINFORCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Steel reinforcement bars. 2. Welded-wire reinforcement.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Each type of steel reinforcement. 2. Bar supports. 3. Mechanical splice couplers.

B. Shop Drawings: Comply with ACI SP-066:

1. Include placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. 2. Include bar sizes, lengths, materials, grades, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar

diagrams, bar arrangement, location of splices, lengths of lap splices, details of mechanical splice couplers, details of welding splices, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

C. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to build the structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.


A. Welding certificates.

1. Reinforcement to Be Welded: Welding procedure specification in accordance with AWS D1.4/D1.4M

B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: CRSI's "Epoxy Coating Plant Certification."

C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:

1. Steel Reinforcement:


032000 Page 2 of 4

a. For reinforcement to be welded, mill test analysis for chemical composition and carbon equivalent of the steel in accordance with ASTM A706/A706M.

2. Mechanical splice couplers.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Minutes of preinstallation conference.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with AWS D1.4/D 1.4M.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, deformed.

B. Headed-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A970/A970M.

C. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064/A1064M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

D. Deformed-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064/A1064M, flat sheet.

2.2 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place.

1. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete in accordance with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

a. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire, all-plastic bar supports, or CRSI Class 2 stainless steel bar supports.

b. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use CRSI Class 1A epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

c. For dual-coated reinforcement, use CRSI Class 1A epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

d. For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.


032000 Page 3 of 4

e. For stainless steel reinforcement, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire, all-plastic bar supports, or CRSI Class 2 stainless steel bar supports.

B. Steel Tie Wire: ASTM A1064/A1064M, annealed steel, not less than 0.0508 inch in diameter.

2.3 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protection of In-Place Conditions:

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. 2. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing and supporting reinforcement.

B. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement.

1. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. 2. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

C. Preserve clearance between bars of not less than 1 inch, not less than one bar diameter, or not less than 1-1/3 times size of large aggregate, whichever is greater.

D. Provide concrete coverage in accordance with ACI 318.

E. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

F. Splices: Lap splices as indicated on Drawings.

1. Bars indicated to be continuous, and all vertical bars shall be lapped not less than 36 bar diameters at splices, or 24 inches, whichever is greater.

2. Stagger splices in accordance with ACI 318.

G. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths.


032000 Page 4 of 4

1. Support welded-wire reinforcement in accordance with CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice."

a. For reinforcement less than W4.0 or D4.0, continuous support spacing shall not exceed 12 inches.

2. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one wire spacing plus 2 inches for plain wire and 8 inches for deformed wire.

3. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 4. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.3 JOINTS

A. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. 2. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. 3. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Comply with ACI 117.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports.

C. Inspections:

1. Steel-reinforcement placement. 2. Steel-reinforcement mechanical splice couplers. 3. Steel-reinforcement welding.



033000 Page 1 of 14

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cast-in-place concrete, including concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 031000 "Concrete Forming and Accessories" for form-facing materials, form liners, insulating concrete forms, and waterstops.

2. Section 032000 "Concrete Reinforcing" for steel reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, and other pozzolans materials subject to compliance with requirements.

B. Water/Cement Ratio (w/cm): The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.


A. Product Data: For each of the following.

1. Portland cement. 2. Fly ash. 3. Slag cement. 4. Blended hydraulic cement. 5. Aggregates. 6. Admixtures:

a. Include limitations of use, including restrictions on cementitious materials, supplementary cementitious materials, air entrainment, aggregates, temperature at time of concrete placement, relative humidity at time of concrete placement, curing conditions, and use of other admixtures.

7. Vapor retarders. 8. Liquid floor treatments.


033000 Page 2 of 14

9. Curing materials. 10. Joint fillers.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture, include the following:

1. Mixture identification. 2. Minimum 28-day compressive strength. 3. Durability exposure class. 4. Maximum w/cm. 5. Calculated equilibrium unit weight, for lightweight concrete. 6. Slump limit. 7. Air content. 8. Nominal maximum aggregate size. 9. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site if

permitted. 10. Intended placement method. 11. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions,

weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure.


A. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Curing compounds. 4. Vapor retarders. 5. Joint-filler strips.

B. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:

1. Portland cement. 2. Fly ash. 3. Slag cement. 4. Blended hydraulic cement. 5. Aggregates. 6. Admixtures:

C. Research Reports: For concrete admixtures in accordance with ICC's Acceptance Criteria AC198.

D. Preconstruction Test Reports: For each mix design.


033000 Page 3 of 14

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Ready-Mixed Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified in accordance with NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on each concrete mixture.

1. Include the following information in each test report:

a. Admixture dosage rates. b. Slump. c. Air content. d. Seven-day compressive strength. e. 28-day compressive strength.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with ASTM C94/C94M and ACI 301.


A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 306.1.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305.1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 Unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.


033000 Page 4 of 14

2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I/II. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. 3. Slag Cement: ASTM C989/C989M, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M, coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

C. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride in steel-reinforced concrete.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and -Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and -Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C1017/C1017M, Type II.

2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder, Class A: ASTM E1745, Class A not less than 10 mils thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.

2.4 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Curing Paper: Eight-feet- wide paper, consisting of two layers of fibered kraft paper laminated with double coating of asphalt.

D. Water: Potable or complying with ASTM C1602/C1602M.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming, Dissipating Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B.


033000 Page 5 of 14

F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming, Nondissipating Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering.

G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming, Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C1315, Type 1, Class A.

2.5 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

B. Floor Slab Protective Covering: Eight-feet- wide cellulose fabric.

2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, in accordance with ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs, based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash or Other Pozzolans: 25 percent by mass. 2. Slag Cement: 50 percent by mass. 3. Total of Fly Ash or Other Pozzolans, Slag Cement: 50 percent by mass, with fly ash or

pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent by mass. 4. Total of Fly Ash or Other Pozzolans: 35 percent by mass with fly ash or pozzolans not

exceeding 25 percent by mass.

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. PROVIDE NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE WITH THE FOLLOWING PROPERTIES:

FOUNDATIONS, WALLS, PIERS

SLABS ON GRADE

SIDEWALKS AND OTHER

CONCRETE

CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH

MATERIAL

f'c @ 28 days (psi) 3,000 3,500 4,000 100-300 Water-Cement Ratio

. 52 . 46 . 48 -

Entrained Air 6 +/- 2 6 +/- 2 6 +/- 2 15-20


033000 Page 6 of 14

Content (%) Minimum Cement Content (lb/cy)

517 517 564 188

Coarse Aggregate Size

ASTM C-33 Size 57

ASTM C-33 Size 467

ASTM C-33 Size 57

ASTM C-33 3/8”

Slump (In) 3 +/- 1 3 +/- 1 3 +/- 1 8+/-1

2.8 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining Work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete.

1. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of ANSI/AISC 303.

3. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDER

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder in accordance with ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install vapor retarder with longest dimension parallel with direction of concrete pour. 2. Face laps away from exposed direction of concrete pour. 3. Lap vapor retarder over footings and grade beams not less than 6 inches, sealing vapor

retarder to concrete. 4. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 5. Terminate vapor retarder at the top of floor slabs, grade beams, and pile caps, sealing

entire perimeter to floor slabs, grade beams, foundation walls, or pile caps. 6. Seal penetrations in accordance with vapor retarder manufacturer's instructions. 7. Protect vapor retarder during placement of reinforcement and concrete.


033000 Page 7 of 14

3.3 JOINTS

A. Construct joints true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Coordinate with floor slab pattern and concrete placement sequence.

1. Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated on Drawings or as approved by Architect.

2. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement.

a. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. b. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and

slabs.

3. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 4. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders at third points of spans. Offset joints in

girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 5. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and

girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 6. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, locate vertical joints beside piers integral with

walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

C. Control Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Form weakened-plane control joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface, where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints:

1. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated on Drawings. 2. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel bar length to prevent concrete bonding to one

side of joint.

F. Dowel Plates: Install dowel plates at joints where indicated on Drawings.


033000 Page 8 of 14

3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, embedded items, and vapor retarder is complete and that required inspections are completed.

1. Immediately prior to concrete placement, inspect vapor retarder for damage and deficient installation, and repair defective areas.

2. Provide continuous inspection of vapor retarder during concrete placement and make necessary repairs to damaged areas as Work progresses.

B. Notify Architect and testing and inspection agencies 24 hours prior to commencement of concrete placement.

C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect in writing, but not to exceed the amount indicated on the concrete delivery ticket.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

D. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301 (ACI 301M), but not to exceed the amount indicated on the concrete delivery ticket.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

E. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness.

1. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. 2. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 3. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures

and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 4. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment in accordance with

ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

a. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. b. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly

penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. c. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose

plasticity. d. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate

concrete, and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

F. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.


033000 Page 9 of 14

1. Do not place concrete floors and slabs in a checkerboard sequence. 2. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 3. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 4. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 5. Level concrete, cut high areas, and fill low areas. 6. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 7. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. 8. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

3.5 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Float Finish:

1. When bleedwater sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of specific float apparatus, consolidate concrete surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats.

2. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture and complies with ACI 117 tolerances for conventional concrete.

C. Trowel Finish:

1. After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel.

2. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance.

3. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

4. Do not add water to concrete surface. 5. Do not apply hard-troweled finish to concrete, which has a total air content greater than 3

percent. 6. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view.

D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and locations indicated on Drawings.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.

2. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In:


033000 Page 10 of 14

1. Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after Work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated.

2. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. 3. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

3.7 CONCRETE CURING

A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

1. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and ACI 306.1 for cold weather protection during curing.

2. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and ACI 305.1 (ACI 305.1M) for hot-weather protection during curing.

3. Maintain moisture loss no more than 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h), calculated in accordance with ACI 305.1,) before and during finishing operations.

B. Curing Formed Surfaces: Comply with ACI 308.1 (ACI 308.1M) as follows:

1. Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces.

2. Cure concrete containing color pigments in accordance with color pigment manufacturer's instructions.

3. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. 4. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing

period, as follows:

a. Continuous Fogging: Maintain standing water on concrete surface until final setting of concrete.

b. Continuous Sprinkling: Maintain concrete surface continuously wet. c. Absorptive Cover: Pre-dampen absorptive material before application; apply

additional water to absorptive material to maintain concrete surface continuously wet.

d. Water-Retention Sheeting Materials: Cover exposed concrete surfaces with sheeting material, taping, or lapping seams.

e. Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

1) Recoat areas subject to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application.

2) Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

C. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Comply with ACI 308.1 (ACI 308.1M) as follows:

1. Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete.


033000 Page 11 of 14

2. Interior Concrete Floors:

a. Floors to Receive Floor Coverings Specified in Other Sections: Contractor has option of the following:

1) Absorptive Cover: As soon as concrete has sufficient set to permit application without marring concrete surface, install prewetted absorptive cover over entire area of floor.

a) Lap edges and ends of absorptive cover not less than 12-inches (300-mm).

b) Maintain absorptive cover water saturated, and in place, for duration of curing period, but not less than seven days.

2) Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive.

a) Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.

b) Cure for not less than seven days.

3) Ponding or Continuous Sprinkling of Water: Maintain concrete surfaces continuously wet for not less than seven days, utilizing one, or a combination of, the following:

a) Water. b) Continuous water-fog spray.

b. Floors to Receive Curing Compound:

1) Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

2) Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application.

3) Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period. 4) Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound

without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

c. Floors to Receive Curing and Sealing Compound:

1) Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

2) Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application.


033000 Page 12 of 14

3) Repeat process 24 hours later, and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period.

3.8 TOLERANCES

A. Conform to ACI 117 .


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform field tests and inspections and prepare testing and inspection reports.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports.

1. Testing agency shall be responsible for providing curing container for composite samples on Site and verifying that field-cured composite samples are cured in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M.

2. Testing agency shall immediately report to Architect, Contractor, and concrete manufacturer any failure of Work to comply with Contract Documents.

3. Testing agency shall report results of tests and inspections, in writing, to Owner, Architect, Contractor, and concrete manufacturer within 48 hours of inspections and tests.

C. Batch Tickets: For each load delivered, submit three copies of batch delivery ticket to testing agency, indicating quantity, mix identification, admixtures, design strength, aggregate size, design air content, design slump at time of batching, and amount of water that can be added at Project site.

D. Inspections:

1. Headed bolts and studs. 2. Verification of use of required design mixture. 3. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 4. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 5. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and

slabs. 6. Batch Plant Inspections: On a random basis, as determined by Architect.

E. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained in accordance with ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed in accordance with the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.


033000 Page 13 of 14

a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C143/C143M:

a. One test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

b. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Slump Flow: ASTM C1611/C1611M:

a. One test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

b. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

4. Air Content: ASTM C231/C231M pressure method, for normal-weight concrete;

5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064/C1064M:

6. Unit Weight: ASTM C567/C567M fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete.

7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31/C31M:

8. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M.

a. Test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at seven days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

b. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at seven days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

c. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

9. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

10. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength, and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi if specified compressive strength is 5000 psi, or no compressive strength test value is less than 10 percent of specified compressive strength if specified compressive strength is greater than 5000 psi.

11. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

12. Additional Tests:


033000 Page 14 of 14

a. Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect.

b. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42/C42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

1) Acceptance criteria for concrete strength shall be in accordance with ACI 301, section 1.6.6.3.

13. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

14. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.



040501 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 04 05 01 - MORTAR AND GROUT PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. The general provisions of the Contract and Division 1, General Supplementary and Special conditions shall apply to the work specified in this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Under this Item the Contractor shall furnish and supply mortar and masonry grout in accordance with the plans, specifications and directions of the Engineer.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 03 30 01 – Cast-In-Place Concrete

B. Section 04 43 00 – Natural Stone Veneer

C. Section 10 14 53 – Site Signage

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples: Submit two strips, 1/2x4 inch in size illustrating mortar color and color range.

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC - Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction, and as required by the City of New Rochelle and State of New York Building Codes.

B. Hot Weather Requirements: IMIAC - Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Hot Weather Masonry Construction, and as required by the City of New Rochelle and State of New York Building Codes.

1.06 MIX TESTS

A. Testing of Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C780.

B. Testing of Grout Mix: In accordance with ASTM C1019.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement:

1. ASTM Type I gray or non-staining white, depending on which gives the best color match, in accordance with ASTM C150. Colored cements are not acceptable. (See Mortar Mixes below).

2. ASTM Type II gray or non-staining white, sulfate resistant, in accordance with ASTM C150. Colored cements are not acceptable. (See Mortar Mixes below.)

B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type. Similar in color, grading and particle sizes to sands of original mortars, and shall match sand sample approved by the Engineer.

C. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.


040501 Page 2 of 4

D. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type (S).

E. Dry Pigment Color Additive:

1. Alkali-resistant (Lime-proof) inorganic pigments shall be used. Such as "Rainbow Dry Colors" as manufactured by Empire Blended Products, Bayville, NJ; or true tone colors as manufactured by Davis Colors, Beltsville, Maryland 20705 (301) 776-2400; or approved equal.

2. Pigments shall be sufficiently fine to disperse throughout the mortar mixes, be capable of imparting the desired color when used in permissible quantities, and not react with other components to the detriment of the mortar. Use the minimum quantity of pigment to produce desired results. The maximum permissible quantity of most metallic oxide pigments is 10 percent of the cement/lime content by weight. The maximum permissible quantity of carbon black is 2 percent of the cement/lime content by weight.

F. Prepared Masonry Cements: ASTM C91, Type N, S, or M.

G. Prepared Masonry Cements: ASTM C91, using white cement, Normal strength; manufactured by Davis Colors, Beltsville, Maryland 20705.

H. Mortar Color: True tone color; manufactured by Davis Colors, Beltsville, Maryland 20705, or approved equal.

I. Water: Clean, potable, and free of oils, acids, alkalies, salts, organic materials or other substances that may be deleterious to mortar or masonry units.

J. Admixtures: No air-entraining agents, cementitious materials containing air-entraining agents, antifreeze compounds, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, calcium chloride, or other admixtures shall be added to mortar.

K. Closed Cell Backer Rod: Compressible rod stock, polyethylene foam. Provide sizes and shapes of backer rod necessary to control joint depth of deep vertical joints.

2.02 MORTAR MIX

A. Mortar

1. Mortar for site use shall comply with the proportion guidelines of ASTM C 270-89, Type N, for all work and adhere to the following composition as formulated by the project conservator and found in their report of August 9, 2000 “Mortar Analysis and Recommended Replication Mixes”:

2. Cement: 1 part by volume, (ASTM C150), to be composed of:

¼ part Gray Portland Cement, Type I

¾ part White Portland Cement, Type I

3. Lime: 1 part by volume Hydrated Lime, Type S (ASTM C207).

4. Sand: 5 parts aggregate sand to be composed of:

3 parts “banding sand”

2 parts Schofield “180”

5. Dry pigment: If needed, add small amount to dry mortar mix in such proportion as determined to achieve the desired color match, not to exceed 10% weight of binder. Mix thoroughly to disperse pigment before addition of water.


040501 Page 3 of 4

6. Water: Potable water as required to achieve a workable mix.

B. Use clearly marked measuring containers to ensure consistent batch mixing. Measurements of mortar components, including pigments, are to be accurately recorded in the field to ensure consistent batch mixing and appearance.

2.03 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT

A. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for exterior applications.

B. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, non-shrink, non-staining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior applications.

C. Use grouts with 4500 psi strength at 28 days; pre-mixed type in accordance with ASTM C 94.

2.04 GROUT MIXING

A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C 476 Fine Grout.

B. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point for grout. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine all areas scheduled for work to determine whether existing masonry conditions will adversely affect execution of the work of this section. Report any such conditions to the Engineer.

3.02 MORTAR AND GROUT PREPARATION

A. Dry Ingredients. Mix sand, cement, hydrated lime, and dry pigment thoroughly for several minutes before adding water, until the even color of the mixed materials indicates that they have been thoroughly distributed throughout the mass.

B. Water: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before adding any water.

Then mix again, adding only enough water to produce a damp, workable mix, which will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for 1 hour. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar of desired consistency is reached. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing.

C. Use of Hardened Mortar: Clean mixing equipment thoroughly after each use to prevent hardened

or partially hardened lumps of mortar from contaminating new batch. D. Mortar Additives: Add no additional substances to the mortar without the written permission of

the Engineer. Additional substances include, but are not limited to anti-freeze compounds and air entraining agents.


040501 Page 4 of 4

3.03 JOINT MOISTENING: If the joints have dried since being rinsed, moisten again with a fine water spray. Allow no freestanding water to be present.

3.04 MORTAR AND GROUT JOINT INSTALLATION: Conform to industry standards. 3.05 JOINT FINISHING

A. Tool final layer of mortar after it has become thumbprint hard, to slightly exceed depth of recess of adjacent sound joints.

B. Expose aggregate of mortar joints to match adjacent sound joints by applying water with stiff bristle brush just after mortar has set but before it has dried.

C. Remove excess mortar from masonry immediately after set but before it has dried to prevent

smearing. As needed, use natural bristle brush and/or wood paddle, with water. Use of muriatic acid or any acid-based masonry cleaners is prohibited.

3.06 PROTECTION/CLEAN-UP

A. Protect work completed until acceptance of project. Replace or repair the surfaces if damaged prior to acceptance.

B. As work proceeds, maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment,

surplus materials and debris related to this work.



CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 1

SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Steel reinforcing bars.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315.


A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product. For masonry units, include data on material properties.

B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C109/C109M for compressive strength, ASTM C1506 for water retention, and ASTM C91/C91M for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.


A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost



or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL

A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

B. CMUs: ASTM C90. 1. Density Classification: Normal weight.

2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.

D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C144.

E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404.



F. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C494/C494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.

G. Water: Potable.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M or ASTM A996/A996M, Grade 60.

B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated.

C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A951/A951M.

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.1875-inch diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.1875-inch diameter. 5. Spacing of Cross Rods: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from urethane.

B. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D226/D226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 3. For mortar parge coats, use Type S.



4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type S.

C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C476, Table 1. 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to

ASTM C143/C143M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

3.2 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch.

3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.



C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.

2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch.

3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

E. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core.

F. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:

1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where

cells are not grouted.

B. Lay solid CMUs with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.



3.5 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and

extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

3.6 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and that of other loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 48 inches.


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections: Special inspections according to Level B in TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5.



1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar.

2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.

3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.

C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.

E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C140 for compressive strength.

F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C780.

G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C780. Test mortar for compressive strength.

H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C1019.

3.8 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes.

2. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A.

3.9 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Masonry Waste: Remove clean masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owner's property.



044300 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 044300 – NATURAL STONE VENEER

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Project Conditions and other Division 01 Specifications Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Provide Natural Stone veneer masonry work for exterior landscape site wall/pier, as indicated

on the Drawings and as specified herein. Include, but not limited to: 1. Natural Stone veneer masonry 2. Masonry reinforcing, anchors and ties. 3. All other unit masonry work shown on Drawings or reasonably required to make work of

this Section complete in all respects.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that relate directly to work of this Section include, but are not limited to:

1. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete

2. Section 10 14 53 – Site Signage

3. Section 04 06 50 – Mortar and Masonry Grout

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirement shall govern. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

A82/A82M-07 Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement A153/A153M-09 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware A951/A951M-11 Steel Wire for Masonry Joint Reinforcement C97/C97M-09 Absorption and Bulk Gravity of Dimension Stone C99/C99M-09 Modulus of Rupture of Dimension Stone C119-11 Standard Terminology Relating to Dimension Stone C170/C170M-09 Compressive Strength of Dimension Stone


044300 Page 2 of 6

C880/C880M-09 Flexural Strength of Dimension Stone

C1242-12ae1 Selection, Design, and Installation of Dimension Stone Attachment Systems

C1515-11 Cleaning of Exterior Dimension Stone, Vertical and Horizontal

Surfaces, New or Existing

C1528-12b Selection of Dimension Stone

3. Masonry Industry Council: All Weather Masonry Construction Manual, 2000 4. International Masonry Industry All Weather Council (IMIAC):

Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. B. Samples:

1. Stone Veneer. Submit a minimum of 4 samples, of the type, size, and showing full color range and texture of stone. Stone shall be taken from salvaged stone from existing site walls as indicated on the drawings.

2. Mortar: Submit cured mortart samples of each mortar color selected. 3. Reinforcing anchors and ties: Submit sample of each type, size, thickness, and finish

specified.

C. Certificates signed by stone source, including name and address of contractor, project location, and the quantity, and date or dates of shipment of delivery to which certificate applies; indicate that the stone veneer meets specification requirements.

D. Manufacturer’s Literature and Data. Submit product data of materials and systems. Include manufacturer’s installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each material used for the following:

1. Anchors, ties, and reinforcement. 2. Reinforcing bars.

1.6 MOCK-UPS

A. Mock-Up: Prior to commencing primary work of this section, construct 1.5 ft. high x 4ft. long mock-up of natural stone veneer, full thickness, including all special shapes and stone wall cap, and obtain Owner’s acceptance of visual qualities. Provide mock-up at locations acceptable to Owner. Protect and maintain mock-up throughout work of this Section to serve as criteria for acceptance of work.


044300 Page 3 of 6

B. Provide a full-scale mockup for each natural stone veneer type. Mockups shall represent the full range of colors, textures, cuts, finishes, grout color & texture, and setting methods for all stonework.

C. Completed mockups shall be inspected and approved by the Owner and the Architect/Landscape

Architect before installation of any stonework.

D. Approved mockups shall become the standard of workmanship and appearance for the project. All stone installed for this project shall especially match the appearance of approved mockups for stone quality, texture, color, grout, and the frequency and appearance of any blemishes, including but not limited to: color streaks, texture streaks, spots, fossil formations, pit holes, reedy formations, honeycomb, travertine-like formations, and grain formation variations.

E. Mockups shall be complete in all respects and shall represent the final complete assembly for all

conditions of stone placement abutting other surfaces. Mockups shall demonstrate reinforcing, ties, anchors, grout,jointing, termination of stone against caps in horizontal surfaces, termination of veneer on corners of piers and columns, termination of veneer against vertical concrete (whether precast or cast in place), and termination against filler strips.

F. Use mockups to test cleaning methods.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Hot Weather Protection: Use mortar within 1-1/2 hours after mixing. Discard mortar over 1-1/2 hours old and mortar stiffened due to hydration (setting).

B. Cold Weather Protection: Strictly comply with IMI Ref. 1, BIA Ref. 1, and Portland Cement

Association. C. Protection: Cover walls at end of each days work. Extend cover 24 in. down sides of walls and

hold securely in place.

D. Loading: Do not apply loads until work has set and cured and is ready to accept loading.

1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Materials shall be delivered, stored, and handled fully protected from wetting, staining, chipping, and other damage. Store masonry materials on raised timber or platforms, above ground, under weathertight covers or indoors, and kept clean and dry.

B. Deliver and store cement, lime, and other perishable materials in their original containers, plainly marked with brand name and manufacturer's name, indoors or in weathertight sheds.

C. Protect metal accessories and reinforcement from elements. Immediately before placing, remove

lose rust, dirt and other foreign materials.


044300 Page 4 of 6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE STONE PRODUCTS

A. Stone veneer shall match colors and sizes as indicated on the drawings. Design intent is to match the current stone pattern and mortar as seen on the existing building and existing site stone walls.

B. Stone caps shall match colors and sizes as indicated on the drawings. The stone used as caps

shall be the width required to completely cover the exposed concrete stem wall and the align with the from face of the stone veneer. The stone cap shall match the veneer stone in general size, colors, and shape.

C. Stones shall be irregular in size and shape to match the existing building and existing site stone

wall patterns.

2.2 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from

materials that comply paragraphs below, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Wire: ASTM A153/153M, Class B-2 coating.

B. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors: 1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression

forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over concrete stem wall:

2. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a 16 gauge screw on anchor plate, hot-dip galvanized. a. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 3/16”

diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. Contractor shall use lengths acceptable to conform to tolerances as the thickness of the veneer changes.

c. Acceptable Product: Heckmann Building Products, Inc.; No. 315-D (Screw-On Anchor

Plate) with #316 (Triangular wire tie).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. C. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized and located.

D. Beginning of installation means installer has erected a fully approved on-site mockup and accepts

existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Verify final approval of the mockup as detailed in section 1.4 herein.

B. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized and located.


044300 Page 5 of 6

C. Establish lines, levels, and coursing; protect from disturbance. D. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before

setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives.

E. Coat stone with dampproofing to extent indicated below:

1. Stone at Grade: Beds, joints, and back surfaces to at least 12 inches above finish-grade

elevations.

2. Stone Extending Below Grade: Beds, joints, back surfaces, and face surfaces below grade. 3. Allow dampproofing to cure before setting dampproofed stone. Do not damage or remove

dampproofing while handling and setting stone.

3.3 PLACING AND BONDING

A. Lay masonry in full bed of mortar (horizontal, vertical, and collar joints), properly jointed with other work. Buttering corners of joints and deep or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.

B. Fully bond intersections, and external and internal corners.

C. Do not shift, or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be

made, remove mortar and replace.

D. Remove excess mortar on surface and in cavities.

E. Perform job site saw cutting with proper tools to provide straight unchipped edges. Take care to prevent breaking masonry unit corners or edges.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Variation of Joint Thickness: Joints shall be between 1/8” and 1/2”.

3.5 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES

A. Attach wall ties to concrete stem wall for veneer construction at maximum 16 inches oc vertically and 16 inches oc horizontally. Place at maximum 8 inches oc or every third course each way around perimeter of openings, within 12 inches of openings.

3.6 CUTTING AND FITTING

A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds. Cooperate with other Sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.

B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting any area not indicated or where appearance or strength

of masonry work may be impaired.


044300 Page 6 of 6

3.7 CLEANING

A. Remove excess mortar and smears.

B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.

C. Clean soiled surfaces with non-acidic solution which will not harm masonry or adjacent materials. Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners. Leave surfaces thoroughly clean and free of all mortar and other soiling.

D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.

E. Comply with ASTM C1515

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction

activities.

A. Provide protection without damaging completed work.

B. Keep expansion joint voids clear of mortar.

3.9 EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE A. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owner’

property.



051200 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel.


A. Product Data:

1. Structural-steel materials. 2. High-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 3. Shop primer. 4. Galvanized-steel primer. 5. Galvanized repair paint.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.



B. Mill test reports for structural-steel materials, including chemical and physical properties.

C. Source quality-control reports.



A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category BU or is accredited by the IAS Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (Acceptance Criteria 172).

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified Installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.


051200 Page 2 of 6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. ANSI/AISC 303. 2. ANSI/AISC 360. 3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts."

B. Connection Design Information:

1. Design connections in accordance with ANSI/AISC 303 by fabricator's qualified professional engineer. Member reinforcement at connections is indicated on Drawings.

2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M, Grade 50.

B. Channels, Angles: ASTM A36/A36M.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A36/A36M.

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B structural tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.3 BOLTS AND CONNECTORS

A. High-Strength A325 Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325 (Grade A325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH (ASTM A563M, Class 10S), heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F959/F959M, Type 325-1 (Type 8.8-1), compressible-washer type with plain finish.

2.4 PRIMER

A. Steel Primer: 1. Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer

complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.


051200 Page 3 of 6

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate in accordance with ANSI/AISC 303 and to ANSI/AISC 360.

B. Shear Stud Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Weld using automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

2.7 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.

1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

2.8 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).

2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces unless indicated to be painted. 6. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction.

B. Surface Preparation of Steel: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces in accordance with the following specifications and standards:

1. SSPC-SP 2. 2. SSPC-SP 3. 3. SSPC-SP 7 (WAB)/NACE WAB-4.


051200 Page 4 of 6

4. SSPC-SP 6 (WAB)/NACE WAB-3.

C. Surface Preparation of Galvanized Steel: Prepare galvanized-steel surfaces for shop priming by thoroughly cleaning steel of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treating with etching cleaner.

D. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections.

1. Allow testing agency access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

2. Bolted Connections: Inspect shop-bolted connections in accordance with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts."

3. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165/E165M. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished

weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94/E94M.

4. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear stud connectors in accordance with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

5. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


051200 Page 5 of 6

3.2 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and in accordance with ANSI/AISC 303 and ANSI/AISC 360.

B. Baseplates Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within ANSI/AISC 303.

3.3 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts" for bolt and joint type specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with ANSI/AISC 303 and ANSI/AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

1. Bolted Connections: Inspect bolted connections in accordance with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts."

2. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.


051200 Page 6 of 6

a. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

1) Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165/E165M. 2) Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted.

3) Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164. 4) Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94/E94M.



054000 Page 1 of 10

SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Load-bearing wall framing. 2. Roof framing. 3. Interior non-load-bearing wall framing.



1. Cold-formed steel framing materials. 2. Load-bearing wall framing. 3. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 4. Interior non-load-bearing wall framing. 5. Vertical deflection clips. 6. Single deflection track. 7. Double deflection track. 8. Drift clips. 9. Post-installed anchors. 10. Power-actuated anchors.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.

3. Delegated Design Submittal: For cold formed metal framing indicated on Drawings to comply with design loads, include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.



B. Product certificates.

C. Product test reports.


054000 Page 2 of 10

D. Research Reports:

1. For post-installed anchors and power-actuated fasteners, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E329 for testing indicated.

B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

D. Comply with AISI S230 "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for One- and Two-Family Dwellings."

E. PRODUCTS


A. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, framing shall comply with AISI S100, AISI S200, and the following:

1. Wall Studs: AISI S211. 2. Headers: AISI S212. 3. Lateral Design: AISI S213.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1.6 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1003/A1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating designation as follows:

1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G60, or equivalent

B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Drift Clips: ASTM A653/A653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows:

1. Grade As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G60.


054000 Page 3 of 10

1.7 LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, and matching minimum base-metal thickness of steel studs.

1.8 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges.

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and matching minimum base-metal thickness of steel studs.

C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.

D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure.

E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.

F. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure.

1.9 INTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and matching minimum base-metal thickness of steel studs.


054000 Page 4 of 10

C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.

D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure.

E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.

F. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure.

1.10 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from ASTM A1003/A1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated steel sheet, of same grade and coating designation used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated.

1.11 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A36/A36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A123/A123M.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts, carbon-steel nuts, and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A153/A153M, Class C.

C. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with bolts of same basic metal as fastened metal, if visible, unless otherwise indicated; with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, as appropriate for the substrate.

D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.


054000 Page 5 of 10

E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing; manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

1.12 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Shims: Load bearing, high-density, multimonomer, non-leaching plastic; or cold-formed steel of same grade and metallic coating as framing members supported by shims.

B. Sill Sealer Gasket: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members as required.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 PREPARATION

A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required to obtain fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.

C. Install load-bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track and the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

D. Install sill sealer gasket at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.


A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200, AISI S202, and manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.


054000 Page 6 of 10

C. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

D. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

E. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads equal to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

F. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

G. Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in framing-assembly members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, which are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

H. Fasten hole-reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings.

2.3 INSTALLATION OF LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows:

1. Anchor Spacing: To match stud spacing.

B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks, with gap not exceeding 1/8 inch between the end of wall-framing member and the web of track.

1. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. 2. Space studs as follows:

a. Stud Spacing: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations.

D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.

E. Align floor and roof framing over studs according to AISI S200, Section C1. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.


054000 Page 7 of 10

F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure.

G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates.

1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads.

2. Install tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs.

H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing.

1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported.

I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced vertically 48 inches. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs with a minimum of two screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing members up to 6 inches deep.

2. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges, and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

3. Bar Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges; terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to structure.

K. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

2.4 INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:


054000 Page 8 of 10

1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building

structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to infill studs and anchor to building structure. 4. Connect drift clips to cold-formed steel framing and anchor to building structure.

E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs.

2. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.


F. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 18 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges.

1. Install solid blocking at centers indicated on Shop Drawings.

G. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

2.5 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.


054000 Page 9 of 10

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building

structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to studs and anchor to building structure. 4. Connect drift clips to cold-formed steel metal framing and anchor to building

structure.

E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs.

2. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.


F. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges.

1. Install solid blocking at centers indicated on Shop Drawings.

G. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

2.6 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2.7 REPAIRS

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780/A780M and manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.


054000 Page 10 of 10

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Cold-formed steel framing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.



055000 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 2. Structural-steel door frames. 3. Loose bearing and leveling plates.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated

to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete.


A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Fasteners. 2. Shop primers. 3. Shrinkage-resisting grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.


055000 Page 2 of 6

2.2 FASTENERS

A. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A47/A47M malleable iron or ASTM A27/A27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F2329/F2329M.

B. Post-Installed Anchors:

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

B. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

D. Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Factory-packaged, nonmetallic, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.


055000 Page 3 of 6

2.5 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

B. Galvanize bearing and leveling plates.

C. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer.

2.6 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.

B. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.

2.7 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.9 STEEL FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A153/A153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A123/A123M for other steel and iron products.

B. Shop prime steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with universal shop primer.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:

1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial

Blast Cleaning." 3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance

Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."


055000 Page 4 of 6

4. Other Steel Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 5. Galvanized-Steel Items: SSPC-SP 16, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning of Coated and Uncoated

Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steels, and Non-Ferrous Metals."

D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Anchor supports for overhead grilles securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure.


055000 Page 5 of 6

C. Anchor shelf angles securely to existing construction with expansion anchors.

D. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS

A. Install prefabricated building columns to comply with ANSI/AISC 360, "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings," and with requirements applicable to listing and labeling for fire-resistance rating indicated.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF METAL BOLLARDS

A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before installing.

B. Anchor bollards to existing construction with expansion anchors. Provide four 3/4-inch bolts at each bollard unless otherwise indicated.

1. Embed anchor bolts at least 4 inches in concrete.

C. Anchor bollards in concrete in formed or core-drilled holes not less than 42 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of bollard. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with shrinkage-resistant grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch toward bollard.

D. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.

E. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with shrinkage-resistant grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.


055000 Page 6 of 6

3.6 REPAIRS

A. Touchup Painting:

1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.



061000 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Wood blocking and nailers. 3. Plywood backing panels.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for composite insulating wall sheathing.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.


A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Power-driven fasteners. 3. Post-installed anchors. 4. Metal framing anchors.


A. Stack wood products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect wood products from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.


061000 Page 2 of 5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on

end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.

3. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood nailers, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing intended to be left exposed in exterior applications.

2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING

A. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: Construction or No. 2 grade.


061000 Page 3 of 5

1. Species:

a. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. b. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. c. Douglas fir-south; WWPA. d. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA. e. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Furring.

B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.

C. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Fasteners shall be of size and type indicated and shall comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A153/A153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01, ICC-ES AC58, ICC-ES AC193, or ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate.


061000 Page 4 of 5

2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. KC Metals Products, Inc. 2. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 3. USP Structural Connectors.

B. Allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, shall meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. Framing anchors shall be punched for fasteners adequate to withstand same loads as framing anchors.

C. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M; structural steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch thick.

1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated.


A. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

C. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.

D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

E. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=12013

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457137342




061000 Page 5 of 5

F. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

G. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code (IBC). 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet enough that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.



061600 Page 1 of 2

SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Composite Insulating Wall sheathing.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.


A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.


A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPOSITE INSULATING WALL SHEATHING

A. Composite Insulating Wall Sheathing: Oriented-strand-board Exposure 1 sheathing 7/16 inch thick, with factory-laminated water-resistive barrier exterior facer, and with rigid foam plastic insulating board laminated to interior face.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Huber Engineered Woods LLC; ZIP System R Sheathing.

2. Span Rating and Performance Category of Sheathing Layer: Not less than 24/16; 7/16 Performance Category.

3. Thickness: 2 1/2 inch nominal overall (2 7/16”). 4. Thermal Resistivity (R Value): 12.6 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F 5. Edge Profile: Square edge. 6. Exterior Facer: Medium-density, phenolic-impregnated polymer-modified sheet

material meeting requirements for ASTM D779 Grade D weather-resistive barrier in accordance with ICC AC38 and AC310, with fastener spacing symbols on exterior facer for 16-inch and 24-inch on center spacing, with the following characteristics


061600 Page 2 of 2

a. Water Resistance of Coatings, ASTM D2247: Pass 14 day exposure test. b. Moisture Vapor Transmission, ASTM E96: Not less than 12 perms. c. Water Penetration, ASTM E331: Pass at 2.86 lbf/sq. ft. d. Wind Driven Rain, TAS-100: Pass. e. Accelerated Weathering, ASTM G154: Pass.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacturer.

1. For sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A153/A153M.

2.3 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. Composite Sheathing manufacturer’s standard tape joint sealing material and accessories

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.

C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with manufacturer’s written recommendations for fastening to Light Gauge Metal studs.

D. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.

E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

3.2 COMPOSITE SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with Manufacturer’s written instructions for installation and joint sealing.



072100 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Extruded polystyrene foam-plastic board insulation. 2. Polyisocyanurate foam-plastic board insulation. 3. Glass-fiber blanket insulation.



1. Extruded polystyrene foam-plastic board insulation. 2. Polyisocyanurate foam-plastic board insulation. 3. Glass-fiber blanket insulation.


A. Product test reports.

B. Research reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation, Type IV, “Rigid Insulation” at foundations: ASTM C578, Type IV, 25-psi minimum compressive strength; unfaced.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Owens Corning.

2. Flame-Spread Index: Not more than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Smoke-Developed Index: Not more than 450 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.






072100 Page 2 of 4

4. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly.

5. Labeling: Provide identification of mark indicating R-value of each piece of insulation 12 inches and wider in width.

2.2 POLYISOCYANURATE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation, Glass-Fiber-Mat Faced, ”Rigid Insulation”: ASTM C1289, glass-fiber-mat faced, Type II, Class 2.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Firestone Building Products. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Rmax, Inc.

2. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly.


2.3 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A. Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation, Polypropylene-Scrim-Kraft Faced: ASTM C665, Type II (nonreflective faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier).


a. CertainTeed Insulation. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Owens Corning.


2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids:

1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E84.

2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E84.










072100 Page 3 of 4

B. Insulation Anchors, Spindles, and Standoffs: As recommended by manufacturer.

C. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.

1. Verify adhesives have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C. Install insulation with manufacturer's R-value label exposed after insulation is installed.

D. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

E. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF FOUNDATION WALL INSULATION

A. Butt panels together for tight fit.

B. Adhesive Installation: Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.

http://www.arcomnet.com/sustainable_design.aspx?topic=143


072100 Page 4 of 4

4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.

5. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation.

a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward interior of construction.

B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:

1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft..

2. Spray Foam Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes.

B. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.



072500 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Waterproofing membrane (for waterproofing beneath fiber-cement plank or composite cement panel rainscreen systems).

2. Flexible flashing.




A. Evaluation Reports: For waterproofing membrane, from ICC-ES.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER

A. Waterproofing Membrane: Prefabricated, 40 mil self-adhering sheet-type waterproofing membrane. The membrane bonds to the substrate and self-seals around nails, staples and other fasteners to prevent damage caused by water penetration. It is intended for use in sub-grade applications, and under siding, exterior plaster, as a through-wall flashing or anywhere it will be protected from ultraviolet exposure.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc; CCW 705. b. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.; Permabarrier. c. Soprema, Inc.; Sopraseal Stick 1100.

2. Composition: Multi-layer high-strength polymer film that is coated with a layer of rubberized asphalt adhesive.

3. Release Liners: Protect asphalt, removed as membrane is installed.

4. Technical Properties:






072500 Page 2 of 4

a. Tested to ICC-ES AC 38, ICC-ES ESR 3980. b. Tested to ICC-ES AC 148, ICC-ES ESR 2783. c. Complies with AAMA 711-13, Level 2. d. Material Thickness, ASTM D 1970: 40 Mils Nominal. e. Pliability, ICC-ES AC 38: Pass. f. Vapor Permeance, ASTM E 96: 0.02 g/m2 Maximum. g. Water Resistance, ASTM D 779: Greater than 30 hours h. Nail Sealability, ASTM D 1970: Pass. i. Tensile MD, ASTM D 882: 21 lbf/in2. j. Tensile CMD, ASTM D 882: 28 lbf/in2. k. Installation Temperature Range: Greater than 50 degrees F. l. Material Color: Black.

B. Adhesive: As recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.

C. Primer: Asphalt-based commercial primer as recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.

2.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING

A. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a prefabricated, self-adhering, pliable, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch, as recommended by waterproofing membrane Manufacturer.

B. Technical Properties:

1. Installation Temperature Range: Greater than 50 degrees F. 2. Material Color: Black. 3. Material Thickness, ASTM D 1970: 40 Mils Nominal. 4. Flexibility at -20 degrees F, ASTM D 1970: Pass. 5. Vapor Permeance, ASTM E 96: 0.08 g/m2 Maximum. 6. Nail Sealability, ASTM D 1970: Pass. 7. Tensile, ASTM D 412: 37 lbf/in2. 8. Elongation, ASTM D 412: 135 percent Minimum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Application: To be installed over concrete masonry substrates.

B. Inspect and prepare substrates using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving best result for the substrates under project conditions.


072500 Page 3 of 4

C. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. Do not proceed with installation until substrates have been prepared using the methods recommended by the manufacturer and deviations from manufacturer’s recommended tolerances are corrected. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions.

D. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect in writing of deviations from manufacturer’s recommended installation tolerances and conditions.

3.2 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions including the following:

1. Apply in clear, dry weather. 2. Surface must be clean, dry and free from oil. 3. Prime weathered surfaces as necessary - clean, dry, wood and metal surfaces do not

require priming. 4. Use 3 inches side laps and 6 inches head laps. 5. Apply uniform pressure with a 2 to 3 inches hand roller to entire surface. 6. Do not install over solvent-based sealants unless fully cured - active solvents may liquefy

bottom adhesive surface. 7. Test for compatibility with caulks and sealants. 8. Do not install over flexible vinyl gaskets. 9. Do not expose installed product to direct sunlight for more than 90 days.

3.3 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Apply in clear, dry weather. 2. Surface must be clean, dry and free from oil. Use 3 inches side laps and 6 inches head

laps. 3. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings. 4. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings. 5. Do not install over solvent-based sealants unless fully cured - active solvents may liquefy

bottom adhesive surface. 6. Test for compatibility with caulks and sealants. 7. Do not install over flexible vinyl gaskets. 8. Do not expose installed product to direct sunlight for more than 90 days.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period.

B. Protect barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required by manufacturer. Remove and replace barrier exposed for more than 90 days.


072500 Page 4 of 4

C. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

D. Remove masking materials after installation.

E. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.



074113.16 Page 1 of 10

SECTION 074113.16 - STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Standing-seam metal roof panels, underlayment, and miscellaneous materials for a complete metal roof installation.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal panel Installer, metal panel manufacturer's representative, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal panels, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review methods and procedures related to metal panel installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment between and attachment to structural members.

5. Review structural loading limitations of deck during and after roofing. 6. Review flashings, special details, drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition

of other construction that affect metal panels. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and

inspections if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for metal panel systems during and after

installation. 9. Review procedures for repair of metal panels damaged after installation. 10. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish

copy of record to each participant.



B. Shop Drawings: Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, hanging and built-in gutters, and accessories; and special details.


074113.16 Page 2 of 10

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal panel indicated with factory-applied color finishes.

1. Include Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Metal Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include clips, fasteners, closures, and other metal panel accessories.



B. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. UL-Certified, Portable Roll-Forming Equipment: UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment capable of producing metal panels warranted by manufacturer to be the same as factory-formed products. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment for duration of work.

C. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.


074113.16 Page 3 of 10

D. Remove strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed in accordance with manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested in accordance with ASTM D2244.

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested in accordance with ASTM D4214.

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special Weathertightness Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.


074113.16 Page 4 of 10

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Energy Performance: Provide roof panels according to the following when tested according to CRRC-1:

1. Three-year, aged solar reflectance (SRI) of not less than 59 and emissivity of not less than 0.83.

B. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E1592:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span.

C. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift-resistance class indicated.

1. Uplift Rating: UL 90.

D. FM Global Listing: Provide metal roof panels and component materials that comply with requirements in FM Global 4471 as part of a panel roofing system and that are listed in FM Global's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Global markings.

1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90. 2. Hail Resistance: MH.

E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS

A. Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation.

1. Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E1514.


074113.16 Page 5 of 10

B. Vertical-Rib, Mechanically-Seamed-Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels, engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and mechanically seaming panels together.


a. ATAS International, Inc. b. Fabral. c. Garland Company, Inc. (The). d. MBCI.

2. Basis-of-Design Standing Seam Metal Roofing System: Field-Lok, by Atas Roofing, Inc.

3. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A792/A792M, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A755/A755M.

a. Nominal Thickness: 24 gauge. b. Performance:

1) Impact Rating: Class 4 when tested in accordance with UL 2218. 2) Fire Rating: Class A when tested in accordance with UL 790.

c. Exterior Finish: 55% Al-Zn alloy coated steel with acrylic coating. d. Color: Clear-coated acrylic over galvalume. e. Texture: Smooth.

4. Clips: One-piece fixed clip, and two-piece floating clip to accommodate thermal movement.

a. Material, fixed clip: 0.034-inch-nominal thickness, 22 gauge, aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet.

b. Material, floating clip: 0.052-inch-nominal thickness, 18-gauge base, and 0.034-inch, 22-gauge top, aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet.

5. Panel Coverage: 18 inches. 6. Panel Height: 2 3/8 inches.

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Underlayment: Provide self-adhering, cold-applied, sheet underlayment, a minimum of 30 mils thick, consisting of slip-resistant, polyethylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.







074113.16 Page 6 of 10

1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F; ASTM D1970. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D1970. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Carlisle WIP Products; a brand of Carlisle Construction Materials. b. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, a Drexel Metals Company. c. Owens Corning.

B. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D226/D226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts.

C. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application.


A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C645; cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A653, G90 coating designation or ASTM A792, Class AZ50 coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system.

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal panels. 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from

material recommended by manufacturer. 3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or

closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.

D. Gutters and Downspouts: See Section 077100 “Roof Specialties” for gutters and downspouts.

E. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads.

F. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing; 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.






074113.16 Page 7 of 10

2. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C1311.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. On-Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal panels may be fabricated on-site using UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment if panels are of same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory-formed panels. Fabricate according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown.

C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.

D. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements.

E. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Panels and Accessories:

1. Acrylic Finish: As selected from manufacturer’s full range of available colors. 2. Concealed Finish: Same finish as exposed side of panel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer.


074113.16 Page 8 of 10

a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.

B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAYMENT

A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment): Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply at locations indicated, wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Extend underlayment into gutter trough. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.

B. Felt Underlayment: Apply at locations indicated below, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.

1. Apply on roof not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap over edges of self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 6 inches, in shingle fashion to shed water.

C. Slip Sheet: Where required by roof panel manufacturer, apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels.

D. Flashings: Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS

A. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panel Installation: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended in writing by manufacturer.

1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners. 2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation

instructions. 3. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved, motorized seamer tool

so clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged.


074113.16 Page 9 of 10

4. Watertight Installation:

a. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal joints of metal panels, using sealant or tape as recommend in writing by manufacturer as needed to make panels watertight.

b. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.

c. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.

B. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

C. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

D. Gutters and Downspouts: See Section 077100 “Roof Specialties for gutters and downspouts installation.

E. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to metal roof panels as recommended in writing by manufacturer.

3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 ft. on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing.

B. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where tests and inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

C. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.


074113.16 Page 10 of 10


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION 074113.16


074213.13 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 074213.13 - FORMED METAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Concealed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels.





B. Shop Drawings: Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.

C. Samples: For each type of metal panel indicated.



B. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.





1.7 WARRANTY



074213.13 Page 2 of 5




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E1592:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/240 of the span.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.


2.2 CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS

A. Provide factory-formed metal panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.

B. Flat Lock Tiles:


a. RHEINZINK. b. MetalTech Global c. PAC-CLAD; Petersen Aluminum Corporation; a Carlisle company d. VMZINC.

2. Tile Shape: Diamond. 3. Tile Width: 6 inch, minimum - 24 inch, maximum 4. Tile Length: 6 inch, minimum -24 inch, maximum 5. Orientation: Vertical.



074213.13 Page 3 of 5

6. Installation Method: Mechanical attachment to solid sheathing with concealed clip fasteners.

7. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.


A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A792/A792M, Class AZ50 aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system.

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal panels. 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from

material recommended by manufacturer. 3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or

closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch-thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.

D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads.

E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing; 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C920; as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. 3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C1311.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.


074213.13 Page 4 of 5

B. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements.

C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Panels and Accessories: 1. Zinc Alloy Sheet/Coils:

a. 1. Titanium Zinc Alloy whose base is electrolytic high grade with a 99.995 % Zn degree of purity and alloying additives of 0.08% - 1.0% copper and 0.07% - .12% titanium, .001% - .015% aluminum in accordance with ASTM B69-16 (or latest edition) – Architectural Rolled Zinc - Type 1 and Type 2.

2. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install work to be truly straight and square or conform to curvilinear geometry indicated on drawings.

a. Fabricate and install work with lines and corners of exposed units true and accurate.

b. Form exposed faces free of buckles, excessive waves, and avoidable tool marks considering temper and reflectivity of metal.

c. Shim and align panel units within installed tolerance of ¼ inch in 20’ –0” d. All seams shall be of uniform appearance and dimensions, straight and level with

minimum exposure of solder and sealant. e. Except as otherwise shown, fold back sheet metal to form a hem on concealed side

of exposed edges. f. Form all seams to be weatherproof, leaving room for expansion and contraction

with specified and required tolerances.

B. Conceal fasteners and expansion provision where possible in exposed work, and locate so as to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.


074213.13 Page 5 of 5

C. Provide work as indicated on approved shop drawings a. Form and fabricate sheets, seams, strips, cleats, edge treatments, integral flashings,

and other components of metal wall cladding to profiles, patterns, and drainage arrangements shown and as required for water shedding construction. Ensure that all shop & field fabricated bends have an acceptable “rounded” or radius bend. NO SHARP BREAKS.

D. Separate non-compatible materials with a rubberized asphalt underlayment.

E. Install work to meet specified performance requirements. Flat-Lock Tile panels are installed from the bottom up. CAUTION: Horizontal and Vertical Flat-Lock Tile panel applications become directional when notched.

F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.



074293 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 074293 - SOFFIT PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal soffit panels.





B. Shop Drawings: Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.

C. Samples: For each type of metal panel indicated.



B. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.





B. UL-Certified, Portable Roll-Forming Equipment: UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment capable of producing metal panels warranted by manufacturer to be the same as factory-formed products. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment for duration of work.


074293 Page 2 of 6

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical roof eave and soffit as shown on Drawings; approximately four panels wide by full eave width, including attachments and accessories.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.10 WARRANTY




074293 Page 3 of 6



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E1592:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span.

B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.02 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E283 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 4.0 lbf/sq. ft..

C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E331 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.


2.2 METAL SOFFIT PANELS

A. Provide metal soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.

B. Flush-Profile Metal Soffit Panels: Solid panels formed with vertical panel edges and a flat pan between panel edges; with flush joint between panels.




074293 Page 4 of 6

a. Berridge Manufacturing Company. b. MBCI Metal Roof and Wall Systems. c. Englert, Inc.

2. Material: Same material and finish as metal roof panels. 3. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with

ASTM A792/A792M, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A755/A755M.

a. Nominal Thickness: 22 GA. b. Exterior Finish: 55% Al-Zn alloy coated steel with acrylic coating. c. Color: Clear-coated acrylic over galvalume.

4. Panel Coverage: 12 inches (nominal). 5. Panel Height: 1 inch.


A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A792/A792M, Class AZ50 aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system.

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.

D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.

E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant types recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing; 1/8 inch thick.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C920; as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. 3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C1311.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements





074293 Page 5 of 6

demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. On-Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal panels may be fabricated on-site using UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment if panels are of same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory-formed panels. Fabricate according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown.

C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.

D. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements.

E. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Panels and Accessories:

1. Acrylic Finish: As selected from manufacturer’s full range of available colors. 2. Concealed Finish: Same finish as exposed side of panel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Metal Soffit Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.

1. Apply panels and associated items true to line for neat and weathertight enclosure. 2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side

of metal panels. 3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use

proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer.


074293 Page 6 of 6

4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes.

B. Watertight Installation:

1. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal lapped joints of metal panels, using sealant or tape as recommend by manufacturer on side laps of nesting-type panels and elsewhere as needed to make panels watertight.

2. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. 3. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with sealant and

fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.

C. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

D. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.



074646 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 074646 - FIBER-CEMENT SIDING & MULTIPURPOSE FIBERCEMENT PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes Composite Concrete Panels, Fiber Cement Plank and Resin Panel.



B. Samples: For fiber-cement siding, mounting system and related accessories.


A. Product certificates.

B. Product test reports.

C. Research/evaluation reports.

D. Sample warranty.




A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


074646 Page 2 of 5


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPOSITE CEMENT PANEL SIDING

A. Basis of Design: Cemfort Xpression Color with Cem-Screw fastening system.

1. Real Concrete by Cemfort Panels, (450) 373-0455 www.cemforthd.com 2. Or acceptable equals by the following:

a. Rieder North America b. Taktl

B. Thermally Isolated Subframing:

1. Needs to be at least 18-gauge, minimal face width of 50 mm (2 in) to receive the panels, maximum length according to the dimensions noted in the plans.

2. The total assembly needs to allow a maximum refraction of L/360.

3. Galvanised by hot-dip process according to the standard ASTM-A525 (G90) or ZAM coated.

C. Mechanical Attachments: Self drilling stainless steel screw, with ‘wafer head’ design, grade # 10, 37mm long, provided by the system manufacturer. Pre-painted with same color and quality product than panel (see section 2.1 – D), by Cemfort Panels Inc.

D. Ventilation grill: 24-gauge caliber metal ventilation grill specific to the system, of 13mm x 64mm, pre-painted, provided by the system manufacturer.

E. Fiber Cement Panels meeting the following requirements:

1. Color: As selected from manufacturer’s full range of available colors 2. Thickness: 12mm 3. Panel height: 6” 4. Panel length: 10’-0”, 6’-0”, 2’-0” 5. Density: + 1,600 kg/m3 (+ 5.4 lb/in3) 6. Manufacturing tolerance: Length and width: ± 3 mm Thickness: ± 1.5 mm Squareness: -

1 mm/m 7. Humidified deflection: 1/588 of span 8. Dimensional change (due to moisture): 0.15% 9. Compression resistance (Head screw): 950 N 10. Flexural strength: 12 mm (1/2”) + 15 Mpa (2,175 psi) 11. Minimal fastener pull resistance: 12 mm: + 4,000N (932 lb) 12. Freeze-Thaw resistance (200 cycles): No loss to mass 13. Impact resistance: ASTM D 1037 ...................................... Passed


074646 Page 3 of 5

14. ASTM A 118.9 (height: 475 mm (19”) ............................... Passed 15. Thermal expansion: ASTM C 531 1.2 x 10-5 mm/mm C (6.7 x 10-6 po. /po. F) 16. Surface burning resistance: ULC-S 102.M - Flame spread............................ 0

2.2 MULTIPURPOSE FIBERCEMENT PANELS (GROUND CONTACT)

A. Basis of Design: Finex Multipurpose Fibercement Panels.

1. Real Concrete by Cemfort Panels, (450) 373-0455 www.cemforthd.com 2. Or acceptable equals

B. Fibercement Panels meeting the following requirements: 1. Thickness: ½” 2. Density: + 1,500 kg/m3 (+ 5.4 lb/in3) 3. Manufacturing tolerance: Length and width: ± 3 mm Thickness: ± 1.5 mm Squareness: -

1 mm/m 4. Humidified deflection: 1/588 of span 5. Dimensional change (due to moisture): 0.15% 6. Compression resistance (Head screw): 950 N 7. Flexural strength: 12 mm (1/2”) + 15 Mpa (2,175 psi) 8. Minimal fastener pull resistance: 12 mm: + 4,000N (932 lb) 9. Freeze-Thaw resistance (200 cycles): No loss to mass 10. Impact resistance: ASTM D 1037 ...................................... Passed 11. ASTM A 118.9 (height: 475 mm (19”) ............................... Passed 12. Thermal expansion: ASTM C 531 1.2 x 10-5 mm/mm C (6.7 x 10-6 po. /po. F) 13. Surface burning resistance: ULC-S 102.M - Flame spread............................ 0

2.3 RAINSCREEN ATTACHMENT/SUPPORT FRAMING SYSTEM – PAVILION AND GREENHOUSE

A. Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1-2010 definition of continuous insulation (c.i.).

B. Coating Material: ASTM A1046, Zinc-Aluminum-Magnesium, minimum thickness ZM40.

C. ASTM A653 Galvanized steel is not acceptable.

D. Steel Classification: Structural Steel (SS), Grade 50, 50 ksi Yield.

E. Spacing: Comply with manufacturer’s Professional Engineer’s calculations.

F. Horizontal Girt: Stiffened horizontal girt with pre-punched drainage holes, directly attached on top of rigid insulation [directly to substrate] at regular spacing, with engineered thermally isolated washer assembly and fasteners.

1. Steel Thickness: Minimum 0.046-inch thick (18 gauge). 2. Profile Depth: 0.75 inches.


074646 Page 4 of 5

3. Girt Fastening Face: 2-inches. 4. Overall Girt Profile: 5-1/8-inches. 5. Basis of Design: HCI™ by Knight Wall Systems or approved equal.

G. Secondary Vertical Rail: Nominal 0.046-inch-thick (18 gauge) cold-formed steel.

1. Profile: Hat channel with stiffening lips. 2. Profile Depth: 0.75 inches. 3. Girt Fastening Face: 2.0 inches. 4. Weep Drains: 0.75 inches diameter at 4 inches on center along flanges to allow for free

air flow laterally. 5. Attachment Holes: Locate at 2 inches on center along back to facilitate number 14 self-

drilling self-tapping screw attachment to primary rail. 6. Oversize holes to allow for thermal contraction and expansion of rail. 7. Basis of Design: PanelRail™ by Knight Wall Systems or approved equal.

H. Fasteners:

1. Sufficient length to provide solid attachment through rigid insulation to structure as required by manufacturer.

2. Thermal Isolating Washers: Minimum 0.125-inch-thick Polyoxymethylene copolymer (POM) washers with integral centering lip to act as a thermal break between wall anchor fasteners and girt.

3. Tensile Yield Strength: 9.57 ksi per ISO 527. 4. Melting Temperature: 329 degrees Fahrenheit per ISO 3146. 5. Basis of Design: ThermaStop™ Isolator by Knight Wall Systems or approved equal.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Siding Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, edge trim, outside and inside corner caps, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration.

B. Flashing: Provide aluminum flashing complying with Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" at window and door heads and where indicated.

1. Finish for Aluminum Flashing: High-performance organic finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.


074646 Page 5 of 5

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements.

B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction.



075323 Page 1 of 8

SECTION 075323 - ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Adhered ethylene-propylene-diene-terpolymer (EPDM) roofing system. 2. Substrate board. 3. Roof insulation. 4. Cover board.


A. Preliminary Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



B. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work, including the following:

1. Layout and thickness of insulation. 2. Base flashings and membrane terminations. 3. Flashing details at penetrations. 4. Tapered insulation, thickness, and slopes. 5. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of roof membrane and

fastening spacings and patterns for mechanically fastened roofing system. 6. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations. 7. Tie-in with air barrier.

C. Wind Uplift Resistance Submittal: For roofing system, indicating compliance with wind uplift performance requirements.


A. Manufacturer Certificates:

1. Performance Requirement Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer, certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

a. Submit evidence of complying with performance requirements.


075323 Page 2 of 8

2. Special Warranty Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer, certifying that all materials supplied under this Section are acceptable for special warranty.

B. Product Test Reports: For components of roof membrane and insulation, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with specified requirements.

C. Sample warranties.



B. Certified statement from existing roof membrane manufacturer stating that existing roof warranty has not been affected by Work performed under this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 20 years from Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Accelerated Weathering: Roof membrane shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G152, ASTM G154, or ASTM G155.

B. Impact Resistance: Roof membrane shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D3746, ASTM D4272, or the Resistance to Foot Traffic Test in FM Approvals 4470.

C. SPRI's Directory of Roof Assemblies Listing: Roof membrane, base flashings, and component materials shall comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 or FM Approvals 4470 as part of a roofing system, and shall be listed in SPRI's Directory of Roof Assemblies for roof assembly identical for that specified for this Project. 1. Wind Uplift Load Capacity: 105 psf.

D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E108 or UL 790, Class C; for application and roof slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.


075323 Page 3 of 8

2.2 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-TERPOLYMER (EPDM) ROOFING

A. EPDM Sheet: ASTM D4637/D4637M, Type I, nonreinforced, EPDM sheet with factory-applied seam tape.


a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. b. Firestone Building Products. c. GenFlex Roofing Systems.

2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: White on black.

2.3 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with other roofing components.

1. Adhesive and Sealants: Comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil-thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application.

C. Prefabricated Pipe Flashings: As recommended by roof membrane manufacturer.

D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.

E. Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard, synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch-wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film.

F. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, single-component sealant, colored to match membrane roofing.

G. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant.

H. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.

I. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening components to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

J. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, molded pipe boot flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, reinforced EPDM securement strips, T-joint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories.

1. Provide white flashing accessories for white EPDM membrane roofing.






075323 Page 4 of 8

2.4 SUBSTRATE BOARDS

A. Substrate Board: ASTM C1177/C1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum board or ASTM C1278/C1278M, fiber-reinforced gypsum board. 1. Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch. 2. Surface Finish: Factory primed.

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening substrate panel to roof deck.

2.5 ROOF INSULATION

A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.


a. Atlas Roofing Corporation - Polyiso. b. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. c. Firestone Building Products. d. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

2. Size: 48 by 48 inches. 3. Thickness:

a. As required to provide R-Value indicated on drawings in a minimum of two layers.

B. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards.

1. Material: Match roof insulation. 2. Minimum Thickness: 1/4 inch. 3. Slope:

a. Roof Field: 1/4 inch per foot unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. b. Saddles and Crickets: 1/4 inch per foot unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

B. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows:

1. Modified asphaltic, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive.







075323 Page 5 of 8

C. Cover Board: ASTM C1177/C1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, or ASTM C1278/C1278M, fiber-reinforced gypsum board. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Surface Finish: Factory primed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF ROOFING, GENERAL

A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, SPRI's Directory of Roof Assemblies assembly requirements, and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29.

B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at end of workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUBSTRATE BOARD

A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, with end joints staggered not less than 24 inches in adjacent rows.

1. At steel roof decks, install substrate board at right angle to flutes of deck.

2. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 3. Cut substrate board to fit tight around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to

intersecting sloping roof decks. 4. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to recommendations in

SPRI's Directory of Roof Assemblies listed roof assembly requirements for specified Wind Uplift Load Capacity and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29.

5. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof according to roofing system manufacturers' written instructions.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION

A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of workday.

B. Comply with roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.


075323 Page 6 of 8

C. Installation Over Metal Decking:

1. Install base layer of insulation with joints staggered not less than 24 inches in adjacent rows. a. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to

intersecting sloping roof decks. b. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width. c. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with each

side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches.

1) Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted.

d. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. e. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. f. Mechanically attach base layer of insulation and substrate board using mechanical

fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to metal decks.

1) Fasten insulation according to requirements in SPRI's Directory of Roof Assemblies for specified Wind Uplift Load Capacity.

2. Install upper layers of insulation and tapered insulation with joints of each layer offset not less than 12 inches from previous layer of insulation.

a. Staggered end joints within each layer not less than 24 inches in adjacent rows. b. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to

intersecting sloping roof decks. c. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width. d. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with each

side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches. e. Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted. f. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. g. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. h. Adhere each layer of insulation to substrate using adhesive according to SPRI's

Directory of Roof Assemblies listed roof assembly requirements for specified Wind Uplift Load Capacity and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29, as follows: 1) Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation

adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF COVER BOARDS

A. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.

1. Trim cover board neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting sloping roof decks.

2. At internal roof drains, conform to slope of drain sump.


075323 Page 7 of 8

a. Trim cover board so that water flow is unrestricted.

3. Cut and fit cover board tight to nailers, projections, and penetrations. 4. Loosely lay cover board over substrate. 5. Adhere cover board to substrate using adhesive according to FM Approvals' RoofNav

assembly requirements and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification, as follows: a. Set cover board in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly

pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

3.6 ADHERED ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Adhere roof membrane over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Unroll membrane roof membrane and allow to relax before installing.

C. Accurately align roof membrane, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roof membrane at rate required by manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roof membrane. Do not apply to splice area of roof membrane.

E. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roof membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeters.

F. Apply roof membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.

G. Adhesive Seam Installation: Clean both faces of splice areas, apply splicing cement.

1. Firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roof membrane to ensure a watertight seam installation.

2. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing terminations. 3. Apply a continuous bead of in-seam sealant before closing splice if required by roofing

system manufacturer.

H. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape.

1. Firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roof membrane to ensure a watertight seam installation.

2. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing terminations.

I. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roof membrane in place with clamping ring.


075323 Page 8 of 8

3.7 INSTALLATION OF BASE FLASHING

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.

D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations.

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars.

3.8 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing system, inspect roofing system for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.



079200 Page 1 of 8

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Non-staining silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Mildew-resistant joint sealants. 4. Butyl joint sealants. 5. Latex joint sealants.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.



B. Sample warranties.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C1021 to conduct the testing indicated.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer.

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.


079200 Page 2 of 8

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.


B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 NON-STAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Non-staining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM C1248.

B. Silicone, Non-staining, S, NS, 50, NT: Non-staining, single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.




079200 Page 3 of 8

a. Pecora Corporation. b. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants. c. Tremco Incorporated.

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane, M, P, 25, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 Urethane, M, P, 25, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT.


a. Pecora Corporation. b. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants. c. Tremco Incorporated.

2.4 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth.

B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.


a. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. b. Pecora Corporation. c. Tremco Incorporated.

2.5 BUTYL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealants: ASTM C1311.


a. Bostik, Inc. b. Pecora Corporation.
















079200 Page 4 of 8

2.6 Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF.


a. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation. b. Pecora Corporation. c. Tremco Incorporated.

2.7 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.


a. Alcot Plastics Ltd. b. BASF Corporation. c. Construction Foam Products; a division of Nomaco, Inc.

B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials.

C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.










079200 Page 5 of 8

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C1193 and joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.


079200 Page 6 of 8

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

1. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C1193 unless otherwise indicated.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 5 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform one test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or one test per each floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C1521.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.


079200 Page 7 of 8

1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, M, P, 25, T, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Exterior perimeter joints between building components b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, non-staining, S, NS, 50, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, Urethane, M, P, 25, T, NT . 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, non-staining, S, NS, 50, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and

windows. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.


079200 Page 8 of 8

F. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

G. Joint-Sealant Application: Concealed mastics.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Aluminum thresholds. b. Sill plates. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Butyl-rubber based. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.



081113 Page 1 of 7

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Interior standard steel doors and frames. 2. Exterior standard steel doors and frames.


1. Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate requirements for installation of door hardware, electrified door hardware, and access control and security systems.





B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.


081113 Page 2 of 7

C. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal doors and frames, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final door hardware schedule.



B. Field quality control reports.


A. Record Documents: For fire-rated doors, list of door numbers and applicable room name and number to which door accesses.


A. Egress Door Inspector Qualifications: Inspector for field quality control inspections of egress door assemblies shall meet the qualifications set forth in NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.4 and the following:


A. Deliver hollow-metal doors and frames palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal doors and frames vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY. 2. Republic Doors and Frames.





081113 Page 3 of 7

3. Steelcraft; an Allegion brand.


2.3 INTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level 3; ANSI/SDI A250.4, Level A.

1. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Core: Kraft-paper honeycomb.

2. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. b. Construction: Full profile welded.

2.4 EXTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level 3; ANSI/SDI A250.4, Level A..

1. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with

minimum A60 coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material

as face sheets. Seal joints against water penetration. f. Bottom Edges: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same

material as face sheets. Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape.



081113 Page 4 of 7

g. Core: Polyurethane.

2. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum A60 coating.

b. Construction: Full profile welded.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame standard, and suitable for performance level indicated.

2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for frames with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches of frame height above 7 feet.

B. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor.

C. Material: ASTM A879/A879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M or ASTM A1011/A1011M; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M, Class B.

2.6 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M.

E. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.

F. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."


081113 Page 5 of 7

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as frames. 1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners

unless otherwise indicated. 2. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers

as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

B. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal doors and frames to receive templated mortised hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to ANSI/SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal doors and frames for hardware.

C. Glazed Lites: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Provide stops and moldings flush with face of door, and with beveled stops unless otherwise indicated.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal doors and frames.

4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated.

5. Provide stops for installation with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.

2.8 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.


081113 Page 6 of 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are removed.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without damage to completed Work.

2. Floor Anchors: Secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout or mortar.

4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit and adjust hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Repair or remove and replace installations where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.


081113 Page 7 of 7

B. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door assembly installations comply with specified requirements.

3.4 REPAIR

A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

B. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.



081416 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Five-ply flush wood veneer-faced doors for transparent finish. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.


1. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including the following:

1. Door core materials and construction. 2. Door edge construction 3. Door face type and characteristics. 4. Factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each type of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

1. Door schedule indicating door location, type, size, fire protection rating, and swing. 2. Door elevations, dimension and locations of hardware, lite and louver cutouts, and

glazing thicknesses. 3. Dimensions and locations of blocking for hardware attachment. 4. Clearances and undercuts. 5. Requirements for veneer matching.

C. Samples: For factory-finished doors.


A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Special warranties.


081416 Page 2 of 5


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.

C. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels designed for building occupants for the remainder of construction period.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: In accordance with their Limited Lifetime Warranty, the Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Delamination of veneer. b. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. c. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch

span.

2. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A.

1. Provide labels from AWI certification program indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.

B. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

C. Composite Wood Products: Verify products are made without added urea formaldehyde.




081416 Page 3 of 5

2.2 SOLID-CORE, FIVE-PLY FLUSH WOOD VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Doors:


a. Eggers Industries. b. Lambton Doors. c. Masonite Architectural. d. Oshkosh Door Company. e. VT Industries Inc.

2. Performance Grade: ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A Extra Heavy Duty. 3. ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A Grade: Custom. 4. Faces: Single-plywood veneer not less than 1/50 inch thick.

a. Species: Select white birch. b. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced). c. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. d. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. e. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each

separate room or area of building.

5. Exposed Vertical Edges: Applied wood-veneer edges of same species as faces and covering edges of faces - Architectural Woodwork Standards edge Type B.

6. Core for Non-Fire-Rated Doors:

a. ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2 particleboard.

1) Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.

7. Construction: Five plies, hot-pressed bonded (vertical and horizontal edging is bonded to core), with entire unit abrasive planed before veneering.

8. Security Rating: Class 40.

2.3 LIGHT FRAMES

A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Species: Species compatible with door faces. 2. Profile: Manufacturer's standard shape.








081416 Page 4 of 5

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated.

1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

1. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. 2. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, ANSI/BHMA-

156.115-W, and hardware templates. 3. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames, to verify dimensions and alignment

before factory machining.

C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with

applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

2.5 FACTORY FINISHING

A. Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing.

1. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

2. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Factory finish doors.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A Grade: Custom. 2. Finish: ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A TR-8 UV Cured Acrylated Polyester/Urethane 3. Staining: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s full standard range 4. Sheen: Satin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.

1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.


081416 Page 5 of 5

2. Reject doors with defects.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)."

B. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

C. Job-Fitted Doors:

1. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below.

a. Do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors.

2. Machine doors for hardware. 3. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 4. Clearances:

a. Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.

5. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.

D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.


A. Repair or remove and replace installations where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

B. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door assembly installations comply with specified requirements.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.



084113 Page 1 of 9

SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Aluminum-framed storefront systems. 2. Aluminum-framed entrance door systems.





B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.

1. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers.

2. Include point-to-point wiring diagrams.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

D. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.


A. Energy Performance Certificates: NFRC-certified energy performance values from manufacturer.

B. Product test reports. For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Source quality-control reports.


E. Sample warranties.


084113 Page 2 of 9





B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.

1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion of the project provided however that the Limited Warranty shall begin in no event later than six months from date of shipment by manufacturer.

B. Special Finish Warranty, Factory-Applied Finishes: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of baked-enamel, powder-coat, or organic finishes within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.


084113 Page 3 of 9

1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure, including, but not limited to, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following:

a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units.

B. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller.

D. Structural: Test according to ASTM E330/E330M as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors, do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors and anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.

E. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E331 as follows:

1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas, including entrance doors, when tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 10 lbf/sq. ft. as defined in AAMA 501.

F. Energy Performance: Certified and labeled by manufacturer for energy performance as follows:

1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor):

a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: U-factor for the system of not more than 0.32 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to AAMA 1503, based upon 1”


084113 Page 4 of 9

clear insulating glass (1/4" clear with e= 0.035 Low-E coating on #2 surface, 1/2" as with warm edge spacer and 90% argon gas-fill, 1/4" clear).

b. Entrance Doors: U-factor of not more than 0.52 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100, based upon 1” clear insulating glass (1/4" clear with e= 0.035 Low-E coating on #2 surface, 1/2" as with warm edge spacer and 90% argon gas-fill, 1/4" clear).

2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC):

a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: SHGC for the system of not more than 0.40 as determined according to NFRC 200.

b. Entrance Doors: SHGC of not more than 0.35 as determined according to NFRC 200.

3. Air Leakage:

a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: Air leakage for the system of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E283.

b. Entrance Doors: Air leakage of not more than 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..

4. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF):

a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: CRF for the system of not less than 68 (frame) and 68 (glass) as determined according to AAMA 1503, based upon 1” clear insulating glass (1/4" clear with e= 0.035 Low-E coating on #2 surface, 1/2" as with warm edge spacer and 90% argon gas-fill, 1/4" clear).

b. Entrance Doors: CRF of not less than 37 (frame) and 66 (glass) as determined according to AAMA 1503, based upon 1” clear insulating glass (1/4" clear with e= 0.035 Low-E coating on #2 surface, 1/2" as with warm edge spacer and 90% argon gas-fill, 1/4" clear).

G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 STOREFRONT SYSTEMS


1. EFCO Corporation. 2. Kawneer North America, an Arconic company. 3. Tubelite Inc.






084113 Page 5 of 9

B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Exterior Framing Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Interior Vestibule Framing Construction: Nonthermal. 3. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 4. Finish: High-performance organic finish. 5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system. 6. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish

indicated. 7. Steel Reinforcement: As required by manufacturer.

C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.

D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

2.3 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS



B. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing or automatic operation.

1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch-thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior.

2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch nominal width. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed

gaskets.

a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.






084113 Page 6 of 9

2.4 INTERIOR STOREFRONT SYSTEMS



B. Basis of Design: Trifab 400 Framing System, by Kawneer North America, an Arconic Company.

C. Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.

1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch-thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch nominal width. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed

gaskets.

a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

2.5 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.

C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.

D. Verify sealant has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.

2.6 MATERIALS

A. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209.

B. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221.

C. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B429/B429M.

D. Structural Profiles: ASTM B308/B308M.

E. Steel Reinforcement:







084113 Page 7 of 9

1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1008/A1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1011/A1011M.

F. Steel Reinforcement Primer: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware.

F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.

G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.

H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. High-Performance Organic Finish, Two-Coat PVDF: Fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat.


084113 Page 8 of 9

1. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

2. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Do not install damaged components.

C. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.

D. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.

E. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.

F. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

G. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers.

2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

H. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed, as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," to produce weathertight installation.

I. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

J. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF GLAZING

A. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

3.3 INSTALLATION OF ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCE DOORS

A. Install entrance doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping.


084113 Page 9 of 9

2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts.

1. Air Leakage: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E783. Allowable air infiltration shall not exceed 1.5 times the amount indicated in the performance requirements or 0.09 cfm/ft2, whichever is greater.

a. Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect.

2. Water Penetration: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E1105 at a minimum uniform static-air-pressure differential of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure differential specified for laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft., and shall not evidence water penetration.

C. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing aluminum-framed storefronts. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

B. Clean glass immediately after installation. Comply with glass manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.



087113 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 087113 - AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Low-energy door operators for swinging doors.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. AAADM: American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers.



B. Shop Drawings: For automatic door operators.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware mounting heights, and attachment details. 2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.


A. Product certificates.





A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Certified Inspector Qualifications: Certified by AAADM.


087113 Page 2 of 5

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of automatic door operators that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATORS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide operator from one of the following:

1. Horton Automatics; a division of Overhead Door Corporation 2. LCN; an Allegion brand. 3. Stanley Access Technologies

2.2 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS, GENERAL

A. General: Provide operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for occupancy type indicated; and in accordance with UL 325. Coordinate operator mechanisms with door operation, hinges, and activation and safety devices. 1. Wind Load: Provide door operators on exterior doors that will open and close doors and

maintain them in fully closed position when subjected to wind load.

B. Electromechanical Operating System: Self-contained unit powered by permanent-magnet dc motor; with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor, connections for power and activation- and safety-device wiring, and manual operation, including spring closing when power is off.

C. Housing for Overhead Concealed Operators: Fabricated from minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded or formed aluminum and extending full width of door opening, including door jambs, to conceal door operators and controls. Provide hinged or removable access panels for service and adjustment of door operators and controls. Secure panels to prevent unauthorized access.

D. Cover for Surface-Mounted Operators: Fabricated from 0.125-inch- thick, extruded or formed aluminum; manufacturer's standard width; with enclosed end caps, provision for maintenance access, and fasteners concealed when door is in closed position.

E. Brackets and Reinforcements: Fabricated from aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.





087113 Page 3 of 5

2.3 LOW-ENERGY DOOR OPERATORS FOR SWINGING DOORS

A. Standard: BHMA A156.19.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. Opening Force if Power Fails: Not more than 15 lbf required to release latch if provided, not more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in motion, and not more than 15 lbf required to fully open door.

2. Entrapment-Prevention Force: Not more than 15 lbf required to prevent stopped door from closing or opening.

C. Configuration: Operator to control single swinging door.

1. Traffic Pattern: One way. 2. Operator Mounting: Bottom Load Operator.

D. Operating System: Electromechanical.

E. Activation Device: Push-plate switch on each side of door to activate door operator.

F. Exposed Finish: Manufacturer’s standard white.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

1. Extrusions: ASTM B221. 2. Sheet: ASTM B209.

B. Fasteners and Accessories: Corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

2.5 CONTROLS

A. General: Provide controls in accordance with BHMA standards; for condition of exposure; and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for occupancy type indicated. Coordinate devices with door operation and door operator mechanisms.

B. Push-Plate Switch: Momentary-contact door control switch with flat push-plate actuator with contrasting-colored, engraved message.

1. Configuration: Round push plate with 4-by-4-inch junction box.

a. Mounting: Recess mounted, semiflush in wall.


087113 Page 4 of 5

2. Configuration: Rectangular push plate with 2-by-4-inch junction box.

a. Mounting: Surface mounted on post.

3. Push-Plate Material: Stainless steel as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

4. Message: International symbol of accessibility and "Push to Open."

C. Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits, provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked, latched, or bolted.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Signage: As required by cited BHMA standard for type of door and its operation.

1. Application Process: Operator manufacturer's standard process. 2. Provide sign materials with instructions for field application when operators are installed.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Factory fabricate automatic door operators to comply with indicated standards.

B. Fabricate exterior components to drain condensation and water-passing joints within operator enclosure to the exterior.

C. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws, finished to match operator.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Install automatic door operators in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and cited BHMA standard for type of door operation and direction of pedestrian travel, including signage, controls, wiring, remote power units if any, and connection to building's power supply.

B. Controls: Install devices in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and cited BHMA standard for operator type and direction of pedestrian travel.

C. Signage: Apply on both sides of each door as required by cited BHMA standard for type of door operator and direction of pedestrian travel.

D. Adjusting: Adjust automatic door operators to function smoothly and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer; comply with requirements of applicable BHMA standards.

1. Adjust operators on exterior doors for tight closure.


087113 Page 5 of 5

2. Readjust automatic door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles).

E. Demonstration: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic door operators.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Test and inspect each automatic door operator installation, using AAADM inspection forms, to determine compliance of installed systems with applicable BHMA standards.

B. Automatic door operators will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.



088000 Page 1 of 10

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Glass products. 2. Insulating glass. 3. Glazing sealants. 4. Glazing tapes. 5. Miscellaneous glazing materials. 6. Insulated Spandrel Panels.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.





B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Product Certificates: For glass.

B. Product test reports.

C. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.


088000 Page 2 of 10

D. Sample warranties.


A. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.


B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design glazing.

B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined in accordance with the IBC and ASTM E1300:

1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Design Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential

shading within individual glass lites.

C. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.


088000 Page 3 of 10

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 7 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.

2. SHGC and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 7 computer program.

3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 300.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. NGA Publications: "Glazing Manual." 2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and

AAMA TIR A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." 3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped

Glazing." 4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the IGCC.

D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than thickness indicated.

E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.


088000 Page 4 of 10


a. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc. b. Guardian Glass; SunGuard. c. Pilkington North America.

B. Tinted Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 2 (tinted), Quality-Q3.


a. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc. b. Guardian Glass; SunGuard. c. Pilkington North America.

C. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

D. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

E. Low-E-Coated Vision Glass: ASTM C1376.


a. Guardian Glass; SunGuard. b. Pilkington North America. c. Viracon, Inc.

2.4 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified in accordance with ASTM E2190.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary sealants. 2. Perimeter Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1) Technoform.
















088000 Page 5 of 10

2) Thermix; a brand of Ensinger USA.

3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both.

2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of industry colors.

B. Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant, Class 50: Complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT.


a. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. b. Sika Corporation. c. Tremco Incorporated.

2.6 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.

2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with

a full bead of liquid sealant.







088000 Page 6 of 10

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

B. Setting Blocks:

1. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer.

C. Spacers:


D. Edge Blocks:


E. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

2.8 INSULATED SPANDREL PANELS


1. Citadel architectural Products. 2. Mapes Industries, Inc. 3. Nudo, A Verzatec Company

B. Basis-of-Design Panel: Mapes-R+ (5-Ply) panels as manufactured by Mapes Industries, Inc.

C. Finish:

1. Exterior: Custom Kynar 2. Interior: Embossed Baked Enamel 3. Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s full range.

D. Panel Fabrication:

1. Exterior Substrate: Impact Layer 2. Core: Isocyanurate 3. Interior Substrate: Solid Plastic (SPS) 4. Tolerances - .8% of panels dimension length and width - (+/-) 1/16" thickness 5. Panel Thickness - 1" 6. R-Value - 5.88 7. U-Value - 0.17

E. Accessories:




088000 Page 7 of 10

1. As recommended for use as an infill panel component in storefront systems. Related material to complete installation as recommended by the manufacturer.

2. Seals against moisture intrusion as recommended by the manufacturer. Polyurethane and silicone based sealant with a 20 year life as recommended by the panel Manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and in accordance with requirements in referenced glazing publications.

3.2 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.


088000 Page 8 of 10

E. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.3 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


088000 Page 9 of 10


A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

3.6 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Clear Glass Type (Door Vision Lites and Interior Storefront Systems): Fully tempered float glass.

1. Minimum Thickness: 1/4 inch thick. 2. Safety glazing required.

B. Tinted Glass Type: Heat-strengthened and Fully tempered float glass.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Guardian Glass, SunGuard SuperNeutral, SNX 51/23 Clear; light gray appearance.

2. Tint Color: Light gray. 3. Minimum Thickness: As determined by Delegated Design Engineer. 4. Safety glazing required, as indicated.

3.7 INSULATING GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Low-E-Coated, Tinted Insulating Glass Type 1 (All insulating glass, unless noted otherwise):

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Guardian Glass, SunGuard SuperNeutral, SNX 51/23 Clear (Outboard), Clear (Inboard); light gray appearance.

2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: As determined by Delegated Design Engineer.. 4. Outdoor Lite: Tinted fully tempered float glass. 5. Tint Color: Light gray. 6. Interspace Content: Argon. 7. Indoor Lite: Clear fully tempered float glass. 8. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second surface. 9. Solar Control: 0.23 SHGC. 10. Safety glazing required.


088000 Page 10 of 10



089119 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 089119 - FIXED LOUVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fixed extruded-aluminum louvers.



1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.

B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.

C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.


A. Product Test Reports: Based on tests performed according to AMCA 500-L.



A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.



089119 Page 2 of 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver-blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building.

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings.

B. Seismic Performance: As indicated on drawings.

2.2 FIXED EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS

A. Horizontal Drainable-Blade Louver: L-3


a. Greenheck Fan Corporation. b. Reliable Products, Inc. c. Ruskin Company.

2. Louver Depth: 4 inches. 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch. 4. Mullion Type: Exposed. 5. Louver Performance Ratings:

a. Free Area: Not less than 8.0 sq. ft. for 48-inch-wide by 48-inch-high louver. b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 900 fpm. c. Air Performance: Not more than 0.10-inch wg static pressure drop at 800-fpm free-

area exhaust velocity. d. Air Performance: Not more than 0.15-inch wg static pressure drop at 1000-fpm

free-area exhaust velocity.

6. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

2.3 LOUVER SCREENS

A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.

1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 2. Screening Type: Insect screening.






089119 Page 3 of 4

B. Louver Screen Frames: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached.

C. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: 1. Insect Screening: Aluminum, 18-by-16 mesh, 0.012-inch wire.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003 or 5005, with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

1. Use hex-head or Phillips pan-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 3. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.

D. Post-installed Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated from stainless-steel components, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M conducted by a qualified testing agency.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.

B. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.

2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 50 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.


089119 Page 4 of 4

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.

D. Protect unpainted galvanized- and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction, so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.



092900 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels.



1. Gypsum wallboard. 2. Gypsum ceiling board. 3. Abuse-resistant gypsum board. 4. Cementitious tile backing panels. 5. Interior trim. 6. Joint treatment materials. 7. Sound-attenuation blankets. 8. Acoustical sealant.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.


092900 Page 2 of 5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C1396/C1396M.


a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. b. National Gypsum Company. c. USG Corporation.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

3. Type X 4. Long Edges: Tapered.

B. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M.


a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. b. National Gypsum Company. c. USG Corporation.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

3. Type X 4. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: For use where indicated on drawings. ASTM C1396/C1396M gypsum board, tested according to ASTM C1629/C1629M.


a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.












092900 Page 3 of 5

b. National Gypsum Company. c. USG Corporation.

2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 3. Surface Abrasion: ASTM C1629/C1629M, meets or exceeds Level 1 requirements. 4. Indentation: ASTM C1629/C1629M, meets or exceeds Level 1 requirements. 5. Soft-Body Impact: ASTM C1629/C1629M, meets or exceeds Level 1 requirements. 6. Long Edges: Tapered. 7. Mold Resistance: ASTM D3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D3274.

2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C1288 or ASTM C1325, with manufacturer's standard edges.


a. Certainteed; SAINT-GOBAIN. b. National Gypsum Company. c. USG Corporation.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D3274.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. Expansion (control) joint.

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C475/C475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.








092900 Page 4 of 5

2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.

E. Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C1002 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

G. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

H. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 079219 "Acoustical Joint Sealants."

I. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION AND FINISHING OF PANELS

A. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

B. Comply with ASTM C840.

C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.


092900 Page 5 of 5

D. For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.



096513 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Thermoset-rubber base.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE


1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; a division of Burke Industries Inc. 2. Flexco. 3. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company.

B. Product Standard: ASTM F1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid, homogeneous).

1. Style and Location:

a. Style B, Cove.

C. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

D. Height: 4 inches.

E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed.

G. Inside Corners: Job formed.






096513 Page 2 of 3

H. Colors: Black.

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Verify adhesives have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.

3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.



096513 Page 3 of 3

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

H. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 4 inches in length.

a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 4 inches in length.

a. Cope corners to minimize open joints.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.



099113 Page 1 of 8

SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates.

1. Concrete. 2. Fiber-cement board. 3. Steel and iron. 4. Galvanized metal. 5. Wood.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 1 (Matte finish – flat): Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 3 (Eggshell-like): 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 4 (Satin-like): 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D523.

D. MPI Gloss Level 5 (Semi-gloss) : 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D523.

E. MPI Gloss Level 6 (Gloss): 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D523.

F. MPI Gloss Level 7 (High-gloss): More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

B. Samples: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.

C. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.


099113 Page 2 of 8

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.




A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.


099113 Page 3 of 8

C. Do not apply paints when surface and environmental conditions do not comply with paint manufacturer’s written recommendations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Behr Paint Company; Behr Process Corporation. 2. Benjamin Moore & Co. 3. Cloverdale Paint. 4. PPG Paints. 5. Rust-Oleum Corporation; a subsidiary of RPM International, Inc. 6. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 7. Zinsser; Rust-Oleum Corporation.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to products listed in the Exterior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: For field applications, verify paints and coatings comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits:

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L. 4. Rust-Preventive Coatings: 100 g/L. 5. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.

D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.










099113 Page 4 of 8

1. Ten percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent. 3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 4. Wood: 15 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.


099113 Page 5 of 8

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:

1. SSPC-SP 2. 2. SSPC-SP 3. 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4. 4. SSPC-SP 11.

G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

I. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint system indicated.

2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic

wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final

installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door

frames. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed

or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.


099113 Page 6 of 8

C. Apply paints to manufacturer’s recommended dry film thickness (DFT), to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

D. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed to view:

a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Metal conduit.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI EXT 3.1C-G3:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3.

1) PPG Architectural; PPG Paints, Seal Grip Int/Ext Acrylic Universal Primer/Sealer.

2) Rust-Oleum; Zinsser, AllPrime Interior-Exterior Primer Sealer. 3) Sherwin Williams; Loxon, Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #161.


099113 Page 7 of 8

1) PPG Architectural; High Performance Coatings, Devflex 4212HP Waterborne Acrylic Eggshell Enamel.

2) Rust-Oleum; Rust Oleum, Industrial Choice 5200 System DTM Acrylic. 3) Sherwin Williams; Pro Industrial, DTM Acrylic Eg-Shel.

2. Steel Deck Applications: Water-Based Dry-Fall System:

a. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified. b. Topcoat: Dry fall, latex, flat, MPI #118.

1) Behr Paint; Behr PRO, Dryfall White. 2) PPG Architectural; PPG Paints, Speedhide Super Tech WB Interior Dry Fog

Flat Latex. 3) Sherwin Williams; Pro Industrial, Waterborne Acrylic Dry Fall

B. Cement Board Substrates:

1. Latex System MPI EXT 3.3J-G3/4:


1) Behr Paint; Premium Plus, Exterior Multi-Surface Primer & Sealer. 2) PPG Architectural; PPG Paints, Seal Grip Int/Ext Acrylic Universal

Primer/Sealer. 3) Sherwin Williams; Loxon, Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (MPI Gloss Level 3-4), MPI #15.

1) Behr; Premium Plus, Exterior Satin Enamel 2) PPG Architectural; PPG Paints, Speedhide Exterior 100% Acrylic Latex

Satin 3) SherwinWilliams; SuperPaint, Exterior Latex Satin; .

C. Steel and Iron Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI EXT 5.1C-G5:

a. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified. b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching

topcoat. c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss

Level 5), MPI #163.

1) Behr; Behr Premium, Int/Ext Direct to Metal Semi-Gloss Paint. 2) Rust-Oleum; Rust Oleum, 3800 System DTM Acrylic Enamel. 3) Sherwin Williams; Pro Industrial, DTM Semi-Gloss.

D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:


099113 Page 8 of 8

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI EXT 5.3J-G5:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134.

1) Behr Paint; Premium Plus, Exterior Multi-Surface Primer & Sealer. 2) Rust-Oleum; Rust Oleum, Sierra Performance Griptec Multi Surface Primer. 3) Sherwin Williams; Pro Industrial, Pro-Cryl Universal Primer.


c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #163.

1) Behr; Behr Premium, Int/Ext Direct to Metal Semi-Gloss Paint. 2) Rust-Oleum; Rust Oleum, 3800 System DTM Acrylic Enamel. 3) Sherwin Williams; Pro Industrial, DTM Semi-Gloss.

E. Wood Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI EXT 6.3J-G5:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd for exterior wood, MPI #5.

1) Cloverdale Paint Prime Solution Interior/Exterior Alkyd Stain Blocking Primer.

2) Rust-Oleum; Zinsser, Allprime Oil Base Primer Sealer and Stain Blocker. 3) Sherwin Williams; A-100, Ext Fast Dry Stain Blocking Alkyd Primer.


c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #163.

1) Cloverdale Paint Cloverdale, EcoLogic High Performance Ultra Low VOC Int/Ext Waterborne Semi-Gloss.

2) Rust-Oleum; Rust Oleum, 3800 System DTM Acrylic Enamel. 3) Sherwin Williams; All Surface Enamel, All Surface Enamel HP Semi-Gloss.



099123 Page 1 of 8

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.

1. Concrete. 2. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 3. Steel and iron. 4. Galvanized metal. 5. Wood. 6. Gypsum board.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 1 (Matte-finish – flat): Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 2 (High side sheen flat - velvet-like): Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 3 (Eggshell-like): 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D523.

D. MPI Gloss Level 4 (Satin-like): 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D523.

E. MPI Gloss Level 5 (Semi-gloss): 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D523.

F. MPI Gloss Level 6 (Gloss): 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D523.

G. MPI Gloss Level 7 (High-gloss): More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

2. Indicate VOC content.

B. Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.


099123 Page 2 of 8

C. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.




A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

C. Do not apply paints when surface and environmental conditions do not comply with paint manufacturer’s written recommendations.


099123 Page 3 of 8

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Behr Paint Company; Behr Process Corporation. 2. PPG Paints. 3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in the Interior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, verify paints and coatings comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits:

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L. 4. Rust-Preventive Coatings: 100 g/L. 5. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 100 g/L. 6. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 7. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 8. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.

D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

1. Ten percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones.







099123 Page 4 of 8

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent. 3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 4. Wood: 15 percent. 5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.


099123 Page 5 of 8

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

C. Apply paints to manufacturer’s recommended dry film thickness (DFT), to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

D. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:

a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Pipe hangers and supports. c. Metal conduit.

2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:

a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Metal conduit.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:


099123 Page 6 of 8

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI INT 3.1L-G5:


1) Behr Paint; Premium Plus, Exterior Multi-Surface Primer & Sealer. 2) PPG Architectural; PPG Paints, Seal Grip Int/Ext Acrylic Universal

Primer/Sealer. 3) Sherwin Williams; Loxon, Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #153.

1) Behr Paint; Behr Pro HPC, Pre-Catalyzed WB Epoxy Semi-Gloss. 2) PPG Architectural; PPG Paints, Pitt-Glaze WB1 Int. Semi-Gloss Pre-

Catalyzed WB Acrylic Epoxy. 3) Sherwin Williams; Pro Industrial, Pro Industrial Pre-Cat Epoxy Semi-Gloss.

B. CMU Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI INT 4.2K-G5:

a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4.

1) Behr Paint; Behr Pro, Block Filler. 2) PPG Architectural; PPG Paints, Speedhide Int./Ext. Masonry Hi Fill Latex

Block Filler. 3) Sherwin Williams; PrepRite, Int/Ext Block Filler.





C. Steel Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI INT 5.1B-G5:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based MPI #107.

1) Behr Paint; Premium Plus, Exterior Multi-Surface Primer & Sealer.


099123 Page 7 of 8

2) PPG Architectural; High Performance Coatings, Pitt-Tech Int/Ext DTM Industrial Primer.

3) Sherwin Williams; Pro Industrial, Pro-Cryl Universal Primer.





D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI INT 5.3B-5G:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134.

1) Behr Paint; Premium Plus, Exterior Multi-Surface Primer & Sealer. 2) PPG Architectural; High Performance Coatings, Pitt-Tech Plus 4020 PF /

Devflex 4020 PF. 3) Sherwin Williams; Pro Industrial, Pro-Cryl Universal Primer.





E. Wood Substrates: Wood trim and architectural woodwork.

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 6.3V-G5:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39.

1) Behr Paint; Premium Plus, Int/Ext Multi Surface Primer and Sealer. 2) PPG Architectural; PPG Paints, Seal Grip Int/Ext Acrylic Universal

Primer/Sealer. 3) Sherwin Williams; PrepRite ProBlock, Primer Sealer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat.


099123 Page 8 of 8

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #147.

1) Behr Paint; Premium Plus, Interior Semi-Gloss Enamel. 2) PPG Architectural; PPG Paints, Speedhide Zero Interior Zero VOC Latex

Semi-Gloss. 3) Sherwin Williams; Pro Industrial, Acrylic Semi-Gloss Coating.

F. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 9.2M-G3:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149.

1) Behr Paint; Premium Plus, Interior All-in-One Primer. 2) PPG Architectural; PPG Paints, Speedhide Zero Interior Zero VOC Latex

Sealer. 3) Sherwin Williams; ProMar 200, Zero Interior Latex Primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, eggshell-like (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #145.

1) Behr Paint; Premium Plus, Interior Eggshell Paint. 2) PPG Architectural; Dulux (CA), Ultra Zero VOC Int Latex Pearl. 3) Sherwin Williams; ProMar 200 HP Zero VOC, Interior Acrylic Eg-Shel.



101423.16 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 101423.16 - ROOM-IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes room-identification signs that are directly attached to the building.

B. Scope: Provide room identification signage for all interior, enclosed spaces in both the Greenhouse and the Pavilion.



B. Shop Drawings: For room-identification signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other

installers, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille,

and layout for each sign at least half size.



A. Sample warranty.



1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.



101423.16 Page 2 of 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the USDOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design" and ICC A117.1.

1. Tactile characters shall be raised the required 1/32" inches from sign face. Glue-on letters or etched backgrounds are not acceptable.

2. All text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 braille. Braille shall be separated 1/2" from the corresponding raised characters or symbols. Grade 2 braille translation to be provided by signage manufacturer.

3. All letters, numbers and/or symbols shall contrast with their background, either light characters on a dark background or dark characters on a light background. Characters and background shall have a non-glare finish.

2.2 ROOM-IDENTIFICATION SIGNS

A. Room-Identification Sign: Sign system with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:


a. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. b. Cosco. c. Mohawk Sign Systems.

2. Laminated-Sheet Sign: Photopolymer or Sandblasted polymer face sheet with raised graphics laminatedto phenolic backing sheet to produce composite sheet.

a. Composite-Sheet Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of sign. b. Surface-Applied Graphics: Applied vinyl film. c. Subsurface Graphics: Phot image or Slide-in changeable insert. d. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth.

a. Edge Condition: Square cut. b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Rounded to manufacturer’s recommended radius.

4. Mounting: Surface mounted to wall with concealed anchors.


101423.16 Page 3 of 4

2.3 SIGN MATERIALS

A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D4802, category as standard with manufacturer for each sign, Type UVF (UV filtering).

B. Vinyl Film: UV-resistant vinyl film with pressure-sensitive, permanent adhesive; die cut to form characters or images as indicated on Drawings and suitable for exterior applications.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signs, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:

1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2. For exterior exposure, furnish nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized devices. 3. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General:

a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened sign unless otherwise indicated.

4. Sign Mounting Fasteners:

a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of sign material or screwed into back of sign assembly unless otherwise indicated.

b. Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching sign finish, with type of head indicated, and installed in predrilled holes.

B. Adhesive: As recommended by sign manufacturer.

C. Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 0.045 inch thick, with adhesive on both sides.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.

1. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention.

2. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous.

3. Provide rabbets, lugs, and tabs necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.

B. Subsurface-Applied Graphics: Apply graphics to back face of clear face-sheet material to produce precisely formed image. Image shall be free of rough edges.


101423.16 Page 4 of 4

C. Subsurface-Etched Graphics: Reverse etch back face of clear face-sheet material. Fill resulting copy with manufacturer's standard enamel. Apply opaque manufacturer's standard background color coating over enamel-filled copy.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that

would impair installation.

B. Mounting Methods:

1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface, embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.

2. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in sign as template. Countersink holes in sign if required. Place sign in position and flush to surface. Install through fasteners and tighten.

3. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied and to prevent visibility of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position and push to engage adhesive. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

4. Two-Face Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent visibility at sign edges. Place sign in position and push to engage tape adhesive.



10 14 53 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 10 14 53 - SITE SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS


B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Sec-

tion whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Co-

operate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Provide and install site signage as shown on the drawings and as specified herein, including but not limited to the following:

1. Traffic Signs.

2. Signage Accessories.

3. Wildcliff Manor Sign


A. Section 03 30 00 – Cast – In – Place Concrete

B. Section 04 06 50 – Mortar and Masonry Grout

C. Section 04 43 00 – Natural Stone Veneer

D. Section 32 11 23 – Processed Aggregate Base

E. Section 32 12 00 – Bituminous Concrete Pavement and Markings

1.04 REFERENCES

A. “Standard Specifications” shall mean the State of New York Department of Transportation Standard Specifications, May 1, 2017; its latest edition; and any supplemental specifications.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of sign.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show mounting methods, grounds, mounting heights, layout, spacing, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign, include the following samples to verify color selected:

1. Panel Signs: Full-size Samples of each type of aluminum sheet and plate sign required.

2. Wildcliff Manor Sign: Samples of each type of sign panel, color, material.


10 14 53 Page 2 of 3

3. Approved samples (full-size) will be returned for installation into Project.

D. Maintenance Data: For signage cleaning and maintenance requirements to include in mainte-nance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each sign type through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and with code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, advise installers of anchorage devices about specific requirements for placement of anchorage devices and similar items to be used for attaching signs.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PANEL SIGNS (TRAFFIC)

A. General: Provide panel signs that comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction.

1. Produce smooth panel sign surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally.

B. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of 5005-H15.

1. Edge Condition: Square cut.

2. Corner Condition: Rounded to radius indicated.

C. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with requirements indicated on Drawings and specified herein for size, style, spacing, content, mounting height and location, material, finishes, and colors of signage.

2.02 PANEL SIGN TYPES

A. Traffic Signs:

1. Material: Conform to “Standard Specifications” Item 645 and 730-01.

2. Background Color and Material: Conform to “Standard Specifications” Item 645 and 730-12.

3. Copy Color and Material: Conform to “Standard Specifications” Item 645 and 730-12.

4. Sign Posts: 4x4” Cedar wooden posts (see drawings).

5. Mounting: Stainless steel tamper proof (see drawings).

2.03 RAIL MOUNTED DECORATIVE SIGNS

A. Wildcliff Manor Signage

1. Manufactured by Impact Corporate Signs or approved equal.

a. Impact Corporate Signs, 26E. Burlington Ave. LaGrange, IL 60525


10 14 53 Page 3 of 3

b. Phone: 1(708) 469-7178

2. The signage should be created following the dimensions, finishes and colors as shown on the drawings. (Provide detailed shop drawings for final approval prior to fabrication.)

2.04 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.05 SHEET ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Traffic Sign and Accessible Parking Sign finish and colors shall conform to “Standard Specifications” Item 645 and 730-12. See sign table below for colors.

B. Welcome sign signage finish and color shall conform to drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with require-ments for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Verify that items provided under other sections of Work are sized and located to accommodate signs.

C. Examine supporting members to ensure that surfaces are at elevations indicated or required to comply with authorities having jurisdiction and are free from dirt and other deleterious matter.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types de-scribed and in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion and other defects in appearance.


A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by the City.



104413 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fire-protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers.

1.2 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE




B. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.



1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.


104413 Page 2 of 3


a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. b. Larsens Manufacturing Company. c. Nystrom.

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.

C. Cabinet Material: Clear anodized aluminum.

D. Surface Mounted: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on wall with no trim. 1. Rolled Edge 2. 2 required (Greenhouse)

E. Semi-recessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface, with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).

1. 3 inch rolled trim style.

2. 1 required (Pavilion)

F. Door Material: Clear anodized aluminum.

G. Door Style: Vertical Duo.

H. Door Glazing: Acrylic sheet.

1. Acrylic Sheet Color: Clear.

I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

J. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed into face.

3. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle.

4. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect.

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."


104413 Page 3 of 3

1) Location: Applied to cabinet glazing. 2) Application Process: Decals. 3) Lettering Color: White. 4) Orientation: Vertical.

K. Materials:

1. Aluminum: ASTM B221 for extruded shapes and aluminum sheet, with strength and durability characteristics of not less than Alloy 6063-T5 for aluminum sheet.

a. Finish: Clear anodic.

2. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 3 mm thick, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished).

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Prepare recesses for semi-recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

B. Install fire-protection cabinets in locations indicated and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

D. Identification: Apply decals at specified locations.

E. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.



104416 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.






A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Six years.


104416 Page 2 of 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.


a. Amerex Corporation.

b. JL Industries (Activar Construction Products) c. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. d. Larsens Manufacturing Company.

2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 4A:80B:C, 10-lbs. nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container.

2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish.


a. Amerex Corporation.

b. JL Industries (Activar Construction Products) c. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.


104416 Page 3 of 3

d. Larsens Manufacturing Company.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

a. Orientation: Vertical.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.

B. Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Mounting Brackets: Top of fire extinguisher to be at 42 inches above finished floor.

C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.



GREENHOUSE 133413 - 1

SECTION 13 3413 - GREENHOUSE

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. It is the intent of this portion of the specifications to include the furnishing and erecting of the greenhouse superstructure including all glazing and ventilation as shown on plans and/or hereinafter described such work to be the responsibility of the Greenhouse Manufacturer. Greenhouse Manufacturer shall have a demonstrated minimum 10 years experience with manufacturing similar projects for rooftop locations.

B. Included in the work of this section is: 1. Unit heaters 2. Fans 3. Shade/heat retention curtain system 4. High pressure fog cooling system 5. Environmental control system

C. Testing and start-up of systems are included in the work of this section.

1.2 SPECIFICATIONS AND PLANS

A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Concrete floors, grouting of sills and base plates, and concrete curbs: Division 03 and 04. 2. Doors and door hardware: Division 08 3. Plumbing rough-in work and hook-up of greenhouse plumbing systems, and downspouts

described in this section: Division 22. 4. Electrical power wiring, environmental control system wiring, lighting, conduit and

hook-ups of greenhouse electrical equipment provided under this section: Division 26.


A. The greenhouses shall be erected by the manufacturer or their qualified greenhouse specialty contractor with at least five (5) years experience in building greenhouses of the type specified, similar in size and complexity.

B. Coordination:

1. Coordinate work of this Section with plumbing work and electrical work performed by separate contractors.

2. Coordinate work of this Section with Owner’s IT department for software and computerized programs provided with greenhouse package.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each system and piece of equipment to be provided. For motorized equipment, include wiring diagram to power source and controls.

B. Approval submittals shall include structurally engineered stamped drawings for the State of New York, a full set of engineering calculations, equipment submittal and a full warranty as per Paragraph 3.6 of this specification. Submittals without this warranty will not be reviewed.

C. Shop drawings shall include the following detailed information: Cover Sheet Floor/ Post Plan Roof Framing & Glazing Plan Sidewall, Gable & Partition Elevations Rigid Frame & Truss Sections Foundation Outline & Post Feet Details Equipment Plan with Electrical Loads Typical Sidewall Section Roof to Gable Section Misc. Closure Details (greenhouse to head house/building)

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For greenhouse structure, shop drawings including analysis data, signed and sealed by the respective qualified professional structural or mechanical engineer responsible for their preparation.

E. Installer qualifications

F. Warranty

G. Operation and Maintenance Manuals

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Basis-of-Design Products: Where the Specifications or drawings name a specific manufacturer’s product accompanied by the words “basis-of-design product,” including make or model number or other designation, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Naming of a Basis of Design Product is intended to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. The Drawings indicate the general size, configuration, location, connections and/or support for equipment or systems specified with relation to the other building systems.

B. Basis-of-Design is THE GLASS HOUSE as manufactured by Rough Brothers, 5513 Vine Street, Cincinnati, Ohio 45217, (1-800-543-7351).



Other acceptable manufacturers include:

1. Van Wingerden Greenhouse Co., 1-828-891-7389 2. Stuppy Inc., 1-800-733-5025

1.2 MATERIALS

A. All primary framing shall be 6005 or 6061-T6 and 6063-T6 alloys. All aluminum flashing shall be 5005-H14 alloy. Framing shall consist of aluminum rigid frames and trusses on spacing to match the drawings, spanning the full width of the structure with a custom roof pitch. Aluminum shall be mill finish with appropriate heat treatment. No castings, either of aluminum or aluminum alloy, shall be permitted for joining structural members at joints subject to stress in which tensile strength is a factor.

B. Sidewall columns shall be attached to top of curbs with adhesive set plated anchor bolts, Grade A36 or A307. Drilling for anchors and setting of plated anchor bolts to be by the Greenhouse Manufacturer.

C. Structural connections shall be made with galvanized steel bolts. All bolts 1/4” diameter up to ½” diameter shall be A307. All bolts ½” diameter or larger shall be Grade 5. Welded connections will not be accepted.

2.3 STANDARD DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Standard loads specified below

1. Dead Load – 10 lbs. per sq. ft. (structure and equipment) 2. Live Load - 12 lbs. per sq. ft. on horizontal area. 3. Wind Load – as per drawings

B. In designing for the above loads, the loads may be considered to act in any of the following combinations:

1. Dead Load plus Wind Load. 2. Dead Load plus Live Load. 3. Dead Load plus Live Load plus Wind Load

C. In addition to the above, roof bars shall be required to carry a 100 lb. concentrated load at the

center of any span.

D. Structure shall be designed in accordance with current Aluminum Association "Specifications for Aluminum Structures". The maximum allowable deflection shall be L/120 of the span. Structure shall include adequate bracing for the lateral support of structural members and framing, and for stability of the structure for the resistance to wind forces. Bottom chord members as well as other truss members shall be adequate to resist compressive loads produced by horizontal wind loads and roof uplift produced by wind.



2.4 EXPANSION CONTROL

A. Suitable expansion joints shall be provided in all longitudinal members to take care of the longitudinal expansion in the aluminum. No longitudinal members shall exceed 21-0". All members shall be so joined as to require each joint to handle the expansion in the individual member and to prevent an accumulation of expansion in several members in one direction.

2.5 ALUMINUM FRAME

A. Truss members and connection plates shall be aluminum. Welded connections will not be accepted. Special care shall be taken in the fabrication of this aluminum work, and all tolerances shall be held to an absolute minimum in order to secure proper fit of the aluminum members specified.

B. Aluminum columns shall be furnished and placed through the length of the greenhouse and across all partitions and gables as required. Columns shall be factory punched, or drilled to attach required aluminum members.

C. Trusses shall be connected to the sidewall columns by an aluminum plate so designed as to be bolted to the web of the column with all bolts in shear. No joint shall be allowed, either of combined extrusions or a casting that shall be fastened to the flange of the column thereby placing fasteners in tension or twist.

D. Aluminum rafters shall be furnished and placed in the roof of the greenhouse, extending from the gutter to the ridge. Each pair of rafters shall be connected together at the ridge by means of aluminum plates.

E. Aluminum purlins in the roof (5” heavy aluminum) shall be furnished and connected to supporting members with a minimum of two galvanized steel bolts into each member. Purlins shall be prefabricated before shipment for the attachment of glazing bars and purlin clips.

F. Provide all other mill-finished aluminum structural components; such as bracing, clips, and fasteners not mentioned above but required to complete the framework of the greenhouse.

2.6 GUTTER

A. An extruded aluminum gutter, 7 ½" wide x 2 3/4" deep, with extruded drip gutter and internal downspout connections shall be provided where indicated on the drawings. This member shall have a flange to receive glazing bars and shall be provided with weep holes to carry condensation collected from the underside of the roof to the drip gutter. Gutter to include safety foot treads as a safety factor. Gutters without integral extruded safety tread shall not be accepted.

B. Connections for gutter downspouts shall be provided where indicated on drawings. Final connection and downspout material covered in other section.

2.7 RIDGE

A. An extruded aluminum ridge shall be furnished and placed at the peak of the structure. Ridge shall be provided with continuous socket hinge to receive ridge vents or fixed roof glazing.



2.8 GABLES

A. Glass gables with fixed gables from sill to gable rafter shall be constructed in a similar manner to the roof and sides using extruded aluminum shapes. All gable glass shall be lapped 3/8” similar to roof glazing.

2.9 GABLE ENDRAFTER

A. Specially extruded gable and corner trim shall be provided to receive roof glazing bar, vertical side and gable glazing and glazing bars. The gable and corner trim shall be neatly mitered and spliced at the ridge and at the gutter to provide a smooth detail at this point. These shall be securely fastened to the structural members, forming the gable end.

2.10 WALL AND VENT SILLS

A. Extruded aluminum sills shall be provided. Sills shall be capable of receiving side vents or fixed glazing. Sill corners shall be shop welded.

2.11 GLAZING BARS

A. Extruded aluminum glazing bars shall be placed and spaced on 26-1/2” centers to properly receive glass 26” wide. A chamber shall be provided on both the top and bottom of this bar for fastening purposes.

B. Condensation gutters to conduct primary condensation to the exterior gutter system shall be provided. Glazing bars shall extend in one piece from the ridge to the gutter. In order to prevent secondary condensation on the underside of the roof bars from collecting at purlin points, roof bars shall cross purlins with the entire underside of the bar raised to a minimum of 3/8” above the top flange of the purlin. This will allow the condensation to pass to the condensation gutter at the side of the enclosure. Rafter straps for fastening roof bars to purlins in the above manner shall be of extruded aluminum. Washers of plastic or other material placed between the roof bars and purlins to raise the bars off the purlins are shall not acceptable as a substitute method of secondary condensation control.

2.12 CURB SILL FLASHING

A. Aluminum sill flashing shall be placed on the outside of the perimeter curb. Sill flashing shall be placed under the glazing sill member and to the outside of the greenhouse columns, covering the top of the exposed curb including any insulation and/or face veneer, if present. Aluminum sill flashing shall extend no less than 2” down the vertical face of the curb. Sill flashing at curbs, or connection to adjacent structures shall be a minimum 1/16” thick. All sill corner flashing shall be shop welded. All sill flashing and end flashing conditions at door openings shall be shop welded closures matching the profile of the sill flashing. All sill flashing to be laid end to end with a .032 x4” long splice cap matching the profile of the sill flashing. Splice cap to be set in sealant and held in place with pop-rivets. Lapped sill flashing at joints is not acceptable.



2.13 ROOF AND SIDE VENTS

A. Automatic 26" sidewall vents with a continuous socket hinge shall be furnished and arranged to open out. Vents for any given compartment, when assembled and installed, shall be continuous from one end to the other. Side vent shall be made up of a top rail, bottom rail and mullions of extruded aluminum. They will then be bolted together in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. All vents shall have provision made at the hinge point to prevent creeping of the vents.

2.14 VENT OPERATORS

A. All vents shall be operated with aluminum rack arms with zinc pinions.

B. Provide 14 gauge 1.315" diameter galvanized drive shaft with aluminum couplings.

C. Aluminum shaft hangers with DELRIN bushings shall be provided to support roof and side vent drive shaft.

D. Rack & pinion arms with aluminum rack, zinc pinion gear and extruded aluminum housing assembly to keep rack and pinions in proper mesh and alignment shall be provided. Racks attach to bottom rail of vents with aluminum clips and stainless steel cotter pins. No less than two sets of rack and pinion arms shall be provided for each bay per run of vents.

2.15 VENT MACHINES

A. Lock EWA Series (or equal) vent machines shall be used to operate motorized sidewall vents. Vents machines to have line voltage limits.

2.16 ROOF & SIDE VENT SCREENS

A. Screens shall be provided at all vent openings. Screen rails shall be 5/16" x 7/8" mill finish extruded aluminum with a groove to receive a vinyl insert to hold 16 x 18 aluminum mesh in place.

B. Screen frames shall be assembled with die cast aluminum corners and designed to allow for re-screening of units in the field.

C. Brush seals shall be provided at ends of screen frames where vent operator arms penetrate.

2.17 GLAZING

A. All glazing to be laminated glass consisting of (2) 1/8” clear annealed glass pieces with .030” PVB inner layer. Nominal thickness to be ¼”.

B. All glass shall be laid with 3/8” lapped joints and held in place with aluminum bar caps to cover the glazing, and prevent the glass from slipping.



C. Aluminum extruded bar caps shall be applied to the bar covering the entire length of each lite of glass and made to conform to the laps in the glass and provide a uniform 3/8” lap. These caps shall be fabricated from extruded aluminum, so fabricated to exert a uniform, but not excessive pressure, along the entire length of the glass lite. Each cap shall be held with a minimum of two ½” x #10 stainless steel hex head self-tapping screws. Screws which hold bar caps shall be spaced not over 15 inches apart, nor shall any screw be placed closer than 1-1/2” from the end of the caps.

D. At each rigid frame top chord and end rafters, scaffold screws, 1” x #12 round head stainless steel screws shall be used to hold the caps in place, yet provide sufficient shank protruding above the caps for support of scaffolding.

2.18 GLAZING COMPOUNDS

A. Glass shall be bedded in extruded rope putty. The roof glass shall be caulked on top with a special elastic glazing compound before the bar caps are applied.

2.19 EXHAUST FANS

A. Exhaust fans shall be heavy-duty construction, consisting of a cast aluminum propeller having three (3) or more Macheta® tip blades, and a formed fiberglass housing and exhaust cone, both having a smooth, gel coat exterior surface. High efficiency, totally enclosed air over (TEAO) motors shall drive fans with heavy duty pulleys and aramid fiber v-belts. Fans are to use a spring-loaded, automotive style v-belt tensioner. Fans shall be protected against rust and corrosion with stainless steel hardware, sealed bearings, and aluminum struts. Fans used in this specification shall be performance certified by an independent testing facility such as BESS Labs (University of Illinois) and shall list the appropriate test number on the fan. Motorized, airfoil style PVC shutters or shutters with aluminum blades shall be provided as part of each exhaust fan. Shutter motor kits to include drive motor, crank arm, pull chain, return spring and hardware. Fans shall be single or two speed as scheduled on the drawings. Fans, wall housings, guards, shutters and shutter motor kits shall be as manufactured and provided by Aerotech, A Munters Company, or equal.

2.20 HIGH PRESSURE EVAPORATIVE COOLING SYSTEM

A. High-pressure fogging systems using only water to create fog, from a self-contained pump, through ruby-orifice fog nozzles to generate 10 micron average fog-droplets certified with PDA, to allow rapid dispersal of water-fog into multiple zones. System to include a high-pressure pump station, fog nozzles, manifolds, tubing and compression fittings. Systems are capable of metering/injecting chemicals into water stream.

B. Ruby-orifice nozzles. All high-pressure water to pass through a ruby-orifice path, ±0.0002 (±0.0005cm). Nozzle Body of 316 stainless steel with 1/8” tapered male pipe thread (NPT) to secure nozzle within mounting. Each nozzle to be equipped with easily removed 5-micron polypropylene or Kynar filter extending from rear of nozzle. Nozzle to be guaranteed unconditionally by fog system manufacturer for life (20-years) against orifice wear.

C. Complete fog pump units. Including:



Open frame steel base

CAT brand triplex plunger pump, brass or stainless steel head construction directly coupled to motor (no belt drives)

High-efficiency TEFC (Totally-Enclosed-Fan-Cooled), Inverter-Duty motor with thermal-overload;

Pre water filters utilize 1 micron bag (cartridge) within stainless steel filter housing to avoid UV associated problems. Inlet & outlet pressure gauges indicate pressure loss through filter indicating filter change

Low pressure cut-off switch: monitoring inlet water pressure, protect pump from run-dry operation

High pressure regulator with by-pass port, installed on discharge side of pump, adjusts outlet pressure to match desired working pressure and balancing multi-zones pump system output

High pressure gauge: stainless steel case, glycerin filled for consistent, accurate reading, 0-1500psi/100bar

High-pressure discharge flex hose, 48” long, terminating with NPT or JIC female swivels

VFD (Variable-Frequency-Drive) control, provides motor soft-start and optimum operating speed at all times, optimizes energy-efficiency, reduces audible motor noise, provides motor-overload protection, low-voltage, short circuit, phase-loss protection, pre-wired.

D. Fog nozzle manifolds & main feed lines: 1. All nozzle manifold and mainlines shall be 316 stainless steel tube (ASTM

A 269, 1/2" outside diameter, 0.049" thick, welded wall). Working pressure up to 3000 psi.

2. All fittings shall be double-ferrule type compression fittings of type 316

stainless steel tube.

3. Provide insulation for all lines where condensation could form.

4. Provide insulation and heat-tape for all lines where freezing conditions could occur.

E. Automatic controls:



1. Solenoid valves; brass construction rated for 1200 psi operating pressure and stainless steel valve plunger and seats.

2. Electrical Control Panel, including;

Enclosure, NEMA-12 or IP-54, wall-mounted, Lockable disconnect switch VFD keypad to adjust motor speed and show drive output status Operation indicators, “Ready”, “Power On”, “Run” and “Fault” Hand/Off/Auto 3-selector switch for “MANUAL” and “AUTO”

operation Cooling fan PLC based controller (18 I/O) with 24-hour/7-day clock & 80 hour back-

up battery Hour meter Pump 500 hour oil change LCD display Pump dry-run shut off if; no water supply or inlet water pressure too low

(< 15 psi) VFD fault will shut off motor if: motor overloads, phase-loss, low-

voltage or short circuit Motor thermal-protection: shuts off motor when normal operating

temperature exceeded 24v remote control for external control activation All controls utilize UL and CE marked and finger-safe components First 50-hour Run-in oil change done prior to shipping Free nozzle cleaning for 2 years 20-Year Nozzle Wear-Warranty by fog system manufacturer E-stop All circuit protections are via resettable breaker

3. Combination type magnetic motor starter with thermal over-load protection, circuit breaker and main disconnect switch, low pressure cut-off switch relay and reset switch with interface to controller, relays and on-off-auto switches for each solenoid valve with interface to controller, relay for inlet solenoid valve.

F. System by GoFog (or equal).

2.21 HEATING SYSTEM

A. General Description:

1. Design requirements a. Inside Temperature: 70 °F b. Outside Temperature: -10 °F c. Temperature Difference: 80 °F d. Wind 15 MPH



2. System design: a. Electric heating system to provide 100% of greenhouse system heating load.

B. Electric Unit Heaters:

1. Electric unit heaters shall be provided where indicated on the drawings. Heaters shall be size and type indicated on drawings. Final electrical connection by others.

2.22 HORIZONTAL AIR FLOW FANS

A. Air distribution system shall be 16" diameter horizontal air flow fans as indicated on the drawings. Assembled unit to include totally enclosed fan cooled motor, polyvinyl coated guard, aluminum 3 wind fan blade, and aluminum mounting bracket for hanging.

2.23 RETRACTABLE SHADE/HEAT RETENTION CURTAIN SYSTEM (HORIZONTAL & VERTICAL)

A. General:

1. Independently motorized Shading, Cooling and Heat Retention Curtain System(s) designed for size as shown on the drawings.

2. Curtains are to travel simultaneously from rigid frame to rigid frame and have a peaked or "roofline" profile.

3. Support lines with clear, low friction, polyester lines spaced 16” O.C. 4. Anti-billowing lines of clear polyester on 32” centers are to be used to contain curtain

fabric. 5. System to include extruded aluminum seal angles at each rigid frame location designed to

accept rubber seals and adjustable clips to secure support and anti-billowing lines to the seal angle while maintaining straight lines down the length of the greenhouse.

6. Shade/Heat retention fabric to be: Polyester & Aluminum with 50% shade factor and 57% energy savings

B. Motors and controls:

1. System(s) to be independently operated by one motor. 2. Motor is to be U.L. or CSA approved. 3. Primary and backup limit switches for each travel direction to be integrally mounted into

the motor. External limit switches are not acceptable. 4. Control panel is to be prewired for computer hookup, equipped with a manual override

switch.

C. Cable drive system:

1. Drive cable to be a 3/32” diameter 7 x 19 stainless steel. 2. Drive cables are to be of a continuous length without any splices. 3. Curtain system to be cable driven using composite drums (two drums per drive cable) and

return pulleys. No metal drums or bare drive shaft cable wrapping will be allowed. Push-Pull (rack & pinion) systems are not acceptable.



D. System hardware:

1. All rotating components, i.e. bearing brackets and pulleys are to utilize pre-greased double sealed ball bearings.

2. All hardware is to be corrosion protected by either galvanizing or plating.

E. System sealing:

1. Proper sealing of the curtain system at the rigid frames is to be accomplished using fixed fabric skirts as energy seals.

2. Fixed fabric panels are to be wrapped and stapled around a 1x7 coated cable. Upper wrapped wire of sidewall seal to be capped with a smooth plastic wire guard designed to reduce wear between the above Shade/Heat retention Curtain and the Seal Fabric. Wire guard to travel the length of the greenhouse zone.

3. All curtains are to come precut with ends serged to prevent unraveling of material.

2.24 DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Single doors shall be 1 3/4" x 3'0" x 6'8" half panel clear anodized with 5" extruded tube rails and 4" extruded aluminum tube frame with wool pile seals. Hardware shall include (1 ½ pr.) Hager 4 ½" x 4 ½" stainless steel hinges with non removable pins (1) Sargent 28-65G05-KL-26D lever handle lockset with key unlocking outside and push button locking inside, aluminum threshold and door sweep. Upper panel shall be glazed with 1/4" clear safety glazing and lower panel shall be an aluminum faced panel.

B. Horizontal rail shall be located at midpoint of door height. All rails and frame shall have a .125" minimum wall thickness

2.25 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Provide and mount an environmental controller, stand alone microprocessor based on greenhouse environmental control panel that includes the following items: complete low voltage operation (24 VAC); internal time clock; a minimum of eight programmable analog greenhouse sensor inputs; a minimum of four programmable digital override inputs; a minimum of four programmable ventilation control outputs; a minimum of four active and maintained cooling outputs; and two active and maintained heating outputs. To have up to four modes of day, (Day, Mid, Eve, Night) for all set points of the greenhouse equipment. The system shall have a minimum of two line LCD display for system operation functions and programming; and three front panel located, momentary toggle switches for complete system programming, and an internal RS-485 interface for connection to computer system. The system must have the capacity to allow remote control for all set points, differentials and data logging via remote modem connection.

B. Provide and mount an ETL, UL, CA listed greenhouse controller and a pre-wired NEMA contactor cabinet for control of heating, ventilation, and cooling systems noted on drawings. The contactor panel shall contain relays and/or magnetic contactors for control of the equipment. Control and power wiring and conduit by electrical contractor.

C. Provide indoor temperature and relative humidity sensor for each controlled zone.



D. Provide and mount an outside weather station to monitor wind direction / speed, temperature, precipitation, and solar connect to the environmental control system for vent override and heating control and weather station control panel.

E. Provide and mount an alarm dialer with two channels for four programmable phone numbers per channel. Any sensors that are wired to the Controller can be used to trigger the alarm.

F. Provide and install software program complete with custom screen settings for each controlled zone. Accessible remotely from a PC to monitor entire greenhouse operations and generates color graphs or spreadsheets of the sensor readings and equipment positions. This collected data can also be exported to other programs such as Excel. The system shall work with any version of Microsoft Windows®.

G. Greenhouse manufacturer to mount greenhouse environmental control panels on a greenhouse manufacturer provided and installed 1/8” mill finished aluminum panel. Aluminum mounting panels to be fastened directly to structural posts.

H. Operations: All aspects of the environmental control system will be programmed and operated locally from individual control panels as complete stand-alone units without the need of the main computer, including:

1. Greenhouse passive cooling: Operation of greenhouse vents by means of timed pulsing drive open, drive close. The control system must allow for incremental vent operation in no less than eight in incremental stages. Adjustable delays, differentials, and separations. Adjustable temperature ramp times.

2. Active Greenhouse Cooling: Programmable stages of maintained cooling to operate exhaust fans, exhaust fan shutter motors, fog system and other connected cooling equipment.

3. Greenhouse Heating: Programmable stages of maintained heating to operate hot water heating system. Pulsing in up to eight stages. Solar influence of set points to raise and lower temperatures automatically based on solar levels.

4. Greenhouse Shading Operations: Programmable stages of open/close based on time of day and/or temperature.

5. Greenhouse Crop Lighting: By means of solar radiation and/or time of day with adjustable delays, differentials and separations.

6. Greenhouse Alarm Functions: By means of adjustable set points for all connected sensors.

7. Data Collections Ability to collect and monitor data for each compartment individually using Microsoft Windows based software.

I. Provide pre-wired NEMA 3R Motor Control Panel (MCP) cabinet for control of required greenhouse components and systems as provided by the greenhouse manufacturer. The MCP cabinet shall:

1. Have a NEMA 3R cabinet with locking capability. 2. Have an externally, front panel, main power disconnect switch. 3. Have an internally, inside of front panel mounted vent and shade motor interface control

(reversing relays). 4. Be UL approved.



J. Provide NEMA 3R fan cooled Lighting Control Panel (LPC) cabinet. The LCP cabinet shall:

1. Have a NEMA 3R cabinet with locking capability. 2. Have a 100 amp main breaker for 480 V AC, 3-phase, 3-wire feed. 3. Have six (6), 2-pole 20 amp, remote control circuit breakers. 4. Be UL approved

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Drilling and setting of anchor bolts is to be by Greenhouse Manufacturer.

B. Install entire system and all components in strict accord with manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Greenhouse Manufacturer is responsible for all unloading of greenhouse materials, systems, equipment and to provide any lift or installation equipment required.

D. Environmental Control Installation:

1. The greenhouse environmental controls supplier shall be responsible for supplying the greenhouse environmental control panel(s), communication wire and sensor wire. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for installing the control panel(s), communication wire and sensor wire and wiring the sensors to the computerized control panels.

2. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for the final connections for the control and sensor wiring in the computerized control panels.

3. The electrical contractor shall furnish and install all associated conduits, power wiring, control wiring from the contactor panel to the control panel, and from owner provided computer to greenhouse control panel, including any/all conduit for power wiring, sensor and communication wires, low voltage control wiring, as required.

4. The electrical contractor will be responsible for the load wiring and load terminations in the contactor panel, as well as limit switch wiring to the operable vent(s) and shade/heat retention curtain systems.

3.2 DISSIMILAR MATERIALS

A. Separate aluminum from cementitious material with polyurethene or asphaltic coating.

3.3 GROUTING

A. After the Greenhouse Manufacturer has placed the wall sills, the Masonry Contractor shall provide the necessary materials and labor to grout between the wall and the sill to eliminate any discrepancies between the two and produce a finished joint, if required.



3.4 FLASHING

A. All counter-flashing shall be furnished and placed by the sheet metal contractor. Drawings establishing flashing line shall be furnished by the Greenhouse Manufacturer. All flashing and counter-flashing shall be minimum 1/16” aluminum.

3.5 INSTRUCTION

A. In addition to a minimum of (4) four site visits by Greenhouse Manufacturer project management, Greenhouse Manufacturer personnel in combination with greenhouse environmental controls personnel shall instruct owner, on site, on the use and operation of the greenhouse, including greenhouse systems and equipment.

B. Greenhouse Manufacturer shall supply the project with complete sets of Operation & Maintenance manuals both in three ring binders (4) and in CD format. Maintenance manuals shall include all equipment data and product literature including all periodic maintenance requirements.

3.6 WARRANTY

A. Greenhouse Manufacturer shall provide a one (1) year warranty on materials and workmanship from date of substantial completion. Any greenhouse warranty item within the warranty period shall be directed to and be the direct responsibility of the Greenhouse Manufacturer, including that of its material suppliers, vendors and subcontractors.


220513 Page 1 of 2

SECTION 220513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on alternating-current power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.


220513 Page 2 of 2

2.3 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Pre-lubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)



220516 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 220516 - EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Flexible-hose packless-expansion joints. 2. Alignment guides and anchors. 3. Pipe loops and swing connections.



B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each anchor and alignment guide, including analysis data, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping systems and for selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and swing connections.

2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions and methods of assembly and attachment to building structure.

3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building structure. 4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating, end

connections, and location for each expansion joint.




A. Maintenance Data: For expansion joints to include in maintenance manuals.


220516 Page 2 of 4


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe and Pressure-Vessel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping service fluids, materials, working pressures, and temperatures.

B. Capability: Products to absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between anchors.

2.2 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Flexible-Hose Packless Expansion Joints:


a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. b. Flex-Pression. c. Mason Industries, Inc.

2. Description: Manufactured assembly with inlet and outlet elbow fittings and two flexible-metal-hose legs joined by long-radius, 180-degree return bend or center section of flexible hose.

3. Flexible Hose: Corrugated-metal inner hoses and braided outer sheaths. 4. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Copper-alloy fittings with

solder-joint end connections.

a. Bronze hoses and single-braid bronze sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 340 psig at 450 deg F ratings.

5. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Copper-alloy fittings with threaded end connections.

2.3 ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS

A. Alignment Guides:






220516 Page 3 of 4


a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. b. Flexicraft Industries. c. Metraflex Company (The).

2. Description: Steel, factory-fabricated alignment guide, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for attaching to structure; with two-section guiding slider for bolting to pipe.

B. Anchor Materials:

1. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M. 2. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A183, steel hex head. 3. Washers: ASTM F844, steel, plain, flat washers. 4. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in

hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.

a. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel. b. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel. c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

5. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type stud, bonding-system anchor for use with hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.

a. Bonding Material: ASTM C881/C881M, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be installed.

b. Stud: ASTM A307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud, unless otherwise indicated.

c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION

A. Install expansion joints of sizes matching sizes of piping in which they are installed.

3.2 PIPE LOOP AND SWING CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install pipe loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.






220516 Page 4 of 4

B. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings, including tee in main.

C. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings, including tee in riser.

D. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings, including tee in main.

3.3 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A. Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.

B. Install one guide(s) on each side of pipe expansion fittings and loops. Install guides nearest to expansion joint not more than four pipe diameters from expansion joint.

C. Attach guides to pipe, and secure guides to building structure.

D. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

E. Anchor Attachments:

1. Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69, Type 24; U bolts bolted to anchor.

F. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding. 2. Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners. Follow

fastener manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete.



220517 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 220517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Grout. 4. Silicone sealants.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop collar.

B. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, anticorrosion coated or galvanized, with plain ends and integral welded waterstop collar.

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.


220517 Page 2 of 4

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description:

1. Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve.

2. Designed to form a hydrostatic seal of 20 psig minimum. 3. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include

type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 4. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. 5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements.

2.3 GROUT

A. Description: Non-shrink, for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.4 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, non-sag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant, ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

B. Silicone, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT. Grade P Pourable (self-leveling) formulation is for opening in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.

C. Silicone Foam: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, non-shrinking foam.


220517 Page 3 of 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.

2. Using grout or silicone sealant, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.


220517 Page 4 of 4

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Use grout or silicone sealant to seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.



1. Leak Test: After allowing for a full cure, test sleeves and sleeve seals for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

B. Sleeves and sleeve seals will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Steel pipe sleeves.

2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Steel pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:


4. Concrete Slabs above Grade:


5. Interior Partitions:




220518 Page 1 of 2

SECTION 220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons. 2. Floor plates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Existing Piping to Remain: Existing piping that is not to be removed and that is not otherwise indicated to be removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Stainless-Steel Type: With polished stainless-steel finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

D. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish; concealed and exposed-rivet hinge; and spring-clip fasteners.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. Split Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.


220518 Page 2 of 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep pattern. b. Insulated Piping: One-piece cast brass with polished, chrome-plated finish. c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece cast

brass with polished, chrome-plated finish. d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece cast brass with

polished, chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece cast brass with polished,

chrome-plated finish. f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece cast brass with polished, chrome-

plated finish.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. New Piping: One-piece, floor plate.


A. Using new materials, replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates.



220519 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Liquid-in-glass thermometers. 2. Dial-type pressure gages. 3. Gage attachments. 4. Test plugs.


1. Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for water meters.




A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Compact-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

1. Standard: ASME B40.200.


220519 Page 2 of 4

2. Case: Cast aluminum; 6-inch nominal size. 3. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated. 4. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid. 5. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings

graduated in deg F. 6. Window: Glass or plastic. 7. Stem: Aluminum or brass and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

8. Connector: 3/4 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 9. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum

of 1.5 percent of scale range.

2.2 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:

1. Standard: ASME B40.100. 2. Case: Open-front, pressure relief type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch

nominal diameter. 3. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 4. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and

bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 5. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 6. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi. 7. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 8. Window: Glass. 9. Ring: Stainless steel. 10. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.

2.3 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Valves: Brass ball, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.4 TEST PLUGS

A. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

B. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.

C. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.


220519 Page 3 of 4

D. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.

E. Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self-sealing rubber.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

B. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.

C. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position.

D. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.

E. Install test plugs in piping tees.

F. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater. 2. Inlet of hat water circulation pumps 3. Each port of master thermostatic mixing valves.

G. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Building water service entrance into building. 2. Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve. 3. Suction and discharge of each domestic water pump.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be one of the following:


220519 Page 4 of 4

1. Metal case, compact-style, liquid-in-glass type. 2. Test plug with EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts.

B. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F.

3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at discharge of each water service into building shall be the following:

1. Open-front, pressure-relief, direct-mounted, metal case. 2. Test plug with EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts.

3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 100 psi.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi.



220523.12 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 220523.12 - BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze ball valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve.

1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61and NSF 372.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, and soldered ends. 3. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher-than-ambient-dew-point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use operating handles or stems as lifting or rigging points.


220523.12 Page 2 of 5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves. 2. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves. 3. ASME B16.5 for flanges on steel valves. 4. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 5. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections. 6. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable-water service.

D. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.

E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

G. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 4 and larger. 2. Hand lever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 4.

H. Valves in Insulated Piping:

1. Include 2-inch stem extensions. 2. Extended operating handles of nonthermal-conductive material and protective sleeves

that allow operation of valves without breaking vapor seals or disturbing insulation. 3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.

2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Bronze Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port, and Bronze or Brass Trim, Threaded or Soldered Ends:




220523.12 Page 3 of 5

a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO INC. d. WATTS.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110 or MSS-145. b. CWP Rating: 600 psig. c. Body Design: Two piece. d. Body Material: Bronze. e. Ends: Threaded and soldered. f. Seats: PTFE. g. Stem: Bronze or brass. h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. i. Port: Full.

B. Bronze Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port, and Bronze or Brass Trim, Press Ends:


a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO INC. d. WATTS.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110 or MSS-145. b. CWP Rating: Minimum 200 psig. c. Body Design: Two piece. d. Body Material: Bronze. e. Ends: Press. f. Press Ends Connections Rating: Minimum 200 psig. g. Seats: PTFE or RTPFE. h. Stem: Bronze or brass. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full. k. O-Ring Seal: EPDM or Buna-N.











220523.12 Page 4 of 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.

3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted.

B. Select valves with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option or press-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.


220523.12 Page 5 of 5

3.4 DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Bronze ball valves, two-piece with full port and bronze or brass trim. Provide with solder or press connection-joint ends.



220523.14 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 220523.14 - CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze swing check valves. 2. Bronze swing check valves, press ends. 3. Iron swing check valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.



1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372.



1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set check valves in either closed or open position.


1. Maintain valve end protection.


220523.14 Page 2 of 6

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher-than-ambient-dew-point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves. 2. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves. 3. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 4. ASME B16.18 for solder joint. 5. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. AWWA Compliance: Comply with AWWA C606 for grooved-end connections.

D. Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects and Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372.

E. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.

F. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

G. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

H. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE LIFT CHECK VALVES

A. Bronze Lift Check Valves with Bronze Disc, Class 125:


a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company.





220523.14 Page 3 of 6

c. NIBCO INC. 2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Vertical flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B61 or ASTM B62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded or soldered. See valve schedule articles. f. Disc: Bronze.

B. Bronze Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc, Class 125:


a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Vertical flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B61 or ASTM B62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded or soldered. See valve schedule articles. f. Disc: NBR, PTFE.

2.3 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc, Class 125:



2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded or soldered. See valve schedule articles. f. Disc: Bronze.











220523.14 Page 4 of 6

B. Bronze Swing Check Valves, Press Ends:



2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80 and MSS SP-139. b. CWP Rating: Minimum 200 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B584, bronze. e. Ends: Press. f. Press Ends Connection Rating: Minimum 200 psig g. Disc: Brass or bronze.

2.4 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats, Class 125:



2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. d. Body Material: ASTM A126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged or threaded. See valve schedule articles. f. Trim: Bronze. g. Gasket: Asbestos free.










220523.14 Page 5 of 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION











E. Check Valves: Install check valves for proper direction of flow.

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

F. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.


A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:


220523.14 Page 6 of 6

1. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc. b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger for Domestic Water: Iron swing check valves with lever and

weight or spring; or iron, center-guided, metal-seat or resilient-seat check valves. c. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger for Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage: Iron swing check

valves with lever and weight or spring.

B. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. End Connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded or soldered or press-ends. 2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged or threaded. 3. For Grooved-End Copper Tubing: Grooved.



1. Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc, Class 125, with soldered or threaded end connections.

2. Bronze swing check valves with press-end connections.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

1. Iron swing check valves with metal seats, Class 125, with threaded or flanged end connections.



220523.15 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 220523.15 - GATE VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze gate valves. 2. Iron gate valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. NRS: Non-rising stem.

C. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

D. RS: Rising stem.



1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372.



1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set gate valves closed to prevent rattling.


1. Maintain valve end protection.


220523.15 Page 2 of 5

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher-than-ambient-dew-point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves. 2. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves. 3. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 4. ASME B16.18 for solder joint. 5. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 and NSP 372 for valve materials for potable-water service.

D. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.

E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

G. RS Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions.

H. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. Bronze Gate Valves, NRS, Class 125:








220523.15 Page 3 of 5

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: Bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.

B. Bronze Gate Valves, Press Ends:



2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80 and MSS SP-139. b. CWP Rating: Minimum 200 psig. c. Body Material: Bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet. d. Ends: Press. e. Press Ends Connection Rating: Minimum 200 psig. f. Stem: Brass or bronze non-rising. g. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. h. Packing: Graphite. i. Port: Full. j. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.

2.3 IRON GATE VALVES

A. Iron Gate Valves, OS&Y, Class 125:



2. Description:










220523.15 Page 4 of 5

a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: Gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge. g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION











E. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.


220523.15 Page 5 of 5


A. Use gate valves for shutoff service only.

B. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted.



1. Bronze gate valves, NRS, Class 125 with soldered ends. 2. Bronze gate valves, press ends.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron gate valves, OS&Y, Class 125 with flanged ends.



220529 Page 1 of 8

SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Thermal hanger-shield inserts. 4. Fastener systems.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Section 220516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping" for pipe guides and anchors.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Metal framing systems. 3. Fiberglass strut systems. 4. Pipe stands. 5. Equipment supports.




220529 Page 2 of 8


A. Structural-Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to 2015 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

2.2 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized, hot dip galvanized, or electro-galvanized. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coated or epoxy powder coated. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made from structural-carbon-steel shapes, with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.4 THERMAL HANGER-SHIELD INSERTS

A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C533, Type I calcium silicate with 100-psig minimum compressive strength.

C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.


220529 Page 3 of 8

E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

1. Indoor Applications: Zinc-coated steel.

2.6 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: ASTM B221.

B. Carbon Steel: ASTM A1011/A1011M.

C. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, non-shrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials and installation, for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components, so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.


220529 Page 4 of 8

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller-diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A36/A36M carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Thermal Hanger-Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

D. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete, after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete, after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

F. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

G. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports, so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

I. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

J. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating Above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating Below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal hanger-shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.


220529 Page 5 of 8

a. Option: Thermal hanger-shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal hanger-shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.

5. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install with insulation of same thickness as piping insulation.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded, shop-painted areas. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as those used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded, shop-painted areas on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-58 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finishes.


220529 Page 6 of 8

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.

F. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

G. Use thermal hanger-shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

H. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.

3. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

4. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

I. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

J. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment of up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11 split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

K. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable-Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.


220529 Page 7 of 8

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel. 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

L. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal Hanger-Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

M. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-

1/4 inches. 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with

springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load, and limit variability

factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load, and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.


220529 Page 8 of 8

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load, and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary, to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical type supports and one trapeze member.

N. Comply with MSS SP-58 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

O. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

P. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.

Q. Use pipe-positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.



220553 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Pipe labels. 3. Valve tags.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16-inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: Black. 3. Background Color: Yellow. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.


220553 Page 2 of 5

5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number or Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Pre-coiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping.

2.3 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain or beaded chain or S-hook.


220553 Page 3 of 5

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. Valve tag schedule shall be mounted on wall in a plastic covered, frame in the mechanical equipment room.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

B. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.


220553 Page 4 of 5

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.

D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Domestic Water Piping

a. Background: Safety green. b. Letter Colors: White.

2. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:

a. Background Color: Safety black. b. Letter Color: White.

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose connections, and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches, round. b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.

2. Valve-Tag Colors:

a. Cold Water: Natural. b. Hot Water: Natural.

3. Letter Colors:

a. Cold Water: White. b. Hot Water: White.


220553 Page 5 of 5



220719 Page 1 of 15

SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:

1. Domestic cold-water piping. 2. Domestic hot-water piping. 3. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any).

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each

type of insulation. 5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access

panels. 6. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.


220719 Page 2 of 15

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM E84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.

C. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components:

1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.


220719 Page 3 of 15

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come into contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable in accordance with ASTM C795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C547.


a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Knauf Insulation. c. Manson Insulation Inc.

2. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type I, Grade A with factory applied ASJ. 3. 850 deg F. 4. Factory fabricate shapes in accordance with ASTM C450 and ASTM C585. 5. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C195.

B. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C449.






220719 Page 4 of 15

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

C. ASJ Adhesive and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A, for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

D. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

2.4 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Adhesives shall comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.

2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. Materials shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

B. Joint Sealants:

1. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 58 to plus 176 deg F. 3. Color: White or gray.

C. ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 3. Color: White.

2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.


220719 Page 5 of 15

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type II.

2.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C1136, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.

C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 2. Color: White. 3. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

2.8 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C1136.

1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

1. Width: 2 inches. 2. Thickness: 6 mils. 3. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 500 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.


220719 Page 6 of 15

2.9 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015-inch-thick, 3/4-inch-

wide with wing seal or closed seal. 2. Aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020-inch-

thick, 3/4-inch-wide with wing seal or closed seal.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.

C. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.

2.10 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:

1. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.

B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures:

1. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:


220719 Page 7 of 15

1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range of between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature of between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

C. Coordinate insulation installation with the tradesman installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless steel surfaces, use demineralized water.


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and of thicknesses required for each item of pipe system, as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace insulation materials that get wet.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation and vapor barrier continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends attached to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.


220719 Page 8 of 15

3. Install insert materials and insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward-clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward-clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, in accordance with insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 25 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches in similar fashion to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.


220719 Page 9 of 15

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials, except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, Mechanical Couplings, and Unions:


220719 Page 10 of 15

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, mechanical couplings, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as that of adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers, so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges, mechanical couplings, and unions, using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union" matching size and color of pipe labels.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket, except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing, using PVC tape.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:


220719 Page 11 of 15

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as that of adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union at least 2 times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as recommended by insulation material manufacturer, and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available.


220719 Page 12 of 15

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch-thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at

end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-barrier mastic.

C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.


220719 Page 13 of 15

3.8 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.


A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

D. Perform tests and inspections.

E. Tests and Inspections: Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

F. All insulation applications will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,


220719 Page 14 of 15

selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. All piping insulation in the section shall comply with the latest adopted standards for the IECC of NYS.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.11 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Cold Water:

1. All Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:

1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

2. NPS 1-1/2 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1-1/2 inches thick.

3.12 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Piping, Concealed:

1. PVC: 20 mils thick.

D. Piping, Exposed:


3.13 UNDERGROUND, FIELD-APPLIED INSULATION JACKET

A. For underground direct-buried piping applications, install underground direct-buried jacket over insulation material.


220719 Page 15 of 15



22080 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 220800 - COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Commissioning on this project shall be in compliance with the commissioning requirements of C408 Maintenance Information and System Commissioning of the 2020 Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State (ECCCNYS).

1.3 SUMMARY

A. Section includes Cx process requirements for the following plumbing systems, assemblies, and equipment:

1. Domestic hot- and cold-water piping. 2. Service water heating equipment.


1. Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" for general Cx process requirements and CxA responsibilities.

2. For construction checklists, comply with requirements in various Division 22 Sections specifying plumbing systems, system components, equipment, and products.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Cx: Commissioning, as defined in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements."

B. CxA: Commissioning Authority, as defined in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements."

C. IAPMO: International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials.

D. "Systems," "Assemblies," "Subsystems," "Equipment," and "Components": Where these terms are used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and components.


22080 Page 2 of 5


A. Qualification Data: For plumbing testing technician.

B. Construction Checklists:

1. Draft Cx plan, including draft construction checklists to be prepared by CxA under Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements." Contractor is to review Construction Checklist in accordance with requirements in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" and ASHRAE 202 and to resolve any issues with the CxA.

2. Cx plan, including material, installation, and performance construction checklists for systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and components relating to plumbing to be part of the Cx process and in accordance with requirements in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements and ASHRAE 202.

C. Test Equipment and Instruments: For all test equipment and instruments to be used in conducting Cx tests by Contractor, provide the following:

1. Equipment/instrument identification number. 2. Planned Cx application or use. 3. Manufacturer, make, model, and serial number. 4. Calibration history, including certificates from agencies that calibrate the equipment and

instrumentation. 5. Equipment manufacturers' proprietary instrumentation and tools. For each instrument or

tool, identify the following:

a. Instrument or tool identification number. b. Equipment schedule designation of equipment for which the instrument or tool is

required. c. Manufacturer, make, model, and serial number. d. Calibration history, including certificates from agencies that calibrate the

instrument or tool, where appropriate.


A. Plumbing Testing Technician Qualifications: Technicians to perform plumbing Construction Checklist verification tests. Construction Checklist verification test demonstrations, Cx tests, and Cx test demonstrations shall have the following minimum qualifications:

1. Journey level or equivalent skill level with knowledge of plumbing system, electrical concepts, and building operations.

2. Minimum three years experience installing, servicing, and operating systems manufactured by approved manufacturer.

B. Testing Equipment and Instrumentation Quality and Calibration:

1. Capable of testing and measuring performance within the specified acceptance criteria. 2. Be calibrated at manufacturer's recommended intervals with current calibration tags

permanently affixed to the instrument being used.


22080 Page 3 of 5

3. Be maintained in good repair and operating condition throughout duration of use on Project.

4. Be recalibrated/repaired if dropped or damaged in any way since last calibrated.

C. Proprietary Test Instrumentation and Tools:

1. Equipment Manufacturer's Proprietary Instrumentation and Tools: For installed equipment included in the Cx process, test instrumentation and tools manufactured or prescribed by equipment manufacturer to service, calibrate, adjust, repair, or otherwise work on its equipment or required as a condition of equipment warranty, shall comply with the following:

a. Be calibrated by manufacturer with current calibration tags permanently affixed. b. Include a separate list of proprietary test instrumentation and tools in operation and

maintenance manuals. c. Plumbing system proprietary test instrumentation and tools become property of

Owner at the time of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Cx PROCESS

A. Perform Cx process in accordance with Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" for BAS and HVAC and in accordance with C408 Maintenance Information and System Commissioning of the 2020 Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State (ECCCNYS).

3.2 CONSTRUCTION CHECKLISTS

A. Preliminary detailed construction checklists are to be prepared under Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" for each plumbing system, assembly, subsystem, equipment, and component required to be commissioned, as detailed in ASHRAE 202. Contractor performs the following:

1. Review plumbing preliminary construction checklists and provide written comments on Construction Checklist items where appropriate.

2. Return preliminary Construction Checklist with review comments within 10 days of receipt.

3. When review comments have been resolved, the CxA will provide final construction checklists marked "Approved for Use, (date)."

4. Use only construction checklists marked "Approved for Use, (date)." Mark construction checklists in the appropriate place, as indicated Project events are completed, and provide pertinent details and other information.


22080 Page 4 of 5

3.3 Cx TESTING PREPARATION

A. Certify that plumbing systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and that they are operating in accordance with the Contract Documents and approved submittals.

B. Certify that plumbing system instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated, point-to-point checkout has been successfully completed, and systems are operating in accordance with their design sequence of operation, Contract Documents, and approved submittals. Certify that all sensors are operating within specified accuracy and that all systems are set to and maintaining set points as required by the design documents.

C. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested in accordance with approved test procedures (for example, normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions).

3.4 Cx TEST CONDITIONS

A. Perform tests using design conditions, whenever possible.

1. Simulated conditions may, with approval of Architect, be imposed using an artificial load when it is impractical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by CxA, and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return configurations and settings to normal operating conditions.

2. Cx test procedures may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is impractical.

3. Cx test procedures may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are impractical.

B. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the plumbing system, document the deficiency and report it to Architect. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests.

C. If seasonal testing is specified, complete appropriate initial performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests.

3.5 Cx TESTS COMMON TO PLUMBING SYSTEMS

A. Measure capacities and effectiveness of systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and components, including operational and control functions, to verify compliance with acceptance criteria.

B. Test systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and components for operating modes, interlocks, control responses, responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and response compared to acceptance criteria.

C. Coordinate schedule with, and perform Cx activities at the direction of, CxA.


22080 Page 5 of 5

D. Comply with Construction Checklist requirements, including material verification, installation checks, startup, and performance test requirements specified in Division 22 Sections specifying plumbing systems and equipment.

E. Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to perform and document the following:

1. Cx Construction Checklist verification tests. 2. Cx Construction Checklist verification test demonstrations.



221116 Page 1 of 10

SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Copper tube and fittings. 2. Ductile-iron pipe and fittings. 3. Piping joining materials. 4. Encasement for piping. 5. Transition fittings. 6. Dielectric fittings.


A. Product Data:

1. Pipe and tube. 2. Fittings. 3. Joining materials. 4. Transition fittings.


A. Coordination Drawings: Piping layout, or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items described in this Section, and coordinated with all building trades.

B. System purging and disinfecting activities report.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14, NSF 61, and NSF 372.


221116 Page 2 of 10

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type L.

B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type K.

C. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, pressure fittings.

E. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

F. Cast Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.

G. Wrought Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

H. Copper Tube, Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:


a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. NIBCO INC. c. Viega LLC.

2. Fittings: Cast-brass, cast-bronze, or wrought-copper with EPDM O-ring seal in each end. 3. Minimum 200-psig working-pressure rating at 250 deg F.

2.3 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe:

1. AWWA C151/A21.51, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

B. Compact-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings:

1. AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile iron. 2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber

gaskets, and steel bolts.

2.4 PIPING JOINING ATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:






221116 Page 3 of 10

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.

2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B32, lead-free alloys.

D. Flux: ASTM B813, water flushable.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8M/A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements:

1. Same size as pipes to be joined. 2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined. 3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.

2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:

1. Standard: ASSE 1079. 2. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:

1. Standard: ASSE 1079. 2. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. 3. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint

copper alloy and threaded ferrous.


221116 Page 4 of 10

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing.

D. Under-building-slab or underground, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 8 and larger, shall be the following:

1. Mechanical-joint, ductile-iron pipe; standard- or compact-pattern, mechanical-joint fittings; and mechanical joints. Provide mechanical joint restraints.

E. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Drawn-temper copper tube, ASTM B88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.

2. Drawn-temper copper tube, ASTM B88, Type L; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints.

F. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following:

1. Drawn-temper copper tube, ASTM B88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.

2. Drawn-temper copper tube, ASTM B88, Type L; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints.

3. Drawn-temper copper tube, ASTM B88, Type L; grooved-joint, copper-tube appurtenances; and grooved joints.

3.2 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."


221116 Page 5 of 10

C. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

D. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports.

E. Install valves according to the following:

1. Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping." 2. Section 220523.14 "Check Valves for Plumbing Piping." 3. Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

F. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements for pressure-reducing valves in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

G. Install domestic water piping level and plumb.

H. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.

I. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

J. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

K. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

L. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

M. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

N. Install piping free of sags and bends.

O. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

P. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

Q. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements for thermostats in Section 221123.21 "Inline, Domestic Water Pumps."

R. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements for thermometers in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."


221116 Page 6 of 10

S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

D. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

E. Pressure-Sealed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools and procedure recommended by pressure-seal-fitting manufacturer. Leave insertion marks on pipe after assembly.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:

1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling. 2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.


221116 Page 7 of 10

3.6 INSTALLATION OF DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements for hangers, supports, and anchor devices in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Install hangers for copper and ductile iron piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

C. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting.

D. Support vertical runs of copper and ductile iron piping to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:

1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than that required by plumbing code. 3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than

equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


221116 Page 8 of 10

3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide hot-water flow in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use. 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.



1. Piping Inspections:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Piping Tests:

a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.


221116 Page 9 of 10

b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for two hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

e. Hydrostatic testing and documentation of test results for polypropylene piping to be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and submitted to the manufacturer upon successful completion per warranty requirements.

f. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

g. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.12 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.


221116 Page 10 of 10

2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are not prescribed, follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.



22119 Page 1 of 11

SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Vacuum breakers. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Balancing valves. 4. Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves. 5. Strainers for domestic water piping. 6. Hose bibbs. 7. Wall hydrants. 8. Drain valves. 9. Water-hammer arresters. 10. Trap-seal primer device. 11. Trap-seal primer systems. 12. Flexible connectors.


1. Section 220519 "Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers, pressure gauges, and flow meters in domestic water piping.

2. Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AMI: Advanced Metering Infrastructure.

B. AMR: Automatic Meter Reading.

C. FKM: A family of fluroelastomer materials defined by ASTM D1418.




22119 Page 2 of 11

B. Shop Drawings: For domestic water piping specialties.

1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Test and inspection reports.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Domestic water piping specialties intended to convey or dispense water for human consumption are to comply with the SDWA, requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and NSF 61 and NSF 372, or to be certified in compliance with NSF 61 and NSF 372 by an American National Standards Institute (ANSI)-accredited third-party certification body that the weighted average lead content at wetted surfaces is less than or equal to 0.25 percent.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:


a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. WATTS. c. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASSE 1001. 3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping.






22119 Page 3 of 11

4. Body: Bronze. 5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded. 6. Finish: Chrome plated.

2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Apollo Valves; a part of Aalberts Integrated Piping Systems. b. WATTS. c. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASSE 1013. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range. 5. Size: ¾” 6. Body: Bronze. 7. End Connections: Threaded 8. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow. 9. Accessories:

a. Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet. b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.

B. Backflow-Preventer Test Kits:


a. Apollo Valves; a part of Aalberts Integrated Piping Systems. b. WATTS. c. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Description: Factory calibrated, with gauges, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test-procedure instructions.

2.5 BALANCING VALVES

A. Copper-Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves:












22119 Page 4 of 11

a. Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand. b. NIBCO INC. c. WATTS.

2. Type: Y-pattern globe valve with two readout ports and memory-setting indicator. 3. Body: bronze. 4. Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2. 5. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.

B. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves:



2. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves. 3. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP. 4. Size: NPS 2 or smaller. 5. Body: Copper alloy. 6. Port: Standard or full port. 7. Ball: Chrome-plated brass or stainless steel. 8. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 9. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded. 10. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device.

2.6 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED, WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Water-Temperature Limiting Devices:


a. Acorn Engineering Company; a Division of Morris Group International. b. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. POWERS; A WATTS Brand.

2. Standard: ASSE 1070. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 4. Type: Thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve. 5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 6. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet. 7. Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable, temperature-

control handle. 8. Valve Finish: Chrome plated.













22119 Page 5 of 11

B. Primary, Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves:


a. Acorn Engineering Company; a Division of Morris Group International. b. Leonard Valve Company. c. POWERS; A WATTS Brand.

2. Standard: ASSE 1017. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 4. Type: Cabinet-type, thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve. 5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 6. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet. 7. Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies,

and adjustable, temperature-control handle. 8. Valve Finish: Rough bronze. 9. Piping Finish: Copper.

C. Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves:


a. Acorn Engineering Company; a Division of Morris Group International. b. POWERS; A WATTS Brand. c. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASSE 1016, thermostatically controlled, water tempering valve. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 4. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 5. Temperature Control: Adjustable. 6. Connections: Threaded inlets and outlet. 7. Finish: Chrome plated.

2.7 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with

AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, epoxy coated and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated. 5. Perforation Size:










22119 Page 6 of 11

a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.033 inch. b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: 0.062 inch.

6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.

2.8 HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose Bibbs: HB-1:


a. Jay R. Smith Mfg Co; a division of Morris Group International. b. WATTS. c. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets. 3. Body Material: Bronze. 4. Seat: Bronze, replaceable. 5. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet. 6. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 7. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 8. Vacuum Breaker: Integral nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker

complying with ASSE 1011. 9. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated. 10. Finish for Service Areas: Chrome or nickel plated. 11. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated. 12. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key. 13. Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle. 14. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key. 15. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb. 16. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.

2.9 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Non-freeze Wall Hydrants: NFWH-1:



2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for exposed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants.










22119 Page 7 of 11

3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 4. Operation: Loose key. 5. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall

clamp. 6. Inlet: NPS 3/4. 7. Outlet, Concealed: With integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7. 8. Box: Deep, flush mounted with cover. 9. Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze. 10. Outlet, Exposed: With integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7. 11. Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: Polished nickel bronze. 12. Operating Keys(s): One with each wall hydrant.

2.10 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4. 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7

and cap with brass chain.

2.11 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water-Hammer Arresters:


a. AMTROL, Inc. b. WATTS. c. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201. 3. Type: Piston. 4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.






22119 Page 8 of 11

2.12 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER DEVICE

A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device:

1. Standard: ASSE 1018. 2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum. 3. Body: Bronze. 4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint. 5. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint. 6. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not

chrome finished.

2.13 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Stainless Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless steel tubing with stainless steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig. 2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple. 3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Backflow Preventers: Install in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap

fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe-to-floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are unacceptable for this application.

3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

B. Balancing Valves: Install in locations where they can easily be adjusted. Set at indicated design flow rates.

C. Temperature-Actuated, Water Mixing Valves: Install with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.

1. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.

D. Y-Pattern Strainers: For water, install on supply side of each control valve and pump.


22119 Page 9 of 11

E. Outlet Boxes: Install boxes recessed in wall or surface mounted on wall. Install 1-1/2-by-3-1/2-inch fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking, wall reinforcement between studs. Comply with requirements for fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."

F. Hose Stations: Install with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with thermometer on outlet.

1. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified. Install 1-1/2-by-3-1/2-inch fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking, wall reinforcement between studs. Comply with requirements for fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."

G. Water-Hammer Arresters: Install in water piping in accordance with PDI-WH 201.

H. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device: Install with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.

I. Drainage-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device: Install as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting.

J. Trap-Seal Primer Systems: Install with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust system for proper flow.

3.2 PIPING CONNECTIONS


B. When installing piping specialties adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance.

3.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Connect wiring in accordance with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Ground equipment in accordance with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, in accordance with NFPA 70 and NECA 1.


22119 Page 10 of 11

3.4 CONTROL CONNECTIONS

A. Connect control wiring in accordance with Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:

1. Vacuum breakers. 2. Backflow preventers 3. Balancing valves. 4. Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves. 5. Hose stations. 6. Wall hydrants. 7. Trap-seal primer device. 8. Trap-seal primer systems.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.

D. Adjust each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections. 1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer according to authorities having

jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.


22119 Page 11 of 11

2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm unit operation.

4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.



221123.21 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 221123.21 - INLINE, DOMESTIC-WATER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. High efficiency, large, wet rotor pumps with electrically commutated, permanent magnet motor.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction materials, rated capacities, certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.


A. Coordination Drawings: Detail pumps and adjacent equipment. Show support locations, type of support, weight on each support, required clearances, and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Structural members to which pumps will be attached. 2. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For inline, domestic-water pumps to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.


221123.21 Page 2 of 6

B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written instructions for handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. UL Compliance: UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.

C. Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects and Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372.

2.2 HIGH EFFICIENCY, LARGE, WET ROTOR PUMPS WITH ELECTRICALLY COMMUTATED, PERMANENT MAGNET MOTOR

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, close-coupled, canned-motor, sealless, overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Bell & Gossett 2. Grundfos Pumps Corp. 3. TACO Comfort Solutions, Inc.

C. Capacities and Characteristics: See drawings

D. Pump Construction:

1. Casing:

a. The pump body shall utilize lead-free bronze or stainless-steel construction. b. Built to permit servicing of pump internals without disturbing the casing or the

suction and discharge piping.

2. End Connections: Flanged. 3. Minimum Working Pressure: 175 psig. 4. Maximum Continuous Operating Temperature: 220 deg F. 5. Impeller: Lead-free bronze or stainless steel. 6. Motor: Synchronous, permanent-magnet motor, electronically controlled by an integrated

variable frequency drive





221123.21 Page 3 of 6

2.3 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 220513 "Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2.4 CONTROLS

A. Type: Integrated and pre-programmed controls to be included as an integral part of the pump.

B. Features:

1. Digital readout and operator interface. 2. Integrated differential pressure and temperature sensors. 3. Integrated motor protection to protect the pump against over/under voltage, over

temperature of motor and/or electronics, over current, locked rotor and dry run (no load condition).

4. MODBUS or BACnet connectivity. 5. Operating modes:

a. Proportional Pressure. b. Constant Pressure. c. Constant Speed. d. Night Set Back e. Constant Temperature.

6. Settings: Start pump at 105 deg F and stop pump at 110 deg F.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before pump installation.

3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.

B. Mount pumps in orientation complying with manufacturer's written instructions.


221123.21 Page 4 of 6

C. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and vibration isolation of size required to support pump weight.

1. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

D. Install pressure switches in water-supply piping.

E. Install thermostats in hot-water return piping.


A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to inline, domestic-water pumps, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic-water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than size of pump nozzles.

1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in suction and discharge piping of the following pumps:

a. Horizontally mounted, in-line, separately coupled centrifugal pumps. b. Horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps. c. Vertically mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps. d. Comply with requirements for flexible connectors specified in Section 221116

"Domestic Water Piping."

D. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of each pump, and check, shutoff, and throttling valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves same size as connected piping. Comply with requirements for strainers specified in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." Comply with requirements for valves specified in the following:

1. Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping." 2. Section 220523.14 "Check Valves for Plumbing Piping." 3. Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping." 4. Install pressure gauge and snubber at suction of each pump and pressure gauge and

snubber at discharge of each pump. Install at integral pressure-gauge tappings where provided or install pressure-gauge connectors in suction and discharge piping around pumps. Comply with requirements for pressure gauges and snubbers specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."


A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices.


221123.21 Page 5 of 6

B. Connect control wiring between temperature controllers and devices.

C. Interlock pump between water heater and hot-water storage tank with water heater burner and time-delay relay.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification of pumps.



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

D. Tests and Inspections:


2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.


E. Inline, domestic-water pump will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Check piping connections for tightness. 3. Clean strainers on suction piping. 4. Set controls for automatic starting and stopping operation of pumps. 5. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication.


221123.21 Page 6 of 6

b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.

6. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains and prepare pump for operation.

7. Start motor. 8. Open discharge valve slowly. 9. Adjust temperature settings on thermostats. 10. Adjust timer settings.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust inline, domestic-water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust initial temperature set points.

C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.



221316 Page 1 of 10

SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Copper tube and fittings.

2. PVC pipe and fittings.



B. Shop Drawings: For hubless, single-stack drainage system. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For waste and vent piping, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Detailed description of piping anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.



A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Waste Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sanitary waste service.


221316 Page 2 of 10

2. Do not proceed with interruption of sanitary waste service without Owner's written permission.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Listed manufacturers to provide labeling and warranty of their respective products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Cambridge-Lee Industries, LLC. 2. Mueller Industries, Inc. 3. Wieland Copper Products, LLC.

B. Copper Type DWV Tube: ASTM B306, drainage tube, drawn temper.

C. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper, solder-joint fittings.

D. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type L and Type M, water tube, drawn temper.

E. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type L, water tube, annealed temper.

F. Copper Pressure Fittings: 1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper,

solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket,

metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.






221316 Page 3 of 10

G. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder-joint end. 1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full-face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos-free, 1/8-

inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. 2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 Solder: ASTM B32, lead free with ASTM B813, water-flushable flux

2.5 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

B. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

C. Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40.

D. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

E. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.

F. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

2.6 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Dielectric Fittings:

1. Dielectric Unions:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1) WATTS. 2) Wilkins. 3) Zurn Industries, LLC.

b. Description:

1) Standard: ASSE 1079. 2) Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. 3) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.






221316 Page 4 of 10

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems.

1. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations.

2. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends.

1. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical.

2. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drainpipe.

a. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines.

3. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees.


221316 Page 5 of 10

4. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected.

a. Reducing size of waste piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

K. Lay buried building waste piping beginning at low point of each system.

1. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream.

2. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

3. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

L. Install soil and waste and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Waste: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Waste Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

M. Install aboveground copper tubing in accordance with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

N. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665.

O. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.

P. Install engineered soil and waste and vent piping systems as follows:

1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Hubless, Single-Stack Drainage System: Comply with ASME B16.45 and hubless,

single-stack aerator fitting manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.

Q. Install force mains at elevations indicated.

R. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install backwater valves in sanitary waster gravity-flow piping.

a. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping.

a. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary drainage force-main piping.


221316 Page 6 of 10

b. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

3. Install drains in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping.

a. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

S. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

1. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.

1. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

1. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."


A. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints in accordance with ASTM B828. Use ASTM B813, water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B32, lead-free-alloy solder.

B. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safehandling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 appendixes. 3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 appendixes.

3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in ODs. 2. In Waste Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. 3. In Aboveground Force Main Piping: Fitting-type transition couplings. 4. In Underground Force Main Piping:


221316 Page 7 of 10

a. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type transition couplings. b. NPS 2 and Larger: Pressure transition couplings.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. 2. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions. 3. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges. 4. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Install hangers for PVC piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters, to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

C. Support vertical runs of PVC piping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

3.6 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect waste and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect waste piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect waste and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.


221316 Page 8 of 10

4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor.

5. Comply with requirements for cleanouts and drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

6. Equipment: Connect waste piping as indicated.

a. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection. b. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment.

E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping.

B. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary waste and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired.


221316 Page 9 of 10

a. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced waste and vent piping until it has been tested and approved.

a. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test waste and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in.

a. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water.

b. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop.

c. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight.

a. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg.

b. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. c. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout

period of inspection. d. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.


A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect sanitary waste and vent piping during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

D. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint.

E. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by waste and vent piping installation.


221316 Page 10 of 10

3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping of any size shall be the following:

1. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

C. Aboveground, vent piping of any size, not located in a return air plenum, shall be the following:

1. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

D. Aboveground, vent piping of any size, located inside of a return air plenum, shall be the following:

1. Copper Type DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.

E. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping of any size shall be the following:

1. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.



221319 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cleanouts. 2. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.


1. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof flashing assemblies. 2. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for preformed flashings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene.

B. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Show fabrication and installation details for frost-resistant vent terminals.




221319 Page 2 of 6


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sanitary waste piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTIONS

A. Sanitary waste piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic sanitary waste piping specialty components.

2.2 CLEANOUTS

A. Cast-Iron Exposed Cleanouts:



2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match

connected piping. 5. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, cast-iron plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

B. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:



2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.










221319 Page 3 of 6

4. Body: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match connected piping.

5. Closure Plug:

a. Cast iron]. b. Countersunk or raised head. c. Drilled and threaded for cover attachment screw. d. Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

6. Wall Access, Cover Plate: Round, deep, chrome-plated bronze cover plate with screw. 7. Wall Access, Frame and Cover: Round, nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless steel

wall-installation frame and cover.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Open Drains:

1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A74, Service Class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C564 rubber gaskets.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping with increaser fitting of size indicated.

B. Deep-Seal Traps:

1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.

a. NPS 2: 4-inch-minimum water seal. b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch-minimum water seal.

C. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:

1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.

D. Floor-Drain, Inline Trap Seal:

1. Description: Inline floor drain trap seal, forming a physical barrier to slow trap evaporation while not impeding flow from drain.

2. Material: Polymer. 3. Standard: Tested and certified in accordance with ASSE 1072. 4. Listing: ICC-ES or IAPMO listed. 5. Size: Same as floor drain outlet or strainer throat.

E. Air-Gap Fittings:


221319 Page 4 of 6

1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping.

2. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 3. Inlet: Opening in top of body. 4. Outlet: Larger than inlet. 5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect

waste piping.

F. Sleeve Flashing Device:

1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device that forms sleeve for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top of fitting that will extend 1 inch above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.

2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.

G. Stack Flashing Fittings:

1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

H. Vent Caps:

1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

I. Frost-Resistant Vent Terminals:

1. Description: Manufactured or shop-fabricated assembly constructed of copper, lead-coated copper, or galvanized steel.

2. Design: To provide 1-inch enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of flashing collar extension, with counterflashing.

J. Expansion Joints:

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.4. 2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland. 3. End Connections: Matching connected piping. 4. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping.


221319 Page 5 of 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for

larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

B. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

D. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 2 inches above floor.

E. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.

F. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

G. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system.

H. Install sleeve and sleeve seals with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane.

I. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.

J. Install frost-resistant vent terminals on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.

K. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy access and maintenance.

L. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.

M. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.


221319 Page 6 of 6

N. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.


A. Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment, to allow service and maintenance.

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit.

1. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.



221319.13 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 221319.13 - DRAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Floor drains. 2. Pavilion drains. 3. Floor sinks. 4. Channel drainage systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene styrene.

B. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

C. HDPE: High-density polyethylene.

D. PE: Polyethylene.

E. PP: Polypropylene.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DRAIN ASSEMBLIES

A. Sanitary drains shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.


221319.13 Page 2 of 6

B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic sanitary piping specialty components.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains: FD-1:



2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3 with backwater valve. 3. Pattern: Floor drain. 4. Body Material: Gray iron. 5. Anchor Flange: Required. 6. Clamping Device: Required. 7. Outlet: Bottom. 8. Sediment Bucket: Not required. 9. Top or Strainer Material: Stainless steel. 10. Top Shape: Round.

B. Cast-Iron Floor Drains: FD-2:



2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3 with backwater valve. 3. Pattern: Floor drain. 4. Body Material: Gray iron. 5. Anchor Flange: Required. 6. Clamping Device: Required. 7. Outlet: Bottom. 8. Sediment Bucket: Required. 9. Top or Strainer Material: Gray iron. 10. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze. 11. Top Shape: Round.










221319.13 Page 3 of 6

2.3 PAVILION DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Pavilion Drains: PD-1



2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3. 3. Pattern: Area drain. 4. Body Material: Gray iron. 5. Anchor Flange: Required. 6. Clamping Device: Required. 7. Outlet: Bottom. 8. Sediment Bucket: Required. 9. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze. 10. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze. 11. Top Shape: Square.

2.4 FLOOR SINKS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Sinks: FS-1:



2. Standard: ASME A112.6.7. 3. Pattern: Floor drain. 4. Body Material: Cast iron. 5. Anchor Flange: Required. 6. Clamping Device: Required. 7. Outlet: Bottom connection. 8. Coating on Interior Surfaces: Not required. 9. Sediment Bucket: Required. 10. Internal Strainer: Dome. 11. Top Grate Material: Porcelain Enamel Coated 12. Top Shape: Square.










221319.13 Page 4 of 6

2.5 CHANNEL DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

A. Narrow, Sloped-Invert, Polymer-Concrete Channel Drainage Systems. TD-1:


a. ACO USA. b. Jay R. Smith Mfg Co; a division of Morris Group International. c. Josam Company.

2. Description: Modular system of channel sections, grates, and appurtenances; designed so grates fit into channel recesses without rocking or rattling.

3. Channel Sections: Narrow, interlocking-joint, sloped-invert, polymer-concrete modular units with end caps.

a. Include rounded bottom, with built-in invert slope of 0.6 percent and with outlets in number, sizes, and locations indicated.

b. Include extension sections necessary for required depth. c. Dimensions: 4-inch inside width. Include number of units required to form total

lengths indicated.

4. Grates: With slots or perforations, and of width and thickness that fit recesses in channel sections.

a. Material: Ductile iron.

1) Locking Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard device for securing grates to channel sections.

5. Supports, Anchors, and Setting Devices: Manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise indicated.

6. Channel-Section Joining and Fastening Materials: As recommended by system manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. 3. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:

a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch total depression.






221319.13 Page 5 of 6

b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope. c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-

inch total depression.

4. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange, so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring.

a. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

5. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install open drain fittings with top of hub 2 inches above floor.

C. Install plastic channel drainage system components on support devices, so that top will be flush with adjacent surface.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties" for backwater valves, air admittance devices and miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.

C. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

D. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.


221319.13 Page 6 of 6

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.



SECTION 221413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. PVC pipe and fittings. 2. Specialty pipe and fittings.




A. Coordination Drawings: Detail storm drainage piping. Show support locations, type of support, weight on each support, required clearances, and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Structural members to which drainage piping will be attached or suspended from.



A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water.

2.2 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS


1. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company. 2. Mueller Industries, Inc. 3. National Pipe and Plastic, Inc.

B. NSF Marking: Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic storm drain and "NSF-sewer" for plastic storm sewer piping.

C. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665; drain, waste, and vent.

D. Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40.

E. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

F. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.

G. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

2.3 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings:

1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in ODs or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.

2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified-piping-system fitting.






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems.

1. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations.

2. Install piping as indicated unless deviations from layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.







J. Make changes in direction for piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends.

1. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. 2. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are

connected.

a. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

K. Lay buried building piping beginning at low point of each system.


1. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream.

2. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

3. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

L. Install piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Storm Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Storm Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.

M. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665.

N. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.

O. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install backwater valves in storm drainage gravity-flow piping.

a. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Section 221423 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."

2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm sewers in storm drainage gravity-flow piping.

a. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage force-main piping.

b. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 221423 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."

P. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 appendices.

B. Joint Restraints and Sway Bracing:

1. Provide joint restraints and sway bracing for storm drainage piping joints to comply with the following conditions:


a. Provide axial restraint for pipe and fittings 5 inches and larger, upstream and downstream of all changes in direction, branches, and changes in diameter greater than two pipe sizes.

b. Provide rigid sway bracing for pipe and fittings 4 inches and larger, upstream and downstream of all changes in direction 45 degrees and greater.

c. Provide rigid sway bracing for pipe and fittings 5 inches and larger, upstream and downstream of all changes in direction and branch openings.

3.4 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.

1. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor, and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed storm drainage piping.

B. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired.

a. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.


2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage piping until it has been tested and approved.

a. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Test Procedure:

a. Test storm drainage piping on completion of roughing-in. b. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not

less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts until completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

C. Piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.8 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground and underground storm drainage piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be the following: 1. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.



223300 Page 1 of 7

SECTION 223300 - ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Commercial, electric, storage, domestic-water heaters. 2. Domestic-water heater accessories.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:



A. Coordination Drawings: Equipment room drawing or BIM model, drawn to scale, on which the items described in this Section are shown and coordinated with all building trades.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial, electric, domestic-water heater.

C. Domestic-Water Heater Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Source quality-control reports.


F. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


223300 Page 2 of 7


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric, domestic-water heaters to include emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of electric, domestic-water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports. b. Faulty operation of controls. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Commercial, Electric, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1) Storage Tank: Three years. 2) Controls and Other Components: Three years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and use.

B. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

C. ASME Compliance: Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, domestic-water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

D. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with potable water to comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372.


223300 Page 3 of 7

2.2 COMMERCIAL, ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

A. Commercial, Electric, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:


a. A. O. Smith Corporation. b. Lochinvar, LLC. c. Rheem Manufacturing Company.

2. Source Limitations: Obtain domestic-water heaters from single source from single manufacturer.

3. Standard: UL 1453. 4. Storage-Tank Construction: ASME-code, steel horizontal arrangement.

a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank and piping connections. Attach tappings to tank before testing.

1) NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends in accordance with ASME B1.20.1. 2) NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends in accordance with ASME B16.5 for

steel and stainless-steel flanges, and in accordance with ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.

b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 barrier materials for potable-

water tank linings, including extending lining material into tappings.

5. Factory-Installed, Storage-Tank Appurtenances:

a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium. b. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal with hose-end connection. c. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IES 90.1. d. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish or high-impact composite material. e. Heating Elements: Electric, screw-in or bolt-on immersion type arranged in

multiples of three. f. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat. g. Safety Controls: High-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices or systems. h. Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped for combination temperature-and-

pressure relief valves. Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than working-pressure rating of domestic-water heater. Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

2.3 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Domestic-Water Expansion Tanks:






223300 Page 4 of 7


a. A. O. Smith Corporation. b. AMTROL, Inc. c. Flexcon Industries.

2. Source Limitations: Obtain domestic-water expansion tanks from single source from single manufacturer.

3. Description: Steel pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed, butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air pre-charge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank.

4. Construction:

a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling. Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.

B. Heat-Trap Fittings: ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

C. Pressure-Reducing Valves: ASSE 1003 for water. Set at 25-psig-maximum outlet pressure unless otherwise indicated.

D. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than working-pressure rating of domestic-water heater. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

E. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include pressure setting less than working-pressure rating of domestic-water heater.

F. Vacuum Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.

G. Shock Absorbers: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, Size A water hammer arrester.

H. Domestic-Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel bracket for wall mounting, capable of supporting domestic-water heater and water.


A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect domestic-water heaters specified to be ASME-code construction, in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.






223300 Page 5 of 7

B. Hydrostatically test commercial domestic-water heaters to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating before shipment.

C. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Install electric, domestic-water heaters level and plumb, in accordance with layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters and on domestic-hot-water outlet piping. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping," Section 220523.13 "Butterfly Valves for Plumbing Piping," and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

B. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend domestic-water heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

C. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in water piping for electric, domestic-water heaters without storage. Extend domestic-water heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

D. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for electric, domestic-water heaters that do not have tank drains. Comply with requirements for hose-end drain valves specified in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

E. Install thermometers on outlet piping of electric, domestic-water heaters. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

F. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping of residential, solar, electric, domestic-water heaters. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

G. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple electric, domestic-water heaters. Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each electric, domestic-water heater. Include shutoff valve and thermometer in each domestic-water heater


223300 Page 6 of 7

inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each electric, domestic-water heater outlet. Comply with requirements for valves specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping," and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping," and comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

H. Install pressure-reducing valve with integral bypass relief valve in electric, domestic-water booster-heater inlet piping and water hammer arrester in booster-heater outlet piping. Set pressure-reducing valve for outlet pressure of 25 psig. Comply with requirements for pressure-reducing valves and water hammer arresters specified in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

I. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of electric, domestic-water heater storage tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.

J. Fill electric, domestic-water heaters with water.

K. Charge domestic-water expansion tanks with air to required system pressure.

L. Install dielectric fittings in all locations where piping of dissimilar metals is to be joined. The wetted surface of the dielectric fitting contacted by potable water shall contain less than 0.25 percent of lead by weight.


A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to electric, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service and maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heaters.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

D. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.


223300 Page 7 of 7

E. Tests and Inspections:


2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation.


F. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial, electric, domestic-water heaters. Training shall be a minimum of one hour(s).



224213.13 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 224213.13 - COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Floor-mounted, bottom-outlet water closets. 2. Flushometer valves. 3. Toilet seats.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Effective Flush Volume: Average of two reduced flushes and one full flush per fixture.

B. Remote Water Closet: Located more than 30 feet from other drain line connections or fixture and where less than 1.5 drainage fixture units are upstream of the drain line connection.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for water closets.


B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves and electronic sensors to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


224213.13 Page 2 of 5


A. Furnish extra materials that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Flushometer-Valve Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLOOR-MOUNTED, BOTTOM-OUTLET WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closets, Floor Mounted, Bottom Outlet, Top Spud: WC-1:


a. Kohler Co. b. Sloan Valve Company. c. TOTO USA, INC.

2. Bowl:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5. b. Material: Vitreous china. c. Type: Siphon jet. d. Style: Flushometer valve. e. Height: Standard. f. Rim Contour: Elongated. g. Water Consumption: 1.28 gal. per flush. h. Spud Size and Location: NPS 1-1/2; top. i. Color: White.

3. Bowl-to-Drain Connecting Fitting: ASTM A1045 or ASME A112.4.3.

2.2 FLUSHOMETER VALVES

A. Flushometer Valves - Diaphragm, Solenoid Actuated.


a. Kohler Co. b. Sloan Valve Company.









224213.13 Page 3 of 5

c. TOTO USA, INC. 2. Source Limitations: Obtain flushometer valve from single source from single

manufacturer. 3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 4. Features: Include integral check stop and backflow-prevention device. 5. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components. 6. Style: Exposed. 7. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome-plated. 8. Panel Finish: Chrome-plated or stainless steel. 9. Actuator: Side or top mounted; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 10. Trip Mechanism: Hard-wired, control-voltage electronic sensor; listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA 70, by qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

11. Consumption: 1.28 gal. per flush. 12. Minimum Inlet: NPS 1. 13. Minimum Outlet: NPS 1-1/4.

2.3 TOILET SEATS

A. Toilet Seats:


a. American Standard. b. Bemis Manufacturing Company. c. Kohler Co.

2. Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.5. 3. Material: Plastic. 4. Type: Commercial (Heavy duty). 5. Shape: Elongated rim, open front. 6. Hinge: Self-sustaining, check. 7. Hinge Material: Noncorroding metal. 8. Seat Cover: Not required. 9. Color: White.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before water-closet installation.







224213.13 Page 4 of 5

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where water closets will be installed.



A. Water-Closet Installation:

1. Install level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. 2. Install floor-mounted water closets on bowl-to-drain connecting fitting attachments to

piping or building substrate.

B. Flushometer-Valve Installation:

1. Install flushometer-valve, water-supply fitting on each supply to each water closet. 2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. 3. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible water closets with handle mounted

on open side of water closet. 4. Install actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach. 5. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.

C. Install toilet seats on water closets.

D. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:

1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork.

2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. 3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."

E. Joint Sealing:

1. Seal joints between water closets and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant.

2. Match sealant color to water-closet color. 3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect water closets with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match water closets.

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."


224213.13 Page 5 of 5

D. Where installing piping adjacent to water closets, allow space for service and maintenance.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust water closets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning water closets, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.


A. Clean water closets and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

B. Install protective covering for installed water closets and fittings.

C. Do not allow use of water closets for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.



224216.13 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 224216.13 - COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Vitreous-china, wall-mounted lavatories. 2. Automatically operated lavatory faucets. 3. Supply fittings. 4. Waste fittings. 5. Lavatory supports.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for lavatories.


B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring of automatic faucets.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lavatories and faucets to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

a. Servicing and adjustments of automatic faucets.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.


224216.13 Page 2 of 6

1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VITREOUS-CHINA, WALL-MOUNTED LAVATORIES

A. Lavatory - Ledge Back, Vitreous China, Wall Mounted LAV-1


a. American Standard. b. Sloan Valve Company. c. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Fixture:

a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1. b. Type: For wall hanging. c. Nominal Size: Rectangular, 20 by 18 inches. d. Faucet-Hole Punching: One hole. e. Faucet-Hole Location: Top. f. Color: White. g. Mounting Material: Chair carrier.

3. Faucet: See below. 4. Support: Type II, concealed-arm lavatory carrier. 5. Lavatory Mounting Height: Standard.

2.2 AUTOMATICALLY OPERATED LAVATORY FAUCETS

A. Lavatory faucets intended to convey or dispense water for human consumption are to comply with the U.S. Safe Drinking Water Act (SDWA), requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), and with NSF 61/NSF 372, or be certified in compliance with NSF 61/NSF 372 by an American National Standards Institute (ANSI) accredited third-party certification body, that the weighted average lead content at wetted surfaces is less than or equal to 0.25 percent.

B. Lavatory Faucets - Automatic Type: Hardwired Electronic Sensor Operated, Mixing,:






224216.13 Page 3 of 6


a. Kohler Co. b. Sloan Valve Company. c. TOTO USA, INC.

2. Standards: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 and UL 1951. 3. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

4. Body Type: Single hole. 5. Body Material: Commercial, solid-brass, or die-cast housing with brazed copper and

brass waterway. 6. Finish: Polished chrome plate. 7. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm. 8. Mounting Type: Deck, concealed. 9. Spout: Rigid type. 10. Spout Outlet: Laminar flow.

2.3 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated-brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet connection matching supply piping.

E. Operation: Loose key.

F. Risers:

1. NPS 3/8. 2. Chrome-plated, soft-copper flexible tube riser.

2.4 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 offset and straight tailpiece.

C. Trap:






224216.13 Page 4 of 6

1. Size: NPS 1-1/2 by NPS 1-1/4. 2. Material:

a. Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 0.032-inch-thick brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated, brass or steel wall flange.

b. Stainless steel, two-piece trap and swivel elbow with 0.012-inch thick stainless-steel tube to wall, and stainless-steel wall flange.

2.5 LAVATORY SUPPORTS

A. Lavatory Carrier:



2. Standard: ASME A112.6.1M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before lavatory installation.

B. Examine counters and walls for suitable conditions where lavatories will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install lavatories level and plumb in accordance with roughing-in drawings.

B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted lavatories.

C. Install accessible wall-mounted lavatories at handicapped/elderly mounting height for people with disabilities or the elderly, in accordance with ICC A117.1.

D. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."






224216.13 Page 5 of 6

E. Seal joints between lavatories, counters, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

F. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible lavatories. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."


A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.




A. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted in accordance with NFPA 70 and NECA 1.

D. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection.

1. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs, as specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs with a black background and engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch high.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust lavatories and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning lavatories, fittings, and controls.

B. Install new batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.


224216.13 Page 6 of 6


A. After completing installation of lavatories, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean lavatories, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed lavatories and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of lavatories for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.



224216.16 Page 1 of 8

SECTION 224216.16 - COMMERCIAL SINKS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Service basins. 2. Kitchen/ Utility sinks. 3. Handwash sinks. 4. Sink faucets. 5. Supports. 6. Supply fittings. 7. Waste fittings.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for sinks.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics and furnished specialties and accessories.


A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories.


A. Maintenance Data: For sinks to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.


224216.16 Page 2 of 8

1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SERVICE BASINS

A. Service Basins, MSB-1: Terrazzo, floor mounted.


a. Acorn Engineering Company; a Division of Morris Group International. b. Fiat Products. c. Florestone Products Co., Inc. d. Stern-Williams Co., Inc.

2. Fixture:

a. Standard: IAPMO PS 99. b. Shape: Five sided. c. Nominal Size: 24 by 2432 inches. d. Height: 12 inches with dropped front. e. Tiling Flange: Not required. f. Rim Guard: On front top surfaces. g. Color: Not applicable. h. Drain: Stainless Steel strainer with NPS 3 outlet.

3. Mounting: On floor and flush to wall.

2.2 KITCHEN/ UTILITY SINKS

A. Utility Sinks, SK-1: Stainless steel, freestanding.


a. Advance Tabco. b. Eagle Group. c. Elkay. d. Griffin Products, Inc. e. Just Manufacturing.

2. Fixture:

a. Standard: ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4.













224216.16 Page 3 of 8

b. Type: Stainless steel, freestanding, sound-deadened unit with backsplash. c. Number of Compartments: Three. d. Overall Dimensions: 20-inches deep, 58-inches long, 44-inches tall. e. Metal Thickness: 14 gauge.

f. Compartment:

1) Dimensions: 10-inches wide,14-inches long, 10-inches deep. 2) Drains: NPS 1-1/2 tailpiece with stopper. 3) Drain Location: Centered in compartments.

g. Drainboard(s): Right and left sides.

1) Dimensions: 12” wide, 20” deep.

3. Legs and Feet: Stainless steel tubing legs with adjustable bullet feet. 4. Faucet

a. Number Required: One. b. Mounting: On backsplash.

5. Supply Fittings:

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. b. Supplies: Chrome-plated brass compression stop with inlet connection matching

water-supply piping type and size.

1) Operation: Loose key. 2) Risers: NPS 1/2, chrome-plated, rigid-copper pipe.

6. Waste Fittings:

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Utility Sinks, SK-3: Stainless steel, freestanding.



2. Fixture:

a. Standard: ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4. b. Type: With backsplash. c. Number of Compartments: One. d. Overall Dimensions: 30” deep, 50.5” wide, 44-3/4” tall.








224216.16 Page 4 of 8

e. Metal Thickness: 14 gauge.

f. Each Compartment:

1) Dimensions: 24-inches wide, 24-inches long, 12-inches deep. 2) Drains: NPS 1-1/2 tailpiece with stopper. 3) Drain Location: Centered in compartment.

g. Drainboard(s): Left side.

1) Dimensions Each: 24” wide, 24” deep.

3. Legs and Feet: Stainless steel tubing legs with adjustable bullet feet.

4. Supply Fittings:

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. b. Supplies: Chrome-plated brass compression stop with inlet connection matching

water-supply piping type and size.

1) Operation: Loose key. 2) Risers: NPS 1/2, chrome-plated, rigid-copper pipe.

5. Waste Fittings:

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2. b. Continuous Waste:

1) Size: NPS 1-1/2. 2) Material: Chrome-plated, 0.032-inch-thick brass tube.

2.3 HANDWASH SINKS

A. Handwash Sinks, SK-2: Stainless steel, wall mounted.



2. Fixture:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 and NSF/ANSI 2. b. Type: Basin with radius corners, back for faucet, and support brackets. c. Nominal Size: 17 by 16 by 6 inches.

3. Faucet: Included with fixture.








224216.16 Page 5 of 8

4. Supply Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Supply Fittings" Article. 5. Waste Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Waste Fittings" Article. 6. Support: Type II sink carrier. 7. Lavatory Mounting Height: Standard.

2.4 SINK FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 372 for faucet-spout materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Sink Faucets: Manual type, two lever handle mixing valve.

1. Commercial, Solid-Brass Faucets, SSF-1:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Chicago Faucets; Geberit Company. 2) Elkay. 3) Just Manufacturing. 4) T&S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.

b. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. c. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with

supplies and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and sink receptor. d. Body Type: Centerset. e. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass. f. Finish: Chrome plated. g. Handle(s): Lever. h. Mounting Type: Back/wall, exposed. i. Spout Type: Rigid, solid brass with wall brace. j. Vacuum Breaker: Required for hose outlet. k. Spout Outlet: Hose thread according to ASME B1.20.7.

2. Commercial, Solid-Brass Faucets, SKF-1:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Chicago Faucets; Geberit Company. 2) Elkay. 3) Just Manufacturing. 4) T&S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.

b. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. c. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with

supplies and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and sink receptor. d. Body Type: Single hole. e. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass. f. Finish: Polished chrome plate. g. Maximum Flow Rate: 1.5 gpm. h. Handle(s): Wrist blade, 4 inches.












224216.16 Page 6 of 8

i. Mounting Type: Deck, concealed. j. Spout Type: Swivel gooseneck. k. Vacuum Breaker: Not required. l. Spout Outlet: Aerator.

2.5 SUPPORTS

A. Type II Sink Carrier:




2.6 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 372 for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet connection matching supply piping.

E. Operation: Loose key.

F. Risers:

1. NPS 3/8. 2. Chrome-plated, soft-copper flexible tube, or ASME A112.18.6, braided or corrugated

stainless-steel flexible hose.

2.7 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 offset and straight tailpiece.

C. Trap:

1. Size: NPS 1-1/2.






224216.16 Page 7 of 8

2. Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and ground-joint swivel elbow with 0.032-inch-thick brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated brass or steel wall flange.

2.8 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before sink installation.

B. Examine walls, floors, and counters for suitable conditions where sinks will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install sinks level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung sinks.

C. Install accessible wall-mounted sinks at handicapped/elderly mounting height according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

D. Set floor-mounted sinks in leveling bed of cement grout.

E. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each sink faucet.

1. Exception: Use ball or gate valves if supply stops are not specified with sink. Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping" and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

2. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

F. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."


224216.16 Page 8 of 8

G. Seal joints between sinks and counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

H. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible sinks. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect sinks with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.



3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust sinks and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning sinks, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.


A. After completing installation of sinks, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean sinks, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed sinks and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of sinks for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.



224713 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 224713 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes drinking fountains and related components.


A. Product Data: For each type of drinking fountain.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

2. Include operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.


A. Maintenance Data: For drinking fountains to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DRINKING FOUNTAINS

A. Drinking Fountains - Surface Wall-Mounted, Stainless Steel: DF-1.


a. Elkay. b. Oasis International. c. Willoughby Industries.

2. Source Limitations: Obtain surface wall-mounted, stainless steel drinking fountains from single source from single manufacturer.

3. Type: Vandal resistant.






224713 Page 2 of 4

4. Receptor(s):

a. Type: With back, On horizontal support. b. Shape: Rounded rectangular. c. Back Panel: Stainless steel wall plate behind drinking fountain. d. Bubblers: One for each receptor, with adjustable stream regulator, located on deck. e. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 tailpiece. f. Bottle Filler: Push-button activation.

5. Maximum Water Flow: 0.5 gpm. 6. Control: Push button. 7. Supply: NPS 3/8 with shutoff valve. 8. Waste Fitting: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2, NPS 1-1/4 chrome-plated brass P-trap and

waste. 9. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Volts: 120 V ac. b. Phase: Single. c. Hertz: 60 Hz.

10. Support: Provide manufacturer's mounting plate and drinking fountain carrier. 11. Drinking Fountain Mounting Height: High/low - standard/accessible in accordance with

ICC A117.1.

2.2 SUPPORTS

A. Type I Water Cooler Carrier:




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.






224713 Page 3 of 4


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. For fixtures indicated for children, install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Set pedestal drinking fountains on floor.

C. Install recessed drinking fountains secured to wood blocking in wall construction.

D. Install off-the-floor carrier supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted fixtures.

E. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to domestic-water distribution piping. Use ball or gate valve. Install valves in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping" and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

F. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage system.

G. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

H. Seal joints between fixtures and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.


C. Install ball or gate shutoff valve on water supply to each fixture. Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping" and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

D. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.


224713 Page 4 of 4

3.5 CLEANING

A. After installing fixtures, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures.

D. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


City of New Rochelle May 12, 2021

Wildcliff Reuse & H.P.C.G.

230513 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on alternating-current

power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped

separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the

following:

1. Motor controllers.

2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.

3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above

sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads

at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,

and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.



230513 Page 2 of 3

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Premium efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.

2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

I. Insulation: Class F.

J. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor

frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection

requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,

suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features

coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and

tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by

pulse-width-modulated inverters.

2. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.

3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.

4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.



230513 Page 3 of 3

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and

requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

2. Split phase.

3. Capacitor start, inductor run.

4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Pre-lubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and

thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor

when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor

insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns

to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)




230517 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 230517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves.

2. Stack-sleeve fittings.

3. Sleeve-seal systems.

4. Sleeve-seal fittings.

5. Grout.

6. Silicone sealants.


1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-

resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without

penetrating items.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, anti-corrosion coated or

zinc coated, with plain ends and integral welded waterstop collar.



230517 Page 2 of 5

B. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with

nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.


A. Description:

1. Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space

between piping and sleeve.

2. Designed to form a hydrostatic seal of 20-psig.

3. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include

type and number required for pipe material and size.

4. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.

5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, ASTM B633

of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description:

1. Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly, made for imbedding in concrete

slab or wall.

2. Plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.

2.4 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink, recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in nonfire-

rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.




A. Silicone, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent

movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant, ASTM C920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 25, use NT.



230517 Page 3 of 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to

provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls

are constructed.

1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP

sleeves.


a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or

other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.

3. Using grout or silicone sealant, seal space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without

sleeve-seal system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.


2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use sealants

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.

1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane

waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Section 076200

"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 3 inches above finished floor

level.

4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if

ring is specified.

5. Using waterproof silicone sealant, seal space between top hub of stack-sleeve fitting and

pipe.



230517 Page 4 of 5

B. Fire-Resistance-Rated, Horizontal Assembly, and Smoke Barrier Penetrations: Maintain

indicated fire or smoke rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- and

smoke-stop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413

"Penetration Firestopping."


A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service

piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for

sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration,

assemble sleeve-seal-system components, and install in annular space between piping and

sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a

watertight seal.


A. Install sleeve-seal fittings as new walls and slabs are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and

walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.


D. Using grout or silicone sealant, seal space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.



1. Leak Test: After allowing for a full cure, test sleeves and sleeve seals for leaks. Repair

leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

B. Sleeves and sleeve seals will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls Above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Sleeve-seal fittings.

2. Concrete Slabs Above Grade:



230517 Page 5 of 5

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Sleeve-seal fittings.




230529 Page 1 of 10

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.

2. Trapeze pipe hangers.

3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.

4. Fastener systems.

5. Equipment supports.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze

hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Section 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC" for vibration isolation devices.

3. Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" and Section 233116 “Nonmetal Ducts” for duct hangers

and supports.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the

following, include Product Data for components:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers.

2. Metal framing systems.

3. Fiberglass strut systems.

4. Pipe stands.

5. Equipment supports.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified

professional engineer responsible for their preparation.



230529 Page 2 of 10

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers.

2. Include design calculations for designing trapeze hangers.




A. Structural-Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand

the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according

to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting

combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components.

2.2 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized, hot-dip galvanized, or electro-galvanized.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coated, or epoxy powder-coated.

4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.

5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Copper Pipe and Tube Hangers:



230529 Page 3 of 10

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-plated steel, factory-fabricated

components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-plated steel.

2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from

structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-

bolts.

2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C533, Type I

calcium silicate with 100-psi minimum compressive strength.

B. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

C. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

D. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air

temperature.

2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete

with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building

materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type anchors for use in hardened portland

cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and

building materials where used.

1. Indoor Applications: Zinc-coated steel.

2. Outdoor Applications: Stainless steel.

2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-

steel shapes.

2.7 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: ASTM B221.

B. Carbon Steel: ASTM A1011/A1011M.



230529 Page 4 of 10

C. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; galvanized.

D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M.

E. Threaded Rods: Continuously threaded. Zinc-plated or galvanized steel for indoor applications

and stainless steel for outdoor applications. Mating nuts and washers of similar materials as

rods.

F. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink

and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength

will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.

Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported

components plus 200 lb.


A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports, clamps,

and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping of

parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe

hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A36/A36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being

supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

D. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less

than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use

operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners

according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.



230529 Page 5 of 10

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,

washers, and other accessories.

F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal movement of piping systems, to permit

freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints,

expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger

and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten

inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses

from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed

maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

L. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield

insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services

piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is

indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields

shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:



230529 Page 6 of 10

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.

5. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be

shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;

appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the

following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve

indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with

SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and

equipment.



230529 Page 7 of 10

B. Comply with MSS SP-58 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in

piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will

not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in

direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.

G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated or

insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of

pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-

center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

4. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of non-

insulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

5. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of non-insulated,

stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

6. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary

pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

7. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of non-insulated,

stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

8. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of

non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.

9. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of

non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.

10. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

11. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction.

12. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.

13. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and

with U-bolt to retain pipe.

14. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes

NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion

support and cast-iron floor flange.



230529 Page 8 of 10

15. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two

rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

16. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to

NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction

might occur.

17. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if

longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical

adjustment is unnecessary.

18. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small

horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical

adjustment is unnecessary.

19. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to

NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition

to expansion and contraction.

J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to

NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4

to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend

pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge.

8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.



230529 Page 9 of 10

9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads.

10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.

12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with

insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer

to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

N. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-

1/4 inches.

3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with

springs.

4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems.

5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability

factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.

6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from

base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from

trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress

from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include

auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These

supports include the following types:



230529 Page 10 of 10

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.

c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

O. Comply with MSS SP-58 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections.

P. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections.




230548.13 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 230548.13 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Spring hangers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.

B. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (for the State of California

owned and regulated medical facilities).



1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation

device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each

type and size of vibration isolation device.

3. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with

requirements.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of equipment bases.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments

to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames

for equipment mounting.



230548.13 Page 2 of 3


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation for HVAC

piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other

supports and restraints.



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to

conduct testing indicated, be an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 and be

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SPRING HANGERS

A. Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in

Compression:

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a

maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing

isolation efficiency.

2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring

at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.

4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

5. Minimum deflection as indicated on Drawings.

6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

7. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced

cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.

8. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower

threaded rod.

9. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support

spring coil.

2.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation devices for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.




230548.13 Page 3 of 3

2.2 VIBRATION CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or

ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to

restrained component (unless post-connection testing has been approved), and with at

least seven days' advance notice.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.





230553 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.

2. Pipe labels.

3. Duct labels.

4. Valve tags.



B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification

material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed

content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,

1/16-inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: Black.

3. Background Color: Yellow.

4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.



230553 Page 2 of 5

5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering

for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the

size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,

Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the

Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond

paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where

equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and

title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and

maintenance data.

2.2 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering

indicating service, and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Pre-coiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference

of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow

direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate

both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping.

2.3 DUCT LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16-

inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. See schedule below.

C. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.



230553 Page 3 of 5

D. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2

by 3/4 inch.

E. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2

inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater

viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal

lettering.

F. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

G. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

H. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include duct size and an arrow indicating flow

direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both

directions or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.

2.4 VALVE TAGS

A. Description: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-

inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped

holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain or beaded chain or S-hook.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve

number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or

space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for

identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data and ,mechanical

equipment room in frame with clear plastic cover.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification

devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and

encapsulants.



230553 Page 4 of 5


A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

B. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings

in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and

plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible

enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including

pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.

D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Refrigerant Piping: White letters on a safety-purple background.

3.5 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic-laminated duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color

codes:



230553 Page 5 of 5

1. Green with white lettering: For supply-air ducts.

2. Yellow with black lettering: For exhaust-air ducts.

3. Blue with white lettering: For outside- and return-air ducts.

B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into and exit from concealed spaces and at

maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable

ceiling system.

3.6 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within

factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose

connections, and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use

fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and

with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Refrigerant: 1-1/2 inches, round.

2. Valve-Tag Colors:

a. Toxic and Corrosive Fluids: Black letters on a safety-orange background.

b. Flammable Fluids: Black letters on a safety-yellow background.




230593 Page 1 of 14

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.

2. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Equipment:

a. Motors.

b. Condensing units.

c. Heat-transfer coils.

3. Testing, adjusting, and balancing existing systems and equipment.

4. Sound tests.

5. Vibration tests.

6. Duct leakage tests.

7. Control system verification.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. BAS: Building automation systems.

C. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

D. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

F. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work.

G. TDH: Total dynamic head.



230593 Page 2 of 14


A. TAB Conference: If requested by the Owner, conduct a TAB conference at Project site after

approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the

details. Provide a minimum of 14 days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Minimum Agenda Items:

a. The Contract Documents examination report.

b. The TAB plan.

c. Needs for coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.

d. Proposed procedures for documentation and communication flow.


A. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. TAB Report: Documentation indicating that Work complies with ASHRAE/IES 90.1,

Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."


A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation

that the TAB specialist and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified

in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,

submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB

strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

D. Certified TAB reports.

E. Sample report forms.

F. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1. Instrument type and make.

2. Serial number.

3. Application.

4. Dates of use.

5. Dates of calibration.



230593 Page 3 of 14


A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by AABC.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC as a TAB

technician.

B. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by NEBB or TABB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or TABB.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by TABB as a TAB

technician.

C. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation."

D. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1,

Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."


A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial

Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's

operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover

conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer

wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify

that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions

for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of philosophies and

assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.



230593 Page 4 of 14

E. Examine ceiling plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they are properly

separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-

stopped if required.

F. Examine equipment performance data including fan curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects

that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or

part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when

installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment

performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in

AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."

Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,

cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

I. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight,

filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible,

and their controls are connected and functioning.

K. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

L. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and

record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from

indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes the following:

1. Equipment and systems to be tested.

2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems.

3. Instrumentation to be used.

4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment.

B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness

for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following:

1. Airside:

a. Verify that leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been

satisfactorily completed.



230593 Page 5 of 14

b. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed.

c. Volume dampers are open and functional.

d. Clean filters are installed.

e. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction.

f. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

g. Ceilings are installed.

h. Windows and doors are installed.

i. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained

in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards

for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the

minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness

as used to construct ducts.

2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with

requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,

coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation," and

Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position

indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other

suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC EQUIPMENT

A. Test, adjust, and balance HVAC equipment indicated on Drawings, including, but not limited

to, the following:

1. Motors.

2. Unit heaters.

3. Condensing units.

4. Energy-recovery units.

5. Heat pumps.

6. Coils.

7. Fan coil units.



230593 Page 6 of 14

3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and

recommended testing procedures. Cross-check the summation of required outlet volumes with

required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

D. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air

dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

H. Check for airflow blockages.

I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

J. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

K. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by

fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.

a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates

minimum outdoor-air conditions.

b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by main Pitot-tube traverse. If

necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses, close to the fan and prior to any

outlets, to obtain total airflow.

c. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil

traverse may be acceptable.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows:

a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection.

c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling

system.



230593 Page 7 of 14

d. Report artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured.

3. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus

actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to

accommodate actual conditions.

4. Obtain approval from Construction Manager for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower

than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units

for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit

performance.

5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment

manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor

amperage to ensure that no overload occurs. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-

heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required

brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated

airflows.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.

2. Adjust submain and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow.

3. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.

C. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows.

1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

2. Measure inlets and outlets airflow.

3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow.

4. Re-measure each inlet and outlet after they have been adjusted.

D. Verify final system conditions.

1. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within

design. Readjust to design if necessary.

2. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design.

3. Re-measure all final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile.

4. Mark all final settings.

5. Measure and record all operating data.

6. Record final fan-performance data.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

2. Motor horsepower rating.

3. Motor rpm.



230593 Page 8 of 14

4. Phase and hertz.

5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.

7. Starter size and thermal-protection-element rating.

8. Service factor and frame size.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS

A. Verify proper rotation of fan(s).

B. Measure and record entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

C. Measure and record entering and leaving refrigerant pressures.

D. Measure and record operating data of compressor(s), fan(s), and motors.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:

1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

3. Airflow.

3.10 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTS

A. Witness the duct pressure testing performed by Installer.

B. Verify that proper test methods are used and that leakage rates are within specified tolerances.

C. Report deficiencies observed.

3.11 PIPE LEAKAGE TESTS

A. Witness the pipe pressure testing performed by Installer.

B. Verify that proper test methods are used and that leakage rates are within specified limits.

C. Report deficiencies observed.

3.12 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.



230593 Page 9 of 14

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.

B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified

above.

3.13 PROGRESS REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems

balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems balancing devices to facilitate

proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC

systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing

devices.

3.14 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections

for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the

certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Fan curves.

2. Manufacturers' test data.

3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

4. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and

Product Data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page.

2. Name and address of the TAB specialist.

3. Project name.

4. Project location.

5. Architect's name and address.

6. Engineer's name and address.

7. Contractor's name and address.

8. Report date.

9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.

10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report.

11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.



230593 Page 10 of 14

b. Notable characteristics of systems.

c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.

14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.

15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.

c. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air distribution systems. Present each system

with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.

3. Terminal units.

4. Balancing stations.

5. Position of balancing devices.

E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.

b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and unit size.

e. Manufacturer's serial number.

f. Unit arrangement and class.

g. Discharge arrangement.

h. Number, type, and size of filters.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total airflow rate in cfm.

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.

e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.



230593 Page 11 of 14

f. Outdoor airflow in cfm.

g. Return airflow in cfm.

h. Outdoor-air damper position.

i. Return-air damper position.

F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

a. System identification.

b. Location.

c. Coil type.

d. Number of rows.

e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.

f. Make and model number.

g. Face area in sq. ft.

h. Tube size in NPS.

i. Tube and fin materials.

j. Circuiting arrangement.


a. Airflow rate in cfm.

b. Average face velocity in fpm.

c. Air pressure drop in inches wg.

d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

h. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.

i. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig.

j. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F.

G. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:

a. System identification.

b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and size.

e. Manufacturer's serial number.

f. Arrangement and class.

g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.



230593 Page 12 of 14

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.

g. Number, make, and size of belts.


a. Total airflow rate in cfm.

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.

e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.

H. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid

representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit number.

b. Location and zone.

c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.

d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.

e. Duct size in inches.

f. Duct area in sq. ft.

g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm.

h. Indicated velocity in fpm.

i. Actual airflow rate in cfm.

j. Actual average velocity in fpm.

k. Barometric pressure in psig.

I. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils , include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit identification.

b. Location and zone.

c. Room or riser served.

d. Coil make and size.

e. Flowmeter type.


a. Airflow rate in cfm.

b. Entering-air temperature in deg F.

c. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.

J. Instrument Calibration Reports:



230593 Page 13 of 14

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.

c. Application.

d. Dates of use.

e. Dates of calibration.

3.15 VERIFICATION OF TAB REPORT

A. The TAB specialist's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of

Construction Manager.

B. Owner shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked.

Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the

extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.

C. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final

report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."

D. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements

checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete

and shall be rejected.

E. If TAB work fails, proceed as follows:

1. TAB specialists shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final

report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and

request a second final inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB

specialist to complete TAB work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the

cost of the services from the original TAB specialist's final payment.

3. If the second verification also fails, Owner may contact AABC Headquarters regarding

the AABC National Performance Guaranty.


3.16 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions

are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and

winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.



230593 Page 14 of 14




230713 Page 1 of 11

SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:

1. Indoor, concealed supply, return and outdoor air.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 230713 "Duct Insulation."

2. Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."

3. Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor

permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of

insulation and hanger.

2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, dampers, specialties and flanges for each

type of insulation.

3. Detail application of field-applied jackets.

4. Detail application at linkages of control devices.

C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing

product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows:

1. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches square.

2. Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches square.

3. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full range

of colors available for each type of finish material.



230713 Page 2 of 11


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation

materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates

of tests and test methods employed.



A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of

Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing

identical products according to ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and

cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less.

C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish

listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups in the

location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Use materials indicated for the

completed Work.

1. Ductwork Mockups:

a. One 10-foot section each of rectangular and round straight duct.

b. One each of a 90-degree mitered round and rectangular elbow, and one each of a

90-degree radius round and rectangular elbow.

c. One rectangular branch takeoff and one round branch takeoff from a rectangular

duct. One round tee fitting.

d. One rectangular and round transition fitting.

e. Four support hangers for round and rectangular ductwork.

f. Each type of damper and specialty.

2. For each mockup, fabricate cutaway sections to allow observation of application details

for insulation materials, adhesives, mastics, attachments, and jackets.

3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be

constructed.

4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting insulation application.



230713 Page 3 of 11

5. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations

in writing.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.

7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in

Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before

preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for

installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for

maintenance.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after

installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have

satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of

construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" and "Indoor Duct and

Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less

than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C871.



230713 Page 4 of 11

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable

according to ASTM C795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing

process.

F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C553, Type II and ASTM C1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK

jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

G. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide

insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in

"Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding

insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for

bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

2.3 MASTICS AND COATINGS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

B. Vapor-Retarder Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM C755, Section 7.2.2, Table 2, for

insulation type and service conditions.

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.

3. Color: White.

C. Vapor-Retarder Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.



2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.

3. Color: White.

D. Vapor-Retarder Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.




3. Color: White.



230713 Page 5 of 11

E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96, greater than 1.0 perm at manufacturer's

recommended dry film thickness.


3. Color: White.

2.4 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.


4. Color: Aluminum.


A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When

factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;

complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a

removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;

complying with ASTM C1136, Type II.

2.6 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,

complying with ASTM C1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.

2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.

3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

4. Elongation: 2 percent.

5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;


1. Width: 3 inches.





6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.



230713 Page 6 of 11

2.7 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167 or ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015-inch

thick, 1/2-inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

2. Aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020-inch

thick, 1/2-inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept

metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for

capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of

insulation indicated.

2. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to

projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in

position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following

requirements:

a. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030-inch thick by 2 inches

square.

b. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-

diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated

capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without

damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances

and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will

adversely affect insulation application.



230713 Page 7 of 11


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces,

free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.

B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for

each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install

accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or

dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.


F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with

adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,

supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation and vapor barriers continuously through hangers and around anchor

attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper

and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to

insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation

material manufacturer.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet

and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of

strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive

self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.



230713 Page 8 of 11

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written

instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at

ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal

thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking

due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar

to butt joints.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):

Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,

for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and

transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-

discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as

follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal

centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16

inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each

way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold

insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.

f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation

facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous

unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with



230713 Page 9 of 11

insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment.

Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1-inch

o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-

barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-

barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot

intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped

pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.

Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the

insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.

At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section

for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually

mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with

6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of

stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,

for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and

transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-

discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as

follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal

centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16

inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each

way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold

insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation

facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous

unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with

insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment.

Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1-inch



230713 Page 10 of 11

o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-

barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-

barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot

intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped

pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.

Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the

insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section

for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and

inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with

individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with

6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of

stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with



B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and

insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be

limited to one location for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule,

General" Article.

D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals

noncompliance with requirements.

3.8 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply, return and outdoor air.

B. Items Not Insulated:



230713 Page 11 of 11

1. Fibrous-glass ducts.

2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.

4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.

5. Flexible connectors.

6. Vibration-control devices.

7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

3.9 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Insulate all ductwork per 2020 Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State,

section C403.11.1.

B. Concealed, rectangular, round and flat-oval, duct and plenum insulation shall be one of the

following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and R-6.

2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and R-6.




230719 Page 1 of 13

SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulation for HVAC piping systems.


1. Section 230713 "Duct Insulation" for duct insulation.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance

thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).


A. Packaging: Insulation system materials are to be delivered to the Project site in unopened

containers. The packaging is to include name of manufacturer, fabricator, type, description, and

size, as well as ASTM standard designation, and maximum use temperature.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in

Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application.

Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for

installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for

maintenance.

1.5 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after

installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have

satisfactory test results.



230719 Page 2 of 13

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing

identical products in accordance with ASTM E84 by a testing agency acceptable to authority

having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation, jacket materials, adhesive, mastic, tapes, and

cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. All Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less.


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation

Schedule," and "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where

insulating materials are applied.

B. Products do not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come into contact with stainless steel have a leachable chloride content of less

than 50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel are qualified as acceptable in accordance

with ASTM C795.

E. Foam insulation materials do not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing

process.

F. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, or expanded-rubber materials; suitable for maximum use

temperature between minus 70 deg F and 220 deg F. Comply with ASTM C534/C534M,

Type I, for tubular materials, Type II for sheet materials.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Aeroflex USA.

b. Armacell LLC.

c. K-Flex USA.

G. Glass-Fiber, Preformed Pipe: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin; suitable for

maximum use temperature up to 850 deg F in accordance with ASTM C411. Comply with

ASTM C547.


following:

a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

b. Knauf Insulation.



230719 Page 3 of 13

c. Manson Insulation Inc.

d. Owens Corning.

2. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type I, Grade A with factory-applied ASJ.

3. Fabricated shapes in accordance with ASTM C450 and ASTM C585.

4. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.3 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Glass-Fiber and Mineral Wool Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C195.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:

a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.

2.4 ADHESIVES

A. Materials are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding

insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Solvent-based adhesive.


following:

a. Aeroflex USA.

b. Armacell LLC.

c. K-Flex USA.

2. Flame-spread index is 25 or less and smoke-developed index is 50 or less as tested in

accordance with ASTM E84.

3. Wet Flash Point: Below 0 deg F.


5. Color: Black.

C. Glass-Fiber and Mineral Wool Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

D. ASJ Adhesive and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,

Grade A, for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

2.5 MASTICS AND COATINGS

A. Materials are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.



230719 Page 4 of 13

B. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Solvent Based, Indoor Use: Suitable for indoor use on below-ambient

services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249.


3. Color: White.

2.6 SEALANTS

A. Materials are as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and are compatible with

insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

B. Joint Sealants:


following:

a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.

b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.

c. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.

d. Owens Corning.

2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.

a. Service Temperature Range: Minus 150 to plus 250 deg F.

b. Color: White or gray.

C. ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVDC and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.


3. Color: White.


A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When

factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;

complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.

2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets comply with ASTM C1136, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D1784,

Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.

Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.


following:



230719 Page 5 of 13

a. Airex Manufacturing.

b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.

d. Proto Corporation.

e. Speedline Corporation.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.

3. Color: White.

4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,

unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and

supply covers for lavatories.

C. Metal Jacket:


following:

a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

b. RPR Products, Inc.

2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005,

Temper H-14.

a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.

b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

c. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 53-mil- thick polysurlyn.

d. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.

2) Preformed two-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius

elbows.

3) Tee covers.

4) Flange and union covers.

5) End caps.

6) Beveled collars.

7) Valve covers.

8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not

available.

2.9 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,


1. Width: 3 inches.







230719 Page 6 of 13

6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive;

suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

1. Width: 2 inches.

2. Thickness: 6 mils.




C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

1. Width: 2 inches.





2.10 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:

1. Aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch

thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4 inch wide, stainless steel or Monel.

C. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect

insulation application.

B. Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with

stainless steel surfaces, use demineralized water.



230719 Page 7 of 13


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;

free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and of thicknesses

required for each item of pipe system, as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install

accessories that do not corrode, compress, or otherwise damage insulation or jacket.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom (12 o'clock and 6 o'clock positions)

of horizontal runs.


F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace insulation

materials that get wet during storage or in the installation process before being properly covered

and sealed in accordance with the Contract Documents, unless otherwise approved by the

engineer of record.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with

adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,

supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation and vapor barrier continuously through hangers and around anchor

attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper

and seal ends attached to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to

insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation

material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over

jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet

and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth, but not to the extent of creating wrinkles or areas of

compression in the insulation.



230719 Page 8 of 13

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward-clinching staples along both edges of

strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with

longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.

Staple laps with outward-clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.

4. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

5. Cover joints and seams with tape, in accordance with insulation material manufacturer's

written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

6. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at

ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking

due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches in

similar fashion to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.

2. Testing agency labels and stamps.

3. Nameplates and data plates.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof

penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,

install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal

joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of

roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):

Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials, except where more

specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles below.



230719 Page 9 of 13

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, Mechanical Couplings, and

Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, mechanical couplings, unions,

and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless

otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using prefabricated fitting insulation ormitered or routed fittings

made from same material and density as that of adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece is

butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids,

and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform

contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with prefabricated fitting insulation orsectional pipe insulation of

same material and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation

to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces

with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using prefabricated fitting insulation orsectional pipe insulation of same

material, density, and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe

insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter,

whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-

box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating

cement.

5. Insulate flanges, mechanical couplings, and unions using a section of oversized

preformed pipe insulation to fit. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2

times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Stencil

or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union" matching size

and color of pipe labels.

6. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a

mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for

above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic

to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

7. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket, except for flexible elastomeric

and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and

unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation

facing, using PVC tape.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,

test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape

insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating

cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate

openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.



230719 Page 10 of 13

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as

that of pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive

to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install sections of pipe insulation and miter if required in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions.

2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install prefabricated valve covers manufactured of same material as that of pipe

insulation when available.

2. When prefabricated valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet

insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow

valve operation without disturbing insulation.


4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to

surface being insulated.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF GLASS-FIBER AND MINERAL WOOL INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands, and tighten

bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions

with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward-clinched

staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs.

Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as recommended by insulation material

manufacturer, and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.


1. Install prefabricated pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with glass-fiber or mineral-wool blanket insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.




230719 Page 11 of 13

1. Install prefabricated sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe


2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections

of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation

materials with wire or bands.


1. Install prefabricated sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe


2. When prefabricated sections are not available, install fabricated sections of pipe

insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation.


3.8 INSTALLATION OF FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Where PVC jackets are indicated and for horizontal applications, install with 1-inch overlap at

longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the

finish bead along seam and joint edge.

B. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end

joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof

sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless steel bands 12

inches o.c. and at end joints.

3.9 FINISHES

A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of

insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

B. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless steel jackets.

3.10 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Insulation conductivity and thickness per pipe size comply with schedules in this Section or

with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

B. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for

each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,

selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

3.11 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F:



230719 Page 12 of 13

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation is the following:

a. Glass-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick.

B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping:


a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick and conductivity of 0.21-0.26 Btu-in/(h-ft2-F°).

C. Refrigerant Liquid Piping:


a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick and conductivity of 0.21-0.26 Btu-in/(h-ft2-F°).

3.12 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping:


a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick and conductivity of 0.21-0.26 Btu-in/(h-ft2-F°) .

B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing:



C. Refrigerant Liquid Piping:



3.13 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the

field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.




3.14 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the

field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.




230719 Page 13 of 13


1. Painted Aluminum, Smooth: 0.024 inch thick.

D. Piping, Exposed:

1. Painted Aluminum, Smooth with Z-Shaped Locking Seam: 0.024 inch thick.




230800 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 230800 - COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Commissioning on this project shall be in compliance with the commissioning requirements of

C408 Maintenance Information and System Commissioning of the 2020 Energy Conservation

Construction Code of New York State (ECCCNYS).

1.3 SUMMARY

A. Section includes Cx process requirements for the following HVAC systems, assemblies, and

equipment:

1. HVAC

a. VRF Air-cooled Condenser Units

b. Energy Recovery Ventilators

c. VRF Fan Coils

d. Electric Unit Heaters

e. Electric Cabinet Unit Heaters

f. Electric Duct Heaters

2. Building Automation System

3. Testing, Adjusting & Balancing Verification


1. Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" for general Cx process

requirements and CxA responsibilities.

2. For construction checklists, comply with requirements in various Division 23 Sections

specifying HVAC systems, system components, equipment, and products.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. BAS: Building automation system.

B. Cx: Commissioning, as defined in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements."

C. CxA: Commissioning Authority, as defined in Section 019113 "General Commissioning

Requirements."



230800 Page 2 of 6

D. "Systems," "Assemblies," "Subsystems," "Equipment," and "Components": Where these terms

are used together or separately, they mean "as-built" systems, assemblies, subsystems,

equipment, and components.

E. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.


A. Construction Checklists:

1. Draft Cx plan, including draft construction checklists to be prepared by CxA under

Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements." Div. 23 Subcontractor is to

review Construction Checklist in accordance with requirements in Section 019113

"General Commissioning Requirements" and ASHRAE 202 and to resolve any issues

with the CxA.

2. Cx plan, including material, installation, and performance construction checklists for

systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and components relating to BAS and

HVAC to be part of the Cx process and in accordance with requirements in

Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements and ASHRAE 202."

B. Test Equipment and Instruments: For all test equipment and instruments to be used in

conducting Cx tests by Div. 23 Subcontractor, provide the following:

1. Equipment/instrument identification number.

2. Planned Cx application or use.

3. Manufacturer, make, model, and serial number.

4. Calibration history, including certificates from agencies that calibrate the equipment and

instrumentation.

5. Equipment manufacturers' proprietary instrumentation and tools. For each instrument or

tool, identify the following:

a. Instrument or tool identification number.

b. Equipment schedule designation of equipment for which the instrument or tool is

required.

c. Manufacturer, make, model, and serial number.

d. Calibration history, including certificates from agencies that calibrate the



A. BAS Testing Technician Qualifications: Technicians performing BAS Construction Checklist

verification tests, Construction Checklist verification test demonstrations, Cx tests, and Cx test

demonstrations are to have the following minimum qualifications:

1. Journey level or equivalent skill level with knowledge of BAS, HVAC, electrical

concepts, and building operations.

2. Minimum three years' experience installing, servicing, and operating systems

manufactured by approved manufacturer.



230800 Page 3 of 6

3. International Society of Automation (ISA)-Certified Control Systems Technician (CCST)

Level I.

B. HVAC Testing Technician Qualifications: Technicians to perform HVAC Construction

Checklist verification tests, Construction Checklist verification test demonstrations, Cx tests,

and Cx test demonstrations shall have the following minimum qualifications:

1. Journey level or equivalent skill level; vocational school four-year-program graduate or

an Associate's degree in mechanical systems, air conditioning, or similar field. Degree

may be offset by three years' experience in servicing mechanical systems in the HVAC

industry. Generally, required knowledge includes HVAC systems, electrical concepts,

building operations, and application and use of tools and instrumentation to measure

performance of HVAC equipment, assemblies, and systems.

2. Minimum three years' experience that is to include installing, servicing, and operating

systems manufactured by approved manufacturer.

C. Testing Equipment and Instrumentation Quality and Calibration:

1. Capable of testing and measuring performance within the specified acceptance criteria.

2. Be calibrated at manufacturer's recommended intervals with current calibration tags

permanently affixed to the instrument being used.

3. Be maintained in good repair and operating condition throughout duration of use on

Project.

4. Be recalibrated/repaired if dropped or damaged in any way since last calibrated.

D. Proprietary Test Instrumentation and Tools:

1. Equipment Manufacturer's Proprietary Instrumentation and Tools: For installed

equipment included in the Cx process, test instrumentation and tools manufactured or

prescribed by equipment manufacturer to service, calibrate, adjust, repair, or otherwise

work on its equipment or required as a condition of equipment warranty, shall comply

with the following:

a. Be calibrated by manufacturer with current calibration tags permanently affixed.

b. Include a separate list of proprietary test instrumentation and tools in operation and

maintenance manuals.

2. HVAC proprietary test instrumentation and tools become property of Owner at the time

of Substantial Completion.



230800 Page 4 of 6


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Cx PROCESS:

A. Perform Cx process in accordance with Section 019113 "General Commissioning

Requirements" for BAS and HVAC and in accordance with C408 Maintenance Information and

System Commissioning of the 2020 Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State

(ECCCNYS).

3.2 CONSTRUCTION CHECKLISTS

A. Preliminary detailed construction checklists are to be prepared under Section 019113 "General

Commissioning Requirements" for each BAS and HVAC system, assembly, subsystem,

equipment, and component required to be commissioned, as detailed in ASHRAE 202.

Contractor performs the following:

1. Review BAS and HVAC preliminary construction checklists and provide written

comments on checklist items where appropriate.

2. Return preliminary Construction Checklist with review comments within 10 days of

receipt.

3. When review comments have been resolved, the CxA will provide final construction

checklists marked "Approved for Use, (date)."

4. Use only construction checklists marked "Approved for Use, (date)" When performing

tests. Mark construction checklists in the appropriate place as indicated Project events are

completed, and provide pertinent details and other information.

3.3 Cx TESTING PREPARATION

A. Certify that HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and

started and that they are operating in accordance with the Contract Documents and approved

submittals.

B. Certify that HVAC instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated,

point-to-point checkout has been successfully completed, and systems are operating in

accordance with their design sequence of operation, Contract Documents, and approved

submittals. Certify that all sensors are operating within specified accuracy and all systems are

set to and maintaining set points as required by the design documents.

C. Certify that TAB procedures have been completed and that TAB reports have been submitted,

discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved.

D. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested in accordance with

approved test procedures (e.g., normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position,

unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions).



230800 Page 5 of 6

3.4 Cx TEST CONDITIONS

A. Perform tests using design conditions, whenever possible.

1. Simulated conditions may, with approval of Architect, be imposed using an artificial load

when it is impractical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions,

calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated

conditions as directed by CxA, and document simulated conditions and methods of

simulation. After tests, return configurations and settings to normal operating conditions.

2. Cx test procedures may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is

impractical.

3. Cx test procedures may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when

design or simulating conditions and altering set points are impractical.

B. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the HVAC system,

document the deficiency and report it to Architect. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule

tests.

C. If seasonal testing is specified, complete appropriate initial performance tests and

documentation, and schedule seasonal tests.

3.5 Cx TESTS COMMON TO HVAC SYSTEMS

A. Measure capacities and effectiveness of systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and

components, including operational and control functions, to verify compliance with acceptance

criteria.

B. Conduct Cx Tests (Functional Performance Tests) for all equipment,/system modes and system

to system interfaces.

C. Test systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and components for operating modes,

interlocks, control responses, responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and response in

accordance with acceptance criteria.

D. Coordinate schedule with, and perform Cx activities at the direction of, CxA.

E. Comply with Construction Checklist requirements, including material verification, installation

checks, startup, and performance test requirements specified in Division 23 Sections specifying

HVAC systems and equipment.

F. Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to perform and document the

following:

1. Cx Construction Checklist verification tests.

2. Cx Construction Checklist verification test demonstrations.



230800 Page 6 of 6

3.6 TAB VERIFICATION

A. Prerequisites: Completion of "Examination" Article requirements and correction of deficiencies,

as specified in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

B. Completion of "Preparation" Article requirements for preparation of a TAB plan that includes

strategies and step-by-step procedures, and system-readiness checks and reports, as specified in

Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

C. Scope: HVAC air systems and hydronic piping systems.

D. Purpose: Differential flow relationships intended to maintain air and water pressurization

differentials between the various areas of Project.

E. Conditions of the Test:

1. Cx Test Demonstration Sampling Rate: As specified in "Inspections" Article in


2. Systems operating in full heating mode with minimum outside-air volume.

3. Systems operating in full cooling mode with minimum outside-air volume.

F. Acceptance Criteria:

1. Under all conditions, rechecked measurements comply with "Inspections" Article in


2. Additionally, no rechecked measurement shall differ from measurements documented in

the final report by more than the tolerances allowed.

3. Under all conditions, where the Contract Documents indicate a differential in airflow

between supply and exhaust and/or return in a space, the differential relationship shall be

maintained.




230923 Page 1 of 80

SECTION 230923 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. DDC system for monitoring and controlling of HVAC systems.

2. Delivery of selected control devices to equipment and systems manufacturers for factory

installation and to HVAC systems installers for field installation.


1. Section 230923.43 "Weather Stations" for weather stations that connect to DDC systems.

2. Communications Cabling:

a. Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for balanced twisted

pair communications cable.

3. Raceways:

a. Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for raceways for

low-voltage control cable.

4. Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for identification requirements for

electrical components.

5. Section 270553 "Identification for Communications Systems" for identification

requirements for communications components.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Algorithm: A logical procedure for solving a recurrent mathematical problem. A prescribed set

of well-defined rules or processes for solving a problem in a finite number of steps.

B. Analog: A continuously varying signal value, such as current, flow, pressure, or temperature.

C. BACnet Specific Definitions:



230923 Page 2 of 80

1. BACnet: Building Automation Control Network Protocol, ASHRAE 135. A

communications protocol allowing devices to communicate data over and services over a

network.

2. BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBBs): BIBB defines a small portion of

BACnet functionality that is needed to perform a particular task. BIBBs are combined to

build the BACnet functional requirements for a device.

3. BACnet/IP: Defines and allows using a reserved UDP socket to transmit BACnet

messages over IP networks. A BACnet/IP network is a collection of one or more IP

subnetworks that share the same BACnet network number.

4. BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL): Organization responsible for testing products for

compliance with ASHRAE 135, operated under direction of BACnet International.

5. PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement): Written document that

identifies the particular options specified by BACnet that are implemented in a device.

D. Binary: Two-state signal where a high signal level represents ON" or "OPEN" condition and a

low signal level represents "OFF" or "CLOSED" condition. "Digital" is sometimes used

interchangeably with "Binary" to indicate a two-state signal.

E. Controller: Generic term for any standalone, microprocessor-based, digital controller residing

on a network, used for local or global control. Three types of controllers are indicated: Network

Controller, Programmable Application Controller, and Application-Specific Controller.

F. Control System Integrator: An entity that assists in expansion of existing enterprise system and

support of additional operator interfaces to I/O being added to existing enterprise system.

G. COV: Changes of value.

H. DDC System Provider: Authorized representative of, and trained by, DDC system manufacturer

and responsible for execution of DDC system Work indicated.

I. Distributed Control: Processing of system data is decentralized and control decisions are made

at subsystem level. System operational programs and information are provided to remote

subsystems and status is reported back. On loss of communication, subsystems shall be capable

of operating in a standalone mode using the last best available data.

J. DOCSIS: Data-Over Cable Service Interface Specifications.

K. E/P: Voltage to pneumatic.

L. Gateway: Bidirectional protocol translator that connects control systems that use different

communication protocols.

M. HLC: Heavy load conditions.

N. I/O: System through which information is received and transmitted. I/O refers to analog input

(AI), binary input (BI), analog output (AO) and binary output (BO). Analog signals are

continuous and represent control influences such as flow, level, moisture, pressure, and

temperature. Binary signals convert electronic signals to digital pulses (values) and generally



230923 Page 3 of 80

represent two-position operating and alarm status. "Digital," (DI and (DO), is sometimes used

interchangeably with "Binary," (BI) and (BO), respectively.

O. I/P: Current to pneumatic.

P. LAN: Local area network.

Q. LNS: LonWorks Network Services.

R. LON Specific Definitions:

1. FTT-10: Echelon Transmitter-Free Topology Transceiver.

2. LonMark: Association comprising suppliers and installers of LonTalk products.

Association provides guidelines for implementing LonTalk protocol to ensure

interoperability through a standard or consistent implementation.

3. LonTalk: An open standard protocol developed by the Echelon Corporation that uses a

"Neuron Chip" for communication. LonTalk is a register trademark of Echelon.

4. LonWorks: Network technology developed by Echelon.

5. Node: Device that communicates using CEA-709.1-C protocol and that is connected to a

CEA-709.1-C network.

6. Node Address: The logical address of a node on the network, consisting of a Domain

number, Subnet number, and Node number. "Node number" portion of an address is a

number assigned to device during installation, is unique within a subnet, and is not a

factory-set unique Node ID.

7. Node ID: A unique 48-bit identifier assigned at factory to each CEA-709.1-C device.

Sometimes called a "Neuron ID."

8. Program ID: An identifier (number) stored in a device (usually EEPROM) that identifies

node manufacturer, functionality of device (application and sequence), transceiver used,

and intended device usage.

9. Standard Configuration Property Type (SCPT): Pronounced "skip-it." A standard format

type maintained by LonMark International for configuration properties.

10. Standard Network Variable Type (SNVT): Pronounced "snivet." A standard format type

maintained by LonMark used to define data information transmitted and received by

individual nodes. "SNVT" is used in two ways. It is an acronym for "Standard Network

Variable Type" and is often used to indicate a network variable itself (i.e., it can mean "a

network variable of a standard network variable type").

11. Subnet: Consists of a logical grouping of up to 127 nodes, where logical grouping is

defined by node addressing. Each subnet is assigned a number, which is unique within a

Domain. See "Node Address."

12. TP/FT-10: Free Topology Twisted Pair network defined by CEA-709.3 and is most

common media type for a CEA-709.1-C control network.

13. TP/XF-1250: High-speed, 1.25-Mbps, twisted-pair, doubly terminated bus network

defined by "LonMark Interoperability Guidelines" typically used only to connect multiple

TP/FT-10 networks.

14. User-Defined Configuration Property Type (UCPT): Pronounced "U-Keep-It." A

Configuration Property format type that is defined by device manufacturer.

15. User-Defined Network Variable Type (UNVT): Network variable format defined by

device manufacturer. UNVTs create non-standard communications that other vendors'



230923 Page 4 of 80

devices may not correctly interpret and may negatively impact system operation. UNVTs

are not allowed.

S. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or

for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.

T. Mobile Device: A data-enabled phone or tablet computer capable of connecting to a cellular

data network and running a native control application or accessing a web interface.

U. Modbus TCP/IP: An open protocol for exchange of process data.

V. MS/TP: Master-slave/token-passing, IEE 8802-3. Datalink protocol LAN option that uses

twisted-pair wire for low-speed communication.

W. MTBF: Mean time between failures.

X. Network Controller: Digital controller, which supports a family of programmable application

controllers and application-specific controllers, that communicates on peer-to-peer network for

transmission of global data.

Y. Network Repeater: Device that receives data packet from one network and rebroadcasts it to

another network. No routing information is added to protocol.

Z. Peer to Peer: Networking architecture that treats all network stations as equal partners.

AA. POT: Portable operator's terminal.

BB. PUE: Performance usage effectiveness.

CC. RAM: Random access memory.

DD. RF: Radio frequency.

EE. Router: Device connecting two or more networks at network layer.

FF. Server: Computer used to maintain system configuration, historical and programming database.

GG. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet protocol.

HH. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.

II. USB: Universal Serial Bus.

JJ. User Datagram Protocol (UDP): This protocol assumes that the IP is used as the underlying

protocol.

KK. VAV: Variable air volume.

LL. WLED: White light emitting diode.



230923 Page 5 of 80




A. Multiple Submissions:

1. If multiple submissions are required to execute work within schedule, first submit a

coordinated schedule clearly defining intent of multiple submissions. Include a proposed

date of each submission with a detailed description of submittal content to be included in

each submission.

2. Clearly identify each submittal requirement indicated and in which submission the

information will be provided.

3. Include an updated schedule in each subsequent submission with changes highlighted to

easily track the changes made to previous submitted schedule.

B. Product Data: For each type of product include the following:

1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and

profiles, and finishes.

2. Operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories indicating

process operating range, accuracy over range, control signal over range, default control

signal with loss of power, calibration data specific to each unique application, electrical

power requirements, and limitations of ambient operating environment, including

temperature and humidity.

3. Product description with complete technical data, performance curves, and product

specification sheets.

4. Installation, operation and maintenance instructions including factors effecting

performance.

5. Bill of materials of indicating quantity, manufacturer, and extended model number for

each unique product.

6. When manufacturer's product datasheets apply to a product series rather than a specific

product model, clearly indicate and highlight only applicable information.

7. Each submitted piece of product literature shall clearly cross reference specification and

drawings that submittal is to cover.

C. Software Submittal:

1. Cross-referenced listing of software to be loaded on each operator workstation, server,

gateway, and DDC controller.

2. Description and technical data of all software provided, and cross-referenced to products

in which software will be installed.

3. Operating system software, operator interface and programming software, color graphic

software, DDC controller software, maintenance management software, and third-party

D. Shop Drawings:



230923 Page 6 of 80

1. General Requirements:

a. Include cover drawing with Project name, location, Owner, Architect, Contractor

and issue date with each Shop Drawings submission.

b. Include a drawing index sheet listing each drawing number and title that matches

information in each title block.

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details where applicable.

3. Include details of product assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

4. Detail means of vibration isolation and show attachments to rotating equipment.

5. Plan Drawings indicating the following:

a. Screened backgrounds of walls, structural grid lines, HVAC equipment, ductwork,

and piping.

b. Room names and numbers with coordinated placement to avoid interference with

control products indicated.

c. Each desktop workstation, server, gateway, router, DDC controller, control panel

instrument connecting to DDC controller, and damper and valve connecting to

DDC controller, if included in Project.

d. Exact placement of products in rooms, ducts, and piping to reflect proposed

installed condition.

e. Network communication cable and raceway routing.

f. Information, drawn to scale.

g. Proposed routing of wiring, cabling, conduit, and tubing coordinated with building

services for review before installation.

6. Schematic drawings for each controlled HVAC system indicating the following:

a. I/O points labeled with point names shown. Indicate instrument range, normal

operating set points, and alarm set points. Indicate fail position of each damper and

valve, if included in Project.

b. I/O listed in table format showing point name, type of device, manufacturer, model

number, and cross-reference to product data sheet number.

c. A graphic showing location of control I/O in proper relationship to HVAC system.

d. Wiring diagram with each I/O point having a unique identification and indicating

labels for all wiring terminals.

e. Unique identification of each I/O that shall be consistently used between different

drawings showing same point.

f. Elementary wiring diagrams of controls for HVAC equipment motor circuits

including interlocks, switches, relays, and interface to DDC controllers.

g. Narrative sequence of operation.

h. Graphic sequence of operation, showing all inputs and output logical blocks.

7. Control panel drawings indicating the following:

a. Panel dimensions, materials, size, and location of field cable, raceways, and tubing

connections.



230923 Page 7 of 80

b. Interior subpanel layout, drawn to scale and showing all internal components,

cabling and wiring raceways, nameplates, and allocated spare space.

c. Front, rear, and side elevations and nameplate legend.

d. Unique drawing for each panel.

8. DDC system network riser diagram indicating the following:

a. Each device connected to network with unique identification for each.

b. Interconnection of each different network in DDC system.

c. For each network, indicate communication protocol, speed and physical means of

interconnecting network devices, such as copper cable type, or optical fiber cable

type. Indicate raceway type and size for each.

d. Each network port for connection of an operator workstation or other type of

operator interface with unique identification for each.

9. DDC system electrical power riser diagram indicating the following:

a. Each point of connection to field power with requirements

(volts/phase//hertz/amperes/connection type) listed for each.

b. Each control power supply including, as applicable, transformers, power-line

conditioners, transient voltage suppression and high filter noise units, DC power

supplies, and UPS units with unique identification for each.

c. Each product requiring power with requirements

(volts/phase//hertz/amperes/connection type) listed for each.

d. Power wiring type and size, race type, and size for each.

10. Monitoring and control signal diagrams indicating the following:

a. Control signal cable and wiring between controllers and I/O.

b. Point-to-point schematic wiring diagrams for each product.

c. Control signal tubing to sensors, switches, and transmitters.

d. Process signal tubing to sensors, switches, and transmitters.

e. Pneumatic main air and control signal tubing to pneumatic damper and valve

actuators, pilot-positioners if applicable, and associated transducers.

11. Color graphics indicating the following:

a. Itemized list of color graphic displays to be provided.

b. For each display screen to be provided, a true color copy showing layout of

pictures, graphics, and data displayed.

c. Intended operator access between related hierarchical display screens.

E. System Description:

1. Full description of DDC system architecture, network configuration, operator interfaces

and peripherals, servers, controller types and applications, gateways, routers and other

network devices, and power supplies.

2. Complete listing and description of each report, log and trend for format and timing, and

events which initiate generation.



230923 Page 8 of 80

3. System and product operation under each potential failure condition including, but not

limited to, the following:

a. Loss of power.

b. Loss of network communication signal.

c. Loss of controller signals to inputs and outpoints.

d. Operator workstation failure.

e. Server failure.

f. Gateway failure.

g. Network failure

h. Controller failure.

i. Instrument failure.

j. Control damper and valve actuator failure.

4. Complete bibliography of documentation and media to be delivered to Owner.

5. Description of testing plans and procedures.

6. Description of Owner training.

F. Samples:

1. For each of the following exposed product, installed in finished space for approval of

selection of aesthetic characteristics:

a. Gas instruments specified in Section 230923.16 "Gas Instruments."

b. Moisture instruments specified in Section 230923.19 "Moisture Instruments."

c. Motion instruments specified in Section 230923.21 "Motion Instruments."

d. Pressure instruments specified in Section 230923.23 "Pressure Instruments."

e. Temperature instruments specified in Section 230923.27 "Temperature

Instruments."

G. Delegated-Design Submittal: For DDC system products and installation indicated as being

delegated.

1. Supporting documentation showing DDC system design complies with performance

requirements indicated, including calculations and other documentation necessary to

prove compliance.

2. Schedule and design calculations for control dampers and actuators.

a. Flow at Project design and minimum flow conditions.

b. Face velocity at Project design and minimum airflow conditions.

c. Pressure drop across damper at Project design and minimum airflow conditions.

d. AMCA 500-D damper installation arrangement used to calculate and schedule

pressure drop, as applicable to installation.

e. Maximum close-off pressure.

f. Leakage airflow at maximum system pressure differential (fan close-off pressure).

g. Torque required at worst case condition for sizing actuator.

h. Actuator selection indicating torque provided.

i. Actuator signal to control damper (on, close, or modulate).

j. Actuator position on loss of power.



230923 Page 9 of 80

k. Actuator position on loss of control signal.

3. Schedule and design calculations for control valves and actuators.

a. Flow at Project design and minimum flow conditions.

b. Pressure-differential drop across valve at Project design flow condition.

c. Maximum system pressure-differential drop (pump close-off pressure) across valve

at Project minimum flow condition.

d. Design and minimum control valve coefficient with corresponding valve position.


f. Leakage flow at maximum system pressure differential.



i. Actuator signal to control damper (on, close or modulate).

j. Actuator position on loss of power.

k. Actuator position on loss of control signal.

4. Schedule and design calculations for selecting flow instruments.

a. Instrument flow range.

b. Project design and minimum flow conditions with corresponding accuracy, control

signal to transmitter, and output signal for remote control.

c. Extreme points of extended flow range with corresponding accuracy, control signal

to transmitter, and output signal for remote control.

d. Pressure-differential loss across instrument at Project design flow conditions.

e. Where flow sensors are mated with pressure transmitters, provide information for

each instrument separately and as an operating pair.


A. Coordination Drawings:

1. Plan drawings and corresponding product installation details, drawn to scale, on which

the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from

installers of the items involved:

a. Product installation location shown in relationship to room, duct, pipe and

equipment.

b. Structural members to which products will be attached.

c. Wall-mounted instruments located in finished space showing relationship to light

switches, fire-alarm devices and other installed devices.

d. Size and location of wall access panels for products installed behind walls and

requiring access.

2. Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are

shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

a. Ceiling components.



230923 Page 10 of 80

b. Size and location of access panels for products installed above inaccessible ceiling

assemblies and requiring access.

c. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

1) Lighting fixtures.

2) Air outlets and inlets.

3) Speakers.

4) Sprinklers.

5) Access panels.

6) Motion sensors.

7) Pressure sensors.

8) Temperature sensors and other DDC control system instruments.

B. Qualification Data:

1. Systems Provider Qualification Data:

a. Resume of project manager assigned to Project.

b. Resumes of application engineering staff assigned to Project.

c. Resumes of installation and programming technicians assigned to Project.

d. Resumes of service technicians assigned to Project.

e. Brief description of past project including physical address, floor area, number of

floors, building system cooling and heating capacity, and building's primary

function.

f. Description of past project DDC system, noting similarities to Project scope and

complexity indicated.

g. Names of staff assigned to past project that will also be assigned to execute work

of this Project.

h. Owner contact information for past project including name, phone number, and e-

mail address.

i. Contractor contact information for past project including name, phone number, and

e-mail address.

j. Architect and Engineer contact information for past project including name, phone

number, and e-mail address.

2. Manufacturer's qualification data.

3. Testing agency's qualifications data.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Product Certificates:

1. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certifying that each proposed DDC system

component complies with ASHRAE 135.

2. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certifying that each proposed DDC system

component complies with LonWorks.

E. Product Test Reports: For each product that requires testing to be performed by manufacturer

and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.



230923 Page 11 of 80

F. Preconstruction Test Reports: For each separate test performed.

G. Source quality-control reports.

H. Field quality-control reports.

I. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For DDC system to include in emergency, operation, and


1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following:

a. Project Record Drawings of as-built versions of submittal Shop Drawings provided

in electronic PDF format.

b. Testing and commissioning reports and checklists of completed final versions of

reports, checklists, and trend logs.

c. As-built versions of submittal Product Data.

d. Names, addresses, e-mail addresses, and 24-hour telephone numbers of Installer

and service representatives for DDC system and products.

e. Operator's manual with procedures for operating control systems including logging

on and off, handling alarms, producing point reports, trending data, overriding

computer control, and changing set points and variables.

f. Programming manuals with description of programming language and syntax, of

statements for algorithms and calculations used, of point database creation and

modification, of program creation and modification, and of editor use.

g. Engineering, installation, and maintenance manuals that explain how to:

1) Design and install new points, panels, and other hardware.

2) Perform preventive maintenance and calibration.

3) Debug hardware problems.

4) Repair or replace hardware.

h. Documentation of all programs created using custom programming language

including set points, tuning parameters, and object database.

i. Backup copy of graphic files, programs, and database on electronic media such as

DVDs.

j. List of recommended spare parts with part numbers and suppliers.

k. Complete original-issue documentation, installation, and maintenance information

for furnished third-party hardware including computer equipment and sensors.

l. Complete original-issue copies of furnished software, including operating systems,

custom programming language, operator workstation software, and graphics

software.

m. Licenses, guarantees, and warranty documents.



230923 Page 12 of 80

n. Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for system components,

including schedule of tasks such as inspection, cleaning, and calibration; time

between tasks; and task descriptions.

o. Owner training materials.


A. Furnish extra materials and parts that match products installed and that are packaged with

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

B. Include product manufacturers' recommended parts lists for proper product operation over four-

year period following warranty period. Parts list shall be indicated for each year.

C. Furnish parts, as indicated by manufacturer's recommended parts list, for product operation

during one-year period following warranty period.

D. Furnish quantity indicated of matching product(s) in Project inventory for each unique size and

type of following:

1. Network Controller: One.

2. Programmable Application Controller: One.

3. Application-Specific Controller: One.

4. Room Carbon Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: One.

5. Room Temperature Sensor: One.

6. General-Purpose Relay: One.

7. Multifunction Time-Delay Relay: One.

8. Latching Relay: One.

9. Current-Sensing Relay: One.

10. Combination On-Off Status Sensor and On-Off Relay: One.

11. Transformer: One.

12. DC Power Supply: One.


A. DDC System Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. Nationally recognized manufacturer of DDC systems and products.

2. DDC systems with similar requirements to those indicated for a continuous period of five

years within time of bid.

3. DDC systems and products that have been successfully tested and in use on at least three

past projects.

4. Having complete published catalog literature, installation, operation, and maintenance

manuals for all products intended for use.

5. Having full-time in-house employees for the following:

a. Product research and development.

b. Product and application engineering.



230923 Page 13 of 80

c. Product manufacturing, testing, and quality control.

d. Technical support for DDC system installation training, commissioning, and

troubleshooting of installations.

e. Owner operator training.

B. DDC System Provider Qualifications:

1. Authorized representative of, and trained by, DDC system manufacturer.

2. In-place facility located within 100 miles of Project.

3. Demonstrated past experience with installation of DDC system products being installed

for period within three consecutive years before time of bid.

4. Demonstrated past experience on five projects of similar complexity, scope, and value.

5. Each person assigned to Project shall have demonstrated past experience.

6. Staffing resources of competent and experienced full-time employees that are assigned to

execute work according to schedule.

7. Service and maintenance staff assigned to support Project during warranty period.

8. Product parts inventory to support on-going DDC system operation for a period of not

less than 5 years after Substantial Completion.

9. DDC system manufacturer's backing to take over execution of Work if necessary to

comply with requirements indicated. Include Project-specific written letter, signed by

manufacturer's corporate officer, if requested.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace products that fail

in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or reduction in

service to Owner.

2. Include updates or upgrades to software and firmware if necessary to resolve

deficiencies.

a. Install updates only after receiving Owner's written authorization.

3. Warranty service shall occur during normal business hours and commence within 24

hours of Owner's warranty service request.

4. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

a. For Gateway: Two-year parts and labor warranty for each.



230923 Page 14 of 80

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DDC SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Day Automation.

2. Siemens

3. Honeywell International Inc.

4. Johnson Controls, Inc.

5. Reliable Controls Corporation.

6. Siemens Industry, Inc. (Building Technologies Division).

7. Trane.

2.2 DDC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Microprocessor-based monitoring and control including analog/digital conversion and program

logic. A control loop or subsystem in which digital and analog information is received and

processed by a microprocessor, and digital control signals are generated based on control

algorithms and transmitted to field devices to achieve a set of predefined conditions.

1. DDC system shall consist of a high-speed, peer-to-peer network of distributed DDC

controllers, other network devices, operator interfaces, and software.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.3 WEB ACCESS

A. DDC system shall be web based.

1. Web-Based Access to DDC System:

a. DDC system software shall be based on server thin-client architecture, designed

around open standards of web technology. DDC system server shall be accessed

using a web browser over DDC system network, using Owner's LAN, and

remotely over Internet through Owner's LAN.

b. Intent of thin-client architecture is to provide operators complete access to DDC

system via a web browser. No special software other than a web browser shall be

required to access graphics, point displays, and trends; to configure trends, points,

and controllers; and to edit programming.

c. Web access shall be password protected.



230923 Page 15 of 80


A. Delegated Design, Qualified Professional: Engage a qualified professional to design DDC

system to satisfy requirements indicated.

1. System Performance Objectives:

a. DDC system shall manage HVAC systems.

b. DDC system control shall operate HVAC systems to achieve optimum operating

costs while using least possible energy and maintaining specified performance.

c. DDC system shall respond to power failures, HVAC equipment failures, and

adverse and emergency conditions encountered through connected I/O points.

d. DDC system shall operate while unattended by an operator and through operator

interaction.

e. DDC system shall record trends and transaction of events and produce report

information such as performance, energy, occupancies, and equipment operation.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Products installed in ducts, equipment, and return-air paths

shall comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with

appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

C. DDC System Speed:

1. Response Time of Connected I/O:

a. AI point values connected to DDC system shall be updated at least every two

seconds for use by DDC controllers. Points used globally shall also comply with

this requirement.

b. BI point values connected to DDC system shall be updated at least every two

seconds for use by DDC controllers. Points used globally shall also comply with

this requirement.

c. AO points connected to DDC system shall begin to respond to controller output

commands within one second(s). Global commands shall also comply with this

requirement.

d. BO point values connected to DDC system shall respond to controller output

commands within one second(s). Global commands shall also comply with this

requirement.

2. Display of Connected I/O:

a. Analog point COV connected to DDC system shall be updated and displayed at

least every five seconds for use by operator.

b. Binary point COV connected to DDC system shall be updated and displayed at

least every five seconds for use by operator.

c. Alarms of analog and digital points connected to DDC system shall be displayed

within 15 seconds of activation or change of state.



230923 Page 16 of 80

d. Graphic display refresh shall update within four seconds.

e. Point change of values and alarms displayed from workstation to workstation when

multiple operators are viewing from multiple workstations shall not exceed graphic

refresh rate indicated.

D. Network Bandwidth: Design each network of DDC system to include at least 30 percent

available spare bandwidth with DDC system operating under normal and heavy load conditions

indicated. Calculate bandwidth usage and apply a safety factor to ensure that requirement is

satisfied when subjected to testing under worst case conditions.

E. DDC System Data Storage:

1. Include capability to archive not less than 24 consecutive months of historical data for all

I/O points connected to system, including alarms, event histories, transaction logs, trends

and other information indicated.

2. Local Storage:

a. Provide server with data storage indicated. Server(s) shall use IT industry standard

database platforms and be capable of functions described in "DDC Data Access"

Paragraph.

F. DDC Data Access:

1. When logged into the system, operator shall be able to also interact with any DDC

controller connected to DDC system as required for functional operation of DDC system.

2. System(s) shall be used for application configuration; for archiving, reporting and

trending of data; for operator transaction archiving and reporting; for network

information management; for alarm annunciation; and for operator interface tasks and

controls application management.

G. Future Expandability:

1. DDC system size shall be expandable to an ultimate capacity of at least two times total

I/O points indicated.

2. Additional DDC controllers, I/O and associated wiring shall be all that is needed to

achieve ultimate capacity. Initial network infrastructure shall be designed and installed to

support ultimate capacity.

3. Operator interfaces installed initially shall not require hardware and software additions

and revisions for ultimate capacity.

H. Input Point Displayed Accuracy: Input point displayed values shall meet following end-to-end

overall system accuracy, including errors associated with meter, sensor, transmitter, lead wire or

cable, and analog to digital conversion.

1. Gas:

a. Carbon Dioxide: Within 50 ppm.

2. Temperature, Dew Point:



230923 Page 17 of 80

a. Air: Within 0.5 deg F.

b. Space: Within 0.5 deg F.

c. Outdoor: Within 2 deg F.

3. Temperature, Dry Bulb:




d. Heating Hot Water: Within 0.5 deg F.

e. Other Temperatures Not Indicated: Within 1 deg F.

4. Temperature, Wet Bulb:




I. Precision of I/O Reported Values: Values reported in database and displayed shall have

following precision:

1. Current:

a. Milliamperes: Nearest 1/100th of a milliampere.

b. Amperes: Nearest 1/10th of an ampere up to 100 A; nearest ampere for 100 A and

more.

2. Gas:

a. Carbon Dioxide (ppm): Nearest ppm.

3. Temperature:

a. Air, Ducts and Equipment: Nearest 1/10th of a degree.

b. Outdoor: Nearest degree.

c. Space: Nearest 1/10th of a degree.

d. Heating Hot Water: Nearest degree.

4. Voltage: Nearest 1/10 volt up to 100 V; nearest volt above 100 V.

J. Control Stability: Control variables indicated within the following limits:

1. Gas:

a. Carbon Dioxide: Within 50 ppm.

2. Temperature, Dry Bulb:




230923 Page 18 of 80


c. Chilled Water: Within 0.5 deg F.

d. Condenser Water: Within 0.5 deg F.

e. Heating Hot Water: Within 0.5 deg F.

f. Energy Recovery Runaround Liquid: Within 0.5 deg F.

3. Temperature, Wet Bulb:



K. Environmental Conditions for Controllers, Gateways, and Routers:

1. Products shall operate without performance degradation under ambient environmental

temperature, pressure and humidity conditions encountered for installed location.

a. If product alone cannot comply with requirement, install product in a protective

enclosure that is isolated and protected from conditions impacting performance.

Enclosure shall be internally insulated, electrically heated, cooled and ventilated as

required by product and application.

2. Products shall be protected with enclosures satisfying the following minimum

requirements unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Products not available

with integral enclosures complying with requirements indicated shall be housed in

protective secondary enclosures. Installed location shall dictate the following NEMA 250

enclosure requirements:

a. Outdoors, Protected: Type 2.

b. Outdoors, Unprotected: Type 4.

c. Indoors, Heated with Filtered Ventilation: Type 1.

d. Indoors, Heated with Non-Filtered Ventilation: Type 2.

e. Indoors, Heated and Air Conditioned: Type 1.

f. Mechanical Equipment Rooms:

1) Chiller and Boiler Rooms: Type 12.

2) Air-Moving Equipment Rooms: Type 1.

g. Localized Areas Exposed to Washdown: Type 4.

h. Within Duct Systems and Air-Moving Equipment Not Exposed to Possible

Condensation: Type 2.

i. Within Duct Systems and Air-Moving Equipment Exposed to Possible


j. Hazardous Locations: Explosion-proof rating for condition.

L. Environmental Conditions for Instruments and Actuators:

1. Instruments and actuators shall operate without performance degradation under the

ambient environmental temperature, pressure, humidity, and vibration conditions

specified and encountered for installed location.



230923 Page 19 of 80

a. If instruments and actuators alone cannot comply with requirement, install

instruments and actuators in protective enclosures that are isolated and protected

from conditions impacting performance. Enclosure shall be internally insulated,

electrically heated, cooled and ventilated as required by instrument and

application.

2. Instruments and accessories shall be protected with enclosures satisfying the following

minimum requirements unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Instruments not

available with integral enclosures complying with requirements indicated shall be housed

in protective secondary enclosures. Instrument's installed location shall dictate following

NEMA 250 enclosure requirements:















M. DDC System Reliability:

1. Design, install and configure DDC controllers, routers, to yield a MTBF of at least

40,000 hours, based on a confidence level of at least 90 percent. MTBF value shall

include any failure for any reason to any part of products indicated.

2. If required to comply with MTBF indicated, include DDC system and product

redundancy to maintain DCC system, and associated systems and equipment that are

being controlled, operational and under automatic control.

3. Critical systems and equipment that require a higher degree of DDC system redundancy

than MTBF indicated shall be indicated on Drawings.

N. Electric Power Quality:

1. Power-Line Surges:

a. Protect susceptible DDC system products connected to ac power circuits from

power-line surges to comply with requirements of IEEE C62.41.

b. Do not use fuses for surge protection.

c. Test protection in the normal mode and in the common mode, using the following

two waveforms:



230923 Page 20 of 80

1) 10-by-1000-mic.sec. waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 V and a peak

current of 60 A.

2) 8-by-20-mic.sec. waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 V and a peak

current of 500 A.

2. Power Conditioning:

a. Protect susceptible DDC system products connected to ac power circuits from

irregularities and noise rejection. Characteristics of power-line conditioner shall be

as follows:

1) At 85 percent load, output voltage shall not deviate by more than plus or

minus 1 percent of nominal when input voltage fluctuates between minus 20

percent to plus 10 percent of nominal.

2) During load changes from zero to full load, output voltage shall not deviate

by more than plus or minus 3 percent of nominal.

3) Accomplish full correction of load switching disturbances within five

cycles, and 95 percent correction within two cycles of onset of disturbance.

4) Total harmonic distortion shall not exceed 3-1/2 percent at full load.

3. Ground Fault: Protect products from ground fault by providing suitable grounding.

Products shall not fail due to ground fault condition.

O. Continuity of Operation after Electric Power Interruption:

1. Equipment and associated factory-installed controls, field-installed controls, electrical

equipment, and power supply connected to building normal and backup power systems

shall automatically return equipment and associated controls to operating state occurring

immediately before loss of normal power, without need for manual intervention by

operator when power is restored either through backup power source or through normal

power if restored before backup power is brought online.

2.5 PANEL-MOUNTED, MANUAL OVERRIDE SWITCHES

A. Manual Override of Control Dampers:

1. Include panel-mounted, two-position, selector switch for each automatic control damper

being controlled by DDC controller.

2. Label each switch with damper designation served by switch.

3. Label switch positions to indicate either "Manual" or "Auto" control signal to damper.

4. With switch in "Auto" position signal to control damper actuator shall be control loop

output signal from DDC controller.

5. With switch in "Manual" position, signal to damper actuator shall be controlled at panel

with either an integral or separate switch to include local control.

a. For Binary Control Dampers: Manual two-position switch shall have "Close" and

"Open" switch positions indicated. With switch in "Close" position, damper shall

close. With switch in "Open" position, damper shall open.



230923 Page 21 of 80

b. For Analog Control Dampers: A gradual switch shall have "Close" and "Open"

switch limits indicated. Operator shall be able to rotate switch knob to adjust

damper to any position from close to open.

6. DDC controller shall monitor and report position of each manual override selector

switch. With switch placed in "manual" position, DDC controller shall signal an override

condition to alert operator that damper is under manual, not automatic, control.

7. Configure manual override switches to allow operator to manually operate damper while

at panel without DDC controller installed and operational.

8. Terminal equipment including VAV units, and unit heaters do not require manual

override unless otherwise indicated by sequence of operation.

2.6 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. System architecture shall consist of no more than two or three levels of LANs.

1. Level one LAN shall connect network controllers and operator workstations.

2. Level one or Level two LAN shall connect programmable application controllers to other

programmable application controllers, and to network controllers.

3. Level two or Level three LAN shall connect application-specific controllers to

programmable application controllers and network controllers.

4. Level two or Level three LAN shall connect application-specific controllers to

application-specific controllers.

B. Minimum Data Transfer and Communication Speed:

1. LAN Connecting Operator Workstations and Network Controllers: 100 Mbps.

2. LAN Connecting Programmable Application Controllers: 1000 kbps.

3. LAN Connecting Application-Specific Controllers: 115,000 bps.

C. DDC system shall consist of dedicated LANs that are not shared with other building systems

and tenant data and communication networks.

D. System architecture shall be modular and have inherent ability to expand to not less than two

times system size indicated with no impact to performance indicated.

E. System architecture shall perform modifications without having to remove and replace existing

network equipment.

F. Number of LANs and associated communication shall be transparent to operator. All I/O points

residing on any LAN shall be capable of global sharing between all system LANs.

G. System design shall eliminate dependence on any single device for system alarm reporting and

control execution. Each controller shall operate independently by performing its' own control,

alarm management and historical data collection.

H. Special Network Architecture Requirements:



230923 Page 22 of 80

1. Air-Handling Systems: For control applications of an air-handling system that consists of

air-handling unit(s) and VAV terminal units, include a dedicated LAN of application-

specific controllers serving VAV terminal units connected directly to controller that is

controlling air-handling system air-handling unit(s). Basically, create a DDC system

LAN that aligns with air-handling system being controlled.

2.7 DDC SYSTEM OPERATOR INTERFACES

A. Operator Means of System Access: Operator shall be able to access entire DDC system through

any of multiple means, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Remote connection through web access.

B. Access to system, regardless of operator means used, shall be transparent to operator.

C. Network Ports: For hardwired connection of desktop or portable workstation. Network port

shall be easily accessible, properly protected, clearly labeled, and installed at the following

locations:

1. Each mechanical equipment room.

D. Critical Alarm Reporting:

1. Operator-selected critical alarms shall be sent by DDC system to notify operator of

critical alarms that require immediate attention.

2. DDC system shall send alarm notification to multiple recipients that are assigned for each

alarm.

3. DDC system shall notify recipients by any or all means, including e-mail, text message

and prerecorded phone message to mobile and landline phone numbers.

2.8 NETWORKS

A. Acceptable networks for connecting workstations, mobile devices, and network controllers


1. ATA 878.1, ARCNET.

2. CEA-709.1-C.

3. IP.

4. IEEE 8802-3, Ethernet.

2.9 NETWORK COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL

A. Network communication protocol(s) used throughout entire DDC system shall be open to

Owner and available to other companies for use in making future modifications to DDC system.

B. ASHRAE 135 Protocol:



230923 Page 23 of 80

1. ASHRAE 135 communication protocol shall be sole and native protocol used throughout

entire DDC system.

2. DDC system shall not require use of gateways except to integrate HVAC equipment and

other building systems and equipment, not required to use ASHRAE 135 communication

protocol.

3. If used, gateways shall connect to DDC system using ASHRAE 135 communication

protocol and Project object properties and read/write services indicated by

interoperability schedule.

4. Operator workstations, controllers and other network devices shall be tested and listed by

BACnet Testing Laboratories.

2.10 DDC SYSTEM WIRELESS NETWORKS

A. Use Zigbee or an open industry standard and technology used by multiple DDC system

manufacturers technology to create a wireless mesh network to provide wireless connectivity

for network devices at multiple system levels including communications from programmable

application controllers and application-specific controllers to temperature sensors and from

network controllers to programmable application controllers and application-specific

controllers.

B. Installer shall design wireless networks to comply with DDC system performance requirements

indicated. Wireless network devices shall co-exist on same network with hardwired devices.

C. Hardwired controllers shall be capable of retrofit to wireless devices with no special software.

D. A wireless coordinator shall provide a wireless interface between programmable application

controllers, application-specific controllers, and network controllers.

E. Wireless Coordinators:

1. Each wireless mesh network shall use wireless coordinator(s) for initiation and formation

of network.

2. Use direct sequence spread spectrum RF technology.

3. Operate on the 2.4-GHz ISM Band.

4. Comply with IEEE 802.15.4 for low-power, low duty-cycle RF transmitting systems.

5. FCC compliant to 47 CFR 15, Subpart B, Class A.

6. Operate as a bidirectional transceiver with sensors and routers to confirm and

synchronize data transmission.

7. Capable of communication with sensors and routers up to a maximum distance of 250

feet in line of sight.

8. Include visual indicators to provide diagnostic information required for operator

verification of operation.

F. Wireless Routers:

1. Each wireless mesh network shall use wireless routers with any controller to provide a

wireless interface to a network controller, through a wireless coordinator.




230923 Page 24 of 80



5. FCC compliant to 47 CFR 15, Subpart B, Class A.

6. Operate as a bidirectional transceiver with other mesh network devices to ensure network

integrity.

7. Capable of communication with other mesh network devices at a maximum distance of

250 feet in line of sight.

8. Include indication for use in commissioning and troubleshooting.

G. Wireless Temperature Sensors:

1. Wireless temperature sensors shall sense and transmit room temperatures, temperature set

point, room occupancy notification and low battery condition to an associated router.




5. FCC compliant to CFR 15, Subpart B, Class A.

6. Include set point adjustment between 55 to 85 deg F.

7. Multiple sensors shall be able to report to a router connected to a DDC controller for

averaging or high and low selection.

H. One-to-One Wireless Network Receivers:

1. One-to-one wireless receivers shall receive wireless RF signals containing temperature

data from multiple wireless room temperature sensors and communicate information to

programmable application controllers or application-specific controllers.

a. Use direct sequence spread spectrum RF technology.

b. Operate on the 2.4-GHz ISM Band.

c. Comply with IEEE 802.15.4 for low-power, low duty-cycle RF transmitting

systems.

d. FCC compliant to 47 CFR 15, Subpart B, Class A.

e. Operate as a bidirectional transceiver with the sensors to confirm and synchronize

data transmission.

f. Capable of communication up to a distance of 200 feet.

g. Include visual indication of the following:

1) Power.

2) Receiver activity.

3) Wireless RF transmission from wireless sensors.

4) No transmission, weak signal, adequate signal or excellent signal.

I. One-to-One Wireless Network Sensors:

1. One-to-one wireless sensors shall sense and report room temperatures to one-to-one

receiver.

a. Use direct sequence spread spectrum RF technology.

b. Operate on the 2.4-GHz ISM Band.



230923 Page 25 of 80

c. Comply with IEEE 802.15.4 for low-power, low duty-cycle RF transmitting

systems.

d. FCC compliant to CFR 15, Subpart B, Class A.

e. Include set point adjustment between 55 to 85 deg F.

2.11 SERVERS

A. Description: x86-based permanently installed computer used for client-server computing.

B. Mounting: Tower.

C. Power: Single power supply, minimum 300 W.

D. Performance Requirements:

1. Performance requirements may dictate equipment exceeding minimum requirements

indicated.

2. Energy Star compliant.

E. Servers shall include the following:

1. Full-feature backup server (server and backup minimum requirement).

2. Software licenses.

3. Cable installation between server(s) and network.

F. Web Server:

1. If required to be separate, include web server hardware and software to match, except

backup server is not required.

2. Firewalls between server web and networks.

3. Password protection for access to server from web server.

4. Cable installation between the server(s) and building Ethernet network.

2.12 SYSTEM SOFTWARE

A. System Software Minimum Requirements:

1. Real-time multitasking and multiuser 32- or 64-bit operating system that allows

concurrent multiple operator workstations operating and concurrent execution of multiple

real-time programs and custom program development.

2. Operating system shall be capable of operating DOS and Microsoft Windows

applications.

3. Database management software shall manage all data on an integrated and non-redundant

basis. Additions and deletions to database shall be without detriment to existing data.

Include cross linkages so no data required by a program can be deleted by an operator

until that data have been deleted from respective programs.



230923 Page 26 of 80

4. Network communications software shall manage and control multiple network

communications to provide exchange of global information and execution of global

programs.

5. Operator interface software shall include day-to-day operator transaction processing,

alarm and report handling, operator privilege level and data segregation control, custom

programming, and online data modification capability.

6. Scheduling software shall schedule centrally based time and event, temporary, and

exception day programs.

B. Operator Interface Software:

1. Minimize operator training through use of English language prorating and English

language point identification.

2. Minimize use of a typewriter-style keyboard through use of a pointing device similar to a

mouse.

3. Operator sign-off shall be a manual operation or, if no keyboard or mouse activity takes

place, an automatic sign-off.

4. Automatic sign-off period shall be programmable from one to 60 minutes in one-minute

increments on a per operator basis.

5. Operator sign-on and sign-off activity shall be recorded and sent to printer.

6. Security Access:

a. Operator access to DDC system shall be under password control.

b. An alphanumeric password shall be field assignable to each operator.

c. Operators shall be able to access DDC system by entry of proper password.

d. Operator password shall be same regardless of which computer or other interface

means is used.

e. Additions or changes made to passwords shall be updated automatically.

f. Each operator shall be assigned an access level to restrict access to data and

functions the operator is cable of performing.

g. Software shall have at least five access levels.

h. Each menu item shall be assigned an access level so that a one-for-one

correspondence between operator assigned access level(s) and menu item access

level(s) is required to gain access to menu item.

i. Display menu items to operator with those capable of access highlighted. Menu

and operator access level assignments shall be online programmable and under

password control.

7. Data Segregation:

a. Include data segregation for control of specific data routed to a workstation, to an

operator or to a specific output device, such as a printer.

b. Include at least 32 segregation groups.

c. Segregation groups shall be selectable such as "fire points," "fire points on second

floor," "space temperature points," "HVAC points," and so on.

d. Points shall be assignable to multiple segregation groups. Display and output of

data to printer or monitor shall occur where there is a match of operator or

peripheral segregation group assignment and point segregations.



230923 Page 27 of 80

e. Alarms shall be displayed and printed at each peripheral to which segregation

allows, but only those operators assigned to peripheral and having proper

authorization level will be allowed to acknowledge alarms.

f. Operators and peripherals shall be assignable to multiple segregation groups and

all assignments are to be online programmable and under password control.

8. Operators shall be able to perform commands including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Start or stop selected equipment.

b. Adjust set points.

c. Add, modify, and delete time programming.

d. Enable and disable process execution.

e. Lock and unlock alarm reporting for each point.

f. Enable and disable totalization for each point.

g. Enable and disable trending for each point.

h. Override control loop set points.

i. Enter temporary override schedules.

j. Define holiday schedules.

k. Change time and date.

l. Enter and modify analog alarm limits.

m. Enter and modify analog warning limits.

n. View limits.

o. Enable and disable demand limiting.

p. Enable and disable duty cycle.

q. Display logic programming for each control sequence.

9. Reporting:

a. Generated automatically and manually.

b. Sent to displays, printers and disk files.

c. Types of Reporting:

1) General listing of points.

2) List points currently in alarm.

3) List of off-line points.

4) List points currently in override status.

5) List of disabled points.

6) List points currently locked out.

7) List of items defined in a "Follow-Up" file.

8) List weekly schedules.

9) List holiday programming.

10) List of limits and deadbands.

10. Summaries: For specific points, for a logical point group, for an operator selected

group(s), or for entire system without restriction due to hardware configuration.

C. Graphic Interface Software:



230923 Page 28 of 80

1. Include a full interactive graphical selection means of accessing and displaying system

data to operator. Include at least five levels with the penetration path operator assignable

(for example, site, building, floor, air-handling unit, and supply temperature loop). Native

language descriptors assigned to menu items are to be operator defined and modifiable

under password control.

2. Include a hierarchical-linked dynamic graphic operator interface for accessing and

displaying system data and commanding and modifying equipment operation. Interface

shall use a pointing device with pull-down or penetrating menus, color and animation to

facilitate operator understanding of system.

3. Include at least 10 levels of graphic penetration with the hierarchy operator assignable.

4. Descriptors for graphics, points, alarms and such shall be modified through operator's

workstation under password control.

5. Graphic displays shall be online user definable and modifiable using the hardware and

software provided.

6. Data to be displayed within a graphic shall be assignable regardless of physical hardware

address, communication or point type.

7. Graphics are to be online programmable and under password control.

8. Points may be assignable to multiple graphics where necessary to facilitate operator

understanding of system operation.

9. Graphics shall also contain software points.

10. Penetration within a graphic hierarchy shall display each graphic name as graphics are

selected to facilitate operator understanding.

11. Back-trace feature shall permit operator to move upward in the hierarchy using a pointing

device. Back trace shall show all previous penetration levels. Include operator with

option of showing each graphic full screen size with back trace as horizontal header or by

showing a "stack" of graphics, each with a back trace.

12. Display operator accessed data on the monitor.

13. Operator shall select further penetration using pointing device to click on a site, building,

floor, area, equipment, and so on. Defined and linked graphic below that selection shall

then be displayed.

14. Include operator with means to directly access graphics without going through

penetration path.

15. Dynamic data shall be assignable to graphics.

16. Display points (physical and software) with dynamic data provided by DDC system with

appropriate text descriptors, status or value, and engineering unit.

17. Use color, rotation, or other highly visible means, to denote status and alarm states. Color

shall be variable for each class of points, as chosen by operator.

18. Points shall be dynamic with operator adjustable update rates on a per point basis from

one second to over a minute.

19. For operators with appropriate privilege, points shall be commanded directly from

display using pointing device.

a. For an analog command point such as set point, current conditions and limits shall

be displayed and operator can position new set point using pointing device.

b. For a digital command point such as valve position, valve shall show its current

state such as open or closed and operator could select alternative position using

pointing device.

c. Keyboard equivalent shall be available for those operators with that preference.



230923 Page 29 of 80

20. Operator shall be able to split or resize viewing screen into quadrants to show one

graphic on one quadrant of screen and other graphics or spreadsheet, bar chart, word

processing, curve plot and other information on other quadrants on screen. This feature

shall allow real-time monitoring of one part of system while displaying other parts of

system or data to better facilitate overall system operation.

21. Help Features:

a. On-line context-sensitive help utility to facilitate operator training and

understanding.

b. Bridge to further explanation of selected keywords. Document shall contain text

and graphics to clarify system operation.

1) If help feature does not have ability to bridge on keywords for more

information, a complete set of user manuals shall be provided in an indexed

word-processing program, which shall run concurrently with operating

system software.

c. Available for Every Menu Item:

1) Index items for each system menu item.

22. Graphic generation software shall allow operator to add, modify, or delete system graphic

displays.

a. Include libraries of symbols depicting HVAC symbols such as fans, coils, filters,

dampers, valves pumps, and electrical symbols similar to those indicated.

b. Graphic development package shall use a pointing device in conjunction with a

drawing program to allow operator to perform the following:

1) Define background screens.

2) Define connecting lines and curves.

3) Locate, orient and size descriptive text.

4) Define and display colors for all elements.

5) Establish correlation between symbols or text and associated system points

or other displays.

D. Project-Specific Graphics: Graphics documentation including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Site plan showing each building, and additional site elements, which are being controlled

or monitored by DDC system.

2. Plan for each building floor, including interstitial floors, and each roof level of each

building, showing the following:

a. Room layouts with room identification and name.

b. Locations and identification of all monitored and controlled HVAC equipment and

other equipment being monitored and controlled by DDC system.

c. Location and identification of each hardware point being controlled or monitored

by DDC system.



230923 Page 30 of 80

3. Control schematic for each of following, including a graphic system schematic

representation, similar to that indicated on Drawings, with point identification, set point

and dynamic value indication, sequence of operation and control logic diagram.

4. Graphic display for each piece of equipment connected to DDC system through a data

communications link. Include dynamic indication of all points associated with equipment.

5. DDC system network riser diagram that shows schematic layout for entire system

including all networks and all controllers, other network devices.

E. Customizing Software:

1. Software to modify and tailor DDC system to specific and unique requirements of

equipment installed, to programs implemented and to staffing and operational practices

planned.

2. Online modification of DDC system configuration, program parameters, and database

using menu selection and keyboard entry of data into preformatted display templates.

3. As a minimum, include the following modification capability:

a. Operator assignment shall include designation of operator passwords, access

levels, point segregation and auto sign-off.

b. Peripheral assignment capability shall include assignment of segregation groups

and operators to consoles and printers, designation of backup workstations and

printers, designation of workstation header points and enabling and disabling of

print-out of operator changes.

c. System configuration and diagnostic capability shall include communications and

peripheral port assignments, DDC controller assignments to network, DDC

controller enable and disable, assignment of command trace to points and

application programs and initiation of diagnostics.

d. System text addition and change capability shall include English or native

language descriptors for points, segregation groups and access levels and action

messages for alarms, run time and trouble condition.

e. Time and schedule change capability shall include time and date set, time and

occupancy schedules, exception and holiday schedules and daylight savings time

schedules.

f. Point related change capability shall include the following:

1) System and point enable and disable.

2) Run-time enable and disable.

3) Assignment of points to segregation groups, calibration tables, lockout, and

run time and to a fixed I/O value.

4) Assignment of alarm and warning limits.

g. Application program change capability shall include the following:

1) Enable and disable of software programs.

2) Programming changes.

3) Assignment of comfort limits, global points, time and event initiators, time

and event schedules and enable and disable time and event programs.



230923 Page 31 of 80

4. Software shall allow operator to add points, or groups of points, to DDC system and to

link them to energy optimization and management programs. Additions and

modifications shall be online programmable using operator workstation, downloaded to

other network devices and entered into their databases. After verification of point

additions and associated program operation, database shall be uploaded and recorded on

hard drive and disk for archived record.

5. Include high-level language programming software capability for implementation of

custom DDC programs. Software shall include a compiler, linker, and up- and down-load

capability.

6. Include a library of DDC algorithms, intrinsic control operators, arithmetic, logic and

relational operators for implementation of control sequences. Also include, as a

minimum, the following:

a. Proportional control (P).

b. Proportional plus integral (PI).

c. Proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID).

d. Adaptive and intelligent self-learning control.

1) Algorithm shall monitor loop response to output corrections and adjust loop

response characteristics according to time constant changes imposed.

2) Algorithm shall operate in a continuous self-learning manner and shall

retain in memory a stored record of system dynamics so that on system shut

down and restart, learning process starts from where it left off.

7. Fully implemented intrinsic control operators including sequence, reversing, ratio, time

delay, time of day, highest select AO, lowest select AO, analog controlled digital output,

analog control AO, and digitally controlled AO.

8. Logic operators such as "And," "Or," "Not," and others that are part of a standard set

available with a high-level language.

9. Arithmetic operators such as "Add," "Subtract," "Multiply," "Divide," and others that are

part of a standard set available with a high-level language.

10. Relational operators such as "Equal To," "Not Equal To," "Less Than," "Greater Than,"

and others that are part of a standard set available with a high-level language.

F. Alarm Handling Software:

1. Include alarm handling software to report all alarm conditions monitored and transmitted

through DDC controllers and other network devices.

2. Include first in, first out handling of alarms according to alarm priority ranking, with

most critical alarms first, and with buffer storage in case of simultaneous and multiple

alarms.

3. Alarm handling shall be active at all times to ensure that alarms are processed even if an

operator is not currently signed on to DDC system.

4. Alarms display shall include the following:

a. Indication of alarm condition such as "Abnormal Off," "Hi Alarm," and "Low

Alarm."



230923 Page 32 of 80

b. "Analog Value" or "Status" group and point identification with native language

point descriptor such as "Space Temperature, Building 110, 2nd Floor,

Room 212."

c. Discrete per point alarm action message, such as "Call Maintenance Dept. Ext-

5561."

d. Include extended message capability to allow assignment and printing of extended

action messages. Capability shall be operator programmable and assignable on a

per point basis.

5. Alarms shall be directed to appropriate operator workstations, printers, and individual

operators by privilege level and segregation assignments.

6. Send e-mail alarm messages to designated operators.

7. Send e-mail, page, text and voice messages to designated operators for critical alarms.

8. Alarms shall be categorized and processed by class.

a. Class 1:

1) Associated with fire, security and other extremely critical equipment

monitoring functions; have alarm, trouble, return to normal, and

acknowledge conditions printed and displayed.

2) Unacknowledged alarms to be placed in unacknowledged alarm buffer.

3) All conditions shall cause an audible sound and shall require individual

acknowledgment to silence audible sound.

b. Class 2:

1) Critical, but not life-safety related, and processed same as Class 1 alarms,

except do not require individual acknowledgment.

2) Acknowledgement may be through a multiple alarm acknowledgment.

c. Class 3:

1) General alarms; printed, displayed and placed in unacknowledged alarm

buffer queues.

2) Each new alarm received shall cause an audible sound. Audible sound shall

be silenced by "acknowledging" alarm or by pressing a "silence" key.

3) Acknowledgement of queued alarms shall be either on an individual basis or

through a multiple alarm acknowledgement.

4) Alarms returning to normal condition shall be printed and not cause an

audible sound or require acknowledgment.

d. Class 4:

1) Routine maintenance or other types of warning alarms.

2) Alarms to be printed only, with no display, no audible sound and no

acknowledgment required.



230923 Page 33 of 80

9. Include an unacknowledged alarm indicator on display to alert operator that there are

unacknowledged alarms in system. Operator shall be able to acknowledge alarms on an

individual basis or through a multiple alarm acknowledge key, depending on alarm class.

10. To ensure that no alarm records are lost, it shall be possible to assign a backup printer to

accept alarms in case of failure of primary printer.

G. Reports and Logs:

1. Include reporting software package that allows operator to select, modify, or create

reports using DDC system I/O point data available.

2. Each report shall be definable as to data content, format, interval and date.

3. Report data shall be sampled and stored on DDC controller, within storage limits of DDC

controller, and then uploaded to archive on server for historical reporting.

4. Operator shall be able to obtain real-time logs of all I/O points by type or status, such as

alarm, point lockout, or normal.

5. Reports and logs shall be stored on server hard drives in a format that is readily

accessible by other standard software applications, including spreadsheets and word

processing.

6. Reports and logs shall be readily printed and set to be printed either on operator

command or at a specific time each day.

H. Standard Reports: Standard DDC system reports shall be provided and operator shall be able to

customize reports later.

1. All I/O: With current status and values.

2. Alarm: All current alarms, except those in alarm lockout.

3. Disabled I/O: All I/O points that are disabled.

4. Alarm Lockout I/O: All I/O points in alarm lockout, whether manual or automatic.

5. Alarm Lockout I/O in Alarm: All I/O in alarm lockout that are currently in alarm.

6. Logs:

a. Alarm history.

b. System messages.

c. System events.

d. Trends.

I. Custom Reports: Operator shall be able to easily define any system data into a daily, weekly,

monthly, or annual report. Reports shall be time and date stamped and shall contain a report

title.

2.13 ASHRAE 135 GATEWAYS

A. Include BACnet communication ports, whenever available as an equipment OEM standard

option, for integration via a single communication cable. BACnet-controlled plant equipment

includes, but is not limited to, boilers and variable-speed drives.



230923 Page 34 of 80

B. Include gateways to connect BACnet to legacy systems, existing non-BACnet devices, and

existing non-BACnet DDC-controlled equipment, only when specifically requested and

approved by Owner.

C. Include with each gateway an interoperability schedule showing each point or event on legacy

side that BACnet "client" will read, and each parameter that BACnet network will write to.

Describe this interoperability of BACnet services, or BIBBs, defined in ASHRAE 135,

Annex K.

D. Gateway Minimum Requirements:

1. Read and view all readable object properties on non-BACnet network to BACnet network

and vice versa where applicable.

2. Write to all writeable object properties on non-BACnet network from BACnet network

and vice versa where applicable.

3. Include single-pass (only one protocol to BACnet without intermediary protocols)

translation from non-BACnet protocol to BACnet and vice versa.

4. Comply with requirements of Data Sharing Read Property, Data Sharing Write Property,

Device Management Dynamic Device Binding-B, and Device Management

Communication Control BIBBs according to ASHRAE 135.

5. Hardware, software, software licenses, and configuration tools for operator-to-gateway

communications.

6. Backup programming and parameters on CD media and the ability to modify, download,

backup, and restore gateway configuration.

2.14 ASHRAE 135 PROTOCOL ANALYZER

A. Analyzer and required cables and fittings for connection to ASHRAE 135 network.

B. Analyzer shall include the following minimum capabilities:

1. Capture and store to a file data traffic on all network levels.

2. Measure bandwidth usage.

3. Filtering options with ability to ignore select traffic.

2.15 WIRELESS ROUTERS FOR OPERATOR INTERFACE

A. Dual-Band Wireless Routers:

1. Description: High-speed, dual-band router with integral Ethernet ports and USB port.

2. Technology: IEEE 802.11n; 2.4- and 5-GHz speed bands.

3. Speed: Up to 300 Mbps on 2.4-GHz band and up to 450 Mbps on 5-GHz band.

4. Compatibility: IEEE 802.11n/g/b/a wireless devices.

5. Ethernet Ports: Four, gigabit (1000 Mbps).

6. USB Port: One, USB 2.0 or 3.0.

7. Wireless Security: Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) and WPA2 according to

IEEE 802.11i.



230923 Page 35 of 80

2.16 DDC CONTROLLERS

A. DDC system shall consist of a combination of network controllers, programmable application

controllers and application-specific controllers to satisfy performance requirements indicated.

B. DDC controllers shall perform monitoring, control, energy optimization and other requirements

indicated.

C. DDC controllers shall use a multitasking, multiuser, real-time digital control microprocessor

with a distributed network database and intelligence.

D. Each DDC controller shall be capable of full and complete operation as a completely

independent unit and as a part of a DDC system wide distributed network.

E. Environment Requirements:

1. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.

2. Controllers located in conditioned space shall be rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F.

F. Power and Noise Immunity:

1. Controller shall operate at 90 to 110 percent of nominal voltage rating and shall perform

an orderly shutdown below 80 percent of nominal voltage.

2. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios

with up to 5 W of power located within 36 inches of enclosure.

G. DDC Controller Spare Processing Capacity:

1. Include spare processing memory for each controller. RAM, PROM, or EEPROM will

implement requirements indicated with the following spare memory:

a. Network Controllers: 50 percent.

b. Programmable Application Controllers: Not less than 60 percent.

c. Application-Specific Controllers: Not less than 70 percent.

2. Memory shall support DDC controller's operating system and database and shall include

the following:

a. Monitoring and control.

b. Energy management, operation and optimization applications.

c. Alarm management.

d. Historical trend data of all connected I/O points.

e. Maintenance applications.

f. Operator interfaces.

g. Monitoring of manual overrides.

H. DDC Controller Spare I/O Point Capacity: Include spare I/O point capacity for each controller

as follows:



230923 Page 36 of 80

1. Network Controllers:

a. 10 percent of each AI, AO, BI, and BO point connected to controller.

b. Minimum Spare I/O Points per Controller:

1) AIs: Three.

2) AOs: Three.

3) BIs: Five.

4) BOs: Five.

2. Programmable Application Controllers:



1) AIs: Three.

2) AOs: Three.

3) BIs: Five.

4) BOs: Five.

3. Application-Specific Controllers:



1) AIs: Three.

2) AOs: Three.

3) BIs: Five.

4) BOs: Five.

I. Maintenance and Support: Include the following features to facilitate maintenance and support:

1. Mount microprocessor components on circuit cards for ease of removal and replacement.

2. Means to quickly and easily disconnect controller from network.

3. Means to quickly and easily access connect to field test equipment.

4. Visual indication that controller electric power is on, of communication fault or trouble,

and that controller is receiving and sending signals to network.

J. General Requirements for CEA-709.1-C DDC Controllers:

1. Controllers shall be LonMark certified.

2. Distinguishable and accessible switch, button, or pin, when pressed shall broadcast its 48-

bit Node ID and Program ID over network.

3. TP/FT-10 transceiver according to CEA-709.3 and connections for TP/FT-10 control

network wiring.

4. TP/XF-1250 transceiver according to CEA-709.3 and connections for TP/XF-1250

control network wiring.

5. Communicate using CEA-709.1-C protocol.



230923 Page 37 of 80

6. Controllers configured into subnets, as required, to comply with performance

requirements indicated.

7. Network communication through LNS network management and database standard for

CEA-709.1-C network devices.

8. Locally powered, not powered through network connection.

9. Functionality required to support applications indicated, including, but not limited to, the

following:

a. Input and outputs indicated and as required to support sequence of operation and

application in which it is used. SNVTs shall have meaningful names identifying

the value represented by an SNVT. Unless an SNVT of an appropriate engineering

type is unavailable, all network variables shall be of an SNVT with engineering

units appropriate to value the variable represents.

b. Configurable through SCPTs defined in LonMark SCPT List, operator-defined

UCPTs, network configuration inputs (NCIs) of an SNVT type defined in

LonMark SNVT List, NCIs of an operator-defined network variable type, or

hardware settings on controller itself for all settings and parameters used by

application in which it is used.

10. Programmable controllers shall conform to LonMark Interoperability Guidelines and

have LonMark certification.

K. Input and Output Point Interface:

1. Hardwired input and output points shall connect to network, programmable application

and application-specific controllers.

2. Input and output points shall be protected so shorting of point to itself, to another point,

or to ground will not damage controller.

3. Input and output points shall be protected from voltage up to 24 V of any duration so that

contact will not damage controller.

4. AIs:

a. AIs shall include monitoring of low-voltage (zero- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20

mA) and resistance signals from thermistor and RTD sensors.

b. AIs shall be compatible with, and field configurable to, sensor and transmitters

installed.

c. Controller AIs shall perform analog-to-digital (A-to-D) conversion with a

minimum resolution of 8 bits or better to comply with accuracy requirements

indicated.

d. Signal conditioning including transient rejection shall be provided for each AI.

e. Capable of being individually calibrated for zero and span.

f. Incorporate common-mode noise rejection of at least 50 dB from zero to 100 Hz

for differential inputs, and normal-mode noise rejection of at least 20 dB at 60 Hz

from a source impedance of 10000 ohms.

5. AOs:



230923 Page 38 of 80

a. Controller AOs shall perform analog-to-digital (A-to-D) conversion with a

minimum resolution of 8 bits or better to comply with accuracy requirements

indicated.

b. Output signals shall have a range of 4 to 20 mA dc or zero- to 10-V dc as required

to include proper control of output device.

c. Capable of being individually calibrated for zero and span.

d. AOs shall not exhibit a drift of greater than 0.4 percent of range per year.

6. BIs:

a. Controller BIs shall accept contact closures and shall ignore transients of less than

5-ms duration.

b. Isolation and protection against an applied steady-state voltage of up to 180-V ac

peak.

c. BIs shall include a wetting current of at least 12 mA to be compatible with

commonly available control devices and shall be protected against effects of

contact bounce and noise.

d. BIs shall sense "dry contact" closure without external power (other than that

provided by the controller) being applied.

e. Pulse accumulation input points shall comply with all requirements of BIs and

accept up to 10 pulses per second for pulse accumulation. Buffer shall be provided

to totalize pulses. Pulse accumulator shall accept rates of at least 20 pulses per

second. The totalized value shall be reset to zero on operator's command.

7. BOs:

a. Controller BOs shall include relay contact closures or triac outputs for momentary

and maintained operation of output devices.

1) Relay contact closures shall have a minimum duration of 0.1 second. Relays

shall include at least 180 V of isolation. Electromagnetic interference

suppression shall be provided on all output lines to limit transients to non-

damaging levels. Minimum contact rating shall be 1 A at 24-V ac.

2) Triac outputs shall include at least 180 V of isolation. Minimum contact

rating shall be 1 A at 24-V ac.

b. BOs shall include for two-state operation or a pulsed low-voltage signal for pulse-

width modulation control.

c. BOs shall be selectable for either normally open or normally closed operation.

d. Include tristate outputs (two coordinated BOs) for control of three-point floating-

type electronic actuators without feedback.

e. Limit use of three-point floating devices to VAV terminal unit control applications.

Control algorithms shall operate actuator to one end of its stroke once every 12

hours for verification of operator tracking.

2.17 NETWORK CONTROLLERS

A. General Network Controller Requirements:



230923 Page 39 of 80

1. Include adequate number of controllers to achieve performance indicated.

2. System shall consist of one or more independent, standalone, microprocessor-based

network controllers to manage global strategies indicated.

3. Controller shall have enough memory to support its operating system, database, and

programming requirements.

4. Data shall be shared between networked controllers and other network devices.

5. Operating system of controller shall manage input and output communication signals to

allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow for

central monitoring and alarms.

6. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real-time clock.

7. Controller shall continually check status of its processor and memory circuits. If an

abnormal operation is detected, controller shall assume a predetermined failure mode and

generate an alarm notification.

8. Controllers shall be fully programmable.

B. Communication:

1. Network controllers shall communicate with other devices on DDC system Level one

network.

2. Network controller also shall perform routing if connected to a network of programmable

application and application-specific controllers.

C. Operator Interface:

1. Controller shall be equipped with a service communications port for connection to a

portable operator's workstation.

2. Local Keypad and Display:

a. Equip controller with local keypad and digital display for interrogating and editing

data.

b. Use of keypad and display shall require security password.

D. Serviceability:

1. Controller shall be equipped with diagnostic LEDs or other form of local visual

indication of power, communication, and processor.

2. Wiring and cable connections shall be made to field-removable, modular terminal strips

or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable.

3. Controller shall maintain BIOS and programming information in event of a power loss

for at least 72 hours.

2.18 PROGRAMMABLE APPLICATION CONTROLLERS

A. General Programmable Application Controller Requirements:

1. Include adequate number of controllers to achieve performance indicated.

2. Controller shall have enough memory to support its operating system, database, and

programming requirements.



230923 Page 40 of 80

3. Data shall be shared between networked controllers and other network devices.

4. Operating system of controller shall manage input and output communication signals to

allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow for

central monitoring and alarms.

5. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real-time clock.

6. Controller shall continually check status of its processor and memory circuits. If an

abnormal operation is detected, controller shall assume a predetermined failure mode and

generate an alarm notification.

7. Controllers shall be fully programmable.

B. Communication:

1. Programmable application controllers shall communicate with other devices on network.

C. Operator Interface:

1. Controller shall be equipped with a service communications port for connection to a

portable operator's workstation or mobile device.

2. Local Keypad and Display:

a. Equip controller with local keypad and digital display for interrogating and editing

data.

b. Use of keypad and display shall require security password.

D. Serviceability:

1. Controller shall be equipped with diagnostic LEDs or other form of local visual

indication of power, communication, and processor.

2. Wiring and cable connections shall be made to field-removable, modular terminal strips

or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable.

3. Controller shall maintain BIOS and programming information in event of a power loss

for at least 72 hours.

2.19 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

A. General Controller Software Requirements:

1. Software applications shall reside and operate in controllers. Editing of applications shall

occur at operator workstations.

2. I/O points shall be identified by up to 30-character point name and up to 16-character

point descriptor. Same names shall be used at operator workstations.

3. Control functions shall be executed within controllers using DDC algorithms.

4. Controllers shall be configured to use stored default values to ensure fail-safe operation.

Default values shall be used when there is a failure of a connected input instrument or

loss of communication of a global point value.

B. Security:



230923 Page 41 of 80

1. Operator access shall be secured using individual security passwords and user names.

2. Passwords shall restrict operator to points, applications, and system functions as assigned

by system manager.

3. Operator log-on and log-off attempts shall be recorded.

4. System shall protect itself from unauthorized use by automatically logging off after last

keystroke. The delay time shall be operator-definable.

C. Scheduling: Include capability to schedule each point or group of points in system. Each

schedule shall consist of the following:

1. Weekly Schedule:

a. Include separate schedules for each day of week.

b. Each schedule should include the capability for start, stop, optimal start, optimal

stop, and night economizer.

c. Each schedule may consist of up to 10 events.

d. When a group of objects are scheduled together, include capability to adjust start

and stop times for each member.

2. Exception Schedules:

a. Include ability for operator to designate any day of the year as an exception

schedule.

b. Exception schedules may be defined up to a year in advance. Once an exception

schedule is executed, it will be discarded and replaced by regular schedule for that

day of week.

3. Holiday Schedules:

a. Include capability for operator to define up to 99 special or holiday schedules.

b. Schedules may be placed on scheduling calendar and will be repeated each year.

c. Operator shall be able to define length of each holiday period.

D. System Coordination:

1. Include standard application for proper coordination of equipment.

2. Application shall include operator with a method of grouping together equipment based

on function and location.

3. Group may then be used for scheduling and other applications.

E. Binary Alarms:

1. Each binary point shall be set to alarm based on operator-specified state.

2. Include capability to automatically and manually disable alarming.

F. Analog Alarms:

1. Each analog object shall have both high and low alarm limits.

2. Alarming shall be able to be automatically and manually disabled.



230923 Page 42 of 80

G. Alarm Reporting:

1. Operator shall be able to determine action to be taken in event of an alarm.

2. Alarms shall be routed to appropriate operator workstations based on time and other

conditions.

3. Alarm shall be able to start programs, print, be logged in event log, generate custom

messages, and display graphics.

H. Remote Communication:

1. System shall have ability to dial out in the event of an alarm.

I. Electric Power Demand Limiting:

1. Demand-limiting program shall monitor building or other operator-defined electric power

consumption from signals connected to electric power meter or from a watt transducer or

current transformer.

2. Demand-limiting program shall predict probable power demand such that action can be

taken to prevent exceeding demand limit. When demand prediction exceeds demand

limit, action will be taken to reduce loads in a predetermined manner. When demand

prediction indicates demand limit will not be exceeded, action will be taken to restore

loads in a predetermined manner.

3. Demand reduction shall be accomplished by the following means:

a. Reset air-handling unit supply temperature set points.

b. Reset space temperature set points.

c. De-energize equipment based on priority.

4. Demand-limiting parameters, frequency of calculations, time intervals, and other relevant

variables shall be based on the means by which electric power service provider computes

demand charges.

5. Include demand-limiting prediction and control for any individual meter monitored by

system or for total of any combination of meters.

6. Include means operator to make the following changes online:

a. Addition and deletion of loads controlled.

b. Changes in demand intervals.

c. Changes in demand limit for meter(s).

d. Maximum shutoff time for equipment.

e. Minimum shutoff time for equipment.

f. Select rotational or sequential shedding and restoring.

g. Shed and restore priority.

7. Include the following information and reports, to be available on an hourly, daily,

weekly, monthly and annual basis:

a. Total electric consumption.

b. Peak demand.

c. Date and time of peak demand.



230923 Page 43 of 80

d. Daily peak demand.

J. Maintenance Management: System shall monitor equipment status and generate maintenance

messages based on operator-designated run-time, starts, and calendar date limits.

K. Sequencing: Include application software based on sequences of operation indicated to properly

sequence chillers, boilers, and other applicable HVAC equipment.

L. Control Loops:

1. Support any of the following control loops, as applicable to control required:

a. Two-position (on/off, open/close, slow/fast) control.

b. Proportional control.

c. Proportional plus integral (PI) control.

d. Proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID) control.

1) Include PID algorithms with direct or reverse action and anti-windup.

2) Algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog value used to position an

output or stage a series of outputs.

3) Controlled variable, set point, and PID gains shall be operator-selectable.

e. Adaptive (automatic tuning).

M. Staggered Start: Application shall prevent all controlled equipment from simultaneously

restarting after a power outage. Order which equipment (or groups of equipment) is started,

along with the time delay between starts, shall be operator-selectable.

N. Energy Calculations:

1. Include software to allow instantaneous power or flow rates to be accumulated and

converted to energy usage data.

2. Include an algorithm that calculates a sliding-window average (rolling average).

Algorithm shall be flexible to allow window intervals to be operator specified (such as

15, 30, or 60 minutes).

3. Include an algorithm that calculates a fixed-window average. A digital input signal shall

define start of window period (such as signal from utility meter) to synchronize fixed-

window average with that used by utility.

O. Anti-Short Cycling:

1. BO points shall be protected from short cycling.

2. Feature shall allow minimum on-time and off-time to be selected.

P. On and Off Control with Differential:

1. Include an algorithm that allows a BO to be cycled based on a controlled variable and set

point.

2. Algorithm shall be direct- or reverse-acting and incorporate an adjustable differential.



230923 Page 44 of 80

Q. Run-Time Totalization:

1. Include software to totalize run-times for all BI and BO points.

2. A high run-time alarm shall be assigned, if required, by operator.

2.20 ENCLOSURES

A. General Enclosure Requirements:

1. House each controller and associated control accessories in a single enclosure. Enclosure

shall serve as central tie-in point for control devices such as switches, transmitters,

transducers, power supplies and transformers.

2. Do not house more than one controller in a single enclosure.

3. Include enclosure door with key locking mechanism. Key locks alike for all enclosures

and include one pair of keys per enclosure.

B. Internal Arrangement:

1. Internal layout of enclosure shall group and protect pneumatic, electric, and electronic

components associated with a controller, but not an integral part of controller.

2. Arrange layout to group similar products together.

3. Include a barrier between line-voltage and low-voltage electrical and electronic products.

4. Factory or shop install products, tubing, cabling and wiring complying with requirements

and standards indicated.

5. Terminate field cable and wire using heavy-duty terminal blocks.

6. Include spare terminals, equal to not less than 10 percent of used terminals.

7. Include spade lugs for stranded cable and wire.

8. Install a maximum of two wires on each side of a terminal.

9. Include enclosure field power supply with a toggle-type switch located at entrance inside

enclosure to disconnect power.

10. Include enclosure with a line-voltage nominal 20-A GFCI duplex receptacle for service

and testing tools. Wire receptacle on hot side of enclosure disconnect switch and include

with a 5-A circuit breaker.

11. Mount products within enclosure on removable internal panel(s).

12. Include products mounted in enclosures with engraved, laminated phenolic nameplates

(black letters on a white background). The nameplates shall have at least 1/4-inch-high

lettering.

13. Route tubing cable and wire located inside enclosure within a raceway with a continuous

removable cover.

14. Label each end of cable, wire and tubing in enclosure following an approved

identification system that extends from field I/O connection and all intermediate

connections throughout length to controller connection.

15. Size enclosure internal panel to include at least 25 percent spare area on face of panel.

C. Environmental Requirements:

1. Evaluate temperature and humidity requirements of each product to be installed within

each enclosure.



230923 Page 45 of 80

2. Calculate enclosure internal operating temperature considering heat dissipation of all

products installed within enclosure and ambient effects (solar, conduction and wind) on

enclosure.

3. Where required by application, include temperature-controlled electrical heat to maintain

inside of enclosure above minimum operating temperature of product with most stringent

requirement.

4. Where required by application, include temperature-controlled ventilation fans with

filtered louver(s) to maintain inside of enclosure below maximum operating temperature

of product with most stringent requirement.

5. Include temperature-controlled cooling within the enclosure for applications where

ventilation fans cannot maintain inside temperature of enclosure below maximum

operating temperature of product with most stringent requirement.

6. Where required by application, include humidity-controlled electric dehumidifier or

cooling to maintain inside of enclosure below maximum relative humidity of product

with most stringent requirement and to prevent surface condensation within enclosure.

D. Wall-Mounted, NEMA 250, Type 1:

1. Enclosure shall be NRTL listed according to UL 50 or UL 50E.

2. Construct enclosure of steel, not less than:

a. Enclosure size less than 24 in.: 0.053 in. or 0.067 in. thick.

b. Enclosure size 24 in. and larger: 0.067 in. or 0.093 in. thick.

3. Finish enclosure inside and out with polyester powder coating that is electrostatically

applied and then baked to bond to substrate.

a. Exterior color shall be manufacturer's standard.

b. Interior color shall be white.

4. Hinged door full size of front face of enclosure and supported using:

a. Enclosures sizes less than 36 in. tall: Multiple butt hinges.

b. Enclosures sizes 36 in. tall and larger: Continuous piano hinges.

5. Removable internal panel with a white polyester powder coating that is electrostatically

applied and then baked to bond to substrate.

a. Size less than 24 in.: Solid or Perforated steel, 0.053 in. thick.

b. Size 24 in. and larger: Solid aluminum, 0.10 in. or steel, 0.093 in. thick.

6. Internal panel mounting hardware, grounding hardware and sealing washers.

7. Grounding stud on enclosure body.

8. Thermoplastic pocket on inside of door for record Drawings and Product Data.

2.21 RELAYS

A. General-Purpose Relays:

1. Relays shall be heavy duty and rated for at least 10 A at 250-V ac and 60 Hz.



230923 Page 46 of 80

2. Relays shall be either double pole double throw (DPDT) or three-pole double throw,

depending on the control application.

3. Use a plug-in-style relay with an eight-pin octal plug for DPDT relays and an 11-pin

octal plug for three-pole double-throw relays.

4. Construct the contacts of either silver cadmium oxide or gold.

5. Enclose the relay in a clear transparent polycarbonate dust-tight cover.

6. Relays shall have LED indication and a manual reset and push-to-test button.

7. Performance:

a. Mechanical Life: At least 10 million cycles.

b. Electrical Life: At least 100,000 cycles at rated load.

c. Pickup Time: 15 ms or less.

d. Dropout Time: 10 ms or less.

e. Pull-in Voltage: 85 percent of rated voltage.

f. Dropout Voltage: 50 percent of nominal rated voltage.

g. Power Consumption: 2 VA.

h. Ambient Operating Temperatures: Minus 40 to 115 deg F.

8. Equip relays with coil transient suppression to limit transients to non-damaging levels.

9. Plug each relay into an industry-standard, 35-mm DIN rail socket. Plug all relays located

in control panels into sockets that are mounted on a DIN rail.

10. Relay socket shall have screw terminals. Mold into the socket the coincident screw

terminal numbers and associated octal pin numbers.

B. Multifunction Time-Delay Relays:

1. Relays shall be continuous duty and rated for at least 10 A at 240-V ac and 60 Hz.

2. Relays shall be DPDT relay with up to eight programmable functions to provide on/off

delay, interval and recycle timing functions.

3. Use a plug-in-style relay with either an 8- or 11-pin octal plug.


5. Enclose the relay in a dust-tight cover.

6. Include knob and dial scale for setting delay time.

7. Performance:



c. Timing Ranges: Multiple ranges from 0.1 seconds to 100 minutes.

d. Repeatability: Within 2 percent.

e. Recycle Time: 45 ms.

f. Minimum Pulse Width Control: 50 ms.

g. Power Consumption: 5 VA or less at 120-V ac.









230923 Page 47 of 80

C. Latching Relays:

1. Relays shall be continuous duty and rated for at least 10 A at 250-V ac and 60 Hz.

2. Relays shall be either DPDT or three-pole double throw, depending on the control

application.

3. Use a plug-in-style relay with a multibladed plug.


5. Enclose the relay in a clear transparent polycarbonate dust-tight cover.

6. Performance:



c. Pickup Time: 15 ms or less.

d. Dropout Time: 10 ms or less.

e. Pull-in Voltage: 85 percent of rated voltage.

f. Dropout Voltage: 50 percent of nominal rated voltage.

g. Power Consumption: 2 VA.







D. Current Sensing Relay:

1. Monitors ac current.

2. Independent adjustable controls for pickup and dropout current.

3. Energized when supply voltage is present and current is above pickup setting.

4. De-energizes when monitored current is below dropout current.

5. Dropout current is adjustable from 50 to 95 percent of pickup current.

6. Include a current transformer, if required for application.

7. House current sensing relay and current transformer in its own enclosure. Use

NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure for indoors and NEMA 250, Type 4 for outdoors.

E. Combination On-Off Status Sensor and On-Off Relay:

1. Description:

a. On-off control and status indication in a single device.

b. LED status indication of activated relay and current trigger.

c. Closed-Open-Auto override switch located on the load side of the relay.

2. Performance:

a. Ambient Temperature: Minus 30 to 140 deg F.

b. Voltage Rating: Single-phase loads rated for 300-V ac. Three-phase loads rated for

600-V ac.

3. Status Indication:



230923 Page 48 of 80

a. Current Sensor: Integral sensing for single-phase loads up to 20 A and external

solid or split sensing ring for three-phase loads up to 150 A.

b. Current Sensor Range: As required by application.

c. Current Set Point: Fixed or adjustable as required by application.

d. Current Sensor Output:

1) Solid-state, single-pole double-throw contact rated for 30-V ac and dc and

for 0.4 A.

2) Solid-state, single-pole double-throw contact rated for 120-V ac and 1.0 A.

3) Analog, zero- to 5- or 10-V dc.

4) Analog, 4 to 20 mA, loop powered.

4. Relay: Single-pole double-throw, continuous-duty coil; rated for 10-million mechanical

cycles.

5. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.

2.22 ELECTRICAL POWER DEVICES

A. Transformers:

1. Transformer shall be sized for the total connected load, plus an additional 25 percent of

connected load.

2. Transformer shall be at least 40 VA.

3. Transformer shall have both primary and secondary fuses.

B. Power-Line Conditioner:

1. General Power-Line Conditioner Requirements:

a. Design to ensure maximum reliability, serviceability and performance.

b. Overall function of the power-line conditioner is to receive raw, polluted electrical

power and purify it for use by electronic equipment. The power-line conditioner

shall provide isolated, regulated, transient, and noise-free sinusoidal power to loads

served.

2. Standards: NRTL listed per UL 1012.

3. Performance:

a. Single phase, continuous, 100 percent duty rated KVA/KW capacity. Design to

supply power for linear or nonlinear, high crest factor, resistive and reactive loads.

b. Automatically regulate output voltage to within 2 percent or better with input

voltage fluctuations of plus 10 to minus 20 percent of nominal when system is

loaded 100 percent. Use Variable Range Regulation to obtain improved line

voltage regulation when operating under less than full load conditions.

1) At 75 Percent Load: Output voltage automatically regulated to within 3

percent with input voltage fluctuations of plus 10 to minus 35 percent of

nominal.



230923 Page 49 of 80



nominal.



nominal.

c. With input voltage distortion of up to 40 percent, limit the output voltage sine

wave to a maximum harmonic content of 5 percent.

d. Automatically regulate output voltage to within 2.5 percent when load (resistive)

changes from zero percent to 100 percent to zero percent.

e. Output voltage returns to 95 percent of nominal level within two cycles and to 100

percent within three cycles when the output is taken from no load to full resistive

load or vice-versa. Recovery from partial resistive load changes is corrected in a

shorter period of time.

f. K Factor: 30, designed to operate with nonlinear, non-sinusoidal, high crest factor

loads without overheating.

g. Input power factor within 0.95 approaching unity with load power factor as poor as

0.6.

h. Attenuate load-generated odd current harmonics 23 dB at the input.

i. Electrically isolate the primary from the secondary. Meet isolation criteria as

defined in NFPA 70, Article 250-5D.

j. Lighting and Surge Protection: Compares to UL 1449 rating of 330 V when

subjected to Category B3 (6000 V/3000 A) combination waveform as established

by IEEE C62.41.

k. Common-mode noise attenuation of 140 dB.

l. Transverse-mode noise attenuation of 120 dB.

m. With loss of input power for up to 16.6 ms, the output sine wave remains at usable

ac voltage levels.

n. Reliability of 200,000 hours' MTBF.

o. At full load, when measured at 1-m distance, audible noise is not to exceed 54 dB.

p. Approximately 92 percent efficient at full load.

4. Transformer Construction:

a. Ferroresonant, dry type, convection cooled, 600V class. Transformer windings of

Class H (220 deg C) insulated copper.

b. Use a Class H installation system throughout with operating temperatures not to

exceed 150 deg C over a 40-deg C ambient temperature.

c. Configure transformer primary for multi-input voltage. Include input terminals for

source conductors and ground.

d. Manufacture transformer core using M-6 grade, grain-oriented, stress-relieved

transformer steel.

e. Configure transformer secondary in a 240/120-V split with a 208-V tap or straight

120 V, depending on power output size.

f. Electrically isolate the transformer secondary windings from the primary windings.

Bond neutral conductor to cabinet enclosure and output neutral terminal.

g. Include interface terminals for output power hot, neutral and ground conductors.

h. Label leads, wires and terminals to correspond with circuit wiring diagram.



230923 Page 50 of 80

i. Vacuum impregnate transformer with epoxy resin.

5. Cabinet Construction:

a. Design for panel or floor mounting.

b. NEMA 250, Type 1, general-purpose, indoor enclosure.

c. Manufacture the cabinet from heavy gauge steel complying with UL 50.

d. Include a textured baked-on paint finish.

C. Transient Voltage Suppression and High-Frequency Noise Filter Unit:

1. The maximum continuous operating voltage shall be at least 125 percent.

2. The operating frequency range shall be 47 to 63 Hz.

3. Protection modes according to NEMA LS-1.

4. The rated single-pulse surge current capacity, for each mode of protection, shall be no

less than the following:

a. Line to Neutral: 45,000 A.

b. Neutral to Ground: 45,000 A.

c. Line to Ground: 45,000 A.

d. Per Phase: 90,000 A.

5. Clamping voltages shall be in compliance with test and evaluation procedures defined in

NEMA LS-1. Maximum clamping voltage shall be as follows:

a. Line to Neutral: 360 V.

b. Line to Ground: 360 V.

c. Neutral to Ground: 360 V.

6. Electromagnetic interference and RF interference noise rejection or attenuation values

shall comply with test and evaluation procedures defined in NEMA LS-1.

a. Line to Neutral:

1) 100 kHz: 42 dB.

2) 1 MHz: 25 dB.

3) 10 MHz: 21 dB.

4) 100 MHz: 36 dB.

b. Line to Ground:

1) 100 kHz: 16 dB.

2) 1 MHz: 55 dB.

3) 10 MHz: 81 dB.

4) 100 MHz: 80 dB.

7. Unit shall have LED status indicator that extinguishes to indicate a failure.

8. Unit shall be listed by an NRTL as a transient voltage surge suppressor per UL 1449, and

as an electromagnetic interference filter per UL 1283.



230923 Page 51 of 80

9. Unit shall not generate any appreciable magnetic field.

10. Unit shall not generate an audible noise.

D. DC Power Supply:

1. Plug-in style suitable for mating with a standard eight-pin octal socket. Include the power

supply with a mating mounting socket.

2. Enclose circuitry in a housing.

3. Include both line and load regulation to ensure a stable output. To protect both the power

supply and the load, power supply shall have an automatic current limiting circuit.

4. Performance:

a. Output voltage nominally 25-V dc within 5 percent.

b. Output current up to 100 mA.

c. Input voltage nominally 120-V ac, 60 Hz.

d. Load regulation within 0.5 percent from zero- to 100-mA load.

e. Line regulation within 0.5 percent at a 100-mA load for a 10 percent line change.

f. Stability within 0.1 percent of rated volts for 24 hours after a 20-minute warmup.

2.23 CONTROL WIRE AND CABLE

A. Wire: Single conductor control wiring above 24 V.

1. Wire size shall be at least No. 18 AWG.

2. Conductor shall be 7/24 soft annealed copper strand with 2- to 2.5-inch lay.

3. Conductor insulation shall be 600 V, Type THWN or Type THHN, and 90 deg C

according to UL 83.

4. Conductor colors shall be black (hot), white (neutral), and green (ground).

5. Furnish wire on spools.

B. Single Twisted Shielded Instrumentation Cable above 24 V:

1. Wire size shall be a minimum No. 18 AWG.

2. Conductors shall be a twisted, 7/24 soft annealed copper strand with a 2- to 2.5-inch lay.

3. Conductor insulation shall have a Type THHN/THWN or Type TFN rating.

4. Shielding shall be 100 percent type, 0.35/0.5-mil aluminum/Mylar tape, helically applied

with 25 percent overlap, and aluminum side in with tinned copper drain wire.

5. Outer jacket insulation shall have a 600-V, 90-deg C rating and shall be Type TC cable.

6. For twisted pair, conductor colors shall be black and white. For twisted triad, conductor

colors shall be black, red and white.


C. Single Twisted Shielded Instrumentation Cable 24 V and Less:

1. Wire size shall be a minimum No. 18 AWG.

2. Conductors shall be a twisted, 7/24 soft annealed copper stranding with a 2- to 2.5-inch

lay.



230923 Page 52 of 80

3. Conductor insulation shall have a nominal 15-mil thickness, constructed from flame-

retardant PVC.

4. Shielding shall be 100 percent type, 1.35-mil aluminum/polymer tape, helically applied

with 25 percent overlap, and aluminum side in with tinned copper drain wire.

5. Outer jacket insulation shall have a 300-V, 105-deg C rating and shall be Type PLTC

cable.

6. For twisted pair, conductor colors shall be black and white. For twisted triad, conductor

colors shall be black, red and white.


D. LAN and Communication Cable: Comply with DDC system manufacturer requirements for

network being installed.

1. Cable shall be balanced twisted pair.

2. Comply with the following requirements and for balanced twisted pair cable described in

Section 271513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling."

a. Cable shall be plenum rated.

b. Cable shall have a unique color that is different from other cables used on Project.

2.24 RACEWAYS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for

electrical power raceways and boxes.

2.25 ACCESSORIES

A. Pressure Electric Switches:

1. Diaphragm-operated snap acting switch.

2. Set point adjustable from 3 to 20 psig.

3. Differential adjustable from 2 to 6 psig.

4. Rated for resistance loads at 120-V ac.

5. Body and switch housing shall be metal.

B. Damper Blade Limit Switches:

1. Sense positive open and/or closed position of the damper blades.

2. NEMA 250, Type 13, oil-tight construction.

3. Arrange for the mounting application.

4. Additional waterproof enclosure when required by its environment.

5. Arrange to prevent "over-center" operation.

C. I/P and E/P Transducers:

1. Commercial Grade:



230923 Page 53 of 80

a. The transducer shall convert an AO signal to a stepped pneumatic signal. Unless

otherwise required by the operating sequence, use a 3- to 15-psig pneumatic signal

for pneumatic actuation.

b. Construct the entire assembly so that shock and vibration will neither harm the

transducer nor affect its accuracy.

c. Transducer shall have auto/manual output switch, manual output control and an

output pressure gauge.

d. Accuracy: Within 1.0 percent of the output span.

e. Linearity: Within 0.5 percent of the output span.

f. Output Capacity: Not less than 550 scim at 15 psig.

g. Transducer shall have separate zero and span calibration adjustments.

h. The transducer shall withstand up to 40 psig of supply pressure without damage.

i. For use on only modulating pneumatic outputs that are associated with terminal

units, including fan-coil units, VAV units, unit heaters and.

2. Industrial Grade:

a. The transducer shall convert an AO signal to a proportional pneumatic signal.

Unless otherwise required by the operating sequence, use a 3- to 15-psig

pneumatic signal for pneumatic actuation. A stepped pneumatic signal is

unacceptable.

b. Construct the entire assembly so that shock and vibration will neither harm the

transducer nor affect its accuracy.

c. Suitable for operation in an ambient temperature range of minus 40 to 150 deg F.

d. Accuracy: Within 0.5 percent of the output span.

e. Linearity: Within 0.5 percent of the output span.

f. Output Capacity: Not less than 5 scfm.

g. Transducer shall have zero and span calibration adjustments.

h. The transducer shall withstand up to 50 psig of supply pressure without damage.

i. For use on all modulating pneumatic outputs, not requiring a commercial-grade

transducer.

D. E/P Switch:

1. Construct the body of cast aluminum or brass; three pipe body (common, normally open,

and normally closed).

2. Internal construction of steel, copper or brass.

3. Air Connections: Barb.

4. Rating of 30 psig when installed in systems below 25 psig and of 150 psig when installed

in systems above 25 psig.

5. Include coil transient suppression.

E. Instrument Enclosures:

1. Include instrument enclosure for secondary protection to comply with requirements

indicated in "Performance Requirements" Article.

2. NRTL listed and labeled to UL 50.

3. Sized to include at least 25 percent spare area on subpanel.

4. Instrument(s) mounted within enclosure on internal subpanel(s).



230923 Page 54 of 80

5. Enclosure face with engraved, laminated phenolic nameplate for each instrument within

enclosure.

6. Enclosures housing pneumatic instruments shall include main pressure gauge and a

branch pressure gauge for each pneumatic device, installed inside.

7. Enclosures housing multiple instruments shall route tubing and wiring within enclosure

in a raceway having a continuous removable cover.

8. Enclosures larger than 12 inches shall have a hinged full-size face cover.

F. Manual Valves:

1. Needle Type:

a. PTFE packing.

b. Construct of brass for use with copper and polyethylene tubing and of stainless

steel for use with stainless steel tubing.

c. Aluminum T-bar handle.

d. Include tubing connections.

2. Ball Type:

a. Body: Bronze ASTM B62 or ASTM B61.

b. Ball: Type 316 stainless steel.

c. Stem: Type 316 stainless steel.

d. Seats: Reinforced PTFE.

e. Packing Ring: Reinforced PTFE.

f. Lever: Stainless steel with a vinyl grip.

g. 600 WOG.

h. Threaded end connections.

2.26 IDENTIFICATION

A. Control Equipment, Instruments, and Control Devices:

1. Self-adhesive label or Laminated acrylic or melamine plastic sign bearing unique

identification.

a. Include instruments with unique identification identified by equipment being

controlled or monitored, followed by point identification.

B. Valve Tags:

1. Brass tags and brass chains attached to valve.

2. Tags shall be at least 1.5 inches in diameter.

3. Include tag with unique valve identification indicating control influence such as flow,

level, pressure, or temperature; followed by location of valve, and followed by three-digit

sequential number. For example: TV-1.001.



230923 Page 55 of 80

4. Valves with Project-specific identification tags having unique identification numbers

following requirements indicated and provided by original manufacturer do not require

an additional tag.

C. Raceway and Boxes:

1. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification

for Electrical Systems."

2. Paint cover plates on junction boxes and conduit same color as the tape banding for

conduits. After painting, label cover plate "HVAC Controls," using an engraved phenolic

tag.

3. For raceways housing pneumatic tubing, add a phenolic tag labeled "HVAC Instrument

Air Tubing."

4. For raceways housing air signal tubing, add a phenolic tag labeled "HVAC Air Signal

Tubing."

D. Equipment Warning Labels:

1. Self-adhesive label with pressure-sensitive adhesive back and peel-off protective jacket.

2. Lettering size shall be at least 14-point type with white lettering on red background.

3. Warning label shall read "CAUTION-Equipment operated under remote automatic

control and may start or stop at any time without warning. Switch electric power

disconnecting means to OFF position before servicing."

4. Lettering shall be enclosed in a white line border. Edge of label shall extend at least 0.25

inch beyond white border.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate the following according to

industry standards for each product, and to verify DDC system reliability specified in

performance requirements:

B. Product(s) and material(s) will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates.

B. Examine roughing-in for products to verify actual locations of connections before installation.



230923 Page 56 of 80

1. Examine roughing-in for instruments installed in piping to verify actual locations of

connections before installation.

2. Examine roughing-in for instruments installed in duct systems to verify actual locations

of connections before installation.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings for suitable conditions where product will be

installed.

D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of

the Work.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 DDC SYSTEM INTERFACE WITH OTHER SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Communication Interface to Equipment with Integral Controls:

1. DDC system shall have communication interface with equipment having integral controls

and having a communication interface for remote monitoring or control.

2. Equipment to Be Connected:

a. Boilers specified in Section 235216 "Condensing Boilers."

b. Air-handling units specified in Section 237313.13 "Indoor, Basic Air-Handling

Units."

B. Communication Interface to Other Building Systems:

1. DDC system shall have a communication interface with systems having a communication

interface.

2. Systems to Be Connected:

a. Fire-alarm system specified in Section 284621.11 "Addressable Fire-Alarm

Systems."

3.3 CONTROL DEVICES FOR INSTALLATION BY INSTALLERS

A. Deliver selected control devices, specified in indicated HVAC instrumentation and control

device Sections, to identified equipment and systems manufacturers for factory installation and

to identified installers for field installation.

B. Deliver the following to duct fabricator and Installer for installation in ductwork. Include

installation instructions to Installer and supervise installation for compliance with requirements.

1. DDC control dampers, which are specified in Section 230923.12 "Control Dampers."

2. Airflow sensors and switches, which are specified in Section 230923.14 "Flow

Instruments."

3. Pressure sensors, which are specified in Section 230923.23 "Pressure Instruments."



230923 Page 57 of 80

C. Deliver the following to plumbing and HVAC piping installers for installation in piping. Include

installation instructions to Installer and supervise installation for compliance with requirements.

1. DDC control valves, which are specified in Section 230923.11 "Control Valves."

2. Pipe-mounted flow meters, which are specified in Section 230923.14 "Flow

Instruments."

3. Pipe-mounted sensors, switches, and transmitters. Flow meters are specified in

Section 230923.14 "Flow Instruments."

4. Tank-mounted sensors, switches, and transmitters. Pressure sensors, switches, and

transmitters are specified in Section 230923.23 "Pressure Instruments."

5. Liquid temperature sensors, switches, and transmitters are specified in Section 230923.27

"Temperature Instruments."

6. Pipe- and tank-mounted thermowells. Liquid thermowells are specified in

Section 230923.27 "Temperature Instruments."


A. Install products to satisfy more stringent of all requirements indicated.

B. Install products level, plumb, parallel, and perpendicular with building construction.

C. Support products, tubing, piping wiring and raceways. Brace products to prevent lateral

movement and sway or a break in attachment when subjected to a force.

D. If codes and referenced standards are more stringent than requirements indicated, comply with

requirements in codes and referenced standards.

E. Fabricate openings and install sleeves in ceilings, floors, roof, and walls required by installation

of products. Before proceeding with drilling, punching, and cutting, check for concealed work

to avoid damage. Patch, flash, grout, seal, and refinish openings to match adjacent condition.

F. Firestop Penetrations Made in Fire-Rated Assemblies: Comply with requirements in

Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

G. Seal penetrations made in acoustically rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

H. Welding Requirements:

1. Restrict welding and burning to supports and bracing.

2. No equipment shall be cut or welded without approval. Welding or cutting will not be

approved if there is risk of damage to adjacent Work.

3. Welding, where approved, shall be by inert-gas electric arc process and shall be

performed by qualified welders according to applicable welding codes.

4. If requested on-site, show satisfactory evidence of welder certificates indicating ability to

perform welding work intended.

I. Fastening Hardware:



230923 Page 58 of 80

1. Stillson wrenches, pliers, and other tools that damage surfaces of rods, nuts, and other

parts are prohibited for work of assembling and tightening fasteners.

2. Tighten bolts and nuts firmly and uniformly. Do not overstress threads by excessive force

or by oversized wrenches.

3. Lubricate threads of bolts, nuts and screws with graphite and oil before assembly.

J. If product locations are not indicated, install products in locations that are accessible and that

will permit service and maintenance from floor, equipment platforms, or catwalks without

removal of permanently installed furniture and equipment.

3.5 SERVER INSTALLATION

A. Install one server(s) at location(s) directed by Owner.

B. Install number of servers required to suit requirements indicated. Review Project requirements

and indicate layout of proposed location in Shop Drawings.

C. Install software indicated on server(s) and verify that software functions properly.

D. Develop Project-specific graphics, trends, reports, logs, and historical database.

3.6 ROUTER INSTALLATION

A. Install routers if required for DDC system communication interface requirements indicated.

B. Test router to verify that communication interface functions properly.

3.7 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION

A. Install controllers in enclosures to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Connect controllers to field power supply.

C. Install controller with latest version of applicable software and configure to execute


D. Test and adjust controllers to verify operation of connected I/O to achieve performance

indicated requirements while executing sequences of operation.

E. Installation of Network Controllers:

1. Quantity and location of network controllers shall be determined by DDC system

manufacturer to satisfy requirements indicated.

2. Install controllers in a protected location that is easily accessible by operators.

3. Top of controller shall be within 72 inches of finished floor.



230923 Page 59 of 80

F. Installation of Programmable Application Controllers:

1. Quantity and location of programmable application controllers shall be determined by

DDC system manufacturer to satisfy requirements indicated.

2. Install controllers in a protected location that is easily accessible by operators.

3. Top of controller shall be within 72 inches of finished floor.

G. Application-Specific Controllers:

1. Quantity and location of application-specific controllers shall be determined by DDC

system manufacturer to satisfy requirements indicated.

2. For controllers not mounted directly on equipment being controlled, install controllers in

a protected location that is easily accessible by operators.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF WIRELESS ROUTERS FOR OPERATOR INTERFACE

A. Install wireless routers to achieve optimum performance and best possible coverage.

B. Mount wireless routers in a protected location that is within 60 inches of floor and easily

accessible by operators.

C. Connect wireless routers to field power supply and to UPS units if network controllers are

powered through UPS units.

D. Install wireless router with latest version of applicable software and configure wireless router

with WPA2 security and password protection. Create access password with not less than 12

characters consisting of letters and numbers and at least one special character. Document

password in operations and maintenance manuals for reference by operators.

E. Test and adjust wireless routers for proper operation with portable workstation and other

wireless devices intended for use by operators.

3.9 ENCLOSURES INSTALLATION

A. Install the following items in enclosures, to comply with indicated requirements:

1. Routers.

2. Controllers.

3. Relays.

4. Accessories.

5. Instruments.

6. Actuators

B. Attach wall-mounted enclosures to wall using the following types of steel struts:

1. For NEMA 250, Type 1 Enclosures: Use painted steel strut and hardware.



230923 Page 60 of 80

2. For NEMA 250, Type 4 Enclosures and Enclosures Located Outdoors: Use stainless steel

strut and hardware.

3. Install plastic caps on exposed cut edges of strut.

C. Align top of adjacent enclosures of like size.

D. Install continuous and fully accessible wireways to connect conduit, wire, and cable to multiple

adjacent enclosures. Wireway used for application shall have protection equal to NEMA 250

rating of connected enclosures.

3.10 ELECTRIC POWER CONNECTIONS

A. Connect electrical power to DDC system products requiring electrical power connections.

B. Design of electrical power to products not indicated with electric power is delegated to DDC

system provider and installing trade. Work shall comply with NFPA 70 and other requirements

indicated.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 262816 "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers" for

electrical power circuit breakers.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables" for electrical power conductors and cables.

E. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for

electrical power raceways and boxes.

3.11 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements in

Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for identification products and

installation.

B. Install self-adhesive labels, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs with unique

identification on face for each of the following:

1. Server.

2. Router.

3. Protocol analyzer.

4. DDC controller.

5. Enclosure.

6. Accessory.

C. Install unique instrument identification on face of each instrument connected to a DDC

controller.



230923 Page 61 of 80

D. Install unique identification on face of each control damper and valve actuator connected to a

DDC controller.

E. Where product is installed above accessible tile ceiling, also install matching identification on

face of ceiling grid located directly below.

F. Where product is installed above an inaccessible ceiling, also install identification on face of

access door directly below.

G. Warning Labels and Signs:

1. Shall be permanently attached to equipment that can be automatically started by DDC

control system.

2. Shall be located in highly visible location near power service entry points.

3.12 NETWORK INSTALLATION

A. Install balanced twisted pair or copper cable (as required by equipment) when connecting

between the following:

1. Gateways.

2. Gateways and network controllers or programmable application controllers.

3. Routers.

4. Routers and network controllers or programmable application controllers.

5. Network controllers and programmable application controllers.

6. Programmable application controllers.

7. Programmable application controllers and application-specific controllers.

8. Application-specific controllers.

B. Install cable in continuous raceway.

1. Where indicated on Drawings, cable trays may be used for copper cable in lieu of

conduit.

3.13 NETWORK NAMING AND NUMBERING

A. Coordinate with Owner and provide unique naming and addressing for networks and devices.

B. ASHRAE 135 Networks:

1. MAC Address:

a. Every network device shall have an assigned and documented MAC address

unique to its network.

b. Ethernet Networks: Document MAC address assigned at its creation.

c. ARCNET or MS/TP networks: Assign from 00 to 64.



230923 Page 62 of 80

2. Network Numbering:

a. Assign unique numbers to each new network.

b. Provide ability for changing network number through device switches or operator

interface.

c. DDC system, with all possible connected LANs, can contain up to 65,534 unique

networks.

3. Device Object Identifier Property Number:

a. Assign unique device object identifier property numbers or device instances for

each device network.

b. Provide for future modification of device instance number by device switches or

operator interface.

c. LAN shall support up to 4,194,302 unique devices.

4. Device Object Name Property Text:

a. Device object name property field shall support 32 minimum printable characters.

b. Assign unique device "Object Name" property names with plain-English

descriptive names for each device.

1) Example 1: Device object name for device controlling boiler plant at

Building 1000 would be "HW System B1000."

2) Example 2: Device object name for a VAV terminal unit controller could be

"VAV unit 102".

5. Object Name Property Text for Other Than Device Objects:

a. Object name property field shall support 32 minimum printable characters.

b. Assign object name properties with plain-English names descriptive of application.

1) Example 1: "Zone 1 Temperature."

2) Example 2 "Fan Start and Stop."

6. Object Identifier Property Number for Other Than Device Objects:

a. Assign object identifier property numbers according to Drawings or tables

indicated.

b. If not indicated, object identifier property numbers may be assigned at Installer's

discretion but must be approved by Owner in advance, be documented and be

unique for like object types within device.

3.14 INSTALLATION OF PROCESS TUBING

A. Install process tubing for signal to instruments in liquid and steam systems. Instruments include,

but are not limited to, the following:



230923 Page 63 of 80

1. Meters.

2. Sensors.

3. Switches.

4. Transmitters.

B. Support tubing according to MSS SP-69, Table 3, but at intervals no less than 60 inches.

C. Install NPS 1/2 process tubing for industrial-grade sensors, transmitters, and switches. Install

stainless steel bushings where required.

D. Make tubing bends with a bending tool. Flattened or wrinkled bends are unacceptable.

E. Support tubing independent of other trades.

F. Route tubing parallel to and at right angles to building construction.

G. Install tubing concealed in areas with ceilings.

H. Install a dirt leg with an isolation valve and threaded plug in drain valve at each connection to a

transmitter and switch.

I. Insulate process piping connected to hot water and steam systems for personnel protection if the

surface temperature exceeds 120 deg F. Only insulate piping within maintenance personnel

reach from floor, platform, or catwalk.

J. Wrap pipe threads of fitting in process tubing with service temperatures below 350 deg F with a

single wrap of PTFE tape.

K. Coat pipe threads of fittings on process tubing in services with temperatures exceeding 350

deg F with pipe compound before being made up to reduce the possibility of galling.

L. Do not make tubing connections to a fitting before completing makeup of the connection.

M. Check tubing for correct diameter and wall thickness. Cut the tube ends square and deburred.

Exercise care during cutting to keep tubing round.

N. Do not install fittings close to a bend. A length of straight tubing, not deformed by bending, is

required for a proper connection.

O. Align tubing with fitting when installed. Avoid springing tube into position.

P. Install tubing with extreme care exercised to keep foreign matter out of system. Open tubing

ends shall be kept plugged to keep out dust, dirt and moisture.

Q. Do not attach tubing to equipment that may be removed frequently for maintenance or may

impart vibration and expansion from temperature change.



230923 Page 64 of 80

R. Protect exposed tubing in mechanical equipment rooms from inadvertent mechanical damage

within 76 inches above floor. Use aluminum channel reversed and secured over tubing to

protect tubing from damage.

S. Process Tubing Isolation Valves Installation:

1. Install valves full size of piping and tubing.

2. Install isolation valves at the following locations:

a. Process connection.

b. Inlet to each instrument including, sensors, transmitters, switches, gauges, and

other control devices.

3. Locate valves to be readily accessible from floor.

3.15 CONTROL WIRE, CABLE AND RACEWAYS INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Wire and Cable Installation:

1. Comply with installation requirements in Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical

Power Cables."

2. Comply with installation requirements in Section 271313 "Communications Copper

Backbone Cabling."

3. Comply with installation requirements in Section 271513 "Communications Copper

Horizontal Cabling."

4. Install cables with protective sheathing that is waterproof and capable of withstanding

continuous temperatures of 90 deg C with no measurable effect on physical and electrical

properties of cable.

a. Provide shielding to prevent interference and distortion from adjacent cables and

equipment.

5. Terminate wiring in a junction box.

a. Clamp cable over jacket in junction box.

b. Individual conductors in the stripped section of the cable shall be slack between

the clamping point and terminal block.

6. Terminate field wiring and cable not directly connected to instruments and control

devices having integral wiring terminals using terminal blocks.

7. Install signal transmission components according to IEEE C2, REA Form 511a,

NFPA 70, and as indicated.

8. Use shielded cable to transmitters.

9. Use shielded cable to temperature sensors.

10. Perform continuity and meager testing on wire and cable after installation.



230923 Page 65 of 80

C. Conduit Installation:

1. Comply with Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for control-

voltage conductors.

2. Comply with Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for balanced

twisted pair cabling and optical fiber installation.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and installations, including connections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

3. Testing of Pneumatic and Air-Signal Tubing:

a. Test for leaks and obstructions.

b. Disconnect each pipe and tubing line before a test is performed, and blowout dust,

dirt, trash, condensate and other foreign materials with compressed air. Use

commercially pure compressed air or nitrogen as distributed in gas cylinders. Air

from an oil-free compressor with an air dryer is an acceptable alternative for the

test.

c. After foreign matter is expelled and line is free from obstructions, plug far end of

tubing run.

d. Connect a pressure source to near end of run with a needle valve between air

supply and tubing run.

e. Connect a pressure gauge accurate to within 0.5 percent of test between the shutoff

needle valve and tubing run under test.

f. For system pressures above 30 psig, apply a pressure of 1.5 times operating

pressure. Record pressure in tubing run every 10 minutes for one hour. Allowable

drop in pressure in one-hour period shall not exceed 1 psig.

g. For system pressures 30 psig and below, apply a pressure of 2.0 times operating

pressure to piping and tubing run. Record pressure in tubing run every 5 minutes

for one hour. Allowable drop in pressure in one-hour period shall not exceed 0.5

psig.

C. Testing:

1. Perform preinstallation, in-progress, and final tests, supplemented by additional tests, as

necessary.

2. Preinstallation Cable Verification: Verify integrity and serviceability for new cable

lengths before installation. This assurance may be provided by using vendor verification



230923 Page 66 of 80

documents, testing, or other methods. As a minimum, furnish evidence of verification for

cable attenuation and bandwidth parameters.

3. In-Progress Testing: Perform standard tests for correct pair identification and termination

during installation to ensure proper installation and cable placement. Perform tests in

addition to those specified if there is any reason to question condition of material

furnished and installed. Testing accomplished is to be documented by agency conducting

tests. Submit test results for Project record.

4. Final Testing: Perform final test of installed system to demonstrate acceptability as

installed. Testing shall be performed according to a test plan supplied by DDC system

manufacturer. Defective Work or material shall be corrected and retested. As a minimum,

final testing for cable system, including spare cable, shall verify conformance of

attenuation, length, and bandwidth parameters with performance indicated.

5. Test Equipment: Use an optical fiber time domain reflectometer for testing of length and

optical connectivity.

6. Test Results: Record test results and submit copy of test results for Project record.

3.17 DDC SYSTEM I/O CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

A. Check installed products before continuity tests, leak tests and calibration.

B. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.

C. Check instruments for proper installation on direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion

depth, or other applicable considerations that will impact performance.

D. Check instrument tubing for proper isolation, fittings, slope, dirt legs, drains, material and

support.

E. For pneumatic products, verify that air supply for each product is properly installed.

F. Control Damper Checkout:

1. For pneumatic dampers, verify that pressure gauges are provided in each air line to

damper actuator and positioner.

2. Verify that control dampers are installed correctly for flow direction.

3. Verify that proper blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided.

4. Verify that damper frame attachment is properly secured and sealed.

5. Verify that damper actuator and linkage attachment is secure.

6. Verify that actuator wiring is complete, enclosed and connected to correct power source.

7. Verify that damper blade travel is unobstructed.

G. Control Valve Checkout:

1. Verify that control valves are installed correctly for flow direction.

2. Verify that valve body attachment is properly secured and sealed.

3. Verify that valve actuator and linkage attachment is secure.

4. Verify that actuator wiring is complete, enclosed and connected to correct power source.

5. Verify that valve ball, disc or plug travel is unobstructed.



230923 Page 67 of 80

6. After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before insulating and

balancing, inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks. Replace

the valve if leaks persist.

H. Instrument Checkout:

1. Verify that instrument is correctly installed for location, orientation, direction and

operating clearances.

2. Verify that attachment is properly secured and sealed.

3. Verify that conduit connections are properly secured and sealed.

4. Verify that wiring is properly labeled with unique identification, correct type and size and

is securely attached to proper terminals.

5. Inspect instrument tag against approved submittal.

6. For instruments with tubing connections, verify that tubing attachment is secure and

isolation valves have been provided.

7. For flow instruments, verify that recommended upstream and downstream distances have

been maintained.

8. For temperature instruments:

a. Verify sensing element type and proper material.

b. Verify length and insertion.

3.18 DDC SYSTEM I/O ADJUSTMENT, CALIBRATION AND TESTING:

A. Calibrate each instrument installed that is not factory calibrated and provided with calibration

documentation.

B. Provide a written description of proposed field procedures and equipment for calibrating each

type of instrument. Submit procedures before calibration and adjustment.

C. For each analog instrument, make a three-point test of calibration for both linearity and

accuracy.

D. Equipment and procedures used for calibration shall comply with instrument manufacturer's


E. Provide diagnostic and test equipment for calibration and adjustment.

F. Field instruments and equipment used to test and calibrate installed instruments shall have

accuracy at least twice the instrument accuracy being calibrated. An installed instrument with an

accuracy of 1 percent shall be checked by an instrument with an accuracy of 0.5 percent.

G. Calibrate each instrument according to instrument instruction manual supplied by manufacturer.

H. If after calibration indicated performance cannot be achieved, replace out-of-tolerance

instruments.



230923 Page 68 of 80

I. Comply with field testing requirements and procedures indicated by ASHRAE's Guideline 11,

"Field Testing of HVAC Control Components," in the absence of specific requirements, and to

supplement requirements indicated.

J. Analog Signals:

1. Check analog voltage signals using a precision voltage meter at zero, 50, and 100

percent.

2. Check analog current signals using a precision current meter at zero, 50, and 100 percent.

3. Check resistance signals for temperature sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of operating

span using a precision-resistant source.

K. Digital Signals:

1. Check digital signals using a jumper wire.

2. Check digital signals using an ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking.

L. Control Dampers:

1. Stroke and adjust control dampers following manufacturer's recommended procedure,

from 100 percent open to 100 percent closed and back to 100 percent open.

2. Stroke control dampers with pilot positioners. Adjust damper and positioner following

manufacturer's recommended procedure, so damper is 100 percent closed, 50 percent

closed and 100 percent open at proper air pressure.

3. Check and document open and close cycle times for applications with a cycle time less

than 30 seconds.

4. For control dampers equipped with positive position indication, check feedback signal at

multiple positions to confirm proper position indication.

M. Control Valves:

1. Stroke and adjust control valves following manufacturer's recommended procedure, from

100 percent open to 100 percent closed and back to 100 percent open.

2. Stroke control valves with pilot positioners. Adjust valve and positioner following

manufacturer's recommended procedure, so valve is 100 percent closed, 50 percent

closed and 100 percent open at proper air pressures.

3. Check and document open and close cycle times for applications with a cycle time less

than 30 seconds.

4. For control valves equipped with positive position indication, check feedback signal at


N. Meters: Check sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

O. Sensors: Check sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

P. Switches: Calibrate switches to make or break contact at set points indicated.

Q. Transmitters:



230923 Page 69 of 80

1. Check and calibrate transmitters at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

2. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at zero, 50, and 100 percent of span using a

precision-resistant source.

3.19 DDC SYSTEM CONTROLLER CHECKOUT

A. Verify power supply.

1. Verify voltage, phase and hertz.

2. Verify that protection from power surges is installed and functioning.

3. Verify that ground fault protection is installed.

4. If applicable, verify if connected to UPS unit.

5. If applicable, verify if connected to a backup power source.

6. If applicable, verify that power conditioning units, transient voltage suppression and

high-frequency noise filter units are installed.

B. Verify that wire and cabling is properly secured to terminals and labeled with unique

identification.

C. Verify that spare I/O capacity is provided.

3.20 DDC CONTROLLER I/O CONTROL LOOP TESTS

A. Testing:

1. Test every I/O point connected to DDC controller to verify that safety and operating

control set points are as indicated and as required to operate controlled system safely and

at optimum performance.

2. Test every I/O point throughout its full operating range.

3. Test every control loop to verify operation is stable and accurate.

4. Adjust control loop proportional, integral and derivative settings to achieve optimum

performance while complying with performance requirements indicated. Document

testing of each control loop's precision and stability via trend logs.

5. Test and adjust every control loop for proper operation according to sequence of

operation.

6. Test software and hardware interlocks for proper operation. Correct deficiencies.

7. Operate each analog point at the following:

a. Upper quarter of range.

b. Lower quarter of range.

c. At midpoint of range.

8. Exercise each binary point.

9. For every I/O point in DDC system, read and record each value at operator workstation,

at DDC controller and at field instrument simultaneously. Value displayed at operator

workstation, at DDC controller and at field instrument shall match.



230923 Page 70 of 80

10. Prepare and submit a report documenting results for each I/O point in DDC system and

include in each I/O point a description of corrective measures and adjustments made to

achieve desire results.

3.21 DDC SYSTEM VALIDATION TESTS

A. Perform validation tests before requesting final review of system. Before beginning testing, first

submit Pretest Checklist and Test Plan.

B. After approval of Test Plan, execute all tests and procedures indicated in plan.

C. After testing is complete, submit completed test checklist.

D. Pretest Checklist: Submit the following list with items checked off once verified:

1. Detailed explanation for any items that are not completed or verified.

2. Required mechanical installation work is successfully completed and HVAC equipment

is working correctly.

3. HVAC equipment motors operate below full-load amperage ratings.

4. Required DDC system components, wiring, and accessories are installed.

5. Installed DDC system architecture matches approved Drawings.

6. Control electric power circuits operate at proper voltage and are free from faults.

7. Required surge protection is installed.

8. DDC system network communications function properly, including uploading and

downloading programming changes.

9. Using BACnet protocol analyzer, verify that communications are error free.

10. Each controller's programming is backed up.

11. Equipment, products, tubing, wiring cable, and conduits are properly labeled.

12. All I/O points are programmed into controllers.

13. Testing, adjusting, and balancing work affecting controls is complete.

14. Dampers and actuators zero and span adjustments are set properly.

15. Each control damper and actuator goes to failed position on loss of power.

16. Valves and actuators zero and span adjustments are set properly.

17. Each control valve and actuator goes to failed position on loss of power.

18. Meter, sensor and transmitter readings are accurate and calibrated.

19. Control loops are tuned for smooth and stable operation.

20. View trend data where applicable.

21. Each controller works properly in standalone mode.

22. Safety controls and devices function properly.

23. Interfaces with fire-alarm system function properly.

24. Electrical interlocks function properly.

25. Operator workstations and other interfaces are delivered, all system and database

software is installed, and graphic are created.

26. Record Drawings are completed.

E. Test Plan:



230923 Page 71 of 80

1. Prepare and submit a validation test plan including test procedures for performance

validation tests.

2. Test plan shall address all specified functions of DDC system and sequences of operation.

3. Explain detailed actions and expected results to demonstrate compliance with


4. Explain method for simulating necessary conditions of operation used to demonstrate

performance.

5. Include a test checklist to be used to check and initial that each test has been successfully

completed.

6. Submit test plan documentation 10 business days before start of tests.

F. Validation Test:

1. Verify operating performance of each I/O point in DDC system.

a. Verify analog I/O points at operating value.

b. Make adjustments to out-of-tolerance I/O points.

1) Identify I/O points for future reference.

2) Simulate abnormal conditions to demonstrate proper function of safety

devices.

3) Replace instruments and controllers that cannot maintain performance

indicated after adjustments.

2. Simulate conditions to demonstrate proper sequence of control.

3. Readjust settings to design values and observe ability of DDC system to establish desired

conditions.

4. After 24 Hours following Initial Validation Test:

a. Re-check I/O points that required corrections during initial test.

b. Identify I/O points that still require additional correction and make corrections

necessary to achieve desired results.

5. After 24 Hours of Second Validation Test:

a. Re-check I/O points that required corrections during second test.

b. Continue validation testing until I/O point is normal on two consecutive tests.

6. Completely check out, calibrate, and test all connected hardware and software to ensure

that DDC system performs according to requirements indicated.

7. After validation testing is complete, prepare and submit a report indicating all I/O points

that required correction and how many validation re-tests it took to pass. Identify

adjustments made for each test and indicate instruments that were replaced.

G. DDC System Response Time Test:

1. Simulate HLC.



230923 Page 72 of 80

a. Heavy load shall be an occurrence of 50 percent of total connected binary COV,

one-half of which represent an "alarm" condition, and 50 percent of total

connected analog COV, one-half of which represent an "alarm" condition, that are

initiated simultaneously on a one-time basis.

2. Initiate 10 successive occurrences of HLC and measure response time to typical alarms

and status changes.

3. Measure with a timer having at least 0.1-second resolution and 0.01 percent accuracy.

4. Purpose of test is to demonstrate DDC system, as follows:

a. Reaction to COV and alarm conditions during HLC.

b. Ability to update DDC system database during HLC.

5. Passing test is contingent on the following:

a. Alarm reporting at printer beginning no more than two seconds after the initiation

(time zero) of HLC.

b. All alarms, both binary and analog, are reported and printed; none are lost.

c. Compliance with response times specified.

6. Prepare and submit a report documenting HLC tested and results of test including time

stamp and print out of all alarms.

H. DDC System Network Bandwidth Test:

1. Test network bandwidth usage on all DDC system networks to demonstrate bandwidth

usage under DDC system normal operating conditions and under simulated HLC.

2. To pass, none of DDC system networks shall use more than 70 percent of available

bandwidth under normal and HLC operation.

3.22 DDC SYSTEM WIRELESS NETWORK VERIFICATION

A. DDC system Installer shall design wireless DDC system networks to comply with performance


B. Installer shall verify wireless network performance through field testing and shall document

results in a field test report.

C. Testing and verification of all wireless devices shall include, but not be limited to, the

following:

1. Speed.

2. Online status.

3. Signal strength.



230923 Page 73 of 80

3.23 FINAL REVIEW

A. Submit written request to Architect and Construction Manager when DDC system is ready for

final review. Written request shall state the following:

1. DDC system has been thoroughly inspected for compliance with contract documents and

found to be in full compliance.

2. DDC system has been calibrated, adjusted and tested and found to comply with

requirements of operational stability, accuracy, speed and other performance


3. DDC system monitoring and control of HVAC systems results in operation according to

sequences of operation indicated.

4. DDC system is complete and ready for final review.

B. Review by Architect and Construction Manager shall be made after receipt of written request. A

field report shall be issued to document observations and deficiencies.

C. Take prompt action to remedy deficiencies indicated in field report and submit a second written

request when all deficiencies have been corrected. Repeat process until no deficiencies are

reported.

D. Should more than two reviews be required, DDC system manufacturer and Installer shall

compensate entity performing review for total costs, labor and expenses, associated with third

and subsequent reviews. Estimated cost of each review shall be submitted and approved by

DDC system manufacturer and Installer before making the review.

E. Prepare and submit closeout submittals when no deficiencies are reported.

F. A part of DDC system final review shall include a demonstration to parties participating in final

review.

1. Provide staff familiar with DDC system installed to demonstrate operation of DDC

system during final review.

2. Provide testing equipment to demonstrate accuracy and other performance requirements

of DDC system that is requested by reviewers during final review.

3. Demonstration shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

a. Accuracy and calibration of 10 I/O points randomly selected by reviewers. If

review finds that some I/O points are not properly calibrated and not satisfying

performance requirements indicated, additional I/O points may be selected by

reviewers until total I/O points being reviewed that satisfy requirements equals

quantity indicated.

b. HVAC equipment and system hardwired and software safeties and life-safety

functions are operating according to sequence of operation. Up to 10 I/O points

shall be randomly selected by reviewers. Additional I/O points may be selected by

reviewers to discover problems with operation.

c. Correct sequence of operation after electrical power interruption and resumption

after electrical power is restored for randomly selected HVAC systems.



230923 Page 74 of 80

d. Operation of randomly selected dampers and valves in normal-on, normal-off and

failed positions.

e. Reporting of alarm conditions for randomly selected alarms, including different

classes of alarms, to ensure that alarms are properly received by operators and

operator workstations.

f. Trends, summaries, logs and reports set-up for Project.

g. For up to three HVAC systems randomly selected by reviewers, use graph trends

to show that sequence of operation is executed in correct manner and that HVAC

systems operate properly through complete sequence of operation including

different modes of operations indicated. Show that control loops are stable and

operating at set points and respond to changes in set point of 20 percent or more.

h. Software's ability to communicate with controllers, operator workstations,

uploading and downloading of control programs.

i. Software's ability to edit control programs off-line.

j. Data entry to show Project-specific customizing capability including parameter

changes.

k. Step through penetration tree, display all graphics, demonstrate dynamic update,

and direct access to graphics.

l. Execution of digital and analog commands in graphic mode.

m. Spreadsheet and curve plot software and its integration with database.

n. Online user guide and help functions.

o. Multitasking by showing different operations occurring simultaneously on four

quadrants of split screen.

p. System speed of response compared to requirements indicated.

q. For Each Network and Programmable Application Controller:

1) Memory: Programmed data, parameters, trend and alarm history collected

during normal operation is not lost during power failure.

2) Operator Interface: Ability to connect directly to each type of digital

controller with a portable workstation and mobile device. Show that

maintenance personnel interface tools perform as indicated in

manufacturer's technical literature.

3) Standalone Ability: Demonstrate that controllers provide stable and reliable

standalone operation using default values or other method for values

normally read over network.

4) Electric Power: Ability to disconnect any controller safely from its power

source.

5) Wiring Labels: Match control drawings.

6) Network Communication: Ability to locate a controller's location on

network and communication architecture matches Shop Drawings.

7) Nameplates and Tags: Accurate and permanently attached to control panel

doors, instrument, actuators, and devices.

r. Communications and Interoperability: Demonstrate proper interoperability of data

sharing, alarm and event management, trending, scheduling, and device and

network management. Use ASHRAE 135 protocol analyzer to help identify

devices, view network traffic, and verify interoperability. Requirements must be

met even if only one manufacturer's equipment is installed.



230923 Page 75 of 80

1) Data Presentation: On each operator workstation, demonstrate graphic

display capabilities.

2) Reading of Any Property: Demonstrate ability to read and display any used

readable object property of any device on network.

3) Set Point and Parameter Modifications: Show ability to modify set points

and tuning parameters indicated.

4) Peer-to-Peer Data Exchange: Network devices are installed and configured

to perform without need for operator intervention to implement Project

sequence of operation and to share global data.

5) Alarm and Event Management: Alarms and events are installed and

prioritized according to Owner. Demonstrate that time delays and other

logic are set up to avoid nuisance tripping. Show that operators with

sufficient privileges are permitted.

6) Schedule Lists: Schedules are configured for start and stop, mode change,

occupant overrides, and night setback as defined in sequence of operations.

7) Schedule Display and Modification: Ability to display any schedule with

start and stop times for calendar year. Show that all calendar entries and

schedules are modifiable from any connected operator workstation by an

operator with sufficient privilege.

8) Archival Storage of Data: Data archiving is handled by operator workstation

and server and local trend archiving and display is accomplished.

9) Modification of Trend Log Object Parameters: Operator with sufficient

privilege can change logged data points, sampling rate, and trend duration.

10) Device and Network Management:

a) Display of network device status.

b) Display of BACnet Object Information.

c) Silencing devices transmitting erroneous data.

d) Time synchronization.

e) Remote device re-initialization.

f) Backup and restore network device programming and master

database(s).

g) Configuration management of routers.

3.24 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions.

Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.25 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include

six months' full maintenance by DDC system manufacturer's authorized service representative.

Include semiannual preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective

components, cleaning, calibration and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and

supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.



230923 Page 76 of 80

3.26 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative with complete knowledge of Project-specific

system installed to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain DDC

system.

B. Extent of Training:

1. Base extent of training on scope and complexity of DDC system indicated and training

requirements indicated. Provide extent of training required to satisfy requirements

indicated even if more than minimum training requirements are indicated.

2. Inform Owner of anticipated training requirements if more than minimum training

requirements are indicated.

3. Minimum Training Requirements:

a. Provide not less than five days of training total.

b. Stagger training over multiple training classes to accommodate Owner's

requirements. All training shall occur before end of warranty period.

c. Total days of training shall be broken into not more than two separate training

classes.

d. Each training class shall be not less than one consecutive day(s).

C. Training Schedule:

1. Schedule training with Owner 20 business days before expected Substantial Completion.

2. Schedule training to provide Owner with at least 10 business days of notice in advance of

training.

3. Training shall occur within normal business hours at a mutually agreed on time. Unless

otherwise agreed to, training shall occur Monday through Friday, except on U.S. Federal

holidays, with two morning sessions and two afternoon sessions. Each morning session

and afternoon session shall be split in half with 30-minute break between sessions.

Morning and afternoon sessions shall be separated by 60-minute lunch period. Training,

including breaks and excluding lunch period, shall not exceed eight hours per day.

4. Provide staggered training schedule as requested by Owner.

D. Training Attendee List and Sign-in Sheet:

1. Request from Owner in advance of training a proposed attendee list with name, phone

number and e-mail address.

2. Provide a preprinted sign-in sheet for each training session with proposed attendees listed

and no fewer than six blank spaces to add additional attendees.

3. Preprinted sign-in sheet shall include training session number, date and time, instructor

name, phone number and e-mail address, and brief description of content to be covered

during session. List attendees with columns for name, phone number, e-mail address and

a column for attendee signature or initials.

4. Circulate sign-in sheet at beginning of each session and solicit attendees to sign or initial

in applicable location.

5. At end of each training day, send Owner an e-mail with an attachment of scanned copy

(PDF) of circulated sign-in sheet for each session.



230923 Page 77 of 80

E. Training Attendee Headcount:

1. Plan in advance of training for two attendees.

2. Make allowance for Owner to add up to two attendee(s) at time of training.

3. Headcount may vary depending on training content covered in session. Attendee access

may be restricted to some training content for purposes of maintaining system security.

F. Training Attendee Prior Knowledge: For guidance in planning required training and instruction,

assume attendees have the following:

1. High school education and degree.

2. Basic user knowledge of computers and office applications.

3. Basic knowledge of HVAC systems.

4. knowledge of DDC systems.

5. Basic knowledge of DDC system and products installed.

G. Attendee Training Manuals:

1. Provide each attendee with a color hard copy of all training materials and visual

presentations.

2. Hard-copy materials shall be organized in a three-ring binder with table of contents and

individual divider tabs marked for each logical grouping of subject matter. Organize

material to provide space for attendees to take handwritten notes within training manuals.

3. In addition to hard-copy materials included in training manual, provide each binder with

a sleeve or pocket that includes a DVD or flash drive with PDF copy of all hard-copy

materials.

H. Instructor Requirements:

1. One or multiple qualified instructors, as required, to provide training.

2. Instructors shall have not less than five years of providing instructional training on not

less than five past projects with similar DDC system scope and complexity to DDC

system installed.

I. Organization of Training Sessions:

1. Organize training sessions into logical groupings of technical content and to reflect

different levels of operators having access to system. Plan training sessions to

accommodate the following three levels of operators:

a. Daily operators.

b. Advanced operators.

c. System managers and administrators.

2. Plan and organize training sessions to group training content to protect DDC system

security. Some attendees may be restricted to some training sessions that cover restricted

content for purposes of maintaining DDC system security.

J. Training Outline:



230923 Page 78 of 80

1. Submit training outline for Owner review at least 10 business day before scheduling

training.

2. Outline shall include a detailed agenda for each training day that is broken down into

each of four training sessions that day, training objectives for each training session and

synopses for each lesson planned.

K. On-Site Training:

1. Owner will provide conditioned classroom or workspace with ample desks or tables,

chairs, power and data connectivity for instructor and each attendee.

2. Instructor shall provide training materials, projector and other audiovisual equipment

used in training.

3. Provide as much of training located on-site as deemed feasible and practical by Owner.

4. On-site training shall include regular walk-through tours, as required, to observe each

unique product type installed with hands-on review of operation, calibration and service

requirements.

5. Operator workstation provided with DDC system shall be used in training. If operator

workstation is not indicated, provide a temporary workstation to convey training content.

L. Off-Site Training:

1. Provide conditioned training rooms and workspace with ample tables desks or tables,

chairs, power and data connectivity for each attendee.

2. Provide capability to remotely access to Project DDC system for use in training.

3. Provide a workstation for use by each attendee.

M. Training Content for Daily Operators:

1. Basic operation of system.

2. Understanding DDC system architecture and configuration.

3. Understanding each unique product type installed including performance and service

requirements for each.

4. Understanding operation of each system and equipment controlled by DDC system

including sequences of operation, each unique control algorithm and each unique

optimization routine.

5. Operating operator workstations, printers and other peripherals.

6. Logging on and off system.

7. Accessing graphics, reports and alarms.

8. Adjusting and changing set points and time schedules.

9. Recognizing DDC system malfunctions.

10. Understanding content of operation and maintenance manuals including control

drawings.

11. Understanding physical location and placement of DDC controllers and I/O hardware.

12. Accessing data from DDC controllers.

13. Operating portable operator workstations.

14. Review of DDC testing results to establish basic understanding of DDC system operating

performance and HVAC system limitations as of Substantial Completion.

15. Running each specified report and log.



230923 Page 79 of 80

16. Displaying and demonstrating each data entry to show Project-specific customizing

capability. Demonstrating parameter changes.

17. Stepping through graphics penetration tree, displaying all graphics, demonstrating

dynamic updating, and direct access to graphics.

18. Executing digital and analog commands in graphic mode.

19. Demonstrating control loop precision and stability via trend logs of I/O for not less than

10 percent of I/O installed.

20. Demonstrating DDC system performance through trend logs and command tracing.

21. Demonstrating scan, update, and alarm responsiveness.

22. Demonstrating spreadsheet and curve plot software, and its integration with database.

23. Demonstrating on-line user guide and help function and mail facility.

24. Demonstrating multitasking by showing dynamic curve plot, and graphic construction

operating simultaneously via split screen.

25. Demonstrating the following for HVAC systems and equipment controlled by DDC

system:

a. Operation of HVAC equipment in normal-off, -on and failed conditions while

observing individual equipment, dampers and valves for correct position under

each condition.

b. For HVAC equipment with factory-installed software, show that integration into

DDC system is able to communicate with DDC controllers or gateways, as

applicable.

c. Using graphed trends, show that sequence of operation is executed in correct

manner, and HVAC systems operate properly through complete sequence of

operation including seasonal change, occupied and unoccupied modes, warm-up

and cool-down cycles and other modes of operation indicated.

d. Hardware interlocks and safeties function properly and DDC system performs

correct sequence of operation after electrical power interruption and resumption

after power is restored.

e. Reporting of alarm conditions for each alarm, and confirm that alarms are received

at assigned locations, including operator workstations.

f. Each control loop responds to set point adjustment and stabilizes within time

period indicated.

g. Sharing of previously graphed trends of all control loops to demonstrate that each

control loop is stable and set points are being maintained.

N. Training Content for Advanced Operators:

1. Making and changing workstation graphics.

2. Creating, deleting and modifying alarms including annunciation and routing.

3. Creating, deleting and modifying point trend logs including graphing and printing on an

ad-hoc basis and operator-defined time intervals.

4. Creating, deleting and modifying reports.

5. Creating, deleting and modifying points.

6. Creating, deleting and modifying programming including ability to edit control programs

off-line.

7. Creating, deleting and modifying system graphics and other types of displays.

8. Adding DDC controllers and other network communication devices such as gateways and

routers.



230923 Page 80 of 80

9. Adding operator workstations.

10. Performing DDC system checkout and diagnostic procedures.

11. Performing DDC controllers operation and maintenance procedures.

12. Performing operator workstation operation and maintenance procedures.

13. Configuring DDC system hardware including controllers, workstations, communication

devices and I/O points.

14. Maintaining, calibrating, troubleshooting, diagnosing and repairing hardware.

15. Adjusting, calibrating and replacing DDC system components.

O. Training Content for System Managers and Administrators:

1. DDC system software maintenance and backups.

2. Uploading, downloading and off-line archiving of all DDC system software and

databases.

3. Interface with Project-specific, third-party operator software.

4. Understanding password and security procedures.

5. Adding new operators and making modifications to existing operators.

6. Operator password assignments and modification.

7. Operator authority assignment and modification.

8. Workstation data segregation and modification.

P. Video of Training Sessions:

1. Provide a digital video and audio recording of each training session. Create a separate

recording file for each session.

2. Stamp each recording file with training session number, session name and date.

3. Provide Owner with two copies of digital files on DVDs or flash drives for later reference

and for use in future training.

4. Owner retains right to make additional copies for intended training purposes without

having to pay royalties.




230923.12 1 of 10

SECTION 230923.12 - CONTROL DAMPERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Round control dampers.

2. Electric and electronic control damper actuators.


1. Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control System for HVAC" for control equipment and

software, relays, electrical power devices, uninterruptible power supply units, wire, and

cable.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct digital control.

B. RMS: Root-mean-square value of alternating voltage, which is the square root of the mean

value of the square of the voltage values during a complete cycle.


A. Product Data: For each type of damper and actuator:










4. Installation instructions, including factors affecting performance.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations and sections.



connection.


4. Include diagrams for air and process signal tubing.

5. Include diagrams for pneumatic signal and main air tubing.



230923.12 2 of 10

C. Delegated Design Submittal:

1. Schedule and design calculations for control dampers and actuators, including the

following.

a. Flow at project design and minimum flow conditions.

b. Face velocity at project design and minimum airflow conditions.

c. Pressure drop across damper at project design and minimum airflow conditions.

d. AMCA 500D damper installation arrangement used to calculate and schedule

pressure drop, as applicable to installation.


f. Leakage airflow at maximum system pressure differential (fan close-off pressure).




A. Coordination Drawings: Plan drawings and corresponding product installation details, drawn to

scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input

from installers of the items involved:

1. Product installation location shown in relationship to room, duct, and equipment.

2. Size and location of wall access panels for control dampers and actuators installed behind

walls.

3. Size and location of ceiling access panels for control dampers and actuators installed

above inaccessible ceilings.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For control dampers to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label products to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code where required by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality

Requirements," to size products where indicated as delegated design.

D. Ground Fault: Products shall not fail due to ground fault condition when suitably grounded.



230923.12 3 of 10

E. Backup Power Source: Systems and equipment served by a backup power source shall have

associated control damper actuators served from a backup power source.

F. Environmental Conditions:

1. Provide electric control-damper actuators, with protective enclosures satisfying the

following minimum requirements unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

Electric control-damper actuators not available with integral enclosures, complying with

requirements indicated, shall be housed in protective secondary enclosures.

G. Selection Criteria:

1. Fail positions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Outdoor Air: Close.

b. Exhaust Air: Close

2. Two-position dampers shall be full size of duct or equipment connection unless otherwise

indicated.

2.2 ROUND CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Round Dampers, Flanged Type:

1. Ruskin

2. Performance:

a. Leakage: Leakage shall not exceed 0.15 cfm/inof perimeter blade at 4-in. wg

differential static pressure.

b. Pressure Drop: 0.03-in. wg at 1500 fpm across a 12-inch damper when tested

according to AMCA 500-D, figure 5.3.

c. Velocity: Up to 4000 fpm

d. Temperature: Minus 25 to plus 250 deg F .

3. Construction:

a. Frame:

1) Size Range: 4 to 60 inches.

2) Material: Galvanized steel.

a) Sizes through 24 Inches in Diameter: 0.15 inch thick.

3) Flanges:

a) Outward rolled with bolt holes on each end of frame for mating to

adjacent ductwork.

b) Face: Not less than 1.25 inch for damper sizes through 12 inches in

diameter, 1.5 inch for damper sizes 14 through 24 inches in

diameter, and 2 inches for larger sizes.

4) Length (Flange Face to Face): Not less than 8 inches

5) Provide 3-inch sheet metal stand-off for mounting actuator.



230923.12 4 of 10

b. Blade: Reinforced circular flat blade constructed of [galvanized] [or] [stainless]

steel.

1) Sizes through 24 Inches: 0.15 inch thick.

c. Blade Stop: Full circumference, located in airstream, minimum 0.5 by 0.25 inch

galvanized-steel bar.

d. Blade Seal: Neoprene, mechanically attached to blade and fully encompassing

blade edge.

e. Axle: Plated steel, mechanically attached to blade.

1) Sizes through 14 Inches: 0.5 inch in diameter.

f. Bearings: Stainless steel sleeve pressed into frame.

2.3 GENERAL CONTROL-DAMPER ACTUATORS REQUIREMENTS

A. Actuators shall operate related damper(s) with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth

modulating action or two-position action and proper speed of response at velocity and pressure

conditions to which the damper is subjected.

B. Actuators shall produce sufficient power and torque to close off against the maximum system

pressures encountered. Actuators shall be sized to close off against the fan shutoff pressure as a

minimum requirement.

C. The total damper area operated by an actuator shall not exceed 80 percent of manufacturer's

maximum area rating.

D. Provide one actuator for each damper assembly where possible. Multiple actuators required to

drive a single damper assembly shall operate in unison.

E. Avoid the use of excessively oversized actuators which could overdrive and cause linkage

failure when the damper blade has reached either its full open or closed position.

F. Use jackshafts and shaft couplings in lieu of blade-to-blade linkages when driving axially

aligned damper sections.

G. Provide mounting hardware and linkages for connecting actuator to damper.

H. Select actuators to fail in desired position in the event of a power failure.

I. Actuator Fail Positions:

1. Exhaust Air: Close

2. Outdoor Air: Close

2.4 ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROL DAMPER ACTUATORS

A. Belimo



230923.12 5 of 10

B. Type: Motor operated, with or without gears, electric and electronic.

C. Voltage:

1. Actuator shall deliver torque required for continuous uniform movement of controlled

device from limit to limit when operated at rated voltage.

2. Actuator shall function properly within a range of 85 to 120 percent of nameplate

voltage.

D. Construction:

1. Less Than 100 W: Fiber or reinforced nylon gears with steel shaft, copper alloy or nylon

bearings, and pressed steel enclosures.

2. 100 up to 400 W: Gears ground steel, oil immersed, shaft-hardened steel running in

bronze, copper alloy, or ball bearings. Operator and gear trains shall be totally enclosed

in dustproof cast-iron, cast-steel, or cast-aluminum housing.

3. Greater Than 400 W: Totally enclosed reversible induction motors with auxiliary hand

crank and permanently lubricated bearings.

E. Field Adjustment:

1. Spring return actuators shall be easily switchable from fail open to fail closed in the field

without replacement.

2. Provide gear-type actuators with an external manual adjustment mechanism to allow

manual positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered.

F. Two-Position Actuators: Single direction, spring return or reversing type.

G. Modulating Actuators:

1. Capable of stopping at all points across full range, and starting in either direction from

any point in range.

2. Control Input Signal:

a. Three Point, Tristate, or Floating Point: Clockwise and counter-clockwise inputs.

One input drives actuator to open position, and other input drives actuator to close

position. No signal of either input remains in last position.

b. Proportional: Actuator drives proportional to input signal and modulates

throughout its angle of rotation. Suitable for zero- to 10 or 2- to 10-V dc and 4- to

20-mA signals.

c. Pulse Width Modulation (PWM): Actuator drives to a specified position according

to a pulse duration (length) of signal from a dry-contact closure, triac sink or

source controller.

d. Programmable Multi-Function:

1) Control input, position feedback, and running time shall be factory or field

programmable.

2) Diagnostic feedback of hunting or oscillation, mechanical overload,

mechanical travel, and mechanical load limit.

3) Service data, including at a minimum, number of hours powered and

number of hours in motion.



230923.12 6 of 10

H. Position Feedback:

1. Equip two-position actuators with limits switches or other positive means of a position

indication signal for remote monitoring of open and close position.

I. Fail-Safe:

1. Where indicated, provide actuator to fail to an end position.

2. Internal spring return mechanism to drive controlled device to an end position (open or

close) on loss of power.

3. Batteries, capacitors, and other non-mechanical forms of fail-safe operation are

acceptable only where uniquely indicated.

J. Integral Overload Protection:

1. Provide against overload throughout the entire operating range in both directions.

2. Electronic overload, digital rotation sensing circuitry, mechanical end switches, or

magnetic clutches are acceptable methods of protection.

K. Damper Attachment:

1. Unless otherwise required for damper interface, provide actuator designed to be directly

coupled to damper shaft without need for connecting linkages.

2. Attach actuator to damper drive shaft in a way that ensures maximum transfer of power

and torque without slippage.

3. Bolt and set screw method of attachment is acceptable only if provided with at least two

points of attachment.

L. Temperature and Humidity:

1. Temperature: Suitable for operating temperature range encountered by application with

minimum operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 120 deg F.

2. Humidity: Suitable for humidity range encountered by application; minimum operating

range shall be from 5 to 95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.

M. Enclosure:

1. Suitable for ambient conditions encountered by application.

N. Stroke Time:

1. Operate damper from fully closed to fully open within 15 seconds.

2. Operate damper from fully open to fully closed within 15 seconds.

3. Move damper to failed position within 15 seconds.

4. Select operating speed to be compatible with equipment and system operation.

5. Actuators operating in smoke control systems comply with governing code and NFPA

requirements.

O. Sound:

1. Spring Return: 62 dBA.



230923.12 7 of 10

2. Non-Spring Return: 45 dBA.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



B. Examine roughing-in for dampers and instruments installed in duct systems to verify actual

locations of connections before installation.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance.


3.2 CONTROL-DAMPER APPLICATIONS

A. Control Dampers:

B. Select from damper types indicated in "Control Dampers" Article to achieve performance

requirements and characteristics indicated while subjected to full range of system operation

encountered.

1. Round Exhaust Air Duct Applications with SMACNA Construction Class <Insert

value> and Velocities to <Insert value>: [Rectangular dampers with aluminum

airfoil blades] [Rectangular dampers with steel airfoil blades] [Industrial-duty

rectangular dampers with steel airfoil blades] [Rectangular dampers with

aluminum flat blades] [Rectangular dampers with steel flat blades] [Insulated

rectangular dampers] [Round dampers, sleeve type] [Round dampers, flange type].

2. Round Outdoor Air Duct Applications with SMACNA Construction Class <Insert

value> and Velocities to <Insert value>: [Rectangular dampers with aluminum

airfoil blades] [Rectangular dampers with steel airfoil blades] [Industrial-duty

rectangular dampers with steel airfoil blades] [Rectangular dampers with

aluminum flat blades] [Rectangular dampers with steel flat blades] [Insulated

rectangular dampers] [Round dampers, sleeve type] [Round dampers, flange type].


A. Furnish and install products required to satisfy most stringent requirements indicated.

B. Properly support dampers and actuators, tubing, wiring, and conduit to comply with

requirements indicated. Brace all products to prevent lateral movement and sway or a break in

attachment when subjected to a force.

C. Provide ceiling, floor, roof, and wall openings and sleeves required by installation. Before

proceeding with drilling, punching, or cutting, check location first for concealed products that

could potentially be damaged. Patch, flash, grout, seal, and refinish openings to match adjacent

condition.



230923.12 8 of 10

D. Seal penetrations made in fire-rated and acoustically rated assemblies.

E. Fastening Hardware:

1. Stillson wrenches, pliers, or other tools that will cause injury to or mar surfaces of rods,

nuts, and other parts are prohibited for assembling and tightening nuts.



3. Lubricate threads of bolts, nuts, and screws with graphite and oil before assembly.

F. Install products in locations that are accessible and that will permit calibration and maintenance

from floor, equipment platforms, or catwalks. Where ladders are required for Owner's access,

confirm unrestricted ladder placement is possible under occupied condition.

3.4 ELECTRIC POWER

A. Furnish and install electrical power to products requiring electrical connections.

B. Furnish and install circuit breakers. Comply with requirements in Section 262816 "Enclosed

Switches and Circuit Breakers."

C. Furnish and install power wiring. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage

Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

D. Furnish and install raceways. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and

Boxes for Electrical Systems."

3.5 CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Install smooth transitions, not exceeding 15 degrees, to dampers smaller than adjacent duct.

Install transitions as close to damper as possible but at distance to avoid interference and impact

to performance. Consult manufacturer for recommended clearance.

B. Clearance:

1. Locate dampers for easy access and provide separate support of dampers that cannot be

handled by service personnel without hoisting mechanism.

2. Install dampers with at least 12 of clear space on sides of dampers requiring service

access.

C. Service Access:

1. Dampers and actuators shall be accessible for visual inspection and service.

2. Install access door(s) in duct or equipment located upstream of damper to allow service

personnel to hand clean any portion of damper, linkage, and actuator. Comply with

requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

D. Install dampers straight and true, level in all planes, and square in all dimensions. Install

supplementary structural steel reinforcement for large multiple-section dampers if factory

support alone cannot handle loading.



230923.12 9 of 10

E. Attach actuator(s) to damper drive shaft.

F. For duct-mounted and equipment-mounted dampers installed outside of equipment, install a

visible and accessible indication of damper position from outside.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect electrical devices and components to electrical grounding system. Comply with

requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Each piece of wire, cable, and

tubing shall have the same designation at each end for operators to determine continuity at

points of connection. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553

"Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Install engraved phenolic nameplate with damper identification on damper.

3.8 CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

A. Control-Damper Checkout:

1. Check installed products before continuity tests, leak tests, and calibration.

2. Check dampers for proper location and accessibility.

3. Check instrument tubing for proper isolation, fittings, slope, dirt legs, drains, material,

and support.

4. For pneumatic products, verify air supply for each product is properly installed.

5. For pneumatic dampers, verify that pressure gages are provided in each air line to damper

actuator and positioner.

6. Verify that control dampers are installed correctly for flow direction.

7. Verify that proper blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided.

8. Verify that damper frame attachment is properly secured and sealed.

9. Verify that damper actuator and linkage attachment are secure.

10. Verify that actuator wiring is complete, enclosed, and connected to correct power source.

11. Verify that damper blade travel is unobstructed.

3.9 ADJUSTMENT, CALIBRATION, AND TESTING:

A. Stroke and adjust control dampers following manufacturer's recommended procedure, from 100

percent open to 100 percent closed back to 100 percent open.

B. Stroke control dampers with pilot positioners. Adjust damper and positioner following

manufacturer's recommended procedure, so damper is 100 percent closed, 50 percent closed,

and 100 percent open at proper air pressure.

C. Check and document open and close cycle times for applications with a cycle time of less than

30 seconds.



230923.12 10 of 10

D. For control dampers equipped with positive position indication, check feedback signal at





230923.27 Page 1 of 13

SECTION 230923.27 - TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Air temperature sensors.

2. Air temperature switches.


1. Section 230923 "Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC" for control equipment and


cable.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. HART (Highway Addressable Remote Transducer) Protocol: The global standard for sending

and receiving digital information across analog wires between smart devices and control or

monitoring systems through bidirectional communication that provides data access between

intelligent field instruments and host systems. A host can be any software application from a

technician's hand-held device or laptop to a plant's process control, asset management, safety, or

other system using any control platform.

B. RTD: Resistance temperature detector.










230923.27 Page 2 of 13





4. Installation operation and maintenance instructions, including factors affecting

performance.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.



connection.


4. Include number-coded identification system for unique identification of wiring, cable,

and tubing ends.

C. Samples: For each exposed product installed in finished space.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plan drawings and corresponding product installation details, drawn to

scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input

from installers of the items involved:

1. Product installation location shown in relationship to room, duct, pipe, and equipment.

2. Wall-mounted instruments located in finished space showing relationship to light

switches, fire-alarm devices, and other installed devices.

3. Sizes and locations of wall access panels for instruments installed behind walls.

4. Sizes and locations of ceiling access panels for instruments installed in inaccessible

ceilings.

B. Product Certificates: For each product requiring a certificate.

C. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a

qualified testing agency.



A. Furnish extra materials and parts that match products installed and that are packaged with

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.



230923.27 Page 3 of 13

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Environmental Conditions:

1. Instruments shall operate without performance degradation under the ambient

environmental temperature, pressure, humidity, and vibration conditions specified and

encountered for installed location.

a. If instrument alone cannot meet requirement, install instrument in a protective

enclosure that is isolated and protected from conditions impacting performance.

Enclosure shall be internally insulated, electrically heated and cooled, filtered, and

ventilated as required by instrument and application.

2. Instruments and accessories shall be protected with enclosures satisfying the following

minimum requirements unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Instruments not

available with integral enclosures complying with requirements indicated shall be housed

in protective secondary enclosures. Instrument's installed location shall dictate following

NEMA 250 enclosure requirements:















2.2 AIR TEMPERATURE SENSORS

A. Platinum RTDs: Common Requirements:

1. 100 or 1000 ohms at zero deg C and a temperature coefficient of 0.00385

ohm/ohm/deg C.

2. Two-wire, PTFE-insulated, 22-gage stranded copper leads.

3. Performance Characteristics:



230923.27 Page 4 of 13

a. Range: Minus 50 to 275 deg F.

b. Interchangeable Accuracy: At 32 deg F within 0.5 deg F.

c. Repeatability: Within 0.5 deg F.

d. Self-Heating: Negligible.

4. Transmitter Requirements:

a. Transmitter required for each 100-ohm RTD.

b. Transmitter optional for 1000-ohm RTD, contingent on compliance with end-to-

end control accuracy.

B. Platinum RTD, Single-Point Air Temperature Duct Sensors:

1. 1000 ohms.

2. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to 275 deg F

3. Probe: Single-point sensor with a stainless-steel sheath.

4. Length: As required by application to achieve tip at midpoint of air tunnel, up to 18

inches.

5. Enclosure: Junction box with removable cover; NEMA 250, Type 1 for indoor

applications and Type 4 for outdoor applications.

6. Gasket for attachment to duct or equipment to seal penetration airtight.

7. Conduit Connection: 1/2-inch

C. Platinum RTD Outdoor Air Temperature Sensors:

1. 1000 ohms.


3. Probe: Single-point sensor with a stainless-steel sheath.

4. Solar Shield: Stainless steel.

5. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4 or 4X junction box or combination conduit and outlet box

with removable cover and gasket.

6. Conduit Connection: 1/2-inch trade size.

D. Platinum RTD Space Air Temperature Sensors:

1. 1000 ohms.


3. Sensor assembly shall include a temperature sensing element mounted under a flush,

brushed-aluminum cover.

4. Provide a mounting plate that is compatible with the surface shape that it is mounted to

and electrical box used.

5. Concealed wiring connection.

E. Space Air Temperature Sensors for Use with DDC Controllers Controlling Terminal Units:

1. 1000-ohm platinum RTD.

2. Temperature Transmitter Requirements:



230923.27 Page 5 of 13

a. Mating transmitter required with each 100-ohm RTD.

b. Mating transmitters optional for 1000-ohm RTD and thermistor, contingent on

compliance with end-to-end control accuracy.

3. Provide digital display of sensed temperature.

4. Provide sensor with local control.

a. Local override to turn HVAC on.

b. Local adjustment of temperature set point.

c. Both features shall be capable of manual override through control system operator.

2.3 AIR TEMPERATURE SWITCHES

A. Thermostat and Switch for Low Temperature Control in Duct Applications:

1. Description:

a. Two-position control.

b. Field-adjustable set point.

c. Manual reset.

d. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and

marked for intended location and application.

2. Performance:

a. Operating Temperature Range: 15 to 55 deg F.

b. Temperature Differential: 5 deg F, non-adjustable and additive.

c. Enclosure Ambient Temperature: Minus 20 to 140 deg F.

d. Sensing Element Maximum Temperature: 250 deg F.

e. Voltage: 120-V ac.

f. Current: 16 FLA.

g. Switch Type: Two SPDT snap switches operate on coldest 12-inchsection along

element length.

3. Construction:

a. Vapor-Filled Sensing Element: Nominal 20 feetlong.

b. Dual Temperature Scale: Fahrenheit and Celsius visible on face.

c. Set-Point Adjustment: Screw.

d. Enclosure: Painted metal, NEMA 250, Type 1.

e. Electrical Connections: Screw terminals.

f. Conduit Connection: 1/2-inch trade size.

B. Thermostat and Switch for High Temperature Control in Duct Applications:

1. Source Limitations: Obtain temperature-measuring sensors and transmitters and airflow

from single manufacturer.

2. Description:



230923.27 Page 6 of 13

a. Two-position control.

b. Field-adjustable set point.

c. Manual reset.

d. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and

marked for intended location and application.

3. Performance:

a. Temperature Range: 100 to 160 deg F.

b. Temperature Differential: 5 deg F.

c. Ambient Temperature: Zero to 260 deg F.

d. Voltage: 120-V ac.

e. Current: 16 FLA.

f. Switch Type: SPDT snap switch.

4. Construction:

a. Sensing Element: Helical bimetal.

b. Enclosure: Metal, NEMA 250, Type 1.

c. Electrical Connections: Screw terminals.

d. Conduit Connection: 1/2-inch trade size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



B. Examine roughing-in for instruments installed in piping to verify actual locations of connections

before installation.

C. Examine roughing-in for instruments installed in duct systems to verify actual locations of

connections before installation.

D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENT APPLICATIONS

A. Air Temperature Sensors:

1. Duct: 100-ohm platinum RTD.

2. Outdoor: 100-ohm platinum RTD.

3. Space: 100-ohm platinum RTD.



230923.27 Page 7 of 13

B. Air Temperature Transmitters:

1. Duct: Air temperature RTD transmitter.

2. Outdoor: Air temperature RTD transmitter.

3. Space: Air temperature RTD transmitter.


A. Install products level, plumb, parallel, and perpendicular with building construction.

B. Properly support instruments, tubing, piping, wiring, and conduit to comply with requirements

indicated. Brace all products to prevent lateral movement and sway or a break in attachment

when subjected to a force.

C. Fastening Hardware:

1. Stillson wrenches, pliers, and other tools that cause injury to or mar surfaces of rods,

nuts, and other parts are prohibited for work of assembling and tightening nuts.




D. Install products in locations that are accessible and that permit calibration and maintenance

from floor, equipment platforms, or catwalks. Where ladders are required for Owner's access,

confirm unrestricted ladder placement is possible under occupied condition.

E. Corrosive Environments:

1. Use products that are suitable for environment to which they are subjected.

2. If possible, avoid or limit use of materials in corrosive environments.

3. When conduit is in contact with a corrosive environment, use Type 316 stainless-steel

conduit and fittings or conduit and fittings that are coated with a corrosive-resistant

coating that is suitable for environment.

4. Where instruments are located in a corrosive environment and are not corrosive resistant

from manufacturer, field install products in a NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosure constructed

of Type 316L stainless steel.

3.4 ELECTRIC POWER








230923.27 Page 8 of 13



3.5 TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENT INSTALLATIONS

A. Mounting Location:

1. Roughing In:

a. Outline instrument mounting locations before setting instruments and routing

cable, wiring, tubing, and conduit to final location.

b. Provide independent inspection to confirm that proposed mounting locations

comply with requirements indicated and approved submittals.

1) Indicate dimensioned locations with mounting height for all surface-

mounted products on Shop Drawings.

2) Do not begin installation without submittal approval of mounting location.

c. Complete installation rough-in only after confirmation by independent inspection

is complete and approval of location is documented for review by Owner and

Architect on request.

2. Install switches and transmitters for air associated with individual air-handling units and

associated connected ductwork near air-handling units co-located in air-handling unit

system control panel to provide service personnel a single and convenient location for

inspection and service.

3. Install air temperature switches and transmitters for indoor applications in mechanical

equipment rooms. Do not locate in user-occupied space unless indicated specifically on

Drawings.

4. Mount switches and transmitters on walls, floor-supported freestanding pipe stands, or

floor-supported structural support frames. Use manufacturer's mounting brackets to

accommodate field mounting. Securely support and brace products to prevent vibration

and movement.

B. Special Mounting Requirements:

1. Protect products installed outdoors from solar radiation, building and wind effect with

stand-offs and shields constructed of Type 316 stainless.

2. Temperature instruments having performance impacted by temperature of mounting

substrate shall be isolated with an insulating barrier located between instrument and

substrate to eliminate effect. Where instruments requiring insulation are located in

finished space, conceal insulating barrier in a cover matching the instrument cover.

C. Mounting Height:

1. Mount temperature instruments in user-occupied space to match mounting height of light

switches unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Mounting height shall comply with

codes and accessibility requirements.



230923.27 Page 9 of 13

2. Mount switches and transmitters located in mechanical equipment rooms and other

similar space not subject to code or state and Federal accessibility requirements within a

range of 42 to 72 inches above the adjacent floor, grade, or service catwalk or platform.

a. Make every effort to mount at 60 inches.

D. Seal penetrations to ductwork, plenums, and air-moving equipment to comply with duct static-

pressure class and leakage and seal classes indicated using neoprene gaskets or grommets.

E. Space Temperature Sensor Installation:

1. Conceal assembly in an electrical box of sufficient size to house sensor and transmitter, if

provided.

2. Install electrical box with a faceplate to match sensor cover if sensor cover does not

completely cover electrical box.

3. In finished areas, recess electrical box within wall.

4. In unfinished areas, electrical box may be surface mounted if electrical light switches are

surface mounted. Use a cast-aluminum electric box for surface-mounted installations.

5. Align electrical box with other electrical devices such as visual alarms and light switches

located in the vicinity to provide a neat and well-thought-out arrangement. Where

possible, align in both horizontal and vertical axis.

F. Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor Installation:

1. Mount sensor in a discrete location facing north.

2. Protect installed sensor from solar radiation and other influences that could impact

performance.

3. If required to have a transmitter, mount transmitter remote from sensor in an accessible

and serviceable location indoors.

G. Single-Point Duct Temperature Sensor Installation:

1. Install single-point-type, duct-mounted, supply- and return-air temperature sensors.

Install sensors in ducts with sensitive portion of the element installed in center of duct

cross section and located to sense near average temperature. Do not exceed 24 inches in

sensor length.

2. Install return-air sensor in location that senses return-air temperature without influence

from outdoor or mixed air.

3. Rigidly support sensor to duct and seal penetration airtight.

4. If required to have transmitter, mount transmitter remote from sensor at accessible and

serviceable location.

H. Averaging Duct Temperature Sensor Installation:

1. Install averaging-type air temperature sensor for temperature sensors located within air-

handling units, similar equipment, and large ducts with air tunnel cross-sectional area of

20 sq. ft. and larger.

2. Install sensor length to maintain coverage over entire cross-sectional area. Install multiple

sensors where required to maintain the minimum coverage.



230923.27 Page 10 of 13

3. Fasten and support sensor with manufacturer-furnished clips to keep sensor taut

throughout entire length.

4. If required to have transmitter, mount transmitter in an accessible and serviceable

location.

I. Low-Limit Air Temperature Switch Installation:

1. Install multiple low-limit switches to maintain coverage over entire cross-sectional area

of air tunnel.

2. Fasten and support sensing element with manufacturer-furnished clips to keep element

taut throughout entire length.

3. Mount switches outside of airstream at a location and mounting height to provide easy

access for switch set-point adjustment and manual reset.

4. Install on entering side of cooling coil unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION





B. Install engraved phenolic nameplate with instrument identification and on face of ceiling

directly below instruments concealed above ceilings.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels, and other foreign

materials from exposed interior and exterior surfaces.

B. Wash and shine glazing.

C. Polish glossy surfaces to a clean shine.

3.8 CHECK-OUT PROCEDURES

A. Check installed products before continuity tests, leak tests, and calibration.

B. Check temperature instruments for proper location and accessibility.

C. Verify sensing element type and proper material.

D. Verify location and length.

E. Verify that wiring is correct and secure.



230923.27 Page 11 of 13

3.9 ADJUSTMENT, CALIBRATION, AND TESTING

A. Description:

1. Calibrate each instrument installed that is not factory calibrated and provided with

calibration documentation.

2. Provide a written description of proposed field procedures and equipment for calibrating

each type of instrument. Submit procedures before calibration and adjustment.

3. For each analog instrument, make a three-point test of calibration for both linearity and

accuracy.

4. Equipment and procedures used for calibration shall meet instrument manufacturer's


5. Provide diagnostic and test equipment for calibration and adjustment.

6. Field instruments and equipment used to test and calibrate installed instruments shall

have accuracy at least twice the instrument accuracy being calibrated. For example, an

installed instrument with an accuracy of 1 percent shall be checked by an instrument with

an accuracy of 0.5 percent.

7. Calibrate each instrument according to instrument instruction manual supplied by

manufacturer.

8. If after calibration indicated performance cannot be achieved, replace out-of-tolerance

instruments.

9. Comply with field-testing requirements and procedures indicated by ASHRAE

Guideline 11, "Field Testing of HVAC Control Components," in the absence of specific

requirements and to supplement requirements indicated.

B. Analog Signals:


percent.



span using a precision-resistance source.

C. Digital Signals:


2. Check digital signals using an ohmmeter to test for contact.

D. Sensors: Check sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

E. Switches: Calibrate switches to make or break contact at set points indicated.

F. Transmitters:

1. Check and calibrate transmitters at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

2. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at zero, 50, and 100 percent of span using a

precision-resistance source.



230923.27 Page 12 of 13



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative:

1. Perform according to manufacturer's written instruction.


equipment.


3.11 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial





12 months' full maintenance by manufacturer's authorized service representative. Include

semiannual preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components,

cleaning and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and supplies shall be

manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.

3.13 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain temperature instruments.

B. Provide a complete set of instructional videos covering each product specified and installed and

showing the following:

1. Software programming.

2. Calibration and test procedures.

3. Operation and maintenance requirements and procedures.

4. Troubleshooting procedures.

C. Coordinate video with operation and maintenance manuals and classroom instruction for use by

Owner in operating, maintaining, and troubleshooting.

D. Record videos on DVD disks.



230923.27 Page 13 of 13

E. Owner shall have right to make additional copies of video for internal use without paying

royalties.




230923.43 Page 1 of 7

SECTION 230923.43 - WEATHER STATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes weather stations connected to direct-digital controls for HVAC.


1. Section 230923 "Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC" for control equipment and


cable.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. I/O: Input/output.

B. RS-232: A TIA standard for asynchronous serial data communications between terminal

devices.

C. RS-485: A TIA standard for multipoint communications using two twisted pairs.






control signal over range, electrical power requirements, and limitations of ambient

operating environment including temperature and humidity.



4. Installation operation and maintenance instructions including factors affecting

performance.

B. Shop Drawings:



230923.43 Page 2 of 7




connection.


4. Include number-coded identification system for unique identification of wiring, cable,

and tubing ends.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For weather stations to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WEATHER STATION

A. Description:

1. Weather station shall measure and record air temperature and relative humidity.

2. Design weather station for applications with minimal visual impact, high reliability, and a

long interval between routine servicing.

3. Weather station shall use solid-state sensors with no moving parts.

4. Weather station shall not be impaired by heavy snowfall or freezing conditions that

produce rime ice. Provide a thermostatically controlled heater element in the sensor head

that keeps the wind sensor elements and the precipitation sensor surface free of snow and

ice to minus 62 deg F.

5. Weather station shall directly connect to host device, or wirelessly connect to a host

device through a fully integrated, industrial-grade, 916-MHz spread spectrum radio-

frequency communications technology. Where required by application, replace 916-MHz

radio-frequency components with 922-MHz and 2.4-GHz radio-frequency components to

comply with local, regional, and national radio-frequency licensing requirements.

6. RS-232 serial data I/O shall be located on the bottom of the weather station and used as a

second serial communications port, for programming and testing the system, or for direct

data downloads using a personal computer or personal digital assistant.

7. Weather station shall be provided with a mounting system supplied by weather station

manufacturer that is suitable for the installation.

B. Sensor Technology:

1. Air-temperature and relative-humidity sensors shall be combined in an integrated, user-

replaceable unit that requires no calibration.



230923.43 Page 3 of 7

a. Relative humidity sensor shall be a thin-polymer, capacitive sensor.

b. Air-temperature sensor shall be a capacitive ceramic sensor.

C. Performance:

1. Air Temperature:

a. Range: Minus 60 to 140 deg F.

b. Accuracy: Within 0.9 deg F.

c. Resolution: 0.1 deg F.

2. Relative Humidity:

a. Range: Zero to 100 percent.

b. Accuracy: Within 3 percent over the range of zero to 90 percent and within 5

percent between 90 to 100 percent.

c. Resolution: 0.1 percent.

3. Data Storage: 60 days of hourly data.

D. Output Signals:

1. RS-232 or RS-485 serial interface directly from weather station to host.

2. In applications that cannot accept a serial signal, provide a serial-to-analog converter.

3. Serial-to-Analog Converter:

a. Serial converter designed to add analog outputs for measuring instruments that

have only serial output.

b. Configure to give analog outputs from all measuring sensors and calculated

parameters.

c. Each converter shall have four analog outputs with a 4- to 20-mA signal.

d. Provide multiple converters for applications requiring more points.

e. Converter requires a 24-V dc power supply.

E. Communication Interface:

1. Weatherproof serial cables shall be used to connect the RS-232 I/O on the weather

station. Cables shall use nickel-plated brass DB-9 connectors for corrosion resistance and

include a Sanoprene jacket suitable for both high-ultraviolet and direct-burial

environments.

2. An RF4xx spread spectrum radio-frequency transceiver shall be provided with every

wireless weather station.

F. Unit shall be provided with a 120-V ac, 60-Hz power supply, a serial cable, and an antenna.

G. Software:

1. Data Transfer Protocols, Software, and Data Interface Hardware: Weather stations that

communicate using a proprietary protocol shall be provided with a software development



230923.43 Page 4 of 7

kit to enable a qualified software developer in development of software drivers for third-

party devices or software.

2. Manufacturer shall submit description and pricing information of software application

offerings for weather station management, data acquisition and logging, report

generation, and data display for review and consideration.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products level, plumb, parallel, and perpendicular with building construction.

B. Properly support weather station, wiring, and conduit to comply with requirements indicated.

Brace all products to prevent lateral movement and sway or a break in attachment when

subjected to forces that are consistent with building code structural design requirements.

C. Fastening Hardware:

1. Stillson wrenches, pliers, and other tools that cause injury to or mar surfaces of rods,

nuts, and other parts are prohibited for work of assembling and tightening nuts.




D. Corrosive Environments:

1. Use products that are suitable for environment to which they are subjected.

2. If possible, avoid or limit use of materials in corrosive environments.

3. When conduit is in contact with a corrosive environment, use Type 316 stainless-steel

conduit and fittings or conduit and fittings that are coated with a corrosive-resistant

coating that is suitable for environment.

4. Where components are located in a corrosive environment and are not corrosive resistant

from manufacturer, field install products in a NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosure constructed

of Type 316L stainless steel.



230923.43 Page 5 of 7

3.3 ELECTRIC POWER








3.4 IDENTIFICATION





B. Install engraved phenolic nameplate with instrument identification.

3.5 ADJUSTMENT, CALIBRATION, AND TESTING

A. Description:

1. Calibrate each weather station installed that is not factory calibrated and provided with

calibration documentation.

2. Provide a written description of proposed field procedures and equipment used for

calibrating. Submit procedures before calibration and adjustment.

3. For each analog signal, make a three-point test of calibration for both linearity and

accuracy.

4. Equipment and procedures used for calibration shall comply with instrument

manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Provide diagnostic and test equipment for calibration and adjustment.

6. Field instruments and equipment used to test and calibrate installed weather stations shall

have accuracy at least twice the instrument accuracy being calibrated. For example, an

installed weather station with a signal accuracy of 1 percent shall be checked by an

instrument with an accuracy of 0.5 percent.

7. Calibrate each weather station according to instrument instruction manual supplied by

manufacturer.

8. If after calibration indicated performance cannot be achieved, replace out-of-tolerance

instruments.

9. Comply with field-testing requirements and procedures indicated by ASHRAE

Guideline 11, "Field Testing of HVAC Control Components," in the absence of specific

requirements and to supplement requirements indicated.



230923.43 Page 6 of 7

B. Analog Signals:


percent.



span using a precision-resistance source.

C. Digital Signals:


2. Check digital signals using an ohmmeter to test for contact.



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.


3.7 STARTUP SERVICE




12 months' full maintenance by manufacturer's authorized service representative. Include

quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components,

lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and supplies shall be

manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain weather stations.

B. Provide a complete set of instructional videos covering each product specified and installed and

showing the following:

1. Software programming.

2. Calibration and test procedures.

3. Operation and maintenance requirements and procedures.



230923.43 Page 7 of 7

4. Troubleshooting procedures.

C. Coordinate video with operation and maintenance manuals and classroom instruction for use by

Owner in operating, maintaining, and troubleshooting.

D. Record videos on DVD disks.

E. Owner shall have right to make additional copies of video for internal use without paying

royalties.




232113 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Copper tube and fittings.

2. Joining materials.

3. Dielectric fittings.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Pipe and tube.

2. Fittings.

3. Joining materials.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Design calculations and detailed fabrication and assembly of pipe anchors and alignment

guides, hangers and supports for multiple pipes, expansion joints and loops, and

attachments of the same to the building structure.

2. Locations of pipe anchors and alignment guides and expansion joints and loops.

3. Locations of and details for penetrations, including sleeves and sleeve seals for exterior

walls, floors, basement, and foundation walls.

4. Locations of and details for penetration and firestopping for fire- and smoke-rated wall

and floor and ceiling assemblies.


A. Coordination Drawings: Piping layout, or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items

described in this Section, and coordinated with all building trades.


A. Installer Qualifications:



232113 Page 2 of 6

1. Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by pressure-seal joint

manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure-seal pipe

couplings and fittings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following

minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated:

1. Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F.


A. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B306, Type DWV.

B. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

C. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, pressure fittings.

D. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

E. Cast Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-

socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.

F. Wrought Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

G. Copper-Tube, Mechanically Formed Tee Fitting: For forming T-branch on copper water tube.

1. Description: Tee formed in copper tube in accordance with ASTM F2014.

H. Grooved, Mechanical-Joint, Copper Tube Appurtenances:

1. Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ASTM B75, copper tube or ASTM B584, bronze castings.

2. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: To fit copper-tube dimensions; rigid pattern unless

otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting EPDM-rubber gasket rated for minimum 230 deg F

for use with ferrous housing, and steel bolts and nuts; 300 psig minimum CWP pressure

rating.

I. Copper-Tube, Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:

1. Fittings: Cast-brass, cast-bronze, or wrought-copper with EPDM O-ring seal in each end.

2. Minimum 200-psig working-pressure rating at 250 deg F.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to

ASTM B813.

B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining

copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.



232113 Page 3 of 6

2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating

nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:

1. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.

b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:

1. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.

b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.

c. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

d. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-

joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:

1. Description:

a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.

b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.

d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.

e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Condensate-Drain Piping, Copper: Type DWV, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper

fittings, and soldered joints.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPING

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,

expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to

layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.



232113 Page 4 of 6

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right

angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated

otherwise.







J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.

K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing

of valves.

L. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of

equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

M. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

N. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment"

for identifying piping.

O. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."



B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube

end. Construct joints according to ASTM B828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using

lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B32.

D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"

Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.

E. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll

grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe

wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings.



232113 Page 5 of 6

F. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tools and procedure. Leave insertion

marks on pipe after assembly.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.


A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 230548 "Vibration

and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

B. Comply with requirements in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and

Equipment" for hangers, supports, and anchor devices.

1. .

C. Install hangers for copper tubing, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod

diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction

requirements, whichever are most stringent.

D. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.

E. Support vertical runs of copper tubing to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and

authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

3.6 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment

connections.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and

installation in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.

2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test

pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.

3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace

strainer screens.



232113 Page 6 of 6

4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged

joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to

protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to

freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains

installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

3. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the

system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any

vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to

pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum

yield strength or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building

Services Piping."

4. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 2 hours, examine piping,

joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing

components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

5. Prepare written report of testing.




232300 Page 1 of 7

SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Copper tube and fittings.

2. Valves and specialties.

3. Refrigerants.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve, refrigerant piping, and piping specialty.

1. Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:

a. Thermostatic expansion valves.

b. Solenoid valves.

c. Hot-gas bypass valves.

d. Filter dryers.

e. Strainers.

f. Pressure-regulating valves.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and fitting sizes;

flow capacities; valve arrangements and locations; slopes of horizontal runs; oil traps;

double risers; wall and floor penetrations; and equipment connection details.

2. Show piping size and piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and

pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation

difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper

operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment.

3. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment.






232300 Page 2 of 7


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in



A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to 2010 ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."

C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."

1.7 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store piping with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior are clean when

installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:

1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig.

2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 535 psig.

3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig.


A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR.

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings, Solder-Joint: ASME B16.22.

C. Wrought-Copper Fittings, Brazed-Joint: ASME B16.50.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper

socket fittings on copper pipe.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M.

F. Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced protective

jacket.

2. End Connections: Socket ends.



232300 Page 3 of 7

3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch-

long assembly.

4. Working Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig.

5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

G. Copper-Tube, Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings for Refrigerant Piping:


following:

a. Conex Banninger - USA.

b. Parker Hannifin, Sporlan Division.

c. RLS LLC.

2. Standard: UL 207; certified by UL for field installation. Certification as a UL-recognized

component alone is unacceptable.

3. Housing: Copper.

4. O-Rings: HNBR or compatible with specific refrigerant.

5. Tools: Manufacturer's approved special tools.

6. Minimum Rated Pressure: 700 psig.

2.3 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Refrigerant Locking Caps:

1. Description: Locking-type, tamper-resistant, threaded caps to protect refrigerant charging

ports from unauthorized refrigerant access and leakage.

2. Material: Brass, with protective shroud or sleeve.

3. Refrigerant Identification: Color-coded, refrigerant specific design.

4. Special Tool: For installing and unlocking.

2.4 REFRIGERANTS

A. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.


following:

a. Arkema Inc.

b. DuPont Fluorochemicals Div.

c. Genetron Refrigerants; Honeywell International Inc.

d. Mexichem Fluor Inc.



232300 Page 4 of 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A

A. Suction Lines NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper,

Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with soldered joints.

B. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines, and Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications:

1. Copper, Type ACR, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with

soldered joints.

3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS

A. Install flexible connectors at compressors.

B. Provide refrigerant locking caps on refrigerant charging ports that are located outdoors unless

otherwise protected from unauthorized access by a means acceptable to the authority having

jurisdiction.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING, GENERAL


systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,

expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless

deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.

B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.

C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right

angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated

otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.



I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.



232300 Page 5 of 7

J. Refer to Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC" and

Section 230993.11 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC DDC" for solenoid valve controllers,

control wiring, and sequence of operation.

K. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and

fittings.

L. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and

specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or

panels as specified in Section 083113 "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment

requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.

M. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.

N. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical

injury.

O. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from

compressor.

2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.

3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.

4. Liquid lines may be installed level.

P. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve

stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply

heat near expansion-valve bulb.

Q. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between

pipes for insulation installation.

R. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC

Piping and Equipment."

S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with

requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC

Piping."

U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION


B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.



232300 Page 6 of 7

C. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube

Handbook."


A. Comply with Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for

hangers, supports, and anchor devices.

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long.

2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.

3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,

supported on a trapeze.

4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

5. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper

pipe.

C. Install hangers for copper tubing, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod

diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction

requirements, whichever are most stringent.

D. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting.

E. Support vertical runs of copper tubing to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and

authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.



1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.

2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,

evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test

pressure.

3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the

pressures indicated in "Performance Requirements" Article.

a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.

b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of

test.

c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount

of soap and glycerin solution over joints.

d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are

achieved.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.



232300 Page 7 of 7

3.7 SYSTEM CHARGING

A. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.

2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum

holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.

3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.

4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.

B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating

suction pressure.

C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system

design temperature.

D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to

manufacturer's written instructions:

1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.

2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.

3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.

4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.

5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.

E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow

rates and pressures are established.




233113 Page 1 of 14

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.

2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings.

3. Sheet metal materials.

4. Sealants and gaskets.

5. Hangers and supports.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and

balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-

mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (State of California).


A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners and adhesives.

2. Sealants and gaskets.

3. Seismic-restraint devices.

4. .

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,

and attachments to other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.



233113 Page 2 of 14

3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes.

4. Elevation of top and bottom of ducts.

5. Dimensions of all duct runs from building grid lines.

6. Fittings.

7. Reinforcement and spacing.

8. Seam and joint construction.

9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.

10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.

11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and

panels.

12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration

isolation.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Sheet metal thicknesses.

2. Joint and seam construction and sealing.

3. Reinforcement details and spacing.

4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.


A. Coordination Drawings: A single set of plans or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items

described in this Section, and coordinated with all building trades.

B. Welding certificates.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint

construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and with performance requirements and

design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads

and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible".

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.



233113 Page 3 of 14

D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Startup."

E. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.4.4 -

"HVAC System Construction and Insulation."

F. Duct Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, all duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are

inside clear dimensions and do not include insulation or duct wall thickness.

2.2 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Fabricate joints in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-

pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and

other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. For ducts with longest side less than 36 inches, select joint types in accordance with

Figure 2-1.

2. For ducts with longest side 36 inches or greater, use flange joint connector Type T-22, T-

24, T-24A, T-25a, or T-25b. Factory-fabricated flanged duct connection system may be

used if submitted and approved by engineer of record.

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal

Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-

support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types

and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Ch. 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing

requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated

static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated.



233113 Page 4 of 14

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for

static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals,

and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible."

1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal

Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-

support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible."

1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal

seams.

2. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with butt-

welded longitudinal seams.

D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and

Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials

involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.4 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct

construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting,

seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.

2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch-minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch-

minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

a. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less.

b. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of

Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental

Chambers."



233113 Page 5 of 14

D. Fiberglass-Free Duct Liner: Made from partially recycled cotton or polyester products and

containing no fiberglass. Airstream surface overlaid with fire-resistant facing to prevent surface

erosion by airstream, complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. Treat natural-fiber products

2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and

gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index

of 50 when tested in accordance with UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified

acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight

seal.

2. Tape Width: 3 inches.

3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.

4. Water resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.

6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.

7. Service: Indoor and outdoor.

8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum.

10. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less.

11. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California



Chambers."

C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.

2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.

3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.

4. Water resistant.


6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).

7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.

8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.


steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.

2. Base: Synthetic rubber resin.

3. Solvent: Toluene and heptane.



233113 Page 6 of 14

4. Solids Content: Minimum 60 percent.

5. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 60.

6. Water resistant.






Chambers."

10. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.

11. Service: Indoor or outdoor.


steel, or aluminum sheets.

E. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.

2. Type: S.

3. Grade: NS.

4. Class: 25.

5. Use: O.





Chambers."

F. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

G. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be

rated for10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.

3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings

and fitting spigots.

2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Galvanized-steel rods and nuts.

B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2,

"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

C. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A603.



233113 Page 7 of 14

D. Steel Cable End Connections: Galvanized-steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts

designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

E. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible

with duct materials.

F. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.

3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct

system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and

calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.

Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and

coordination drawings.

B. Install ducts in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install ducts in maximum practical lengths with fewest possible joints.

D. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for

branch connections.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and

perpendicular to building lines.

F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent

enclosure elements of building.

G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

H. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and

enclosures.

I. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to

view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal

flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2

inches.



233113 Page 8 of 14

J. Install heating coils, cooling coils, air filters, dampers, and all other duct-mounted accessories in

air ducts where indicated on Drawings.

K. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials

both before and after installation. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied

Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction

Guidelines."

L. Elbows: Use long-radius elbows wherever they fit.

1. Fabricate 90-degree rectangular mitered elbows to include turning vanes.

2. Fabricate 90-degree round elbows with a minimum of three segments for 12 inches and

smaller and a minimum of five segments for 14 inches and larger.

M. Branch Connections: Use lateral or conical branch connections.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use

two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When

welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds,

and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in arrangement and fabrication of fittings,

hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these

3.3 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct

Schedule" Article in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible."

B. Seal ducts at a minimum to the following seal classes in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.

3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.

4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.

5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal

Class B.



233113 Page 9 of 14

6. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.

7. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B.

8. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal

Class C.

9. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.

10. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"

Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners

appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.

3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for

slabs more than 4 inches thick.

4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for

slabs less than 4 inches thick.

5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum

Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports

within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,

bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at maximum intervals of 16

feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,

and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air

Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for

branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.



233113 Page 10 of 14

3.6 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have

duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer.

Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting"

and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."



B. Leakage Tests:

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report

for each test.

2. Test the following systems:

a. Ducts with a Pressure Class Higher Than 3-Inch wg: Test representative duct

sections totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area for each

designated pressure class.

b. Supply Ducts with a Pressure Class of 3- Inch wg or Higher: Test representative

duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each


c. Return Ducts with a Pressure Class of 3- Inch wg or Higher: Test representative



d. Exhaust Ducts with a Pressure Class of 3- Inch wg or Higher: Test representative



e. Outdoor-Air Ducts with a Pressure Class of 3- Inch wg or Higher: Test

representative duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct

area for each designated pressure class.

3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing

and for compliance with test requirements.

4. Testing of each duct section is to be performed with access doors, coils, filters, dampers,

and other duct-mounted devices in place as designed. No devices are to be removed or

blanked off so as to reduce or prevent additional leakage.

5. Test for leaks before applying external insulation.

6. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section

being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system

design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.

7. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.



233113 Page 11 of 14

2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness in

accordance with "Description of Method 3 - NADCA Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR,

"Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems."

a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media

shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.8 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use duct cleaning methodology as indicated in NADCA ACR.

C. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Provide openings with access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure and leakage

class at dampers, coils, and any other locations where required for inspection and

cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and

liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Section 233300 "Air

Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.

3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

D. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97

percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from

HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points

of entry into building.

E. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).

2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply

and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive

assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section,

air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and

dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components.

5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and

mechanical equipment rooms.

6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.



233113 Page 12 of 14

7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

F. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants

from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect

vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under

negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without

damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner

to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated

or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.

5. Clean coils and coil drain pans in accordance with NADCA ACR. Keep drain pan

operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning

materials; comb and straighten fins.

6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.

7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus

is present. Apply antimicrobial agents in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.

3.9 STARTUP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

for HVAC."

3.10 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows:

1. Fabricate all ducts to achieve SMACNA pressure class, seal class, and leakage class as

indicated below.

B. Supply Ducts:

1. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg.

2. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C.

3. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 16.

4. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 8.

C. Return Ducts:





D. Exhaust Ducts:



233113 Page 13 of 14

1.





E. Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts:





5.

F. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.

2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:


2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two

vanes.

3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane

Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:


2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two

vanes.

3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct




Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.

b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.

c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct





233113 Page 14 of 14

3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-

1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have

proportionately fewer segments.

1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three

segments for 90-degree elbow.

2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments

for 90-degree elbow.

3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments

for 90-degree elbow.

4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.

c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam.

G. Branch Configuration:


Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.

b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Conical spin in.

2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical

Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.

c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.




233300 Page 1 of 7

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manual volume dampers.

2. Turning vanes.

3. Duct-mounted access doors.

4. Duct access panel assemblies.

5. Flexible connectors.



B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

attachments to other work.

1. Detail duct accessories' fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction.

Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances and method of field

assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:

a. Manual volume damper installations.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, or BIM model, drawn to scale, on which

ceiling-mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are

shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved.

B. Source quality-control reports.



233300 Page 2 of 7


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for

acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise

indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,

discolorations, and other imperfections.

2.2 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to

the following:

a. McGill AirFlow LLC.

b. Nailor Industries Inc.

c. Ruskin Company.

2. Performance:

a. Leakage Rating Class III: Leakage not exceeding 40 cfm/sq. ft. against 1-inch wg

differential static pressure.

3. Construction:

a. Linkage out of airstream.

b. Suitable for horizontal or vertical airflow applications.

4. Frames:

a. Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch-thick, aluminum sheet channels.

b. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade.



233300 Page 3 of 7

b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.

c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.

d. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch-thick extruded aluminum.

6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

7. Bearings:

a. Oil-impregnated bronze.

b. Dampers mounted with vertical blades to have thrust bearing at each end of every

blade.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

a. Locking device to hold damper blades in a fixed position without vibration.

2.3 TURNING VANES



1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

2. Duro Dyne Inc.

3. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of galvanized sheet

steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct

mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated

faces and fibrous-glass fill.

C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded

fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into

vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible"; Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in

Elbows."

E. Vane Construction:

1. Single wall.

2. Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger dimensions.

2.4 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS





233300 Page 4 of 7


2. McGill AirFlow LLC.

3. Ruskin Company.

B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figure 7-2 (7-2M), "Duct Access Doors and

Panels," and Figure 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular.

b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct

pressure class.

c. 24-gauge-thick galvanized steel or 0.032-inch thick aluminum door panel.

d. Vision panel.

e. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.

f. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.

a. 24-gauge-thick galvanized steel or 0.032-inch-thick aluminum frame.

3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.

b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.

c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches.

2.5 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES



1. CL WARD & Family Inc.


3. Flame Gard, Inc.

B. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 16-gauge carbon steel.

C. Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.

D. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96, grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for

minimum 2000 deg F.

E. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10 inches wg positive or negative.



233300 Page 5 of 7

2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. CL WARD & Family Inc.

2. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Fire-Performance Characteristics: Adhesives, sealants, fabric materials, and accessory materials

shall have flame-spread index not exceeding 25 and smoke-developed index not exceeding 50

when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

E. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

F. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to

two strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-thick

aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

G. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.

2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.

3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

H. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in

compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan

discharge and duct.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of

30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring

at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.

4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.

7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at

start and stop.



233300 Page 6 of 7

2.7 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for

concealed ducts and standard, one-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

B. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless steel ducts.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch

minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories in accordance with applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116 for

fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in

galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless steel accessories in stainless steel ducts, and

aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Where multiple damper sections are necessary to achieve required dimensions, provide

reinforcement to fully support damper assembly when fully closed at full system design static

pressure.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend

from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with

hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.

2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated and as needed for testing

and balancing.

G. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining

accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. On both sides of duct coils.



233300 Page 7 of 7

2. Upstream from duct filters.

3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.

4. At drain pans and seals.

5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, and equipment.

6. Elsewhere as indicated.

H. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

I. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.

2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.

3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.

4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.

5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.

6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.

J. Label access doors according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and

Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

K. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

L. For fans developing static pressures of 5 inches wg and more, cover flexible connectors with

loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

M. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

N. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust

limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and

stop of fans.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.

2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that size and location of access doors are

adequate to perform required operation.

3. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation and verify that vanes do not move

or rattle.

4. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and

damper.




233713.13 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 233713.13 - AIR DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Round ceiling diffusers.

2. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers.

3. Fixed face grilles.


1. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for volume-control dampers not integral to

diffusers.



1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and

performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity,

model number, size, and accessories furnished.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items

are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.

3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.

4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,

access panels, and special moldings.

5. Duct access panels.




233713.13 Page 2 of 5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ROUND CEILING DIFFUSERS

A. Exhaust inlet: EG-2

1. Basis of design, Price RSG


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Krueger.

b. Price Industries.

c. Titus.

3. Material: Aluminum.

4. Finish: Baked enamel, white

5. Face Style: Double deflection, 1” blade spacing.

6. Mounting: Surface mounted.

7. Dampers: Butterfly

2.2 RECTANGULAR AND SQUARE CEILING DIFFUSERS

A. Supply diffuser: SD-1



the following:

a. Krueger.


c. Titus.

2. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.


4. Finish: Baked enamel, white.

5. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches.

6. Face Style: Plaque.

7. Mounting: Surface.

8. Pattern: Fixed.

9. Dampers: Butterfly.

B. Supply diffuser: SD-2



233713.13 Page 3 of 5



the following:

a. Krueger.


c. Titus.






7. Mounting: T-bar.

8. Pattern: Fixed.


C. Return diffuser: RD-1



the following:

a. Krueger.


c. Titus.






7. Mounting: T-bar.

8. Pattern: Fixed.

9. Dampers: Butterfly

D. Exhaust diffuser: EG-1



the following:

a. Krueger.


c. Titus.






233713.13 Page 4 of 5


6. Mounting: Surface.

7. Pattern: Fixed.


2.3 GRILLES

A. Fixed Face Grille: RG-1:



the following:

a. Krueger.


c. Titus.


3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.

4. Grille Arrangement: 0° core, ½ in. square x ½ in. depth.

5. Core Construction: Integral.

6. Frame: 1 inch wide.

7. Mounting Frame: Surface Mounted.

8.

B. Fixed Face Grille: EG-3:



the following:

a. Krueger.


c. Titus.


3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.

4. Grille Arrangement: 0° core, ½ in. square x ½ in. depth.

5. Core Construction: Integral.

6. Frame: 1 inch wide.

7. Mounting Frame: Exposed Duct Mounted.


A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of

Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."



233713.13 Page 5 of 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers and grilles are installed for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers and grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,

and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design

requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final

locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels,

locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with

installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of

dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before

starting air balancing.




233716

SECTION 233716 - FABRIC AIR-DISTRIBUTION DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes continuous, tubular, fabric air-distribution devices.



1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and

performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

B. Shop Drawings: For fabric air-distribution devices.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and suspension and attachment details.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For diffusers with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For diffusers, in manufacturer's standard sizes to verify color selected.

E. Diffuser Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. Indicate room location,

quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items

are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.


3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,

access panels, and special moldings.




233716

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. Air Distribution Concepts.

2. Airmax International.

3. Berner International.

4. DuctSox Corp.

5. Durkee America Inc.

6. Fabric Duct Systems.

7. FabricAir Inc.

8. KE Fibertec NA, Inc.

9. Prihoda North America.


A. Continuous tubular diffuser materials shall be listed and labeled as complying with UL 2518 UL

723 NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

B. Air permeability of fabric will comply with ASTM D737.

2.3 CONTINUOUS TUBULAR DIFFUSERS

A. Description:

1. Fabric: Woven flame-retardant polyester.

2. Shape: Round.

3. Air-Outlet Configuration: Circumferential hole pattern with diffusion-hole diameter and

spacing along the length of the diffusion device to be determined by manufacturer based

on project specific requirements.

4. Color: To be coordinated with Architect.

B. Duct Connection Type: Round zipper.

C. Accessories:

1. Quick-connect joint.

2. Snap hooks.

3. End cap.

4. Removable support hoops.

5. Elbows.



233716

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet locations

have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow

pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical.

Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a

determination of final location.

B. Install chosen suspension system in accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer.

Installation instructions to be provided by the manufacturer with product.

C. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, lighting layouts, and similar finished work.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Clean air handling unit and other ductwork prior to the fabric duct system as it is installed.

Make sure that all dust and debris from installation is removed from the fan coil unit and other

ductwork before connecting the fabric duct system.

B. If the Fabric duct system becomes soiled during the installation, it should be removed and

cleaned following the manufacturers cleaning instructions.


City of New Rochelle April 28, 2021


236313 Page 1 of 8

SECTION 236313 - AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Packaged air-cooled refrigerant condensers.


A. Product Data: For each air-cooled refrigerant condenser.

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

2. Include equipment dimensions, weights and structural loads, required clearances, method

of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

B. Shop Drawings: For air-cooled refrigerant condensers.


2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


connection.


C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For air-cooled refrigerant condensers indicated, to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases,

rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for

designing vibration isolation bases.



236313 Page 2 of 8


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items described in

this Section, and coordinated with all building trades.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-cooled refrigerant condensers to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of roof rails.

B. Coordinate location of refrigerant piping and electrical rough-ins.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Carrier Corporation; a unit of United Technologies Corp.

2. Trane.

3. YORK; a Johnson Controls company.

4. Daikin.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain air-cooled refrigerant condensers from single source from single

manufacturer.



an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15 and ASHRAE 34.

C. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 -

"Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

D. CU-1 (Pavilion) Capacities and Characteristics:



236313 Page 3 of 8

1. Heat-Rejection Capacity: 3 Tons.

2. Ambient-Air Temperature: 95F.

3. Refrigerant Pipe Connections:

a. Number of Connections: 2.

b. Liquid Pipe Size: 3/8””.

c. Suction Pipe Size: 5/8”.

4. Fans:

a. Number of Condenser Fans: 2.

5. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Volts: 208V.

b. Phase: 1.

c. Hertz: 60.

d. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: 2.3 A.

e. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: 15 A.

E. CU-2 (Greenhouse) Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Heat-Rejection Capacity: 4 Tons.

2. Ambient-Air Temperature: 95F.

3. Refrigerant Pipe Connections:

a. Number of Connections: 2.

b. Liquid Pipe Size: 3/8””.

c. Suction Pipe Size: 5/8”.

4. Fans:

a. Number of Condenser Fans: 2.

5. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Volts: 208V.

b. Phase: 1.

c. Hertz: 60.

d. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: 3.4 A.

e. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: 15 A.

2.3 PACKAGED AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS

A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; consisting of casing, condenser coils, condenser fans

and motors, and unit controls.

B. Refrigerant: R-410A.



236313 Page 4 of 8

C. Condenser Coil: Factory tested at 425 psig.

1. Tube: 1/2-inch-diameter seamless copper.

2. Coil Fin: Aluminum.

3. Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure

type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common

Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

a. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, air-over (TEAO).

b. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough, so driven

load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

c. Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on exterior of unit.

D. Condenser Fans and Drives:

1. Directly driven propeller fans with aluminum or galvanized-steel fan blades, for

horizontal air discharge; manufactured with permanently lubricated ball-bearing motors

with integral current- and thermal-overload protection.

2. Fan Motors:

a. Weather-proof motors with rain shield and shaft slinger.

b. Totally enclosed air-over (TEAO).

c. Variable speed.

E. Operating and Safety Controls: Include condenser fan motor thermal and overload cutouts; 115-

V control transformer, if required; magnetic contactors for condenser fan motors and a non-

fused factory-mounted and -wired disconnect switch for single external electrical power

connection.

1. Fan Cycling Control: Head pressure sensors. Low ambient kit.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Steel:

1. ASTM A36/A36M for carbon structural steel.

2. ASTM A568/A568M for steel sheet.

B. Stainless Steel:

1. Manufacturer's standard grade for casing.

2. Manufacturer's standard type, ASTM A240/A240M for bare steel exposed to airstream or

moisture.

C. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M.

D. Aluminum: ASTM B209.



236313 Page 5 of 8

E. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Coat with a corrosion-resistant coating capable of withstanding a

500-hour salt-spray test according to ASTM B117.

1. Standards:

a. ASTM B117 for salt spray.

b. ASTM D2794 for minimum impact resistance of 100 in-lb.

c. ASTM B3359 for cross hatch adhesion of 5B.

2. Application: Immersion or Spray.

3. Thickness: 1 mil.

4. Gloss: Minimum gloss of 60 on a 60 degree meter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of air-cooled

refrigerant condensers.

B. Examine roughing-in for refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of piping

connections before equipment installation.

C. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where air-cooled condensers will be

installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated; maintain manufacturer's

recommended clearances.

B. Equipment Mounting:

1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13

"Vibration Controls for HVAC."

C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Loose Components: Install electrical components, devices, and accessories that are not factory

mounted.



236313 Page 6 of 8


A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Section 232300 "Refrigerant Piping." Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

C. Refrigerant Piping: Where indicated on Drawings, connect piping to unit with pressure-relief,

service valve, filter-dryer, and moisture indicator on each refrigerant-circuit liquid line.

D. Apply labels to refrigerant lines in accordance with Section 230553, "Identification for HVAC

Piping and Equipment."


A. Install field power to each condenser unit electrical power connection.

B. Connect wiring in accordance with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."

C. Ground equipment in accordance with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

D. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, in accordance

with NFPA 70 and NECA 1.

E. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and

circuit number feeding connection.

1. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs, as specified in

Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



B. Connect control wiring in accordance with Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power

Cables."

C. Install nameplate for each control connection, indicating field control panel designation and I/O

control designation feeding connection.

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE




236313 Page 7 of 8

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions

and perform the following:

a. Inspect for physical damage to unit casing.

b. Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight.

c. Clean units and inspect for construction debris.

d. Verify that all bolts and screws are tight.

e. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections.

f. Verify that controls are connected and operational.

2. Lubricate bearings on fan motors.

3. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding.

4. After startup and performance test, lubricate bearings.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

D. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

E. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection.

2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation. Complete manufacturer's starting checklist.


equipment.

5. Verify proper airflow over coils.

F. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission

to structure.

G. Air-cooled refrigerant condensers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.

H. Prepare test and inspection reports.



236313 Page 8 of 8

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain air-cooled refrigerant condensers.




224713 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 237223.19 – PACKAGED INDOOR FIXED PLATE ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fixed-plate, total heat exchangers in packaged, indoor, energy-recovery units.



1. Include packaged, indoor, fixed-plate, energy-recovery unit rated capacities, operating

characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

2. Fans:

a. Certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

b. Certified fan-sound power ratings.

c. Fan construction and accessories.

d. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For packaged, indoor, fixed-plate, energy-recovery units.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and mounting details.



connection.



A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, elevations, and other details, drawn to scale. and

coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved.




224713 Page 2 of 6


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment to include in



A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Filters: One set(s) of each type of filter specified.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-

handling units and components.

B. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

2. Capacity ratings for fixed-plate energy-recovery units shall comply with ASHRAE 84.

C. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

D. Comply with ASTM E84 or UL 723.

2.2 PACKAGED, INDOOR, FIXED-PLATE TOTAL ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS


following:

1. Airia Brands Inc.

2. Carnes Company.

3. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

4. Multistack, LLC.

5. RenewAire LLC.

6. Systemair USA.

7. Venmar CES Inc.

B. Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.



224713 Page 3 of 6

C. Housing: Manufacturer's standard construction with corrosion-protection coating and exterior

finish, hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts,

minimum 1- inch-thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical connections, exterior drain

connection, and lifting lugs.

D. Fixed-Plate Total Heat Exchanger:

1. Casing: Galvanized steel.

2. Plates: Evenly spaced and sealed and arranged for cross-flow.

a. Plate Material: Chemically treated paper or polymer membrane with selective

hydroscopicity and moisture permeability, and gas barrier properties.

E. Supply and Exhaust Fans: Forward-curved centrifugal fan.

1. Motor and Drive: Direct driven.

2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor

Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

3. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load

will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

F. Filters:

1. Description: Pleated factory-fabricated, self-supported, disposable air filters with holding

frames.

2. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 900.

3. Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive.

4. Filter Media Frame: Beverage board with perforated metal retainer, or metal grid, on

outlet side.

5. Filter Mounting Frames: Filters shall be removable from one side or lift out from access

plenum.

G. Wiring: Fabricate units with space within housing for electrical conduits. Wire motors and

controls, so only external connections are required during installation.

1. Indoor Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure contains relays, starters, and terminal

strip.

2.3 CONTROLS

A. Control Panel: Solid-state, programmable, microprocessor-based control unit for unit mounting.

Integrate to BACnet, LonWorks, or Modbus, as specified in Section 230923 "Direct Digital

Control (DDC) System for HVAC".

B. Starting relay, factory mounted and wired, and manual motor starter for field wiring.

C. Dry-bulb temperature sensor.

D. Dirty filter switch.



224713 Page 4 of 6

E. Low-Voltage Transformer: Integral transformer to provide control voltage to unit from primary

incoming electrical service.




B. AHRI Compliance: Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy-recovery equipment certified as

complying with AHRI 1060.

C. Fan Performance Rating: Comply with AMCA 211 and label fans with AMCA-certified rating

seal. Factory test fan performance for airflow, pressure, power, air density, rotation speed, and

efficiency according to AMCA 210/ASHRAE 51.

D. Fan Sound Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301 or AHRI 260 (IP). Air-handling unit fan sound

ratings shall comply with AMCA 301 or AHRI 260 (IP).

E. UL Compliance:

1. Packaged fixed plate energy recovery units shall comply with requirements in UL 1812;

or UL 1815.

2. Electric Coils: Comply with UL 1995.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before packaged, indoor, fixed-plate,

energy-recovery unit installation. Replace with new insulation materials and filter media that

are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install packaged, indoor, fixed-plate, energy-recovery units, so supply and exhaust airstreams

flow in opposite directions.

1. Install access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and downstream, for

access to interior components.

2. Install removable panels or access doors between supply and exhaust ducts on building

side for bypass during startup.

3. Access doors and panels are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."



224713 Page 5 of 6


1. Comply with requirements for vibration-isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13


C. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural-steel support frame, using threaded steel rods

and spring hangers. Comply with requirements for vibration-isolation devices specified in

Section 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."

D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

E. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace

temporary filters used during construction and testing with new, clean filters.

3.3 DUCTWORK CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for ductwork according to Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

B. Connect duct to units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements in Section 233300

"Air Duct Accessories."


A. Install electrical devices furnished with units but not factory mounted.

B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."

C. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

D. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, according to

NFPA 70 and NECA 1.

E. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and


1. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs with a black background

and engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch high.




A. Perform tests and inspections




224713 Page 6 of 6


proper motor rotation and unit operation.


equipment.

C. Packaged, indoor, fixed-plate, energy-recovery units will be considered defective if it does not

pass tests and inspections.


3.7 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. .

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity setpoints.


3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-to-air energy-recovery

units.




237223.29 Page 1 of 7

SECTION 237223.29 - PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, FIXED PLATE ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fixed-plate, sensible heat exchangers in packaged, outdoor, energy-recovery units.




1. Include packaged, outdoor, fixed-plate, energy-recovery-unit rated capacities, operating

characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

2. Fans:

a. Certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

b. Certified fan-sound power ratings.

c. Fan construction and accessories.

d. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For packaged, outdoor, fixed-plate, energy-recovery units.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and mounting details.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, lifting

requirements, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location

and size of each field connection.


4. Vibration-Isolation Roof Curb Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include rails and frames for

equipment mounting.

5. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for

designing vibration-isolation bases.



237223.29 Page 2 of 7


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, roof plans, elevations, and other details, drawn to scale.

and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged, outdoor, fixed-plate, energy-recovery

equipment to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed. Package with protective covering for

storage and identify with labels describing contents.

1. Filters: One set(s) of each type of filter specified.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of building openings and duct connections with actual equipment

provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-


B. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

2. Capacity ratings for fixed-plate energy-recovery units shall comply with ASHRAE 84.

C. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

D. Comply with ASTM E84 or UL 723.

E. Delegated Design: Engage registered professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design vibration-isolation controls, including comprehensive

engineering analysis using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.



237223.29 Page 3 of 7

2.2 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, FIXED-PLATE, SENSIBLE HEAT, ENERGY-RECOVERY

UNITS


following:


2. Lifebreath; a division of Airia Brands.

3. Venmar CES Inc.

4. RenewAire LLC.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged, outdoor, fixed-plate, energy-recovery units from single

manufacturer.

C. Surfaces in Contact with Airstream: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Housing: Manufacturer's standard construction with corrosion-protection coating and exterior

finish, gasketed, hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal

parts, minimum 1-inch thick, thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping

connections, exterior drain connection, and lifting lugs.

E. Fixed-Plate, Sensible Heat Exchanger:

1. Casing: Aluminum.

2. Drain Pan: Same material as casing, with drain connections on exhaust and supply side.

a. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

3. Plates: Evenly spaced, sealed, and arranged for cross-flow.

a. Plate Material: Embossed aluminum.

4. Bypass Plenum: Within casing, with gasketed face-and-bypass dampers having operating

rods extended outside casing.

F. Supply and Exhaust Fans: Forward-curved centrifugal fan.

1. Motors and Drives: Direct driven.

a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure

type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513

"Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

b. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If size is not indicated, provide motor

large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor

range above 1.0.

G. Filters:

1. Particulate air filtration is specified in Section 234100 "Particulate Air Filtration."



237223.29 Page 4 of 7

H. Filters:

1. Description: Cleanable wire mesh at outside air intake and pleated factory-fabricated,

self-supported, disposable air filters with holding frames.

2. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 900.

3. Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive.

4. Filter Media Frame: Beverage board with perforated metal retainer or metal grid on outlet

side.

5. Filter-Mounting Frames: Arranged with access doors or panels on both sides of unit.

Filters shall be removable from one side or lift out from access plenum.

I. Wiring: Fabricate units with space within housing for electrical conduits. Wire motors and

controls so only external connections are required during installation.

1. Outdoor Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure contains relays, starters, and terminal

strip.

2.3 CONTROLS

A. Control Panel: Solid-state, programmable, microprocessor-based control unit for unit

mounting.. Integrate to BACnet, LonWorks, or Modbus, as specified in Section 230923 "Direct

Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC".

B. Starting relay, factory mounted and wired, and manual motor starter for field wiring.

C. Frost Control: None.

D. Economizer Control: Fixed-plate airflow bypass. See Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control

(DDC) System for HVAC" for control sequence.

E. Dry-bulb temperature sensor.

F. Dirty filter switch.

G. Low-Voltage Transformer: Integral transformer to provide control voltage to unit from primary

incoming electrical service.



NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.

B. AHRI Compliance: Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy-recovery equipment certified as

complying with AHRI 1060 (IP.

C. Fan Performance Rating: Comply with AMCA 211, and label fans with AMCA-certified rating

seal. Factory test fan performance for airflow, pressure, power, air density, rotation speed, and

efficiency in accordance with AMCA 210 and ASHRAE 51.



237223.29 Page 5 of 7

D. Fan Sound Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301 or AHRI 260 (IP.

E. UL Compliance:

1. Packaged, Fixed-Plate, Energy-Recovery Units: Comply with requirements in UL 1812.

2. Electric Coils: Comply with UL 1995.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for


B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before packaged, outdoor, fixed-plate,

energy-recovery unit installation. Replace insulation materials and filter media that are wet,

moisture damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 INSTALLATION OF PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, FIXED-PLATE, ENERGY-RECOVERY

UNITS

A. Install packaged, outdoor, fixed-plate, energy-recovery units, so supply and exhaust airstreams

flow in opposite directions.

1. Install access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and downstream, for

access to interior components.

2. Install removable panels or access doors between supply and exhaust ducts on building

side for bypass during startup.

3. Access doors and panels are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."


1. Install packaged, outdoor, fixed-plate, energy-recovery units on 4-inch cast-in-place

concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and

foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

2. Install roof-mounted packaged, outdoor, fixed-plate, energy-recovery units on

manufacturer's-recommended-height equipment roof curbs. Comply with requirements

for equipment curbs specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories."

3. Comply with requirements for vibration-isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13


C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Do not operate equipment fans until temporary or permanent filters are in place. Replace

temporary filters used during construction and testing with new, clean filters prior to final

inspection.



237223.29 Page 6 of 7

3.3 DUCTWORK CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for ductwork in accordance with Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

B. Connect duct to units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements in Section 233300

"Air Duct Accessories."


A. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, in accordance


B. Connect wiring in accordance with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."

C. Ground equipment in accordance with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

D. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and


1. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs, as specified in

Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."






Cables."

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions.

2. .

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity setpoints.




237223.29 Page 7 of 7







equipment.

C. Packaged, outdoor, fixed-plate, energy-recovery units will be considered defective if it does not

pass tests and inspections.


3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-to-air energy-recovery

units.




238129 Page 1 of 28

SECTION 238129 - VARIABLE-REFRIGERANT-FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes complete VRF HVAC system(s) including, but not limited to, delegated design

and the following components to make a complete operating system(s) according to

requirements indicated:

1. System controls.

2. System control cable and raceways.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Air-Conditioning System Operation: System capable of operation with all zones in cooling

only.

B. Heat-Pump System Operation: System capable of operation with all zones in either heating or

cooling, but not with simultaneous heating and cooling zones that transfer heat between zones.

C. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or

for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.

D. Plenum: A space forming part of the air distribution system to which one or more air ducts are

connected. An air duct is a passageway, other than a plenum, for transporting air to or from

heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning equipment.

E. Two-Pipe System Design: One refrigerant vapor line and one refrigerant liquid line connect a

single outdoor unit or multiple manifold outdoor units in a single system to associated system

condensation units. One refrigerant liquid line and refrigerant vapor line connect condensing

units to associated indoor units. Condensing units used in two pipe systems act as an

intermediate heat exchanger and include diverting valves and gas/liquid separators to move high

and low pressure refrigerant between indoor units.

F. VRF: Variable refrigerant flow.





238129 Page 2 of 28



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for indoor and outdoor units and HRCUs.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished

specialties and accessories.

3. Include operating performance at design conditions and at extreme maximum and

minimum outdoor ambient conditions.

4. Include description of system controllers, dimensions, features, control interfaces and

connections, power requirements, and connections.

5. Include system operating sequence of operation in narrative form for each unique indoor-

and outdoor-unit and condensing unit control.

6. Include description of control software features.

7. Include total refrigerant required and a comprehensive breakdown of refrigerant required

by each system installed.

8. Include refrigerant type and data sheets showing compliance with requirements indicated.

9. For system design software.

10. Indicate location and type of service access.

B. Shop Drawings: For VRF HVAC systems.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.



connection.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments

to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames

for equipment mounting.

4. Include diagrams and details of refrigerant piping and tubing showing installation

requirements for manufacturer-furnished divided flow fittings.


C. Samples for Initial Selection: For fully and partially exposed indoor units with factory finishes

viewable by occupants.

1. Include a Sample for each unique finish with unit identification, detailed description of

application, and cross-referenced floor plans showing locations.

D. Delegated-Design Submittals:

1. Include design calculations for selecting vibration isolators and for designing vibration

isolation bases.

2. Include design calculations with corresponding diagram of refrigerant piping and tubing

sizing for each system installed.

3. Include design calculations with corresponding floor plans indicating that refrigerant

concentration limits are within allowable limits of ASHRAE 15 and governing codes.



238129 Page 3 of 28

4. Include calculations showing that system travel distance for refrigerant piping and

controls cabling are within horizontal and vertical travel distances set by manufacturer.

Provide a comparison table for each system installed.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, and details, drawn to scale, on which the

following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the

items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components.

2. Structural floors, roofs and associated members to which equipment, piping, ductwork,

cables, and conduit will be attached.


4. Wall-mounted controllers located in finished space showing relationship to light

switches, fire-alarm devices, and other installed devices.

5. Size and location of access doors and panels installed behind walls and inaccessible

ceilings for products installed behind walls and requiring access.

6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Luminaires.

b. Air outlets and inlets.

c. Speakers.

d. Sprinklers.

e. Service access panels.

B. Qualification Data:

1. For Installer: Certificate from VRF HVAC system manufacturer certifying that Installer

has successfully completed prerequisite training administered by manufacturer for proper

installation of systems, including but not limited to, equipment, piping, controls, and

accessories indicated and furnished for installation.

a. Retain copies of Installer certificates on-site and make available on request.

2. For VRF HVAC system manufacturer.

3. For VRF HVAC system provider.

C. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for equipment, accessories, and components, from

manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.

D. Source quality-control reports.



238129 Page 4 of 28


F. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VRF HVAC systems to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals.

B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.

2. Program Software Backup: On CD or DVD, USB media, or approved cloud storage

platform, complete with data files.

3. Device address list.

4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.




1. Filters:

a. One set(s) for each unit with replaceable filters.

b. One set(s) for each unit type and unique size of washable filters.

2. Indoor Units: One for each unique size and type installed.

3. Controllers for Indoor Units: One for each unique controller type installed.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. Nationally recognized manufacturer of VRF HVAC systems and products.

2. Shipped VRF HVAC systems with similar requirements to those indicated for a

continuous period of 10 years within time of bid.

3. VRF HVAC systems and products that have been successfully tested and in use on at

least five completed projects.

4. Having complete published catalog literature, installation, and operation and maintenance

manuals for all products intended for use.

5. Having full-time in-house employees for the following:

a. Product research and development.

b. Product and application engineering.

c. Product manufacturing, testing, and quality control.



238129 Page 5 of 28

d. Technical support for system installation training, startup, commissioning, and

troubleshooting of installations.

e. Owner training.

B. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications:

1. Authorized representative of, and trained by, VRF HVAC system manufacturer.

2. Demonstrated past experience with products being installed for period within three

consecutive years before time of bid.

3. Demonstrated past experience on five projects of similar complexity, scope, and value.

a. Each person assigned to Project shall have demonstrated past experience.

4. Staffing resources of competent and experienced full-time employees that are assigned to

execute work according to schedule.

5. Service and maintenance staff assigned to support Project during warranty period.

6. Product parts inventory to support ongoing system operation for a period of not less than

five years after Substantial Completion.

7. VRF HVAC system manufacturer's backing to take over execution of Work if necessary

to comply with requirements indicated. Include Project-specific written letter, signed by

manufacturer's corporate officer, if requested.

C. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and

approved by VRF HVAC system manufacturer.

1. Each employee shall be certified by manufacturer for proper installation of systems,

including, but not limited to, equipment, piping, controls, and accessories indicated and

furnished for installation.

2. Installer certification shall be valid and current for duration of Project.

3. Retain copies of Installer certificates on-site and make available on request.

4. Each person assigned to Project shall have demonstrated past experience.

a. Demonstrated past experience with products being installed for period within five

consecutive years before time of bid.

b. Demonstrated past experience on five projects of similar complexity, scope, and

value.

D. ISO Compliance: System equipment and components furnished by VRF HVAC system

manufacturer shall be manufactured in an ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 facility.


A. Deliver and store products in a clean and dry place.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written rigging and installation instructions for unloading and

moving to final installed location.

C. Handle products carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting, and scoring. Do not install

damaged products.



238129 Page 6 of 28

D. Protect products from weather, dirt, dust, water, construction debris, and physical damage.

1. Retain factory-applied coverings on equipment to protect finishes during construction and

remove just prior to operating unit.

2. Cover unit openings before installation to prevent dirt and dust from entering inside of

units. If required to remover coverings during unit installation, reapply coverings over

openings after unit installation and remove just prior to operating unit.

E. Replace installed products damaged during construction.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace equipment and components

that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures.

b. Faulty operation.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering and use.

2. Warranty Period:

a. For Compressor: 10 year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

b. For Parts, Including Controls: 10 year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

c. For Labor: 10 year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Daikin AC (Americas), Inc.

2. LG Electronics.

3. Samsung HVAC.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain products from single source from single manufacturer including, but

not limited to, the following:

1. Indoor units, including accessories.

2. Controls and software.

3. HRCUs.

4. Refrigerant isolation valves.

5. Specialty refrigerant pipe fittings.



238129 Page 7 of 28

2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Direct-expansion (DX) VRF HVAC system(s) with variable capacity in response to varying

cooling and heating loads. System shall consist of multiple indoor units, outdoor unit(s), piping,

controls, and electrical power to make complete operating system(s) complying with


1. Two-pipe system design.

2. System operation, heat pump as indicated on Drawings.



C. AHRI Compliance: System and equipment performance certified according to AHRI 1230 and

products listed in AHRI directory.

D. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. ASHRAE 15: For safety code for mechanical refrigeration.

2. ASHRAE 62.1: For indoor air quality.

3. ASHRAE 135: For control network protocol with remote communication.

4. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: For system and component energy efficiency.

E. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design complete and operational VRF HVAC system(s) complying

with requirements indicated.

1. Provide system refrigerant calculations.

a. Refrigerant concentration limits shall be within allowable limits of ASHRAE 15

and governing codes.

b. Indicate compliance with manufacturer's maximum vertical and horizontal travel

distances. Prepare a comparison table for each system showing calculated

distances compared to manufacturer's maximum allowed distances.

2. Include a mechanical ventilation system and gas detection system as required to comply

with ASHRAE 15 and governing codes.

3. System Refrigerant Piping and Tubing:

a. Arrangement: Arrange piping to interconnect indoor units, HRCUs and outdoor

unit(s) in compliance with manufacturer requirements and requirements indicated.

b. Routing: Conceal piping above ceilings and behind walls to maximum extent

possible.



238129 Page 8 of 28

c. Sizing: Size piping system, using a software program acceptable to manufacturer,

to provide performance requirements indicated. Consider requirements to

accommodate future change requirements.

4. System Controls:

a. Network arrangement.

b. Network interface with other building systems.

c. Product selection.

d. Sizing.

B. Service Access:

1. Provide and document service access requirements.

2. Locate equipment, system isolation valves, and other system components that require

service and inspection in easily accessible locations. Avoid locations that are difficult to

access if possible.

3. Where serviceable components are installed behind walls and above inaccessible ceilings,

provide finished assembly with access doors or panels to gain access. Properly size the

openings to allow for service, removal, and replacement.

4. If less than full and unrestricted access is provided, locate components within an 18-inch

reach of the finished assembly.

5. Where ladder access is required to service elevated components, provide an installation

that provides for sufficient access within ladder manufacturer's written instructions for

use.

6. Comply with OSHA regulations.

C. System Design and Installation Requirements:

1. Design and install systems indicated according to manufacturer's recommendations and


2. Where manufacturer's requirements differ from requirements indicated, contact Architect

for direction. The most stringent requirements should apply unless otherwise directed in

writing by Architect.

D. System Adaptability to Future Changes: Arrange and size system refrigerant piping to

accommodate future changes to system without having to resize and replace existing refrigerant

piping.

E. Isolation of Equipment: Provide isolation valves to isolate each HRCU, indoor unit and outdoor

unit for service, removal, and replacement without interrupting system operation.

F. System Capacity Ratio: The sum of connected capacity of all indoor units shall be within the

following range of outdoor-unit rated capacity:

1. Not less than 60 percent.

2. Not more than 130 percent.

3. Range acceptable to manufacturer.

G. System Turndown: Stable operation down to 20 percent of outdoor-unit capacity.



238129 Page 9 of 28

H. System Auto Refrigerant Charge: Each system shall have an automatic refrigerant charge

function to ensure the proper amount of refrigerant is installed in system.

I. Outdoor Conditions:

1. Suitable for outdoor ambient conditions encountered.

a. Design equipment and supports to withstand wind loads of governing code and

ASCE/SEI 7.

b. Design equipment and supports to withstand snow and ice loads of governing code

and ASCE/SEI 7.

2. Maximum System Operating Outdoor Temperature: See Drawings.

3. Minimum System Operating Outdoor Temperature: See Drawings.

J. Sound Performance: Sound levels generated by operating HVAC equipment shall be within


1. Indoor: Within design guidelines of "2015 ASHRAE HANDBOOK- HVAC

Applications."

2. Outdoor: Within ordinance of governing authorities.

K. Thermal Movements: Allow for controlled thermal movements from ambient, surface, and

system temperature changes.

L. Capacities and Characteristics: As indicated on Drawings.

2.4 OUTDOOR, AIR-SOURCE HEAT-PUMP UNITS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested complete unit with components, piping, wiring, and

controls required for mating to piping, power, and controls field connections.

1. Specially designed for use in systems with either all heating or all cooling demands, but

not for use in systems with simultaneous heating and cooling.

2. Systems shall consist of one unit, or multiple unit modules that are designed by variable

refrigerant system manufacturer for field interconnection to make a single refrigeration

circuit that connects multiple indoor units.

3. All units installed shall be from the same product development generation.

B. Cabinet:

1. Galvanized steel and coated with a corrosion-resistant finish.

a. Coating with documented salt spray test performance of 1000 hours according

ASTM B117 surface scratch test (SST) procedure.

2. Mounting: Manufacturer-designed provisions for field installation.

3. Internal Access: Removable panels or hinged doors of adequate size for field access to

internal components for inspection, cleaning, service, and replacement.



238129 Page 10 of 28

C. Compressor and Motor Assembly:

1. One or more positive-displacement, direct-drive and hermetically sealed scroll

compressor(s) with inverter drive and turndown to 15 percent of rated capacity.

2. Protection: Integral protection against the following:

a. High refrigerant pressure.

b. Low oil level.

c. High oil temperature.

d. Thermal and overload.

e. Voltage fluctuations.

f. Phase failure and phase reversal.

g. Short cycling.

3. Speed Control: Variable to automatically maintain refrigerant suction and condensing

pressures while varying refrigerant flow to satisfy system cooling and heating loads.

4. Vibration Control: Integral isolation to dampen vibration transmission.

5. Oil management system to ensure safe and proper lubrication over entire operating range.

6. Crankcase heaters with integral control to maintain safe operating temperature.

7. Fusible plug.

D. Condenser Coil Assembly:

1. Plate Fin Coils:

a. Casing: Aluminum, galvanized, or stainless steel.

b. Fins: Aluminum or copper, mechanically bonded to tubes, with arrangement

required by performance.

c. Tubes: Copper, of diameter and thickness required by performance.

2. Aluminum Microchannel Coils:

a. Series of flat tubes containing a series of multiple, parallel-flow microchannels

layered between refrigerant header manifolds.

b. Single- or multiple-pass arrangement.

c. Construct fins, tubes, and header manifolds of aluminum alloy.

3. Coating: Corrosion resistant.

E. Condenser Fan and Motor Assembly:

1. Fan(s): Propeller type.

a. Direct-drive arrangement.

b. Fabricated from non-ferrous components or ferrous components with corrosion

protection finish to match performance indicated for condenser coil.

c. Statically and dynamically balanced.



238129 Page 11 of 28

2. Fan Guards: Removable safety guards complying with OSHA regulations. If using metal

materials, coat with corrosion-resistant coating to match performance indicated for

condenser coil.

3. Motor(s): Brushless dc or electronically commutated with permanently lubricated

bearings and rated for outdoor duty.

4. Motor Protection: Integral protection against thermal, overload, and voltage fluctuations.

5. Speed Settings and Control: Variable speed with a speed range of least 75 percent.

6. Vibration Control: Integral isolation to dampen vibration transmission.

F. Drain Pan: If required by manufacturer's design, provide unit with non-ferrous drain pan with

bottom sloped to a low point drain connection.

G. Unit Controls:

1. Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard, and suitable for unprotected outdoor locations.

2. Factory-Installed Controller: Configurable digital control.

3. Factory-Installed Sensors:

a. Refrigerant suction temperature.

b. Refrigerant discharge temperature.

c. Outdoor air temperature.

d. Refrigerant high pressure.

e. Refrigerant low pressure.

f. Oil level.

4. Features and Functions: Self-diagnostics, time delay, auto-restart, fuse protection, auto

operation mode , manual operation mode , night setback control ,power consumption

display , run test switch.

5. Communication: Network communication with indoor units and other outdoor unit(s).

6. Cable and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard with each connection labeled and

corresponding to a unit-mounted wiring diagram.

7. Field Connection: Manufacturer's standard with each connection labeled and

corresponding to a unit-mounted wiring diagram.

H. Unit Electrical:

1. Enclosure: Metal, similar to enclosure, and suitable for unprotected outdoor locations.

2. Field Connection: Single point connection to power entire unit and integral controls.

3. Disconnecting Means: Factory-mounted circuit breaker or switch, complying with

NFPA 70.

4. Control Transformer: Manufacturer's standard. Coordinate requirements with field power

supply.

5. Wiring: Manufacturer's standard with each connection labeled and corresponding to a

unit-mounted wiring diagram.

6. Raceways: Enclose line voltage wiring in [metal ]raceways to comply with NFPA 70.

I. Unit Hardware: Zinc-plated steel, or stainless steel. Coat exposed surfaces with additional

corrosion-resistant coating if required to prevention corrosion when exposed to salt spray test

for 1000 hours according ASTM B117.



238129 Page 12 of 28

J. Unit Piping:

1. Unit Tubing: Copper tubing with brazed joints.

2. Unit Tubing Insulation: Manufacturer's standard insulation, of thickness to prevent

condensation.

3. Field Piping Connections: Manufacturer's standard.

4. Factory Charge: Dehydrated air or nitrogen.

5. Testing: Factory pressure tested and verified to be without leaks.

2.5 SYSTEM CONTROLS

A. General Requirements:

1. Network: Indoor units, and condensing units shall include integral controls and connect

through a manufacturer-selected control network.

a. Provide with Daikin iTouch control system, or approved equivalent, to control all

VRF components autonomously.

2. Network Communication Protocol: Manufacturer proprietary or open control

communication between interconnected units.

3. Integration with Building Automation System (for system observation only):

ASHRAE 135, BACnet IP and certified by BACnet Testing Lab (BTL), including the

following:

a. Ethernet connection via RJ-45 connectors and port with transmission at 100 Mbps

or higher.

b. Integration devices shall be connected to local uninterruptible power supply unit(s)

to provide at least 5 minutes of battery backup operation after a power loss.

c. Integration shall include control monitoring scheduling change of value

notifications.

4. Operator Interface:

a. Operators shall interface with system and unit controls through the following:

1) Operator interfaces integral to controllers.

2) Integration with Building Automation System. For system status observation

only

b. Users shall be capable of interface with controllers for indoor units control to

extent privileges are enabled. Control features available to users shall include the

following:

1) On/off control.

2) Temperature set-point adjustment.

2.6 SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL

A. Refrigerant:



238129 Page 13 of 28

1. As required by VRF HVAC system manufacturer for system to comply with performance


2. ASHRAE 34, Class A1 refrigerant classification.

3. R-410a.

B. Oil:

1. As required by VRF HVAC system manufacturer and to comply with performance


2.7 METAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Copper Tube Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated

components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of galvanized or copper-

coated steel.

B. Plastic Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, galvanized-steel, factory-fabricated

components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of galvanized steel.

2.8 SYSTEM CONTROL CABLE

A. Cable Rating: Listed and labeled for application according to NFPA 70.

1. Flame Travel and Smoke Density in Plenums: As determined by testing identical

products according to NFPA 262, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products for

installation in plenums with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

a. Flame Travel Distance: 60 inches or less.

b. Peak Optical Smoke Density: 0.5 or less.

c. Average Optical Smoke Density: 0.15 or less.

2. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Riser Cables in Non-Plenum Building Spaces: As

determined by testing identical products according to UL 1666.

3. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Cables in Non-Riser Applications and Non-Plenum

Building Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according to UL 1685.

B. Low-Voltage Control Cabling:

1. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.



238129 Page 14 of 28

a. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) or No. 18 AWG, stranded

(19x30) tinned-copper conductors as required by VRF HVAC system

manufacturer.

b. PVC insulation.

c. Braided or foil shielded.

d. PVC jacket.

e. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1685.

2. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.

a. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) or No. 18 AWG, stranded

(19x30) tinned-copper conductors as required by VRF HVAC system

manufacturer.

b. PVC insulation.

c. Braided or foil shielded.

d. PVC jacket.

e. NFPA 262 includes the standard flame-resistance test criteria in common use for

cables and conductors.

f. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.

C. TIA-485A Network Cabling:

1. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.

a. Paired, one pair, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors.

b. PVC insulation.

c. Unshielded.

d. PVC jacket.

e. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1685.

2. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.

a. Paired, one pair, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors.

b. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.

c. Unshielded.

d. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket.

e. NFPA 262 includes the standard flame-resistance test criteria in common use for

cables and conductors.

f. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262.

D. Ethernet Network Cabling: TIA-568-C.2 Category 6 cable with RJ-45 connectors.

1. Description: Four-pair, balanced-twisted pair cable, certified to meet transmission

characteristics of category cable indicated.

2. Conductors: 100-ohm, 23 AWG solid copper.

3. Shielding: Shielded twisted pairs (FTP).

4. Cable Rating: By application.

5. Jacket: thermoplastic.

E. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for

control wiring and cable raceways.



238129 Page 15 of 28


A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect factory-assembled equipment.

B. Equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports for historical record. Submit reports only if requested.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine products before installation. Reject products that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold

damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for piping and tubing to verify actual locations of connections before

equipment installation.

D. Examine roughing-in for ductwork to verify actual locations of connections before equipment

installation.

E. Examine roughing-in for wiring and conduit to verify actual locations of connections before

equipment installation.

F. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and outdoor pads for suitable conditions where equipment will be

installed.

G. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of

the Work.

H. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Clearance:

1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.

2. Maintain clearances required by governing code.

B. Loose Components: Install components, devices, and accessories furnished by manufacturer,

with equipment, that are not factory mounted.

1. Loose components shall be installed by manufacturer's service representative or system

Installer under supervision of manufacturer's service representative.



238129 Page 16 of 28

3.3 INSTALLATION OF OUTDOOR UNITS

A. Install units to be level and plumb while providing a neat and finished appearance.

B. Install outdoor units on support structures indicated on Drawings.

C. Pad-Mounted Installations: Install outdoor units on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases.

Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000

"Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Attachment: Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported

equipment.

2. Grouting: Place grout under equipment supports and make bearing surface smooth.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING INSTALLATION


and tubing systems. Install piping and tubing as indicated unless deviations to layout are

approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping and tubing in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in

equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping and tubing at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are

prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping and tubing above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel

removal.

E. Install piping and tubing to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping and tubing at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping and tubing free of sags.


I. Install piping and tubing to allow application of insulation.

J. Install groups of pipes and tubing parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation

with service access between insulated piping and tubing.

K. Install sleeves for piping and tubing penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC

Piping."

L. Install escutcheons for piping and tubing penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply

with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC

Piping."



238129 Page 17 of 28

3.5 INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERANT PIPING

A. Refrigerant Tubing Kits:

1. Unroll and straighten tubing to suit installation. Deviations in straightness of exposed

tubing shall be unnoticeable to observer.

2. Support tubing using hangers and supports indicated at intervals not to exceed 5 feet.

Minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

3. Prepare tubing ends and make mating connections to provide a pressure tight and leak-

free installation.

B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15 and governing codes.

C. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.

D. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints and fittings.

E. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of equipment. Install valves and specialties in

accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or panels as

specified in Section 083113 "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment requiring

maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.

F. Install refrigerant piping and tubing in protective conduit where installed belowground.

G. Install refrigerant piping and tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to

mechanical damage.

H. Unless otherwise required by VRF HVAC system manufacturer, slope refrigerant piping and

tubing as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping and tubing with a uniform slope downward

away from compressor.

2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.

3. Install traps to entrain oil in vertical runs.

4. Liquid lines may be installed level.

I. When brazing, remove or protect components that could be damaged by heat.

J. Before installation, clean piping, tubing, and fittings to cleanliness level required by VRF

HVAC system manufacturer.

K. Joint Construction:

1. Ream ends of tubes and remove burrs.

2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of tube and fittings before

assembly.

3. Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter.



238129 Page 18 of 28

a. Use Type BCuP (copper-phosphorus) alloy for joining copper fittings with copper

tubing.

b. Use Type BAg (cadmium-free silver) alloy for joining copper with bronze.

3.6 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and in applicable Division 26 Sections.

B. To extent electrical power is required for system equipment, components, and controls, and is

not indicated on Drawings and addressed in the Specifications, the design for such electrical

power shall be delegated to VRF HVAC system provider.

1. Delegated design of electrical power to equipment, components and controls, and

associated installation shall be included at no additional cost to Owner.

C. Connect field electrical power source to each separate electrical device requiring field electrical

power. Coordinate termination point and connection type with Installer.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables" for wiring connections.

E. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems"

for grounding connections.

F. Install nameplate or acrylic label with self-adhesive back for each electrical connection

indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection.

1. Nameplate shall be laminated phenolic layers of black with engraved white letters.

Letters at least 1/2 inch high.

2. Locate nameplate or label where easily visible.

G. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for

raceway selection and installation requirements for boxes, conduits, and wireways as

supplemented or revised in this Section.

1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep.

2. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.

H. Comply with TIA-569-D for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends

between pull points.

I. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible.

J. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to

grounding system.



238129 Page 19 of 28

3.7 SOFTWARE

A. Cybersecurity:

1. Software:

a. Coordinate security requirements with IT department.

b. Ensure that latest stable software release is installed and properly operating.

c. Disable or change default passwords to password using a combination of

uppercase and lower letters, numbers, and symbols at least eight characters in

length. Record passwords and turn over to party responsible for system operation

and administration.

2. Hardware:

a. Coordinate location and access requirements with IT department.

b. Enable highest level of wireless encryption that is compatible with Owner's ICT

network.

c. Disable dual network connections.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEM CONTROL CABLE


B. Installation Method:

1. Install cables in raceways except as follows:

a. Within equipment and associated control enclosures.

b. In accessible ceiling spaces where open cable installation method may be used.

c. In gypsum board partitions where cable may be enclosed within wall cavity.

2. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.

C. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA-568-C Series of standards.

2. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems."

3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make

terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels.

4. Cables may not be spliced and shall be continuous from terminal to terminal. Do not

splice cable.

5. Cables serving a common system may be grouped in a common raceway. Install control

cable in separate raceway from power wiring. Do not group conductors from different

systems or different voltages.

6. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6

inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.



238129 Page 20 of 28

7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's

limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5,

"Copper Structured Cabling Systems." Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Remove and discard

cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Do not use

heat lamps for heating.

10. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling

Systems." Monitor cable pull tensions.

11. Support: Do not allow cables to lie on removable ceiling tiles or access panels.

12. Secure: Fasten securely in place with hardware specifically designed and installed so as

to not damage cables.

13. Provide strain relief.

14. Keep runs short. Allow extra length for connecting to terminals.

15. Do not bend cables in a radius less than 10 times the cable OD.

16. Use sleeves or grommets to protect cables from vibration at points where they pass

around sharp corners and through penetrations.

17. Ground wire shall be copper, and grounding methods shall comply with IEEE C2.

Demonstrate ground resistance.

D. Balanced Twisted-Pair Cable Installation:

1. Comply with TIA-568-C.2.

2. Do not untwist balanced twisted-pair cables more than 1/2 inch at the point of termination

to maintain cable geometry.

E. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings

by cable supports not more than 30 inches apart.

2. Cable shall not be run through or on structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or

other potentially damaging items. Do not run cables between structural members and

corrugated panels.

F. Separation from EMI Sources: Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-D recommendations

for separating unshielded cable from potential EMI sources including electrical power wiring

and equipment.

3.9 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Comply with TIA-569-D, Annex A, "Firestopping."

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping" Chapter.



238129 Page 21 of 28

3.10 GROUNDING INSTALLATION

A. For data communication wiring, comply with TIA-607-B and with BICSI TDMM, "Bonding

and Grounding (Earthing)" Chapter.

B. For low-voltage control cabling, comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and

Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.11 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system equipment, piping, tubing, and valves. Comply with requirements for

identification specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Identify system electrical and controls components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with

requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical

Systems."

1. Identify each control cable on each end and at each terminal with a number-coded

identification tag. Each cable shall have a unique tag.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage VRF HVAC system manufacturer's service representative

to advise and assist installers; witness testing; and observe and inspect components, assemblies,

and equipment installations, including controls and connections.

1. Field service shall be performed by a factory-trained and -authorized service

representative of VRF HVAC system manufacturer whose primary job responsibilities

are to provide direct technical support of its products.

2. Manufacturer shall provide on-site visits during the course of construction at installation

milestones indicated. System Installer shall coordinate each visit in advance to give

manufacturer sufficient notice to plan the visit.

a. First Visit: Kick-off meeting.

b. Second Visit: At approximately 25 percent completion of system(s).

c. Third Visit: At approximately 50 percent completion of system(s).

d. Fourth Visit: At approximately 75 percent completion of system(s).

e. Fifth Visit: Final inspection before system startup.

3. Kick-off Meeting:

a. Meeting shall include system Installer and other related trades with sole purpose of

reviewing VRF HVAC system installation requirements and close coordination

required to make a successful installation.

b. Meeting shall be held at Project site and scheduled at a mutually agreed to time

that occurs before the start of any part of system installation.

c. Meeting shall cover the following as a minimum requirement:



238129 Page 22 of 28

1) Review of latest issue of Contract Documents, Drawings, and

Specifications, relevant to VRF HVAC systems.

2) Manufacturer's installation requirements specific to systems being installed.

3) Review of all relevant VRF HVAC system submittals, including delegated-

design submittals.

4) Required field activities related installation of VRF HVAC system.

5) Project team communication protocol, contact information, and exchange of

responsibilities for each party involved, including manufacturer, supplier,

system Installer, and other related trades.

4. Site Visits: Activities for each site visit shall include the following:

a. Meet with VRF HVAC system Installer to discuss field activities, issues, and

suggested methods to result in a successful installation.

b. Offer technical support to Installer and related trades as related to VRF system(s)

being installed.

c. Review progress of VRF HVAC system(s) installation for strict compliance with

manufacturer's requirements.

d. Advise and if necessary assist Installer with updating related refrigerant

calculations and system documentation.

e. Issue a report for each visit, documenting the visit.

1) Report to include name and contact information of individual making the

visit.

2) Date(s) and time frames while on-site.

3) Names and contact information of people meeting with while on-site.

4) Clearly identify and list each separate issue that requires resolution. For

each issue, provide a unique identification number, relevant importance,

specific location or equipment identification, description of issue,

recommended corrective action, and follow-up requirements needed.

Include a digital photo for clarification if deemed to be beneficial.

5. Final Inspection before Startup:

a. Before inspection, Installer to provide written request to manufacturer stating the

system is fully installed according manufacturer's requirements and ready for final

inspection.

b. All system equipment and operating components shall be inspected. If components

are inaccessible for inspection, they shall be made accessible before the final

inspection can be completed.

c. Manufacturer shall provide a comprehensive inspection of all equipment and each

operating component that comprise the complete system(s). Inspection shall follow

a detailed checklist specific to each equipment and operating component.

d. Inspection reports for indoor units shall include, but not be limited to, the

following:

1) Unit designation on Drawings.

2) Manufacturer model number.

3) Serial number.

4) Network address, if applicable.



238129 Page 23 of 28

5) Each equipment setting.

6) Mounting, supports, and restraints properly installed.

7) Proper service clearance provided.

8) Wiring and power connections correct.

9) Line-voltage reading(s) within acceptable range.

10) Wiring and controls connections correct.

11) Low-voltage reading(s) within an acceptable range.

12) Controller type and model controlling unit.

13) Controller location.

14) Temperature settings and readings within an acceptable range.

15) Condensate removal acceptable.

16) Fan settings and readings within an acceptable range.

17) Unit airflow direction within an acceptable range.

18) If applicable, fan external static pressure setting.

19) Filter type and condition acceptable.

20) Noise level within an acceptable range.

21) Refrigerant piping properly connected and insulated.

22) Condensate drain piping properly connected and insulated.

23) If applicable, ductwork properly connected.

24) If applicable, external interlocks properly connected.

25) Remarks.

e. Inspection reports for outdoor units shall include, but not be limited to, the

following:

1) Unit designation on Drawings.

2) Manufacturer model number.

3) Serial number.

4) Network address, if applicable.

5) Each equipment setting.

6) Mounting, supports, and restraints properly installed.

7) Proper service clearance provided.

8) Wiring and power connections correct.

9) Line-voltage reading(s) within acceptable range.

10) Wiring and controls connections correct.

11) Low-voltage reading(s) within an acceptable range.

12) Condensate removal acceptable.

13) Noise level within an acceptable range.

14) Refrigerant piping properly connected and insulated.

15) Condensate drain piping properly connected and insulated.

16) Remarks.

f. Installer shall provide manufacturer with the requested documentation and

technical support during inspection.

g. Installer shall correct observed deficiencies found by the inspection.

h. Upon completing the on-site inspection, manufacturer shall provide a written

report with complete documentation describing each inspection step, the result, and

any corrective action required.



238129 Page 24 of 28

i. If corrective action is required by Installer that cannot be completed during the

same visit, provide additional visits, as required, until deficiencies are resolved and

systems are deemed ready for startup.

j. Final report shall indicate the system(s) inspected are installed according to

manufacturer's requirements and are ready for startup.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of manufacturer's service

representative:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.




equipment.

C. Refrigerant Tubing Positive Pressure Testing:

1. Comply with more stringent of VRF HVAC system manufacturer's requirements and


2. After completion of tubing installation, pressurize tubing systems to a test pressure of not

less than 1.2 times VRF HVAC system operating pressure, but not less than 600 psig,

using dry nitrogen.

3. Successful testing shall maintain a test pressure for a continuous and uninterrupted period

of 24 hours. Allowance for pressure changes attributed to changes in ambient temperature

are acceptable.

4. Prepare test report to record the following information for each test:

a. Name of person starting test, company name, phone number, and e-mail address.

b. Name of manufacturer's service representative witnessing test, company name,

phone number, and e-mail address.

c. Detailed description of extent of tubing tested.

d. Date and time at start of test.

e. Test pressure at start of test.

f. Outdoor temperature at start of test.

g. Name of person ending test, company name, phone number, and e-mail address.

h. Date and time at end of test.

i. Test pressure at end of test.

j. Outdoor temperature at end of test.

k. Remarks:

5. Submit test reports for Project record.

D. Refrigerant Tubing Evacuation Testing:

1. Comply with more stringent of VRF HVAC system manufacturer's requirements and




238129 Page 25 of 28

2. After completion of tubing positive-pressure testing, evacuate tubing systems to a

pressure of 500 microns.

3. Successful testing shall maintain a test pressure for a continuous and uninterrupted period

of one hour(s) with no change.

4. Prepare test report to record the following information for each test:

a. Name of person starting test, company name, phone number, and e-mail address.

b. Name of manufacturer's service representative witnessing test, company name,

phone number, and e-mail address.

c. Detailed description of extent of tubing tested.

d. Date and time at start of test.

e. Test pressure at start of test.

f. Outdoor temperature at start of test.

g. Name of person ending test, company name, phone number, and e-mail address.

h. Date and time at end of test.

i. Test pressure at end of test.

j. Outdoor temperature at end of test.

k. Remarks:

5. Submit test reports for Project record.

6. Upon successful completion of evacuation testing, system shall be charged with

refrigerant.

E. System Refrigerant Charge:

1. Using information collected from the refrigerant tubing evacuation testing, system

Installer shall consult variable refrigerant system manufacturer to determine the correct

system refrigerant charge.

2. Installer shall charge system following VRF HVAC system manufacturer's written

instructions.

3. System refrigerant charging shall be witnessed by system manufacturer's representative.

4. Total refrigerant charge shall be recorded and permanently displayed at the system's

outdoor unit.

F. Products will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.13 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a VRF HVAC system manufacturer's service representative to perform system(s)

startup service.

1. Service representative shall be a factory-trained and -authorized service representative of

VRF HVAC system manufacturer.

2. Complete startup service of each separate system.

3. Complete system startup service according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Startup checks shall include, but not be limited to, the following:



238129 Page 26 of 28

1. Check control communications of equipment and each operating component in system(s).

2. Check each indoor unit's response to demand for cooling and heating.

3. Check each indoor unit's response to changes in airflow settings.

4. Check each indoor unit, and HCRU for proper condensate removal.

5. Check sound levels of each indoor and outdoor unit.

C. Installer shall accompany manufacturer's service representative during startup service and

provide manufacturer's service representative with requested documentation and technical

support during startup service.

1. Installer shall correct deficiencies found during startup service for reverification.

D. System Operation Report:

1. After completion of startup service, manufacturer shall issue a report for each separate

system.

2. Report shall include complete documentation describing each startup check, the result,

and any corrective action required.

3. Manufacturer shall electronically record not less than two hours of continuous operation

of each system and submit with report for historical reference.

a. All available system operating parameters shall be included in the information

submitted.

E. Witness:

1. Invite Architect Owner and Commissioning Agent to witness startup service procedures.

2. Provide written notice not less than 20 business days before start of startup service.

3.14 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust equipment and components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by

manufacturer.

B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points. Adjust initial airflow settings and discharge

airflow patterns.

C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges according to VRF HVAC system

manufacturer's written instructions, and as indicated.

D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial



3.15 PROTECTION

A. Protect products from moisture and water damage. Remove and replace products that are wet,

moisture damaged, or mold damaged.



238129 Page 27 of 28

B. Protect equipment from physical damage. Replace equipment with physical damage that cannot

be repaired to new condition. Observable surface imperfections shall be grounds for removal

and replacement.

C. Protect equipment from electrical damage. Replace equipment suffering electrical damage.

D. Cover and seal openings of equipment to keep inside of equipment clean. Do not remove covers

until finish work is complete.


A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall

include 12 months' full maintenance by manufacturer's authorized service representative.

Include four service visits for preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or

defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper equipment and

system operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and

supplies.

3.17 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include

software support for two years.

B. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and

program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial

Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for

using software.

1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule and access the system and

to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

3.18 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a VRF HVAC system manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative to train

Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain entire system.

B. Instructor:

1. Instructor shall be factory trained and certified by VRF HVAC system manufacturer with

current training on the system(s), equipment, and controls that are installed.

2. Instructor's credentials shall be submitted for review by Architect before scheduling

training.

3. Instructor(s) shall have not less than three years of training experience with VRF HVAC

system manufacturer and past training experience on at least three projects of comparable

size and complexity.

C. Schedule and Duration:



238129 Page 28 of 28

1. Schedule training with Owner at least 20 business days before first training session.

2. Training shall occur before Owner occupancy.

3. Training shall be held at mutually agreed date and time during normal business hours.

4. Each training day shall not exceed eight hours of training. Daily training schedule shall

allow time for one-hour lunch period and 15-minute break after every two hours of

training.

5. Perform not less than eight total hours of training.

D. Location: Owner shall provide a suitable on-site location to host classroom training.

E. Training Attendees: Assume three people.

F. Training Attendance: For record purposes, document training attendees at the start of each new

training session. Record attendee's name, signature, phone number, and e-mail address.

G. Training Format: Individual training modules shall include classroom training followed by

hands-on field demonstration and training.

H. Training Materials: Provide training materials in electronic format to each attendee.

1. Include instructional videos showing general operation and maintenance that are

coordinated with operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Video record each classroom training session and submit an electronic copy to Owner

before requesting Owner acceptance of training.

I. Acceptance: Obtain Commissioning Agent or Owner written acceptance that training is

complete and requirements indicated have been satisfied.




238216.14 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 238216.14 - ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE AIR COILS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Electric-resistance air coils.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for each air coil.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and pressure drops for each air coil.

B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, sections, and other details, or BIM model, drawn to scale,

showing the items described in this Section and coordinated with all building trades.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air coils to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.


A. Altitude above Mean Sea Level: 100 feet.



238216.14 Page 2 of 5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Coil Assembly: Comply with UL 1995.



C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-


D. ASHRAE 62.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5, "Systems

and Equipment," and Section 7, "Construction and Startup."

E. Equally balance heater electrical load for each step across all electrical phases.

F. Part-Load Operation: Provide arrangement with operation staged for uninterrupted operation

over the full range of airflow down to the minimum airflow indicated.

2.2 ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE AIR COILS


following:

1. Brasch Manufacturing Co., Inc.

2. Chromalox, Inc.

3. INDEECO.

4. RenewAire LLC.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain electric-resistance air coils from single source from single

manufacturer.

C. Heating Elements:

1. Open Elements:

a. Open-coil resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 percent chromium;

supported and insulated by floating ceramic bushings recessed into casing

openings, fastened to supporting brackets, and mounted in a frame.

b. Safety Screens: Install safety screens to protect operators from accidentally coming

into direct connect with elements.

D. Frame: Galvanized steel; minimum 0.052 inch thick for slip-in mounting. Include intermediate

element support brackets equally spaced at a maximum of 36 inches o.c. across electric-

resistance air coil.

E. Terminal Box/Control Panel: Unit mounted; with disconnection means and overcurrent

protection.



238216.14 Page 3 of 5

1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure complying with UL 50.

2. Full-face-hinged door.

3. Factory insulate terminal box to prevent condensation from occurring within box.

4. Install a laminated elementary wiring diagram on inside face of heater control panel door

or in another protected location than visible be service personnel. Wiring diagram to

match installation.

F. Controls:

1. Safety Controls: Each heater is to be provided with the following factory-mounted safety

controls:

a. Disk-type thermal cutout switch with automatic reset.

b. Primary linear thermal limit cutout switch with automatic reset.

c. Secondary linear thermal limit cutout switch with local manual reset.

d. Airflow Proving Switch: Pressure differential type; with pressure range selected to

ensure reliable operation throughout full range of air-handling unit airflow down to

minimum airflow indicated.

2. Staging Control: Magnetic contactors for switching stages of heat.

3. Remote Monitoring and Control: Include control devices necessary to interface with

remote-control signals, including the following:

a. Heater on/off control.

b. Monitoring heater on/off status.

c. High-temperature alarm.

d. Low-airflow alarm.

e. Heater capacity control.

G. Electrical:

1. Single-Point Field Power Connection: Install and wire the heater to accommodate a

single field electrical connection for electrical power.

2. Disconnecting Means: Provide each heater with a main electrical power connection, door

mounted and interlocking, and disconnecting means to prevent access into panel, unless

switched to the off position.

a. Coordinate fused disconnect switch with electrical contractor.

b. Minimum Short-Circuit Current Rating: As required by electrical power

distribution system, but not less than 42,000 A.

3. Factory install and wire branch circuit fusing or circuit breakers in accordance with

NFPA 70.

4. Pilot Lights: Include labeled pilot lights on face of control panel for the following:

a. Power on.

b. Low-airflow alarm.

c. High-temperature alarm.

d. One for each stage on.

e. .



238216.14 Page 4 of 5

5. Terminations: Wire terminations and field interface terminations to labeled terminal

strips.

6. Control Transformer: Size control circuit transformer for load.

7. Labeling: Label each electrical device with a laminated phenolic tag.

8. Use only NRTL-labeled electrical components.

H. Nameplate: Include the following data:

1. Manufacturer name, address, telephone number, and website address.

2. Manufacturer model number.

3. Serial number.

4. Manufacturing date.

5. Coil identification (indicated on Drawings).

6.

I. Duct mounted temperature sensor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine ducts, plenums, and casings to receive air coils for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting coil performance.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install coils level and plumb.

B. Install coils in metal ducts and casings constructed in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible."

C. Clean coils using materials and methods recommended in writing by manufacturers, and clean

inside of casings and enclosures to remove dust and debris.


A. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."

B. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, in accordance




238216.14 Page 5 of 5

D. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and







Cables."

C. Install nameplate for each control connection, indicating field control panel designation and I/O

control designation feeding connection.




1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate electric coils to

confirm proper unit operation.


equipment.





238219 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 238219 - FAN COIL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Ducted fan coil units and accessories.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and

accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:



connection.



A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, and other details, drawn to scale,

on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from

installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components.

2. Structural members to which fan coil units will be attached.



5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures.

b. Air outlets and inlets.

c. Speakers.

d. Sprinklers.

e. Access panels.



238219 Page 2 of 6

6. Perimeter moldings.


C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fan coil units to include in emergency, operation, and


1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"


a. Maintenance schedules and repair part lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and

filters.




1. Fan Coil Unit Filters: Furnish 1 spare filter for each filter installed.


A. Comply with NFPA 70.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

C. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 -

"Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan coil units and suspension system components with

other construction that penetrates or is supported by ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC

equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS






238219 Page 3 of 6

B. Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to AHRI 440, ASHRAE 33, and UL 1995.

2.2 DUCTED FAN COIL UNITS


following:

1. Daikin Applied.

2. Engineered Air.


4. Titus; brand of Johnson Controls International plc, Global Products.

5. Trane Inc.

6. USA Coil & Air.

B. Fan Coil Unit Configurations: Row split.

1. One Heat Pump Coil.

C. Coil Section Insulation: Insulate coil section according to Section 230616 "HVAC Equipment

Insulation."

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Insulation and adhesive shall have a combined

maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested

according to ASTM E84 by a qualified testing agency.

2. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Drain Pans: Fabricate pans and drain connections to comply with ASHRAE 62.1.

E. Chassis: Galvanized steel where exposed to moisture.

F. Cabinets: Steel with baked-enamel finish in manufacturer's standard paint color.

G. Filters: Minimum arrestance and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to

ASHRAE 52.2 and all addendums.

H. MERV Rating: 6 when tested according to ASHRAE 52.2.

I. Indoor Refrigerant Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no

closer than 0.1 inch and brazed joints at fittings. Comply with AHRI 210/240, and leak test to

minimum 450 psig for a minimum 300-psig working pressure. Include thermal expansion valve.

J. Direct-Driven Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated,

multispeed motor resiliently mounted in the fan inlet. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and

painted-steel or galvanized-steel fan scrolls.

1. Motors: Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements

for HVAC Equipment."

K. Remote condensing units are specified in Section 236313 “Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers.”



238219 Page 4 of 6

L. Basic Unit Controls:

1. Control voltage transformer.

2. Wall-mounting thermostat with the following features.

a. Heat-cool-off switch.

b. Fan on-auto switch.

c. Fan-speed switch.

d. Automatic changeover.

e. Adjustable deadband.

f. Exposed set point.

g. Exposed indication.

h. Degree F indication.

3. Wall-mounting temperature sensor.

4. Unoccupied-period-override push button.

5. Data entry and access port.

a. Input data includes room temperature, and humidity set points and occupied and

unoccupied periods.

b. Output data includes room temperature, supply-air temperature, operating mode,

and status.

M. DDC Terminal Controller:

1. Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods on seven-day clock with a

minimum of four programmable periods per day.

2. Unoccupied-Period-Override Operation: Two hours.

3. Unit Supply-Air Fan Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Fan runs continuously.

b. Unoccupied Periods: Fan cycles to maintain room setback temperature.

4. Refrigerant-Coil Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Start compressor to maintain room temperature set point.

b. Unoccupied Periods: Stop compressor cooling and cycle compressor for heating to

maintain setback temperature.

N. Interface with DDC System for HVAC Requirements:

1. Interface relay for scheduled operation.

2. Interface relay to provide indication of fault at the central workstation.

3. Provide BACnet interface for central DDC system for HVAC workstation for the

following functions:

a. Adjust set points.

b. Fan coil unit start, stop, and operating status.

c. Data inquiry, includingsupply- and room-air temperature.

d. Occupied and unoccupied schedules.



238219 Page 5 of 6

O. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single electrical connection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, to receive fan coil units for compliance with requirements

for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before fan

coil unit installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fan coil units level and plumb.

B. Install fan coil units to comply with NFPA 90A.

C. Suspend fan coil units from structure with elastomeric hangers. Vibration isolators are specified

in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

D. Verify locations of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings

and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches above finished floor.

E. Install new filters in each fan coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general

arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific connection requirements are as follows:

1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

2. Connect piping to fan coil unit factory hydronic piping package. Install piping package if

shipped loose.

3. Connect condensate drain to indirect waste.

a. Install condensate trap of adequate depth to seal against fan pressure. Install

cleanouts in piping at changes of direction.

B. Connect supply-air and return-air ducts to fan coil units with flexible duct connectors specified

in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995 for

duct connections.

C. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."



238219 Page 6 of 6

D. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."





2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and

electrical connections.

3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to

two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fan coil units.




238233

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 238233 - CONVECTORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes electric convectors.




B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.



connection.

3. Include details and dimensions of custom-fabricated enclosures.

4. Indicate location and size of each field connection.

5. Indicate location and arrangement of integral controls.

6. Include enclosure joints, corner pieces, access doors, and other accessories.



A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following

items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items

involved:

1. Structural members, including wall construction, to which convectors will be attached.

2. Method of attaching convectors to building structure.




238233

Page 2 of 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRIC CONVECTORS


following:

1. Markel Products; TPI Corporation.

2. Marley Engineered Products.

B. Description: Factory-packaged units constructed according to UL 499, UL 1030, and UL 2021.

1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.

C. Heating Elements: Nickel-chromium-wire heating element enclosed in metallic sheath

mechanically bonded to fins, with high-temperature cutout and sensor running the full length of

element. Element supports shall eliminate thermal expansion noise.

1. Volts: 208.

2. Phase: 1.

3. Hertz: 60.

4. Heat Output: 250 W/ linear foot.

D. Front and Top Panel: Minimum 0.0528-inch- thick steel with exposed corners rounded;

removable front panels with tamper-resistant fasteners braced and reinforced for stiffness.

E. Wall-Mounted Back and End Panels: Minimum 0.0428-inch-thick steel.

F. Floor-Mounted Pedestals: Conceal conduit for power and control wiring at maximum 36-inch

spacing. Pedestal-mounted back panel shall be solid panel matching front panel.

G. Support Brackets: Locate at maximum 36-inch spacing to support front panel and element.

H. Insulation: 1/2-inch-thick, fibrous glass on inside of the back of the enclosure.

I. Finish: Baked-enamel finish in manufacturer's custom color as selected by Architect.

J. Damper: Knob-operated internal damper.

K. Access Doors: Factory made, permanently hinged with tamper-resistant fastener, minimum size

6 by 7 inches, integral with enclosure.

L. Enclosure Style: Sloped top.

1. Front Inlet Grille: Extruded-aluminum linear bar grille; pencil-proof bar spacing.

a. Anodized finish, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's custom colors.

2. Top Outlet Grille: Extruded-aluminum linear bar grille; pencil-proof bar spacing.

a. Anodized finish, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's custom colors.

3. Enclosure Height: 10 inches.



238233

Page 3 of 4

4. Enclosure Depth: 3 inches.

5. Enclosure Length: See drawings.

M. Unit Controls: Integral low-voltage relay and control transformer for remote thermostat.

N. Accessories: Integral disconnect switch, recessing flanges finished to match enclosure or

overlapping front cover for fully recessed units, and rubber gaskets to seal cabinet at wall.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive convectors for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations before installation of

convector.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install convectors level and plumb.

B. Install valves within reach of access door provided in enclosure.

C. Install air-seal gasket between wall and recessed flanges or front cover of fully recessed unit.

D. Install piping within pedestals for freestanding units.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground electric convectors according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections:

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start convectors to confirm

proper operation.


equipment.

B. Convectors will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.



238233

Page 4 of 4





238239.19 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 238239.19 - WALL AND CEILING UNIT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes wall and ceiling heaters with propeller fans and electric-resistance heating

coils.




B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.



connection.

3. Include details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.

4. Include equipment schedules to indicate rated capacities, operating characteristics,

furnished specialties, and accessories.

5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wall and ceiling unit heaters to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.



238239.19 Page 2 of 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. King Electric.

2. Markel Products; TPI Corporation.

3. Trane.

2.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Assembly including chassis, electric heating coil, fan, motor, and controls. Comply with

UL 2021.



2.3 CABINET

A. Front Panel: Extruded-aluminum bar grille, with removable panels fastened with tamperproof

fasteners.

B. Finish: Baked enamel over baked-on primer with manufacturer's standard color selected by

Architect, applied to factory-assembled and -tested wall and ceiling heaters before shipping.

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Surface-Mounted Cabinet Enclosure: Steel with finish to match cabinet.

2.4 COIL

A. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and

60-Hz hum, embedded in magnesium oxide refractory and sealed in corrosion-resistant metallic

sheath. Terminate elements in stainless-steel, machine-staked terminals secured with stainless-

steel hardware, and limit controls for high-temperature protection. Provide integral circuit

breaker for overcurrent protection.

2.5 FAN AND MOTOR

A. Fan: Aluminum propeller directly connected to motor.



238239.19 Page 3 of 3

B. Motor: Permanently lubricated. Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor

Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

2.6 CONTROLS

A. Controls: Unit-mounted thermostat.

B. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single field connection with

disconnect switch.

2.7 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS

A. Refer to schedule on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive wall and ceiling unit heaters for compliance with requirements for


B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit-heater

installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall and ceiling unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.

B. Install wall and ceiling unit heaters level and plumb.

C. Install wall-mounted thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to

match lighting controls. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with

Drawings and room details before installation.

D. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."



260519 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN/THWN-2.

C. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for metal-clad cable, Type MC with ground wire.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.



B. Comply with NFPA 70.


260519 Page 2 of 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway, Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.


260519 Page 3 of 3

F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 8 inches of slack.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078400 "Firestopping."



1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance conductors and generator feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.



260526 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS



B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.2 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in

diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

2.3 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.


260526 Page 2 of 5

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel 3/4 inch by 10 feet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE

A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.

B. Comply with all local utility service grounding requirements.

3.3 GROUNDING AT THE OPTIONAL STANDBY GENERATOR

A. Optional Standby Generator shall be configured and installed as a non-separately derived system. The generator neutral shall be isolated and shall not be bonded to the generator housing or generator grounding terminal.

B. The generator equipment grounding terminal, generator enclosure, and surrounding metallic fence shall be interconnected with the buildings grounding system.


260526 Page 3 of 5

C. The generator shall be considered as a separate or remote structure. An additional ground rod shall be provided adjacent to the unit and bonded to the generator grounding terminal.

3.4 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches (100 mm) will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches (50 mm) above to 6 inches (150 mm) below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.

C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.

3.5 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

C. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

D. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.

E. Metallic Fences: Comply with requirements of IEEE C2.

1. Grounding Conductor: Bare copper, not less than No. 8 AWG. 2. Gates: Shall be bonded to the grounding conductor with a flexible bonding jumper. 3. Barbed Wire: When present, strands shall be bonded to the grounding conductor.


260526 Page 4 of 5

3.6 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

C. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are specified in Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems," and shall be at least 12 inches (300 mm) deep, with cover.

1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor.

D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.


260526 Page 5 of 5


A. Perform tests and inspections. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.



260529 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.


A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.


A. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems.


A. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

2. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and/or Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:


260529 Page 2 of 3

1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 5. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 6. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted [or other ]support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps, or single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.


260529 Page 3 of 3

5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



260533 Page 1 of 8

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 5. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

C. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

D. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

E. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel or die cast. b. Type: compression.

2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

F. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.


260533 Page 2 of 8

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

D. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 or Type 3R as applicable unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

E. Metal Floor Boxes:

1. Material: Cast metal or sheet metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


260533 Page 3 of 8

F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb (23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb (23 kg) shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.

G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

I. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

J. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.

K. Gangable boxes are prohibited.

2.5 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.

2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two.

1. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 2. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, “ELECTRIC”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.


260533 Page 4 of 8

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated.

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the

following:

a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Mechanical rooms. d. Gymnasiums.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless

steel in commercial kitchens.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use compression fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

F. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.


260533 Page 5 of 8

D. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

E. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction.

F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

G. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm)of enclosures to which attached.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot (3-m) intervals.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for

each specific location. 5. Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor.

I. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

K. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

L. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35-mm) trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm) trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

M. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

N. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:


260533 Page 6 of 8

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

O. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m).

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature change.

c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change.

d. Attics: 135 deg F (75 deg C) temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per degree F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per degree C) of temperature change for PVC conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

P. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

Q. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between the box and cover plate or the supported equipment and box.

R. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

S. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

T. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

U. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

V. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.


260533 Page 7 of 8

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end

of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) on each side of the coupling.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

5. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.

D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line.

3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."


260533 Page 8 of 8

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.



260544 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 260544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants.


1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends.

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:

1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness:


260544 Page 2 of 4

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).


A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.

2.4 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.



A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below.

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.


260544 Page 3 of 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS


B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or

cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are

used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using cast-iron pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.


260544 Page 4 of 4


A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.


A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.


D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.



260553 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways. 2. Underground-line warning tape. 3. Warning labels and signs. 4. Equipment identification labels.


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage.

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.


260553 Page 2 of 5

2.2 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.

2.3 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape:

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.

2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when

exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

B. Color and Printing:

1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE. 3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,

COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.

C. Features:

1. Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.

2. Overall Thickness: 5 mils (0.125 mm). 3. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil (0.00889 mm). 4. Weight: 28 lb/1000 sq. ft. (13.7 kg/100 sq. m). 5. 3-Inch (75-mm) Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf (311.3 N), and 4600 psi (31.7

MPa).

2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)."


260553 Page 3 of 5

3. Arc-flash hazard warning label – comply with NFPA70E for labeling content and requirements.

2.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

B. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

D. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30A, and 120V to ground: Install labels at 10-foot (3-m) maximum intervals.

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. Standby Power. 2. Normal Power.

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.


260553 Page 4 of 5

a. Color shall be factory applied, or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit.

b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow.

d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

D. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

E. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.

1. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.

F. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive warning labels.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches. b. Contactors and other controls with external control power connections.

G. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,


260553 Page 5 of 5

lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label with clear protective overlay or Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with

appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.



260572 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 260572 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes a computer-based, fault-current study to determine the minimum interrupting capacity of circuit protective devices.


A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following after the approval of system protective devices submittals. Submittals shall be in digital form.

1. Short-circuit study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. 2. Short-circuit study and equipment evaluation report; signed, dated, and sealed by a

qualified professional engineer.

a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory.


A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are unacceptable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE

A. Comply with IEEE 399 and IEEE 551.

B. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall have the capability to calculate mandatory features as listed in IEEE 399.

2.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY REPORT CONTENTS

A. Executive summary.


260572 Page 2 of 4

B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and guide for interpretation of the computer printout.

C. One-line diagram, showing the following:

1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings. 2. Cable size and lengths. 3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings. 4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings. 5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, and panelboard designations.

D. Comments and recommendations for system improvements, where needed.

E. Protective Device Evaluation:

1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short-circuit ratings. 2. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse, and other protective device ratings versus calculated

short-circuit duties. 3. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or

higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. 4. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication

factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

F. Short-Circuit Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article in the Evaluations.

G. Short-Circuit Study Output:

1. Low-Voltage Fault Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location:

a. Voltage. b. Calculated fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. Equivalent impedance.

2. Momentary Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location:

a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. Calculated asymmetrical fault currents:

1) Based on fault-point X/R ratio. 2) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 1.6. 3) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 2.7.

3. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location:


260572 Page 3 of 4

a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio. e. Equivalent impedance. f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a

symmetrical basis. g. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the study. 1. For equipment provided that is Work of this Project, use characteristics submitted under

the provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project.

B. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support the short-circuit study:

1. Product Data for Project's overcurrent protective devices involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service. 3. Power sources and ties. 4. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift. 5. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and

impedance. 6. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of

breaker, type of trip, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings. 7. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and

conductor material. 8. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation. 9. Cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material (magnetic or

nonmagnetic).

3.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY

A. Perform study following the general study procedures contained in IEEE 399.

B. Calculate short-circuit currents according to IEEE 551.

C. Base study on the device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.

D. Begin short-circuit current analysis at the service, extending down to the system overcurrent protective devices as follows:


260572 Page 4 of 4

1. To normal system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less.

E. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

F. The calculations shall include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors. The calculations shall also account for the fault-current dc decrement, to address the asymmetrical requirements of the interrupting equipment.

1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for areas as defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.

G. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault at each of the following:

1. Electric utility's supply termination point. 2. Incoming switchgear. 3. Low-voltage switchgear. 4. Motor-control centers. 5. Control panels. 6. Automatic transfer switches. 7. Branch circuit panelboards. 8. Disconnect switches. 9. <Insert significant locations in the system>.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish compliance with short-circuit study.



260573 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 260573 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes computer-based, overcurrent protective device coordination studies to determine overcurrent protective devices and to determine overcurrent protective device settings for selective tripping.


A. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following after the approval of system protective devices submittals. Submittals shall be in digital form.

1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. 2. Study and equipment evaluation reports. 3. Overcurrent protective device coordination study report; signed, dated, and sealed by a

qualified professional engineer.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For the overcurrent protective devices to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017800 "Project Close Out," include the following:

a. The following parts from the Protective Device Coordination Study Report:

1) One-line diagram. 2) Protective device coordination study. 3) Time-current coordination curves.

b. Power system data.


260573 Page 2 of 5



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have the capability to calculate mandatory features as listed in IEEE 399.

B. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.

2.2 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY REPORT CONTENTS

A. One-line diagram, showing the following:

1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings. 2. Cable size and lengths. 3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings. 4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings. 5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, and panelboard designations.

B. Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article.

C. Short-Circuit Study Output: As specified in "Short Circuit Study Output" Paragraph in "Short-Circuit Study Report Contents" Article in Section 260572 "Overcurrent Protective Device Short-Circuit Study."

D. Protective Device Coordination Study:

1. Report recommended settings of protective devices, ready to be applied in the field. Use manufacturer's data sheets for recording the recommended setting of overcurrent protective devices when available.

a. Circuit Breakers:

1) Adjustable pickups and time delays (long time, short time, ground). 2) Adjustable time-current characteristic. 3) Adjustable instantaneous pickup. 4) Recommendations on improved trip systems, if applicable.

b. Fuses: Show current rating, voltage, and class.


260573 Page 3 of 5

E. Time-Current Coordination Curves: Determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices. Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where the power source is local generation. Show the following information:

1. Device tag and title, one-line diagram with legend identifying the portion of the system covered.

2. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to which the device is exposed.

3. Identify the device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if applicable, tap, time delay, and instantaneous settings recommended.

4. Plot the following listed characteristic curves, as applicable:

a. Power utility's overcurrent protective device. b. Low-voltage fuses including manufacturer's minimum melt, total clearing,

tolerance, and damage bands. c. Low-voltage equipment circuit-breaker trip devices, including manufacturer's

tolerance bands. d. Transformer full-load current, magnetizing inrush current. e. Ground-fault protective devices. f. The largest feeder circuit breaker in each motor-control center and panelboard.

5. Provide adequate time margins between device characteristics such that selective operation is achieved.

6. Comments and recommendations for system improvements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.

1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to coordination study may not be used in study.

3.2 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

A. Comply with IEEE 242 for calculating short-circuit currents and determining coordination time intervals.

B. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.

C. The study shall be based on the device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.


260573 Page 4 of 5

D. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

E. The calculations shall include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors. The calculations shall also account for the fault-current dc decrement, to address the asymmetrical requirements of the interrupting equipment.

1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for areas as defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.

F. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault and single line-to-ground fault at each of the following:

1. Electric utility's supply termination point. 2. Low-voltage switchgear. 3. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches. 4. Branch circuit panelboards.

G. Protective Device Evaluation:

1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short-circuit ratings. 2. Adequacy of switchgear, motor-control centers, and panelboard bus bars to withstand

short-circuit stresses.

3.3 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the overcurrent protective device study.

B. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study. The list below is a guide.

1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Electrical power utility impedance at the service. 3. Power sources and ties. 4. Short-circuit current at each system bus, three phase and line-to-ground. 5. Full-load current of all loads. 6. Voltage level at each bus. 7. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift. 8. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of

breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings.

9. Maximum demands from service meters. 10. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and

conductor material. 11. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.


260573 Page 5 of 5

12. Low-voltage cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material, and conduit material (magnetic or nonmagnetic).

13. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:

a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting and stopping.

b. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices. c. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility

company. d. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated. e. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere

or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.

f. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for overcurrent relays.

g. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and SCCR in amperes rms symmetrical.

3.4 FIELD ADJUSTING

A. Adjust relay and protective device settings according to the recommended settings provided by the coordination study. Field adjustments shall be completed by the engineering service division of the equipment manufacturer under the Startup and Acceptance Testing contract portion.



260574 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 260574 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes a computer-based, arc-flash study to determine the arc-flash hazard distance and the incident energy to which personnel could be exposed during work on or near electrical equipment.


A. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following submittals after the approval of system protective devices submittals. Submittals shall be in digital form.

1. Arc-flash study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. 2. Arc-flash study report; signed, dated, and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.



A. Product Certificates: For arc-flash hazard analysis software, certifying compliance with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E.


A. Maintenance procedures according to requirements in NFPA 70E shall be provided in the equipment manuals.

B. Operation and Maintenance Procedures: In addition to items specified in Section 017800 "Project Close Out," provide maintenance procedures for use by Owner's personnel that comply with requirements in NFPA 70E.




260574 Page 2 of 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ARC-FLASH STUDY REPORT CONTENT

A. Executive summary.

B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis and scope.

C. One-line diagram, showing the following:

1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings. 2. Cable size and lengths. 3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings. 4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings. 5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center and panelboard designations.

D. Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article.

E. Short-Circuit Study Output: As specified in "Short-Circuit Study Output" Paragraph in "Short-Circuit Study Report Contents" Article in Section 260572 "Overcurrent Protective Device Short-Circuit Study."

F. Protective Device Coordination Study Report Contents: As specified in "Protective Device Coordination Study Report Contents" Article in Section 260573 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

G. Arc-Flash Study Output:

1. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location at minimum:

a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. Equivalent impedance.

H. Incident Energy and Flash Protection Boundary Calculations:

1. Arcing fault magnitude. 2. Protective device clearing time. 3. Duration of arc. 4. Arc-flash boundary. 5. Working distance. 6. Incident energy. 7. Recommendations for arc-flash energy reduction.

I. Fault study input data, case descriptions, and fault-current calculations including a definition of terms and guide for interpretation of the computer printout.


260574 Page 3 of 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals. Proceed with arc-flash study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to arc-flash study may not be used in study.

3.2 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

A. Comply with NFPA 70E for hazard analysis study.

B. Preparatory Studies:

1. Short-Circuit Study Output: As specified in "Short-Circuit Study Output" Paragraph in "Short-Circuit Study Report Contents" Article in Section 260572 "Overcurrent Protective Device Short-Circuit Study."

2. Protective Device Coordination Study Report Contents: As specified in "Protective Device Coordination Study Report Contents" Article in Section 260573 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

C. Calculate maximum and minimum contributions of fault-current size.

1. The minimum calculation shall assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum and shall assume no motor load.

2. The maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and shall assume motors to be operating under full-load conditions.

D. Calculate the arc-flash protection boundary and incident energy at locations in the electrical distribution system where personnel could perform work on energized parts.

E. Include low-voltage equipment locations.

F. Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based on the calculated arc-flash boundary, considering incident energy of 1.2 cal/sq.cm.

G. Incident energy calculations shall consider the accumulation of energy over time when performing arc-flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations shall take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors shall be decremented as follows:

1. Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered beyond three to five cycles.

H. Arc-flash computation shall include both line and load side of a circuit breaker as follows:

1. When the circuit breaker is in a separate enclosure. 2. When the line terminals of the circuit breaker are separate from the work location.


260574 Page 4 of 4

I. Base arc-flash calculations on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Cap maximum clearing time at two seconds based on IEEE 1584, Section B.1.2.

3.3 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the arc-flash hazard analysis.

1. Verify completeness of data supplied on the one-line diagram on Drawings. Call discrepancies to the attention of Architect.

2. For new equipment, use characteristics submitted under the provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project.



260800 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 260800 - COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Commissioning on this project shall be in compliance with the commissioning requirements of C408 Maintenance Information and System Commissioning of the 2020 Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State (ECCCNYS).

1.3 SUMMARY


1. Electrical equipment connected to Normal electrical systems, including the following:

a. Interior Lighting and Controls

b. Exterior Lighting and Controls


1. Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" for general Cx process requirements and CxA responsibilities.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. BoD: Basis-of-Design Document, as defined in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements."

B. Cx: Commissioning, as defined in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements."

C. CxA: Commissioning Authority, as defined in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements."

D. OPR: Owner's Project Requirements, as defined in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements."

E. "Systems," "Assemblies," "Subsystems," "Equipment," and "Components": Where these terms are used together or separately, they mean "as-built" systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and components.


260800 Page 2 of 6


A. Construction Checklists by CxA: Draft construction checklists will be created by CxA for Contractor review.


A. Testing Equipment and Instrumentation Quality and Calibration: For test equipment and instrumentation required to perform electrical Cx work, perform the following:

1. Submit test equipment and instrumentation list. For each equipment or instrument, identify the following:

a. Equipment/instrument identification number. b. Planned Cx application or use. c. Manufacturer, make, model, and serial number. d. Calibration history, including certificates from agencies that calibrate the

equipment and instrumentation.

2. Test equipment and instrumentation must meet the following criteria:

a. Capable of testing and measuring performance within the specified acceptance criteria.

b. Be calibrated at manufacturer's recommended intervals with current calibration tags permanently affixed to the instrument being used.

c. Be maintained in good repair and operating condition throughout duration of use on Project.

d. Be recalibrated/repaired if dropped or damaged in any way since last calibrated.

B. Proprietary Test Instrumentation and Tools:

1. Equipment Manufacturer's Proprietary Instrumentation and Tools: For installed equipment included in the Cx process, test instrumentation and tools manufactured or prescribed by equipment manufacturer to service, calibrate, adjust, repair, or otherwise work on its equipment or required as a condition of equipment warranty, perform the following:

a. Submit proprietary instrumentation and tools list. For each instrument or tool, identify the following:

1) Instrument or tool identification number. 2) Equipment schedule designation of equipment for which the instrument or

tool is required. 3) Manufacturer, make, model, and serial number. 4) Calibration history, including certificates from agencies that calibrate the


b. Include a separate list of proprietary test instrumentation and tools in operation and maintenance manuals.


260800 Page 3 of 6

c. Electrical proprietary test instrumentation and tools become property of Owner at the time of Substantial Completion.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION CHECKLIST REVIEW

A. Review and provide written comments on draft construction checklists. CxA will create required draft construction checklists and provide them to Contractor.

B. Return draft Construction Checklist review comments within 10 days of receipt.

C. When review comments have been resolved, CxA will provide final construction checklists, marked "Approved for Use, (date)."

D. Use only construction checklists, marked "Approved for Use, (date)."

3.2 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Certify that electrical systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and that they are operating according to the Contract Documents and approved Shop Drawings and submittals.

B. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested according to approved test procedures (for example, powered by normal power source, powered by emergency power source, etc.).

C. Test systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and components operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and response according to acceptance criteria.

D. Construction Checklists: Complete and submit detailed construction checklists for electrical systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.

1. Contributors to development of construction checklists must include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Electrical systems and equipment installers.

E. Perform tests using design conditions, whenever possible.

F. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the electrical system, document the deficiency and report it to Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests.

G. Coordinate schedule with, and perform Cx activities at the direction of the CxA.


260800 Page 4 of 6

H. Comply with Construction Checklist requirements, including material verification, installation checks, startup, and performance tests requirements specified in Sections specifying electrical systems and equipment.

3.3 Cx TESTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Functional Testing of Lighting Controls 1. Automatic lighting controls shall comply with the requirements of the 2020 Energy

Conservation Code of New York State (ECCNYS). Functional testing shall be performed in accordance with ECCNYS Section C408, and as described in the following sections.

B. Occupant Sensor Controls 1. Certify that the occupant sensor has been located and aimed in accordance with

manufacturer recommendations. 2. For projects with seven or fewer occupant sensors, each sensor shall be tested. 3. For projects with more than seven occupant sensors, testing shall be done for each unique

combination of sensor type and space geometry. Where multiples of each unique combination of sensor type and space geometry are provided, not less than 10 percent and in no case fewer than one, of each combination shall be tested unless the building official or design professional requires a higher percentage to be tested. Where 30 percent or more of the tested controls fail, all remaining identical combinations shall be tested.

4. For occupant sensor controls to be tested, verify the following: a. Where occupant sensor controls include status indicators, verify correct operation. b. The controlled lights turn off or down to the permitted level within the required

time. c. For auto-on occupant sensor controls, the lights turn on to the permitted level when

an occupant enters the space. d. For manual-on occupant sensor controls, the lights turn on only when manually

activated. e. The lights are not incorrectly turned on by movement in adjacent areas or by

HVAC operation.

C. Interior Time-Switch Controls 1. Where time-switch controls are provided, the following procedures shall be performed:

a. Confirm that the time-switch control is programmed with accurate weekday,

weekend and holiday schedules. b. Provide documentation to the owner of time-switch controls programming

including weekday, weekend, holiday schedules, and set-up and preference program settings.

c. Verify the correct time and date in the time switch. d. Verify that any battery back-up is installed and energized. e. Verify that the override time limit is set to not more than 2 hours. f. Simulate occupied condition. Verify and document the following:

1) All lights can be turned on and off by their respective area control switch.


260800 Page 5 of 6

2) The switch only operates lighting in the enclosed space in which the switch is located.

g. Simulate unoccupied condition. Verify and document the following: 1) Nonexempt lighting turns off. 2) Manual override switch allows only the lights in the enclosed space where

the override switch is located to turn on or remain on until the next scheduled shutoff occurs.

h. Additional testing as specified by the registered design professional or commissioning agent.

D. Daylight Responsive Controls 1. Where daylight responsive controls are provided, the following shall be verified:

a. Control devices have been properly located, field calibrated and set for accurate

setpoints and threshold light levels. b. Daylight controlled lighting loads adjust to light level setpoints in response to

available daylight. c. The calibration adjustment equipment is located for ready access only by

authorized personnel.

E. Exterior Lighting Controls 1. Daylight Shutoff:

a. Verify lights automatically turn off when daylight is present and satisfies the

lighting needs.

2. Decorative Lighting Shutoff: a. Verify building facade and landscape lighting automatically shuts off from not

later than 1 hour after business closing to not earlier than 1 hour before business opening.

3. Lighting Setback: a. Verify exterior lighting is automatically reduced by not less than 30 percent by

selectively switching off or dimming luminaires at one of the following times.

F. Exterior Time Switch Control: 1. Verify Time-switch controls for exterior lighting comply with the following:

a. They shall have a clock capable of being programmed for not fewer than 7 days. b. They shall be capable of being set for seven different day types per week. c. They shall incorporate an automatic holiday setback feature. d. They shall have program backup capabilities that prevent the loss of program and

time settings for a period of not less than 10 hours in the event that power is interrupted.


260800 Page 6 of 6

G. Documentation Requirements: 1. Construction documents shall include the location and catalogue number of each piece of

equipment. 2. An operating and maintenance manual shall be prepared and provided to include the

following: a. Name and address of not less than one service agency for installed equipment. b. A narrative of how each system is intended to operate, including recommended

setpoints. c. Submittal data indicating all selected options for each piece of lighting equipment

and lighting controls. d. Operation and maintenance manuals for each piece of lighting equipment.

Required routine maintenance actions, cleaning and recommended relamping shall be clearly identified.

e. A schedule for inspecting and recalibrating all lighting controls.

3. A report of test results shall be provided and include the following: a. Results of functional performance tests. b. Disposition of deficiencies found during testing, including details of corrective

measures used or proposed.



260923 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Time switches. 2. Photoelectric switches. 3. Indoor ceiling and switchbox-mounted occupancy sensors.


1. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices"



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TIME SWITCHES

A. Electronic Time Switches: Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display; complying with UL 917.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Contact Configuration: SPDT. 3. Contact Rating: 20-A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac. 4. Programs: 4 channels; each channel is individually programmable with 40 on-off

operations per week and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation on holidays.

5. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a program on selected channels.

6. Astronomic Time: All channels. 7. Automatic daylight savings time changeover. 8. Battery Backup: Not less than seven days reserve, to maintain schedules and time clock.

2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES

A. Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800 VA, to operate connected load, complying with UL 773.


260923 Page 2 of 5


2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc (16.14 to 108 lux), with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range.

3. Time Delay: Thirty-second minimum, to prevent false operation. 4. Lightning Arrester: Air-gap type. 5. Mounting: Twist lock complying with NEMA C136.10, with base.

2.3 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy sensors with a separate power pack.


2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

3. Devices shown on drawings as “vacancy sensors” shall be manual on operation with automatic off.

4. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor is powered from the power pack.

5. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

6. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch (13-mm) knockout in a standard

electrical enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged

door.

7. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor.

8. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure.

B. PIR Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area by their heat and movement.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm).

2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.

3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet (27.4 m) when mounted on a 10-foot- (3-m-) high ceiling.

C. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area through pattern changes of reflected ultrasonic energy.


260923 Page 3 of 5

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches (305 mm) in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s (305 mm/s).

2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 600 sq. ft. (56 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.

4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.

5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet (27.4 m) when mounted on a 10-foot- (3-m-) high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet (4.3 m).

D. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of

any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm), and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches (305 mm) in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s (305 mm/s).

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.

2.4 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox.


2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F (0 to 49 deg C). 3. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent at 120 V, 1200-VA fluorescent at

277 V, and 800-W incandescent.

B. Wall-Switch Sensor:

1. Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40 degrees; with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft.

2. Sensing Technology: PIR. 3. Switch Type: SP, field selectable automatic "on," or manual "on" automatic "off." 4. Voltage: Dual voltage, 120 and 277 V. 5. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes. 6. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of

the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching.


260923 Page 4 of 5

2.5 LIGHTING CONTACTORS

A. Description: Electrically operated and electrically held lighting contactors, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.

1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current).

2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the point of installation.

3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250. 4. Provide with control and pilot devices as indicated on Drawings, matching the NEMA

type specified for the enclosure.

2.6 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations and adopted energy code requirements.

C. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structure-borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators.

D. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 3/4 inch.


260923 Page 5 of 5

E. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.


B. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.



262416 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

B. SPD: Surge protective device.


A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Detail enclosure types including mounting and anchorage, environmental protection,

knockouts, corner treatments, covers and doors, gaskets, hinges, and locks. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for SPD as installed in panelboard. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards.


A. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards.




262416 Page 2 of 6


A. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace panelboards that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Panelboard Warranty Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELBOARDS COMMON REQUIREMENTS


B. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. Enclosures: Flush and Surface-mounted, dead-front cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Damp, Wet, or Greenhouse Areas: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

2. Height: 84 inches (2.13 m) maximum. 3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within

hinged trim cover. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware.

E. Incoming Mains Location: Convertible between top and bottom.

F. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

G. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type, with a lug on the neutral bar for each pole in

the panelboard. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type, with a lug on the bar

for each pole in the panelboard.


262416 Page 3 of 6

H. NRTL Label: Panelboards shall be labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authority having jurisdiction for use as service equipment with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. Panelboards shall have meter enclosures, wiring, connections, and other provisions for utility metering. Coordinate with utility company for exact requirements.

I. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. Assembly listed by an NRTL for 100 percent interrupting capacity.


A. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying with UL 1449 SPD Type 2.

2.3 POWER PANELBOARDS

A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, distribution type.

B. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

C. Mains: see drawings.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers or Plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: [Bolt-on circuit breakers or Plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

B. Mains: see drawings.

C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

D. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, general-purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.

1. External Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit.

E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.


262416 Page 4 of 6

2.5 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers:

a. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads. b. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. c. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers:

a. RMS sensing. b. Field-replaceable rating plug or electronic trip. c. Digital display of settings, trip targets, and indicated metering displays. d. Multi-button keypad to access programmable functions and monitored data. e. Ten-event, trip-history log. Each trip event shall be recorded with type, phase, and

magnitude of fault that caused the trip. f. Integral test jack for connection to portable test set or laptop computer. g. Field-Adjustable Settings:

1) Instantaneous trip. 2) Long- and short-time pickup levels. 3) Long and short time adjustments. 4) Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I squared T response.

4. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and double-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

5. GFEP Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). 6. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-

pole configuration. 7. MCCB Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Breaker handle indicates tripped status. c. UL listed for reverse connection without restrictive line or load ratings. d. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials. e. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and HID lighting circuits.

f. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

g. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on or off position.


262416 Page 5 of 6

2.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage, number of phases, and number of poles shall be located on the interior of the panelboard door.

B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification standards, and AIC rating.

C. Circuit Directory: Directory card inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

C. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.

E. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

F. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

G. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services and separately derived systems to ground. Make connections to grounding electrodes, separate grounds for isolated ground bars, and connections to separate ground bars.

H. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

I. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future.

J. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Handwritten directories are not acceptable. Install directory inside panelboard door.


262416 Page 6 of 6

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in power panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

E. Install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" identifying source of remote circuit.



B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.



262726 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Toggle switches. 3. Wall-plates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.

B. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, and FS W-C-596.

2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:

1. Straight blade, non-feed-through type.


262726 Page 2 of 4

2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer

provides proper GFCI protection.

B. Tamper-Resistant GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, and FS W-C-596.

2.5 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

2.6 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Steel with white baked enamel, suitable for field painting. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed

and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.


262726 Page 3 of 4

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers:


262726 Page 4 of 4

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

I. Adjust locations of service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.


A. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

B. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



262816 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Nonfusible switches. 2. Enclosures.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, accessory, and component indicated.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

B. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.


262816 Page 2 of 3

3. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.2 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 3. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless steel. 4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4>. 5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

C. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.



B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.


1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.


262816 Page 3 of 3

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Enclosed switches will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.



265119 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior solid-state luminaires that use LED technology. 2. Lighting fixture supports.


1. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. LED: Light-emitting diode.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, arranged by designation. See drawings for fixture schedule.

B. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.




265119 Page 2 of 4

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS


B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL.

C. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4.

D. Internal driver.

E. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120 V ac.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts:

1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging

B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

2.3 METAL FINISHES

A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.4 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.


265119 Page 3 of 4

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as luminaire.

C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Supports: Sized and rated for luminaire weight.

E. Flush-Mounted Luminaire Support: Secured to outlet box.

F. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Attached to structural members in walls. 2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.

G. Suspended Luminaire Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with

approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.

3. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end.

4. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure.

H. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires:

1. Secure to any required outlet box. 2. Secure luminaire using approved fasteners in a minimum of four locations, spaced near

corners of luminaire.

I. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for wiring connections.


265119 Page 4 of 4

J. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.




265219 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 265219 - EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Exit signs.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

C. Emergency Lighting Unit: A lighting unit with integral or remote emergency battery powered supply and the means for controlling and charging the battery and unit operation.

D. Fixture: See "Luminaire" Paragraph.

E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.


A. Product Data: For each type of emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and emergency lighting support, arranged by designation.




1.6 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace


265219 Page 2 of 5

components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING


B. NRTL Compliance: Fabricate and label emergency lighting units, exit signs, and batteries to comply with UL 924.

C. Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.

D. Comply with NEMA LE 4 for recessed luminaires.

E. Comply with UL 1598 for recessed luminaires.

F. Internal Type Emergency Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within luminaire body.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100 lumens each upon loss of normal power. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.

2. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

3. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Less than 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C) or exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C), with an average value exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C) over a 24-hour period.

b. Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F (minus 20 deg C) and not exceeding 140 deg F (60 deg C).

c. Humidity: More than 95 percent (condensing). d. Altitude: Exceeding 3300 feet (1000 m).

4. Test Push-Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space.

a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.


265219 Page 3 of 5

5. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free. 6. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer

relay. 7. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-

required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.2 EMERGENCY LIGHTING

A. Emergency Luminaires:

1. Emergency Luminaires: as indicated on Drawings with the following additional features:

a. Operating at nominal voltage of 120 V ac. b. Internal emergency power unit. c. Rated for installation in damp locations, and for sealed and gasketed fixtures in wet

locations.

2.3 EXIT SIGNS

A. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Exit Signs: as indicated on Drawings with the following additional features:

a. Operating at nominal voltage of 120 V ac.

b. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs; 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.

c. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Internal emergency power unit.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts:

1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access:

1. Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions. 2. Designed to permit relamping without use of tools. 3. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling

accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

C. Conduit: Rigid galvanized steel minimum 3/4 inch (21 mm) in diameter.


265219 Page 4 of 5

2.5 METAL FINISHES

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.6 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Supports:

1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position when testing emergency power unit. 3. Provide support for luminaire and emergency power unit without causing deflection of

ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire and emergency power unit weight and vertical force of 400 percent of fixture weight.

D. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Attached to structural members in walls. 2. Do not attach fixtures directly to gypsum board.

E. Suspended Luminaire Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with

approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of fixture oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.

3. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.

4. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure.

F. Ceiling Grid Mounted Luminaires:

1. Secure to any required outlet box.


265219 Page 5 of 5

2. Secure emergency power unit using approved fasteners in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of emergency power unit.

G. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



1. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.



265600 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. 2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays.


A. Product Data: For each luminaire, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.



B. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Drawings.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES

A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

C. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

D. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.


265600 Page 2 of 3

E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.

F. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.

G. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

H. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping.

I. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USES ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp tube configuration (twin, quad, triple), base type, and nominal wattage for

compact fluorescent luminaires. c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for

HID luminaires. d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) compact fluorescent luminaires. e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.3 LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS

A. Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A.

B. Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc (16 to 32 lx) and off at 4.5 to 10 fc (48 to 108 lx) with 15-second minimum time delay.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION

A. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.

C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming.


265600 Page 3 of 3

3.2 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- (0.254-mm-) thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.



284621.11 Page 1 of 16

SECTION 284621.11 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Addressable fire-alarm system. 2. Fire-alarm control unit (FACU). 3. Manual fire-alarm boxes. 4. System smoke detectors. 5. Heat detectors. 6. Fire-alarm notification appliances. 7. Fire-alarm remote annunciators. 8. Fire-alarm addressable interface devices. 9. Digital alarm communicator transmitters (DACTs).

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DACT: Digital alarm communicator transmitter.

B. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

C. FACU: Fire-alarm control unit.

D. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

E. PC: Personal computer.

F. Voltage Class: For specified circuits and equipment, voltage classes are defined as follows:

1. Control Voltage: Listed and labeled for use in remote-control, signaling, and power-limited circuits supplied by a Class 2 or Class 3 power supply having rated output not greater than 150 V and 5 A, allowing use of alternate wiring methods complying with NFPA 70, Article 725.

2. Low Voltage: Listed and labeled for use in circuits supplied by a Class 1 or other power supply having rated output not greater than 1000 V, requiring use of wiring methods complying with NFPA 70, Article 300, Part I.


284621.11 Page 2 of 16


A. Approved Permit Submittal: Submittals must be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect.

B. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, profiles, and finishes. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics.

C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system.

1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in "Documentation" section of "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details, including details of attachments to other Work.

3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory and field wiring.

4. Annunciator panel details as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 5. Detail assembly and support requirements. 6. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits. 7. Include battery-size calculations. 8. Include input/output matrix. 9. Include written statement from manufacturer that equipment and components have been

tested as a system and comply with requirements in this Section and in NFPA 72. 10. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector. 11. Verify that each duct detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature,

and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating. 12. Provide program report showing that air-sampling detector pipe layout balances

pneumatically within airflow range of air-sampling detector. 13. Provide control wiring diagrams for fire-alarm interface to HVAC; coordinate location of

duct smoke detectors and access to them.

a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators.

b. Show field wiring required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm. c. Locate detectors in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. d. Show air-sampling detector pipe routing.

14. Include floor plans to indicate final device locations showing address of each addressable

device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams.

D. Delegated Design Submittal: For notification appliances and smoke and heat detectors, in addition to submittals listed above, indicate compliance with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


284621.11 Page 3 of 16

1. Drawings showing location of each notification appliance and smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of device.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting spacing and sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72. Calculate spacing and intensities for strobe signals and sound-pressure levels for audible appliances.

3. Indicate any audible appliances required to produce square wave signal per NFPA 72.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following and deliver copies to authorities having jurisdiction:

a. Comply with "Records" section of "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

b. Provide "Fire-Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of Completion Documents" in accordance with "Completion Documents" Article in "Documentation" section of "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between devices and equipment. Each conductor must be numbered at every junction point with indication of origination and termination points.

d. Riser diagram. e. Device addresses. f. Air-sampling system sample port locations and modeling program report showing

layout meets performance criteria. g. Record copy of site-specific software. h. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" in accordance with "Inspection, Testing

and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following:

1) Equipment tested. 2) Frequency of testing of installed components. 3) Frequency of inspection of installed components. 4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. 5) Manufacturer's user training manuals.

i. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. j. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at FACU and each annunciator

unit.

B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On USB media. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.


284621.11 Page 4 of 16


A. Extra Stock Material: Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer

than one unit. 2. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors, and Flame Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of

amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type used. 3. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to five percent of amount of each type installed, but no

fewer than two units of each type. 4. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked or tamperproofed components. 5. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed. 6. Fuses: Two of each type installed in system. Provide in box or cabinet with

compartments marked with fuse types and sizes.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Personnel must be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

2. Installation must be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level IV technician. 3. Obtain certification by NRTL in accordance with NFPA 72. 4. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire-alarm system equipment and components that fail because of defects in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

A. Description:

1. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission and horn-and-strobe notification for evacuation.

B. Performance Criteria:

1. Regulatory Requirements:


284621.11 Page 5 of 16

a. Fire-Alarm Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled by a NRTL in accordance with NFPA 70 for use with selected fire-alarm system and marked for intended location and application.

2. General Characteristics:

a. Automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors. b. Fire-alarm signal initiation must be by one or more of the following devices:

1) Manual stations. 2) Heat detectors. 3) Smoke detectors.

c. Fire-alarm signal must initiate the following actions:

1) Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. 2) Identify alarm and specific initiating device at FACU. 3) Transmit alarm signal to remote alarm receiving station. 4) Activate alarm communication system. 5) Switch HVAC equipment controls to fire-alarm mode. 6) Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct

systems. 7) Record events in system memory. 8) Indicate device in alarm on graphic annunciator.

d. Supervisory signal initiation must be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1) Zones or individual devices have been disabled. 2) FACU has lost communication with network.

e. System trouble signal initiation must be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1) Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2) Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory

signal-initiating devices. 3) Loss of communication with addressable sensor, input module, relay,

control module, remote annunciator, printer interface, or Ethernet module. 4) Loss of primary power at FACU. 5) Ground or single break in internal circuits of FACU. 6) Abnormal ac voltage at FACU. 7) Break in standby battery circuitry. 8) Failure of battery charging. 9) Abnormal position of switch at FACU or annunciator.

f. System Supervisory Signal Actions:

1) Initiate notification appliances. 2) Identify specific device initiating event at FACU and remote annunciators.


284621.11 Page 6 of 16

3) After time delay of 200 seconds, transmit trouble or supervisory signal to remote alarm receiving station.

4) Transmit system status to building management system. 5) Display system status on graphic annunciator.

g. Network Communications:

1) Provide network communications for fire-alarm system in accordance with fire-alarm manufacturer's written instructions.

2) Provide network communications pathway per manufacturer's written instructions and requirements in NFPA 72 and NFPA 70.

h. Document Storage Box:

1) Description: Enclosure to accommodate standard 8-1/2-by-11 inch (216-by-279 mm) manuals and loose document records. Legend sheet will be permanently attached to door for system required documentation, key contacts, and system information. Provide two key ring holders with location to mount standard business cards for key contact personnel.

2) Material and Finish: 18-gauge cold-rolled steel; four mounting holes. 3) Color: Red powder-coat epoxy finish. 4) Labeling: Permanently screened with 1 inch (25 mm) high lettering

"SYSTEM RECORD DOCUMENTS" with white indelible ink. 5) Security: Locked with 3/4 inch (19 mm) barrel lock. Provide solid 12 inch

(304 mm) stainless steel piano hinge.

2.2 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT (FACU)


1. Edwards; Carrier Global Corporation. 2. Fike Corporation. 3. Fire-Lite Alarms; Honeywell International, Inc. 4. Notifier; Honeywell International, Inc. 5. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC. 6. Siemens Industry, Inc., Building Technologies Division.

B. Description: Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic modules.

C. Performance Criteria:

1. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with NFPA 72 and UL 864. 2. General Characteristics:

a. System software and programs must be held in nonvolatile flash, electrically erasable, programmable, read-only memory, retaining information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies.

b. Include real-time clock for time annotation of events on event recorder and printer.









284621.11 Page 7 of 16

c. Provide communication between FACU and remote circuit interface panels, annunciators, and displays.

d. FACU must be listed for connection to central-station signaling system service. e. Provide nonvolatile memory for system database, logic, and operating system and

event history. System must require no manual input to initialize in the event of complete power down condition. FACU must provide minimum 500-event history log.

f. Addressable Initiation Device Circuits: FACU must indicate which communication zones have been silenced and must provide selective silencing of alarm notification appliance by building communication zone.

1) Addressable Control Circuits for Operation of Notification Appliances and Mechanical Equipment: FACU must be listed for releasing service.

g. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at FACU and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and programming and control menu.

1) Annunciator and Display: LCD, two line(s) of 40 characters, minimum. 2) Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display,

and control commands.

h. Initiating-Device, Notification-Appliance, and Signaling-Line Circuits:

1) Pathway Class Designations: NFPA 72, Class B. 2) Pathway Survivability: Level 0. 3) Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling-line circuit. 4) Install fault circuit isolators to comply with circuit performance

requirements of NFPA 72 or with manufacturer's written instructions, whichever is more conservative.

i. Serial Interfaces:

1) One dedicated port for central-station operation using point ID DACT. 2) One RS 485 port for remote annunciators, Ethernet module, or multi-

interface module (printer port). 3) One USB port for PC configuration.

j. Notification-Appliance Circuit:

1) Audible appliances must sound in three-pulse temporal pattern, as defined in NFPA 72.

2) Visual alarm appliances must flash in synchronization where multiple appliances are in same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72.

k. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls must select specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment


284621.11 Page 8 of 16

schedule changes in system memory, and print out final adjusted values on system printer.

l. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to remote alarm station.

m. Primary Power: 24 V(dc) obtained from 120 V(ac) service and power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory and DACT be powered by 24 V(dc) source.

n. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system must not exceed 80 percent of power-supply module rating.

o. Secondary Power: 24 V(dc) supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch.

p. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.

2.3 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes must be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; must show visible indication of operation; and must be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.

1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate alarm, pull-lever type; with

integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to FACU.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch. 3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at top to

permit lifting for access to initiate alarm. Lifting cover actuates integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation.

4. Able to perform at up to 90 percent relative humidity at 90 deg F.

2.4 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Performance Criteria:

a. Regulatory Requirements:

1) NFPA 72. 2) UL 268.

b. General Characteristics:

1) Detectors must be two-wire type. 2) Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components must be

mounted in twist-lock module that connects to fixed base. Provide terminals in fixed base for connection to building wiring.

3) Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.


284621.11 Page 9 of 16

4) Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power-on status.

5) Detector address must be accessible from FACU and must be able to identify detector's location within system and its sensitivity setting.

6) Operator at FACU, having designated access level, must be able to manually access the following for each detector:

a) Primary status. b) Device type. c) Present average value. d) Present sensitivity selected. e) Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

7) Detector must have functional humidity range within 10 to 90 percent relative humidity.

2.5 HEAT DETECTORS

A. Fixed-Temperature-Type Heat Detectors: 1. Performance Criteria:


1) NFPA 72. 2) UL 521.


1) Actuated by temperature that exceeds fixed temperature of 190 deg F. 2) Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases. 3) Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status

(normal, alarm, or trouble) to FACU. 4) Detector must have minimum functional humidity range of 10 to 90 percent.

2.6 CONTINUOUS LINEAR HEAT-DETECTOR SYSTEM

A. Performance Criteria:


a. NFPA 72.


a. Detector Cable: Rated detection temperature of 220 deg F, to be confirmed with input from AHJ. Listed for "regular" service and indoor/outdoor harsh environment. Cable includes two steel actuator wires twisted together with spring pressure, wrapped with protective tape, and finished with fluoropolymer outer sheath. Each actuator wire is insulated with heat-sensitive material that reacts with


284621.11 Page 10 of 16

heat to allow cable twist pressure to short circuit wires at location of elevated temperature.

b. Control Unit: single-zone or multizone unit as indicated. Provide same system power supply, supervision, and alarm features as specified for FACU.

c. Signals to FACU: Local system trouble must be reported to FACU as composite "trouble" signal. Alarms on each detection zone must be individually reported to central FACU as separately identified zones.

d. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to FACU.

2.7 FIRE-ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Fire-Alarm Audible Notification Appliances:

1. Description: Horns, bells, or other notification devices that cannot output voice messages. 2. Performance Criteria:


1) NFPA 72.


1) Connected to notification-appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.

2) Audible notification appliances must have functional humidity range of 10 to 95 percent relative humidity.

3) ISO Temporal 3 Evacuation Tone: 90 plus or minus 4 dB(A-weighted) at 24 V.

4) Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24 V(dc); with provision for housing operating mechanism behind grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns must produce sound-pressure level of 90 dB(A-weighted), measured 10 ft. (3 m) from horn, using coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol.

5) Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.

B. Fire-Alarm Visible Notification Appliances:

1. Performance Criteria:


1) NFPA 72. 2) UL 1971.


1) Clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on aluminum faceplate.


284621.11 Page 11 of 16

2) Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3) For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings must

be determined with guards in place. 4) Flashing must be in temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 5) Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 6) Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.

2.8 FIRE-ALARM REMOTE ANNUNCIATORS



a. NFPA 72.


a. Annunciator functions must match those of FACU for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions must match those of FACU, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.

1) Mounting: Flush (for new construction) or Surface cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1.

b. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights must match those of FACU. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.

2.9 FIRE-ALARM ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICES



a. NFPA 72.


a. Include address-setting means on module. b. Store internal identifying code for control panel use to identify module type. c. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers. d. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing system address for alarm-

initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts. e. Integral Relay:

1) Allow control panel to switch relay contacts on command. 2) Have minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts

available for field wiring.


284621.11 Page 12 of 16

f. Control Module:

1) Operate notification devices. 2) Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service.

2.10 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTERS (DACTs)



a. NFPA 72.


a. DACT must be acceptable to remote central station and must be listed for fire-alarm use.

b. Functional Performance: Unit must receive alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from FACU and automatically capture [one] [two] telephone line(s) and dial preset number for remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals must be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter must initiate local trouble signal and transmit signal indicating loss of telephone line to remote alarm receiving station over remaining line. Transmitter must automatically report telephone service restoration to central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter must initiate local trouble signal.

c. Local functions and display at DACT must include the following:

1) Verification that both telephone lines are available. 2) Programming device. 3) LED display. 4) Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication. 5) Communications failure with central station or FACU.

d. Digital data transmission must include the following:

1) Address of alarm-initiating device. 2) Address of supervisory signal. 3) Address of trouble-initiating device. 4) Loss of ac supply. 5) Loss of power. 6) Low battery. 7) Abnormal test signal. 8) Communication bus failure.

e. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger. f. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to

central station.


284621.11 Page 13 of 16

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature, humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring are installed, before installation begins.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Preinstallation Testing: Perform verification of functionality of installed components of existing system prior to starting work. Document equipment or components not functioning as designed.

B. Protection of In-Place Conditions: Protect devices during construction unless devices are placed in service to protect facility during construction.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Comply with NECA 305, NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install electrical wiring to comply with requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems."

1. Devices placed in service before other trades have completed cleanup must be replaced. 2. Devices installed, but not yet placed, in service must be protected from construction dust,

debris, dirt, moisture, and damage in accordance with manufacturer's written storage instructions.

B. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inch (1980 mm) above finished floor.

C. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes:

1. Install manual fire-alarm box in normal path of egress within 60 inch (1520 mm) of exit doorway.

2. Mount manual fire-alarm box on background of contrasting color. 3. Operable part of manual fire-alarm box must be between 42 and 48 inch (1060 and 1220

mm) above floor level. Devices must be mounted at same height unless otherwise indicated.


284621.11 Page 14 of 16

D. Smoke- and Heat-Detector Spacing:

1. Comply with "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in "Initiating Devices" chapter in NFPA 72, for smoke-detector spacing.

2. Comply with "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in "Initiating Devices" chapter in NFPA 72, for heat-detector spacing..

3. Smooth ceiling spacing must not exceed 30 ft. 4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high

ceiling areas must be determined in accordance with Annex A in NFPA 72. 5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 36 inches from air-supply diffusers or return-air

openings. 6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from lighting fixtures and

not directly above pendant mounted or indirect lighting.

E. Install cover on each smoke detector that is not placed in service during construction. Cover must remain in place except during system testing. Remove cover prior to system turnover.


A. Connect wiring in accordance with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Ground equipment in accordance with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, in accordance with NFPA 70 and NECA 1.

D. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection.

1. Nameplate must be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs, as specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



B. Install nameplate for each control connection, indicating field control panel designation and I/O control designation feeding connection.

3.6 PATHWAYS

A. Pathways above suspended ceilings and in inaccessible locations may be routed exposed.

1. Exposed pathways located less than 96 inch (2440 mm) above floor must be installed in conduit.


284621.11 Page 15 of 16

B. Exposed conduit must be painted red enamel.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 270553 "Identification for Communications Systems."

B. Install framed instructions in location visible from FACU.

3.8 GROUNDING

A. Ground FACU and associated circuits in accordance with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Ground shielded cables at control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location.


A. Field tests must be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Administrant for Tests and Inspections:

1. Administer and perform tests and inspections with assistance of factory-authorized service representative.


1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection must be based on completed record Drawings and system documentation that is required by "Completion Documents, Preparation" table in "Documentation" section of "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in "Inspection" section of "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" table in "Testing" section of "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Factory-authorized service representative must prepare "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in "Documentation" section of "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72 and "Inspection and Testing Form" in "Records" section of "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

D. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

E. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



284621.11 Page 16 of 16

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.



311100 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 31 11 00 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 1 General Requirements and Specific Requirements, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. The work of this Section includes the following:

1. Clearing and grubbing of tree stumps, shrubs, brush and other plant material as indicated on the Drawings and directed by the Landscape Architect.

2. The work completed within this specification must be completed within full compliance of the SEQR document for the project.


A. Section 02 41 13 - Site Demolition

B. Section 31 25 00 - Erosion and Sediment Controls


A. Traffic: Conduct site-clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protections necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to remain in place.

1. Protect site improvements on adjoining properties and on New Rochelle’s property to remain.

2. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to property owners.

C. Review and verify all limits of items to be removed with The City and Landscape Architect prior to commencing clearing and grubbing operations.

D. Inspection: Verify existing condition of all plant material scheduled for clearing and grubbing removal. Do not proceed with any work that will result with unsafe conditions causing a continuing or permanent hazard. Ascertain that all work scheduled for clearing and grubbing can be safely accomplished in a proper time period.

E. Benchmarks: Protect all survey monuments, benchmarks, and property boundary pins. Replace if destroyed by Contractor's operations at no cost to The City of New Rochelle. Contractor to provide temporary offsets to benchmarks during clearing & grubbing and construction and provide new monuments as part of this construction.

F. Permits/Fees: Coordinate with appropriate utility companies and pay any disconnect fees and permits as necessary.

G. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on the City’spremises where indicated or directed.

H. Provide 48 hours notice prior to conducting any site clearing and grubbing operation.

I. Contact Dig Safely, New York at 811 or (1-800-962-7962) prior to commencing any clearing and grubbing operations.


311100 Page 2 of 3

1.05 EXISTING SERVICES

A. General: Indicated locations are approximate. Contractor is responsible for determining exact locations before commencing Work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS – NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SITE CLEARING

A. General: Remove tree stumps, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation, asphalt surfaces, stone and gravel, improvements, or obstructions, as required, to permit installation of new construction. Remove similar items elsewhere on site or premises as specifically indicated. Removal includes digging out and off-site disposal of stumps and roots.

B. Clearing and Grubbing: Clear site of shrubs, and other vegetation, except for those indicated to be

left standing.

1. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through ground surface. 2. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with suitable material, unless further

excavation or earthwork is indicated.

a. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm) loose depth, and thoroughly compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. Topsoil in field areas shall be placed in accordance with Section 312316 - Earthwork.

b. Removal of Improvements: Remove existing above-grade and below-grade improvements

as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. 3.02 POISON IVY REMOVAL

A. Carefully remove all poison ivy vines within the project site. Do not burn the grubbed plants as the oils of the plant are very volatile and become airborne in the smoke infecting those nearby.

1. Workmen shall wear appropriate clothing that sufficiently covers all exposed areas of skin

during removal operations. Workmen who have or who believe they may have a severe allergic reaction to the chemicals produced by poison ivy plants shall not be required to work in areas where poison ivy is prevalent.

2. Apply Round-Up or approved equal to the leaves of all visible plants with a low pressure

applicator. Apply to other areas as directed. Follow manufacturers guidelines for application rates.

3. Cut roots of poison ivy plants one inch below the ground after a period of time as recommended

by the manufacturer after initial application, or when the Engineer determines that the plant is sufficiently dead. Plant material not sufficiently dead in the opinion of the Engineer shall receive a second application of “Round-Up”.


311100 Page 3 of 3

4. Remove dead plant material from trees by carefully cutting stalk at 2' intervals or as directed. Care shall be taken not to remove bark from the existing trees. Coat remaining plant stump with “Round-Up”.

5. Bag and seal vines in recyclable bags and dispose of legally.

3.03 PROTECTION OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS/UTILITIES

A. General: Retain and protect all existing and adjacent improvements, structures and utilities designated to remain.

B. Time: For the duration of the work. C. Replace: Any existing improvements or utilities scheduled to remain which are removed erroneously

or damaged beyond satisfactory repair, in kind, as approved by the Landscape Architect and the City’s, and as per utility requirements.

3.04 PAVEMENT REMOVAL

A. Demolish and remove from the site all bituminous concrete pavement, gravel areas and concrete pavement/curbs as indicated to be removed on the Drawings. Sawcut pavement and curbing limits as required.

3.05 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS

A. Prior to beginning any construction activities at the site, the Contractor shall submit the proposed off-site disposal location to the Engineer for review and written approval.

B. Burning on the City’s Property: Burning is not permitted on the City’s property. C. Removal from the City’s Property: Remove waste materials and unsuitable or excess topsoil from

the City’s property.



311400 Page 1 of 2

SECTION 31 14 00 – STRIP, SCREEN AND STOCKPILE EXISTING TOPSOIL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



Standard Specifications, dated September 1, 2020; its latest edition and any supplemental specifications.


A. Strip, screen, and stockpile existing topsoil in accordance with the plans, specifications and as directed by the Engineer.

B. Restoration of areas disturbed by stockpiling and construction shall be restored to their original

condition, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 31 25 00 - Sediment and Erosion Control

B. Section 32 91 13 - Topsoil

C. Section 32 92 00 - Seeded Lawn

1.4 PROTECTION OF UTILITIES

A. Prior to the excavation of any area, determine the location of all existing utility lines designated to remain. Take proper precautions not to disturb or damage any existing surface or subsurface utilities that are to remain.

B. Contact Dig Safely New York (1.800.962.7962 or 811) to locate underground utilities prior to

commencing site preparation operations. C. Any damage to existing facilities by reason of his performance of the work under this Contract

will be repaired in conformance with the applicable utility company requirements at no additional cost to the City.

D. Maintain existing systems in operation as required during installation of new work.


311400 Page 2 of 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT:

A. As selected by the Contractor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 STRIPPING TOPSOIL

A. Strip existing topsoil from existing lawn and soil areas to be disturbed within the project limits. B. All topsoil within the limits of work shall be stripped; depths may vary.

3.2 SCREENING TOPSOIL

A. All topsoil to be reused on-site shall be screened of existing earth clods, sods, stones over 1/2”,

sticks, roots, weeds, litter and other deleterious material to the approval of the Engineer. B. Screen topsoil through approved sieve.

C. Properly dispose of tailings from screenings off-site.

3.3 STOCKPILING TOPSOIL

A. Stockpile stripped topsoil in piles within the project limits or in location agreed to by Owner. B. Protect stockpiles from erosion by installing a silt fence around the perimeter of the pile and by

temporary seeding per Section 31 25 00.

C. All topsoil in excess of what is required to complete the work per the drawings and the topsoil specification shall become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for the removal and legal disposal of all surplus soil materials.



312316 Page 1 of 2

SECTION 31 22 13 - FORMATION OF SUBGRADE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division One General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section.


Standard Specifications, January 1, 2021; its latest edition; and any supplemental specifications.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Preparation of subgrade beneath all pavement installation and as shown on the Drawings, or as ordered by the Engineer, and as specified herein. The work of formation of subgrade shall be performed at the plane coincident with the bottom most base or subbase material as shown on the Drawings and in conformance with Standard Specifications Section 203-2.01A Subgrade Area Material and 203-3.03C Compaction.

1.03 RELATED WORK

A. Section 31 23 16 - Earthwork

B. Section 31 23 33 - Trenching


A. Testing: Compaction tests may be required by the Owner and will be paid for by the Owner. No specific testing schedule has been established at this time. If tests indicate that density requirements have not been achieved, the Contractor shall continue compacting. All re-testing in these areas shall be paid for by the Contractor.

B. Density and Compaction Testing: The Contractor is responsible to schedule compaction tests as required by the Contract Documents and as directed by the Engineer and to allow adequate time for the proper execution of said tests.


A. West Nile Virus Precautions: To stem the spread of West Nile Virus, the Contractor shall closely monitor the work of this section to prevent water from collecting and/or ponding within or adjacent to the work for any length of time, thereby reducing the opportunities for mosquitoes to breed.


312316 Page 2 of 2

B. Dust Prevention: Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming a nuisance to the public, to neighbors, and to other work being performed on or near the site in conformance with Standard Specifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. As selected by the Contractor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION METHODS

A. Comply with Standard Specifications Section 2.03-3.01.



312316 Page 1 of 7

SECTION 31 23 16 - EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



Standard Specifications, January 1, 2021; its latest edition; and any supplemental specifications. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. All excavation and placement of fill not included under other sections. Place, compact and dispose of excess excavated materials in accordance with the plans, specifications and directions of the Engineer.

B. Saw cutting existing pavements and existing curbs. C. Rock excavation and removal as specified herein, and as needed for the competition of the

work. 1. When rock is encountered in the work of this Section the excavation and removal of that

rock shall comply with “Standard Specifications” and as specified herein. 2. No additional payment will be made for rock excavation and removal needed during the

completion of the work of this Section. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 02 41 13 – Demolition and Site Preparation B. Section 31 23 33 – Trenching C. Section 31 25 00 – Sediment and Erosion Control D. Section 32 11 23.23 – Crushed Stone Aggregate Materials

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. “Suitable Material” or “Acceptable Material”

1. ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM; free of rock or gravel larger than three (3) inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen material, vegetation and other deleterious material.

2. Any mineral (inorganic) soil, blasted or broken rock and similar materials of natural or

man made origin, including mixtures thereof, are considered acceptable materials. B. “Unacceptable Material” - ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH,

OL, OH and PT.


312316 Page 2 of 7


A. Material Standards: As defined in Standard Specifications inclusive of all supplements. B. Testing: Compaction tests will be required by the Engineer and will be paid for by the Owner.

If tests indicate that density requirements have not been achieved, continue compacting. All re-testing in unsatisfactory areas shall be paid for by the Contractor.

C. Density and Compaction Testing: The Contractor is responsible to schedule compaction tests as

required by the Engineer and to allow adequate time for the proper execution of said tests. A minimum of 48 hour notice shall be required.

1.6 PROTECTION

A. Dust Control: Use all means necessary to control dust on and near the construction areas caused by the Contractor's performance of the work in conformance with Standard Specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Backfill, Fill and Embankment Materials: Any acceptable material as determined by the Engineer, EXCEPT within six (6) inches of finished grade.

B. Subbase and Base Material: Conform to Standard Specifications, Section 304-2.02. C. Bedding Material: Conform to Standard Specifications, Section 603-3.03.

2.2 WARNING TAPE A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape

manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, minimum 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows:

1. Blue: Water systems.


312316 Page 3 of 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. The entire area of work shall be brought to the required lines and grades by excavation and filling. Excavated materials, acceptable in the opinion of the Engineer, shall be used in making embankments and filling the low areas of the work, and at such places as the Engineer may direct.

B. Excavate to the limits shown on the Drawings to subgrade level. Compact subgrade level

before placing fill, base or subbase materials. C. Construct base course to required depths and elevations below all concrete pads, foundations

and bituminous concrete. D. Construct bedding course below all drainage and utility structures. E. Place suitable/ acceptable material below all lawn and landscaped areas. No rocks larger than 2

inches in any dimension shall be placed within 4 inches of the finished grade. Material that does not meet this requirement and cannot be used within the project site either be screened to meet these requirements or properly removed from the site.

3.2 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM 1557:

1. Under foundations, concrete pads, and pavements, compact the top 12 inches below

subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum dry density. 2. Under lawn or unpaved areas: see Section 32 91 13 - Topsoil.

3.3 EXCAVATION

A. Protect Structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. Any damage to existing structures or utilities that occurs as a result of the Contractor’s operations shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Project.

B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide

protective insulating materials as necessary. C. Provide erosion and control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge

of soil-bearing water run-off or airborne dust to adjacent properties and watercourses, in accordance with the Sediment and Erosion Control Plan, details and as directed by the Engineer.

D. Subgrade: All soft, boggy, clayey or other objectionable material below the proposed subgrade

elevation shall be removed, and the area refilled with acceptable material. Upon discovery of such material, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer for evaluation.


312316 Page 4 of 7

E. Boulders: The Contractor shall remove all boulders, stone or pieces of concrete, lumber, iron or other material that project above subgrade and dispose of off-site. Any stone larger than two (2) cubic feet in volume shall not be placed within two (2) feet of the finished surface.

F. Excavating for Foundations: All excavations shall be cut accurately to required lines and

dimensions for work on drawings and shall be large enough to provide adequate clearance for the proper execution of the work.

G. Bottoms of Excavations: Level the bottoms of all excavations, to receive footings or other work

supported on soil, accurately, to the lines and levels shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.

Where excavation for a foundation has been carried below the indicated level by error, fill the space between the incorrect and required depth with concrete at no additional cost to the Owner.

H. Storage and Placement: All those excavated materials which in the opinion of the Engineer are

suitable for backfill shall be stored or placed within the limits of the Contract, where directed by the Engineer.

I. Surplus: All surplus materials and materials not suitable for backfill shall be removed off-site.

No additional payment will be made for this, but the cost thereof shall be deemed included in the price bid.

J. Shoring: Wherever necessary to maintain the banks of excavation in a safe and stable condition,

the Contractor shall furnish and install temporary sheet piling or planks, braces and shores of good sound timber of adequate strength, and shall remove such piling or shoring as the foundation work progresses.

Sheeting and bracing of a type approved by the Engineer, shall be installed when the Contractor’s employees are required to enter into excavations which exceed four (4) feet in depth. The foregoing shall include the construction and removal of sheeting and bracing, the excavation and maintenance of temporary ditches, and the furnishing and operation of pumps or other appliances needed to properly drain the work. No direct compensation will be made for this work, but payment therefore shall be deemed included in the price bid.

K. Inspection: When the excavations have been carried to the required depth as shown on the

drawings, the Contractor shall do no more work until after inspection by the Engineer, who shall order the foundation or other work to proceed, or further excavation, as the conditions indicate and no foundation or other work shall be done until the excavations have been approved by the Engineer.

L. Bailing and Draining: The Contractor shall furnish all materials, appliances and labor required

to keep the site of the work free from water, ice and snow during construction. M. Utilities and Services: When any sewer, water, gas, electric or other utility service connections

are encountered in the excavation operations, the service shall not be interrupted or disturbed by the Contractor unless called for on the plans and/or directed by the Engineer. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to detect and protect existing utilities (to remain) from damage


312316 Page 5 of 7

during construction. The Contractor shall locate buried utilities, to the best of his ability, using electronic probes, or other methods, prior to the start of excavation. The Contractor shall then proceed cautiously and perform hand excavation, as necessary, to protect the utility as directed by the Engineer, at no extra cost to the Owner. If a utility is inadvertently damaged, it is the Contractor’s responsibility to restore that utility to operating condition, equal to that existing prior to damage. The Contractor shall remain at the site with the damaged utility until it has been restored and there is no danger to the public (i.e. exposed live electrical wires, etc.).

Should the Contractor need to cut off utilities or services during the performances of the work, he shall notify the City Department or Utility Company owning or controlling services, to cut off these services. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to provide sufficient advance notice to the Utility Company so that work not be delayed. The cost of any such delay in work shall be solely borne by the Contractor. Any services cut off or interrupted by the Contractor’s operations shall be restored at the Contractor’s expense.

N. Over-excavate to depths as shown on plans and as directed by Engineer. 3.4 FILL

A. Remove all vegetation, topsoil, debris, wet and unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from the ground surface prior to placing fills. Unsuitable subgrade material as determined by the Engineer may be removed in accordance with Section 3.3 D of this Specification.

B. Fill and Compacting shall be carried out as directed by the Engineer, and shall be constructed in

successive horizontal layers not over 6 inches in depth. It shall be spread by a "Bulldozer", or other acceptable methods, and shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling with a self-propelling roller weighing not less than ten (10) tons and completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. In places where the character of the material makes the use of this roller impracticable or where drains or other construction may be damaged, a lighter one may be substituted, or the area shall be compacted by vibratory tamping, all with the approval, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

C. All hollows and depressions which develop during the process of rolling and compacting shall

be filled with acceptable material, and the subgrade shall again be compacted. This process of filling and compacting shall be repeated until no depressions develop.

D. Plow, strip or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material

will bond with existing surface. E. When subgrade or existing ground surface to receive fill has a density less than that required for

fill, break up ground surface to depth required, pulverize, moisture-condition or aerate soil and recompact to required density.

3.5 BACKFILL

A. After inspection and approval of foundations and other work which is to be covered by backfill, the excavated voids shall be filled with clean excavated material, puddled and rammed solid every 6" of depth.


312316 Page 6 of 7

B. After areas and trenches have been excavated and structures constructed therein, the spaces

around and above them shall be carefully backfilled with acceptable material. Backfill shall be placed on both sides of structures to approximately the same elevation at the same time. All backfill shall be thoroughly tamped and rammed in place in layers not over six (6) inches in depth, using rammers of a weight acceptable to the Engineer. If directed by the Engineer, the backfill shall be thoroughly saturated with water as it is placed.

C. Backfilling around manholes, catch basins and dry wells shall not take place until the mortar

has hardened and the possibility of movement is slight. Backfilling shall take place uniformly around all sides of the structure.

D. When sheeting is being withdrawn, all cavities left thereby shall be filled with acceptable

material, tamped in place so as to fill all voids thoroughly. Backfill inside of sheeting shall be placed before sheeting is removed.

E. All backfill shall be with suitable material, as defined in this specification or as determined by

engineer. 3.6 UTILITY TRENCHES

A. See Section 31 23 33 - Trenching. 3.7 SAW CUTTING

A. All saw cutting shall be carried out to the full depth of the pavement, curb or concrete walk to be cut. Saw cutting shall be done to accurate, neat and straight lines marked previous to commencement of work. Saw cutting shall be done with approved power saws specifically designed and manufactured for such a purpose. Compressor, backhoe or spade-cutting of the pavement will not be allowed.

3.8 ROCK EXCAVATION

A. Rock excavation shall include the excavation, removal and disposal of solid rock, concrete and

all boulders one cubic yard or more in volume which require drilling and splitting or other mechanical means. Blasting will NOT be allowed. Boulders of less than one cubic yard in volume or other materials found in excavations, however stiff, heavy and compact, including rippable rock, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, can be removed without drilling and wedging, shall not be considered as rock excavation.

B. All loose, unsound or semi-detached rock fragments, as determined by the Engineer, which

may be detrimental to the proposed structure or installation shall be removed from the excavation. Excavation beyond the necessary limits, made to remove damaged rock shall be backfilled by the Contractor with compacted gravel fill at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Where boulders are on the sides of or in the bottom of excavations, they shall be wholly or

partially removed at a minimum to the limits as specified and/or as determined by the Engineer. In removing boulders lodged in the sides of the excavations, the Contractor shall not disturb or undermine adjacent pavement or structures. Pavement surfaces damaged beyond reasonable limits as determined by the Engineer shall be repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to


312316 Page 7 of 7

the Owner. In general, boulders or rock fragments which extend under paved surfaces shall be removed by mechanical splitting.

D. Unauthorized excavations in rock, or excavations made beyond or below the indicated limits

shall be refilled and compacted with approved gravel fill at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Depressions below the required grade resulting from the removal of boulders and rock

fragments shall be refilled with compacted gravel fill at no additional cost to the Owner.

F. No additional payment will be made for rock excavation and removal needed during the completion of the work of this Section.



312333 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 31 23 33 – TRENCHING





A. Trenching, sheeting and dewatering as specified herein, and as needed for installation of water distribution and appurtenances associated with the work.

B. Rock in trench excavation and removal as specified herein, and as needed for installation of

water distribution and appurtenances associated with the work. 1. When rock is encountered in work of trench excavation the removal of that rock shall

comply with “Standard Specifications” 2. No additional payment will be made for rock removal during trench excavation.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 22 47 14 – Exterior Drinking Fountain

B. Section 31 23 16 - Earthwork C. Section 33 40 00 – Storm Drainage


A. Use equipment adequate in size, capacity, and numbers to accomplish the work of this Section in a timely manner.

B. Comply with requirements and regulations of utility companies and governmental agencies

having jurisdiction. C. Refer to Section 312316 - Earthwork for compaction requirements.


A. Contact Dig Safely New York (1.800.962.7962 or 811) to locate underground utilities prior to commencing site preparation operations.


312333 Page 2 of 5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT

A. As selected by the Contractor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work of this section until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

B. Finish Elevations and Lines:

1. Locate and protect control points during progress of the Work. 2. Preserve permanent reference points during progress of the Work. 3. Do not change or relocate reference points or items of the Work without written approval

from the Engineer. 3.2 EXECUTION

A. Utilities:

1. Unless shown to be removed, protect active utility lines shown on the Drawings or otherwise made known to the Contractor prior to excavating. If damaged, repair or replace at no additional cost to the Owner.

2. If active utility lines are encountered, and are not shown on the Drawings or otherwise

made known to the Contractor, promptly take necessary steps to assure that service is not interrupted. Inform Engineer of existing utility line before proceeding.

3. If service is interrupted as a result of work under this Section, immediately restore service

by repairing the damaged utility at no additional cost to the Owner. 4. If existing utilities are found to interfere with the permanent facilities being constructed

under this Section, immediately notify the Engineer for review and written direction before proceeding with modifications to the work. Do not proceed with permanent relocation of utilities until written direction is received from the Engineer.


312333 Page 3 of 5

B. Protection of Persons and Property:

1. Barricade open holes and depressions occurring as part of the Work, and post warning lights on property adjacent to or with public access to the work.

2. Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise

required. 3. Protect existing structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, fences and other facilities from

damage caused by trenching, settlement, lateral movement, washout, and other hazards created by operations under this Section. All existing features affected and/or damaged by the work of this Section shall be brought back to their original conditions at no cost to the Owner.

C. Dewatering:

1. Remove all water, including rain water, encountered during trench and substructure work

to an approved location by pumps, drains, and other approved methods. 2. Keep excavations and site construction free from water.

D. Dust Prevention:

1. Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming a nuisance to the public, to neighbors, and to other work being performed on or near the site in conformance with Standard Specifications.

E. Maintain access to the site at all times.

3.3 TRENCHING PROCEDURES

A. Trench Excavation:

1. Construction methods shall conform to Section 206 of Standard Specifications, where applicable.

2. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe.

Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe. 3. Clearance: 12 inches minimum each side of pipe. 4. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and

support of pipes. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, and fittings. Remove stones and sharp objects to avoid point loading.

5. Place and compact bedding material on rock or other unyielding bearing surfaces and to

fill unauthorized excavations. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, and fittings.

B. Rock in Trench Excavation:


312333 Page 4 of 5

1. When rock is encountered in work of trench excavation the removal of that rock shall

comply with “Standard Specifications” 2. No additional payment will be made for rock removal during trench excavation.

C. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 312316 - Earthwork. D. Provide sheeting and shoring as necessary for protection of the Work and for the safety of

personnel.

1. Prior to backfilling, remove all sheeting. 2. Do not permit sheeting to remain in the trenches except when field conditions or the type

of sheeting or methods or construction such as the use of concrete bedding are such as to make removal of sheeting impracticable. In such cases, portions of sheeting may be cut off and remain in the trench as approved by the Owner.

E. Miscellaneous:

1. Short sections of a trench may be tunneled, subject to approval of the Engineer, if the pipe

and backfill can be installed and compacted properly into such tunnel. 2. Where it becomes necessary to excavate beyond the limits of normal excavation lines in

order to remove boulders or other interfering objects, backfill and compact the voids remaining after removal of the objects in accordance with Section 312316 at no additional cost to the Owner.

a. If a void is below the subgrade for the utility bedding, use suitable earth materials

and compact to a relative density of no less than 95%. b. If a void is in the side of the utility trench of open cut, use suitable earth or sand

compacted or consolidated to a relative density of no less than 90%. 3. Trench to the minimum width necessary for proper installation of the utility, with sides as

nearly vertical as possible. Accurately grade the bottom to provide uniform bearing for the utility.

4. Depressions:

a. Dig bell holes and depressions for joints after the trench has been graded. Provide

uniform bearing for the pipe on prepared bottom of the trench. b. Except where rock is encountered, do not excavate below the depth indicated or

specified. c. Where rock is encountered, excavate rock to a minimum over depth of 4" below the

trench depth indicated or specified.


312333 Page 5 of 5

F. Where utility trenching and/or piping traverses public property and/or is subject to governmental or utility company jurisdiction, provide depth, bedding, cover, and other requirements and/or regulations as set forth by authority having jurisdiction, but in no case shall the depth be less than that shown in the Contract Documents.

G. Cover:

1. Provide minimum trench depth indicated below to maintain a minimum cover over the top

of the installed item below the finish grade or subgrade, unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings: a. Water pipes: 24”/48”

2. Where utilities are under a concrete structure slab or pavement, the minimum depth need

only be sufficient to completely encase the piping or pipe sleeve, provided it will not interfere with the structural integrity of the slab or pavement.

3. Where the minimum cover is not provided, encase the pipes in concrete as indicated on the

Drawings. Provide concrete with a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3000 psi with entrained air 5 to 7 percent. Mechanically consolidate concrete.

3.4 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION

A. Excavations shall be backfilled and compacted in accordance with Section 31 23 16.



312500 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 31 25 00 - SEDIMENT AND EROSION CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


B. “New York State Standards and Specifications for Erosion and Sediment Control”, New York State Department of Environmental Conservation, November 2016, inclusive of all supplements and/or its latest revision or edition.

C. “Standard Specifications” shall mean the State of New York Department of Transportation

Standard Specifications, January 1, 2021, its latest edition and any supplemental specifications. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES: This Section includes the materials, labor, installation and incidental

costs for the installation of:

A. Sediment barriers and sedimentation structures B. Temporary mulch C. Filter fabric and excavated inlet protection D. Stone Check Dam E. Stabilized construction entrance


A. All erosion and sediment control measures will be constructed in accordance with the standards and specifications of the “New York State Standards and Specifications for Erosion and Sediment Control”.

B. All construction of erosion and sediment control measures shall be overseen by the Engineer

and Owner’s Representative.


A. Land disturbance will be kept to a minimum; re-stabilization will be scheduled as soon as possible. Temporary seeding or permanent hydro-seeding should take place immediately upon completion of grading. Permanent seeding will be scheduled between April 1 - June 1 and August 15 - October 1.

B. Erosion and sediment control measures will be installed prior to construction whenever possible

and will be maintained in effective condition throughout the construction period. C. Additional control measures will be installed during the construction period as required by field

conditions or as requested by the Engineer.


312500 Page 2 of 3

D. Sediment removed from control structures will be disposed of on site in a manner approved by the Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Straw bales:

1. Straw bales shall meet the requirements of Section 713-19 of the Standard Specifications. The bales shall be tightly bound with either wire or nylon twine to resist breaking apart during their use, shipment or placement.

2. Hardwood stakes shall be at least 1 ¼” x 1 ¼” by two feet (2') long.

B. Silt Fence:

1. Shall be listed in the NYSDOT Approved List in conformance with Section 209-2.08 of the

Standard Specifications.

C. Stone Check Dam: Shall consist of geotextile filter fabric and well-graded stone (NYSDOT Light Stone Fill)

D. Mulch shall meet the requirements of Section 713-19 Straw or section 713-11 Wood Fiber

Mulch of the Standard Specifications. E. Stabilized construction entrance: Shall consist of geotextile, crushed stone and, if necessary, a

drainage pipe to maintain ditch flow.

1. Geotextile shall conform to Section 207-2, strength class 1 of the Standard Specifications. 2. Crushed stone shall be 6” of coarse aggregate conforming to Table 703-4 size #3 of the



312500 Page 3 of 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install sediment and erosion control measures as indicated on the drawings and as required by

the Engineer and Owner’s Representative.

3.2 APPLYING MULCH A. Spread mulch uniformly in a continuous blanket at the approximate rate of 2 tons per acre. B. Inspect mulch periodically. After rainstorms check for rill erosion. Where erosion is severe,

repair the eroded area and place additional mulch as required to control the erosion. Grasses shall not be considered established until a ground cover is achieved, which is mature enough to control soil erosion and to withstand survive severe weather conditions.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCES

A. Install in accordance with Section 209-3.13 of the Standard Specifications.

3.4 SILT FENCE

A. Install silt fence in accordance with Section 209-3.07 of the Standard Specifications.

3.5 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

A. Inspect and maintain erosion control measures throughout the life of the project and as directed by Engineer.

B. Inspect every 7 days, after ½” of rainfall or more within 12 hour period or daily during

prolonged rain. C. Repair or rebuild measures within 3 days of damage or sooner if there is an impending storm.

Remove sediment deposits greater than 1/2 the height of the measure within the same time period.



321130 Page 1 of 7

SECTION 32 11 30 - EXPOSED AGGREGATE PAVEMENT ON FULL DEPTH BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



Standard Specifications, January 1, 2021; its latest edition; and any supplemental specifications. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the materials, labor, installation and incidental costs for the installation of subbase material, base materials, bituminous concrete pavement, asphalt emulsion binder and surface aggregate.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 32 11 23.23 – Bituminous Concrete Pavement

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Material Certificates: Provide material certificates signed by the material producer and the Contractor, certifying that materials and products comply with specified requirements.


A. Material and Methods of Construction: Shall comply with the following standards:

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).

3. Asphalt Institute (AI).

4. State of New York Department of Transportation Standard Specifications, inclusive of all supplements.

B. Testing: Compaction tests will be required by the Engineer and shall be paid for by the

Contractor. If tests indicate that density requirements have not been achieved, the Contractor shall continue compacting. All retesting in these areas shall be paid for by the Contractor.

C. Density and Compaction Testing: The Contractor is responsible to schedule compaction tests if

required by the Owner and to allow adequate time for the proper execution of said tests.


321130 Page 2 of 7

D. Allowable Tolerances: Final surface of base materials within 3/8" from a required grade. Final pavement thicknesses shall conform to specified requirements as shown in the Drawings. Test for smoothness using a ten (10) foot long straightedge. Surface shall not vary more than 1/4" from straightedge when placed in any direction. In no case will water be allowed to stand or puddle on any finished pavement.

E. Permits/Approvals: The Contractor shall obtain approval of construction and secure all permits

for all work. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Transporting shipments of bituminous concrete material shall be made in tight vehicles previously cleaned of all foreign material, and delivered to the site, so that it will not become contaminated in any way.


A. Weather Limitations

1. Base material shall not be placed on frozen or saturated subbase material.

2. Bituminous concrete paving material shall not be placed on frozen or saturated base material.

3. Cold weather: Bituminous concrete paving materials shall be mixed and placed in

accordance with minimum placement temperature as specified in Section 405-3.01 Weather Limitations, Standard Specifications.

4. Precipitation or Moisture: Placement of bituminous concrete paving materials shall not be

scheduled when weather conditions of fog or rain prevail nor when the pavement surface shows signs of any moisture.

5. Precipitation Probability: Placement of bituminous concrete paving materials shall not be

scheduled when the Precipitation Probability, obtained by the Contractor from the U.S. Weather Bureau Within three (3) hours prior to the start of such operations, equals or exceeds fifty (50) percent. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the exact time at which the above information was obtained.

B. Grade Control: Establish and maintain the required lines and grades for each course during

paving operations.

C. Provide temporary barricades and warning lights as required for protection of project work and public safety.

D. Protect adjacent work from damage, soiling and staining during paving operations.

E. Inspection Costs: All costs associated with material certifications, plant inspection and

laboratory tests shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be deemed included in the price bid for asphalt pavement.


321130 Page 3 of 7

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT BASE COURSE

A. Conform to the requirements of Standard Specifications, Section 403-2. 2.2 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT TOP COURSE

A. Conform to the requirements of Standard Specifications, Section 403-2.

2.3 ASPHALT EMULSION BINDER

A. The material shall be asphalt emulsion, grade CRS-2, meeting the requirements of ASTM D2397.

2.4 SURFACE AGGREGATE - BLUESTONE

A. The mineral aggregate for the surface treatment shall consist of uniformly sized crushed bluestone, graded such that one hundred percent (100%) will pass a one-half inch (1/2”) square opening sieve and one hundred percent (100%) by weight shall be retained on a one-quarter inch (1/4”) sieve. The aggregate shall be roughly cubical in shape, flat or elongated aggregate will not be accepted. The aggregate shall be washed free of surface dust, film, clay and silt.

2.5 FORMS

A. The forms for this work shall be of wood of an approved type and a minimum length of ten feet (10') for tangents and curves, unless otherwise shown of the plans.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Verify that all existing utility openings, valves, and other project installations are at their proper finished grade elevations, within areas to be paved. Provide temporary closures and protection over openings until completion of rolling operations. Remove closures at completion of the work. Set covers to grade, flush with the surface of the adjoining pavement.

3.2 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

A. Prior to placing the bottom course of processed stone aggregate base, the prepared subgrade shall be maintained true to line and grade, at all times for a minimum distance of 200 feet in advance of the work. No placement of the processed aggregate is to commence until acceptance by the Engineer of the subgrade on which it is to be placed.

B. The formation and protection of subgrade shall conform to the requirements of Section 2.09.01

and 2.09.03, Standard Specifications.


321130 Page 4 of 7

3.3 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT

A. General

1. Install the bituminous concrete pavement to the lines, grades, and details shown on the Drawings. Neatly and cleanly meet and match abutting pavements. Remove all soft or yielding material below grade and replace with suitable material.

2. Thicknesses after compaction shall conform to the details on the Drawings. The pavement

shall consist of the number of courses and thickness as detailed. Remove and replace areas showing deficiencies in required thickness with new material as directed by the Engineer.

3. Protect existing abutting pavement during paving operations. Replace any abutting

pavement damaged during paving operations.

4. Provide a cross-pitch of 1/4" per foot for proper drainage. Ensure that there are no “low” spots that may trap water and create a slipping hazard.

B. Forms

1. The forms for this work shall be of wood of an approved type and a minimum length of

ten feet (10') for tangents and curves, unless otherwise shown of the plans. 2. All forms shall be straight, free from bends and warps at all times, and shall be cleaned

thoroughly and oiled before pavement is placed against them; this cleaning and oiling being repeated daily as the forms are moved ahead. The forms shall rest firmly upon the thoroughly compacted sub-grade throughout their entire length, shall be joined neatly and tightly and staked securely to line and grade at least two hundred feet (200') in advance of the point of placing pavement by using at least three (3) bracing pins or stakes to each ten foot (10') length of side form, so that they will resist the pressure of the pavement and the impact of the roller without springing.

C. Placing

1. Bituminous concrete pavement shall be constructed and compacted in conformance with


2. Coat the edge of all abutting pavement with tack coat before installing bituminous concrete pavements. Insure that the abutting pavement has a sound, clean, straight edge. Feathering of edges and transitions between new and existing pavements is not acceptable. Protect surfaces of abutting pavement from tack coat overspray.

3. Each mixture shall be furnished and laid by means of a mechanical spreader of approved

design to a depth which after final compaction shall be equal to the specified depth. In areas where the use of a mechanical spreader is impractical, as determined by the Engineer, other means of spreading and compacting may be permitted. The use of hand rakes will not be permitted. The Contractor shall use lutes where necessary.


321130 Page 5 of 7

4. After placing and compacting binder course, tack coat shall be applied prior to placement of the wearing (top) course.

5. Each mixture shall be laid only where the surface to be covered is free from loose or

foreign material, dry, and only when weather conditions, in the opinion of the Engineer, are suitable.

6. The Contractor shall provide suitable means for keeping all small tools clean and free

from bituminous accumulations.

7. Pavement may be laid by hand. Pavement shall be compacted by making multiple passes with a roller weighing not less than 2,000 pounds. After compaction, the thickness shall be that as specified on the drawings.

D. Compacting

1. Upon completion of the spreading of each mixture, the material shall be consolidated

thoroughly and uniformly with self-propelled tandem rollers. The top course shall be free from roller marks.

2. Rollers used for compacting the top course shall be well balanced, self-propelled, tandem

rollers, weighing between seven (7) and eight (8) tons. The roller shall have a compression under the rear wheel of between 200 and 300 pounds per linear inch of roll at a rate not exceeding 800 square yards per hour per roller. After compaction, the surface course shall have a density not less than 97% theoretical maximum density as determined by Appendix B of The Asphalt Institute Manual MS-2.

3. Locations inaccessible to the roller, the compression shall be effected with iron tampers

weighing not less than twenty-five (25) pounds and having a bearing area not exceeding forty-eight (48) square inches, or other impact type equipment.

4. Perform breakdown, second and finish rolling until the bituminous concrete mixture has

been compacted to the required surface density and smoothness. Continue rolling until all roller marks are eliminated. Provide a smooth compacted surface true to thickness and elevations required.

5. After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on the pavement until it has cooled and

hardened, and in no case sooner than 8 hours.

E. Joints for New Construction and Between Existing Pavement:

1. Carefully make joints between old and new pavements, and between successive day's work, to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining work. Construct joints to have the same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of the asphalt concrete course.

2. Construction shall be as nearly continuous as is possible. The roller shall pass over the

end of the laid mixture only when a practical necessity.


321130 Page 6 of 7

3. When the operation of laying is interrupted, the end of the laid material shall be left unrolled until such time as work is resumed, in order that there be no joints throughout the project.

4. If it is necessary to roll the end of the laid mixture during construction, thus consolidating

it, the joint so made shall be cut back before recommencing the operation of laying, in order to present a fresh, clean surface for contract with the newly placed material.

5. The edges of such joints shall be painted with liquid asphalt (RC-70 or MC-70) and the

use of hot smoothing irons in finishing such joints, shall not be permitted.

F. Finished Surface

1. The surface of the top course of the pavement after compression shall be smooth and true to crown and grade, free from depressions, waves, bunches, overlapping seams and unevenness in surface. All new surfaces shall meet existing surfaces smoothly and evenly.

2. After the compaction of the top course, the Contractor shall check the entire paved area for

depressions, using a ten (10) foot wood or metal straightedge. Any depressions greater than three-sixteenths (3/16) of an inch shall be corrected by removing the top course of the affected areas, and replacing with new material to form a true and even surface.

G. Defects: Where defects in composition, compression or finish appear in the completed work,

such finished areas shall be removed to the full depth of the course and the defective material replaced with the required thickness of pavement at the expense of the contractor.

1. Patching: Remove and replace mixtures that become mixed with foreign materials and all

defective areas. Cut out such areas and fill with fresh hot asphalt concrete. Compact by rolling to the required surface density and smoothness. Remove deficient areas for the full depth of the course. Cut sides perpendicular and parallel to the directions of traffic with edges vertical. Apply a tack coat before placing asphalt concrete mixture.

3.4 BITUMINOUS BINDER

A. Application

1. Application of emulsified asphalt shall be made when the surface is dry of slightly damp conditions. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, asphalt binder shall be applied only when temperature of the surface to be treated is 70 degrees F or higher.

2. Asphalt binder shall be applied using a truck mounted pressure distributor at the rate of

0.30 to 0.45 gallons per square yard. If required by Engineer, a strip of building paper at least three (3) feet in width with a length equal to that of the spray bar plus one (1) foot, shall be used at the beginning of each spread. If the cut off is not positive, the use of the paper may be required at the end of each spread. The paper shall be removed and disposed of in a satisfactory manner. The distributor shall be moving forward at proper application speed at the time the spray bar is opened. Any skipped areas or deficiencies shall be corrected. Junctions of spreads shall be carefully made to assure a smooth surface.


321130 Page 7 of 7

3. Under no circumstances shall operations proceed in a manner that bituminous material will be allowed to chill, set-up, dry, or otherwise impair retention of the cover aggregate. The distributor, when not spreading, shall be parked so that the spray bar or mechanism will not drip bituminous material on adjacent surfaces.

3.5 BLUESTONE AGGREGATE

A. Application

1. Application of bluestone aggregate shall be immediately following the application of bituminous binder material, cover aggregate shall be spread in the range of 25 to 30 pounds per square yard. The spreading of aggregate shall be by the use of approved truck mounted or self propelled mechanical spreaders. Spreading shall be accomplished in such a manner that the tires of the trucks or aggregate spreader at no time contact the uncovered and newly applied bituminous material.

2. Immediately after the aggregate is spread, any deficient areas shall be covered by

additional material. If the application of the cover aggregate by spread is not uniform, the Engineer may order the Contractor to use a drag broom before rolling.

3. Immediately after spreading, the cover aggregate shall be compacted by the use of

pneumatic tired rollers. Rolling shall proceed in a longitudinal direction, beginning at the outer edges of the treatment and working toward the center. Each trip shall overlap the previous trip by one-half (1/2) the width of the front wheels of the roller. The first rolling of the cover aggregate shall be completed within fifteen (15) minutes after it has been spread. Rolling shall continue only until a smooth, thoroughly compacted surface is obtained, with a minimum of three complete passes over all surfaces.

4. Any free bituminous material on the surface caused by a deficient amount of cover

aggregate shall be covered in such a manner so as not to displace imbedded material. Excess material shall be swept from the surface using a power broom with light pressure after the work is completed. Traffic shall be kept off the pavement for at least twenty-four (24) hours.


A. Protect all work until acceptance of the project. Replace or repair pavement if damaged prior to acceptance.

B. Clean up all debris from installation procedures, including but not limited to bituminous

concrete and base material overflow into/onto areas indicated to be lawn or other surfaces. Remove from site all excess materials, debris and equipment. Contractor shall dispose of debris material legally.

C. Repair damage resulting from paving operation to other areas of the work.



321200 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 32 12 00 - BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT





A. This Section includes the materials, labor, installation and incidental costs for the installation of subbase material, base materials, and bituminous concrete pavement.


A. Section 32 11 23.23 – Crushed Stone Aggregate Base

B. Section 32 13 13 – Portland Cement Concrete Pavement

C. Section 32 13 23 – Post-Tensioned Concrete Pavement

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Material Certificates: Provide material certificates signed by the material producer and the Contractor, certifying that materials and products comply with specified requirements.


A. Material and Methods of Construction: Shall comply with the following standards:

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).

3. Asphalt Institute (AI).

4. State of New York Department of Transportation Standard Specifications, inclusive of all supplements.

B. Testing: Compaction tests will be required by the Engineer and shall be paid for by the

Contractor. If tests indicate that density requirements have not been achieved, the Contractor shall continue compacting. All retesting in these areas shall be paid for by the Contractor.

C. Density and Compaction Testing: The Contractor is responsible to schedule compaction tests if

required by the Owner and to allow adequate time for the proper execution of said tests.


321200 Page 2 of 6

D. Allowable Tolerances: Final surface of base materials within 3/8" from a required grade. Final pavement thicknesses shall conform to specified requirements as shown in the Drawings. Test for smoothness using a ten (10) foot long straightedge. Surface shall not vary more than 1/4" from straightedge when placed in any direction. In no case will water be allowed to stand or puddle on any finished pavement.

E. Permits/Approvals: The Contractor shall obtain approval of construction and secure all permits

for all work. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Transporting shipments of bituminous concrete material shall be made in tight vehicles previously cleaned of all foreign material, and delivered to the site, so that it will not become contaminated in any way.


A. Weather Limitations

1. Base material shall not be placed on frozen or saturated subbase material.

2. Bituminous concrete paving material shall not be placed on frozen or saturated base material.

3. Cold weather: Bituminous concrete paving materials shall be mixed and placed in

accordance with minimum placement temperature as specified in Section 405-3.01 Weather Limitations, Standard Specifications.

4. Precipitation or Moisture: Placement of bituminous concrete paving materials shall not be

scheduled when weather conditions of fog or rain prevail nor when the pavement surface shows signs of any moisture.

5. Precipitation Probability: Placement of bituminous concrete paving materials shall not be

scheduled when the Precipitation Probability, obtained by the Contractor from the U.S. Weather Bureau Within three (3) hours prior to the start of such operations, equals or exceeds fifty (50) percent. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the exact time at which the above information was obtained.

B. Grade Control: Establish and maintain the required lines and grades for each course during

paving operations.

C. Provide temporary barricades and warning lights as required for protection of project work and pubic safety.

D. Protect adjacent work from damage, soiling and staining during paving operations.

D. Inspection Costs: All costs associated with material certifications, plant inspection and

laboratory tests shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be deemed included in the price bid for asphalt pavement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


321200 Page 3 of 6


A. Conform to the requirements of Standard Specifications, Section 403-2. 2.2 TACK COAT

A. Conform to the requirements of Standard Specifications, Section 702-10. 2.3 SUBASE

A. Conform to the requirements of Section 304-2.02 of the Standard Specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Verify that all existing utility openings, valves, and other project installations are at their proper finished grade elevations, within areas to be paved.

B. Provide temporary closures and protection over openings until completion of rolling

operations. C. Remove closures at completion of the work. Set covers to grade, flush with the surface of the

adjoining pavement. 3.2 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

A. Prior to placing the bottom course of processed stone aggregate base, the prepared subgrade shall be maintained true to line and grade, at all times for a minimum distance of 200 feet in advance of the work. No placement of the processed aggregate is to commence until acceptance of the subgrade on which it is to be placed.

B. The formation and protection of subgrade shall conform to the requirements of Section 2.09.01

and 2.09.03, Standard Specifications.

3.3 BASE COURSE MATERIAL PLACEMENT/COMPACTION

A. Install processed aggregate base material at the locations as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with Section 203 of the Standard Specifications. Dimensions specified are after compaction.

B. Compact base material with vibratory roller to minimum 95% modified AASHTO laboratory

density (ASTM D-1557, Method C).

C. Insure thorough and proper compaction around all yard drains, catch basins, structures, utility valves, and other improvements that project above base material.


A. General


321200 Page 4 of 6

1. Install the bituminous concrete pavement to the lines, grades, and details shown on the

Drawings and in accordance with Section 403 of the Standard Specifications. Neatly and cleanly meet and match abutting pavements. Remove all soft or yielding material below grade and replace with suitable material.

2. Thicknesses after compaction shall conform to the details on the Drawings. The

pavement shall consist of the number of courses and thickness as detailed. Remove and replace areas showing deficiencies in required thickness with new material as directed.

3. Protect existing abutting pavement during paving operations. Replace any abutting

pavement damaged during paving operations. Joint between bituminous pavement and existing Portland cement concrete pavement shall be tightly compacted and pavement edge shall be of equal density to other areas of pavement.

4. Provide a cross-pitch of 1/4" per foot for proper drainage. Ensure that there are no low

spots that may trap water and create a slipping hazard.

B. Placing

1. Bituminous concrete pavement shall be constructed and compacted in conformance with Section 403 of the Standard Specifications.

2. Coat the edge of all abutting pavement with tack coat before installing bituminous

concrete pavements. Insure that the abutting pavement has a sound, clean, straight edge. Feathering of edges and transitions between new and existing pavements is not acceptable. Protect surfaces of abutting pavement from tack coat overspray.

3. Each mixture shall be furnished and laid by means of a mechanical spreader of approved

design to a depth which after final compaction shall be equal to the specified depth. In areas where the use of a mechanical spreader is impractical, as determined by the Engineer, other means of spreading and compacting may be permitted.

4. After placing and compacting binder course, tack coat shall be applied prior to placement

of the wearing (top) course.

5. Each mixture shall be laid only where the surface to be covered is free from loose or foreign material, dry, and only when weather conditions are suitable.

6. Provide suitable means for keeping all small tools clean and free from bituminous

accumulations.

7. Pavement may be laid by hand. Pavement shall be compacted by making multiple passes with a roller weighing not less than 2,000 pounds. After compaction, the thickness shall be that as specified on the drawings.

C. Compacting

1. Upon completion of the spreading of each mixture, the material shall be consolidated thoroughly and uniformly with self-propelled tandem rollers. The top course shall be free from roller marks.


321200 Page 5 of 6

2. Rollers used for compacting the top course shall be well balanced, self-propelled, tandem

rollers, weighing between seven (7) and eight (8) tons. The roller shall have a compression under the rear wheel of between 200 and 300 pounds per linear inch of roll at a rate not exceeding 800 square yards per hour per roller. After compaction, the surface course shall have a density not less than 97% theoretical maximum density as determined by Appendix B of The Asphalt Institute Manual MS-2.

3. Locations inaccessible to the roller, the compression shall be effected with iron tampers

weighing not less than twenty-five (25) pounds and having a bearing area not exceeding forty-eight (48) square inches, or other impact type equipment.

4. Perform breakdown, second and finish rolling until the bituminous concrete mixture has

been compacted to the required surface density and smoothness. Continue rolling until all roller marks are eliminated. Provide a smooth compacted surface true to thickness and elevations required.

5. After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on the pavement until it has cooled and

hardened, and in no case sooner than 8 hours.

D. Joints for New Construction and Between Existing Pavement:

1. Carefully make joints between old and new pavements, and between successive days’ work, to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining work. Construct joints to have the same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of the asphalt concrete course.

2. Construction shall be as nearly continuous as is possible. The roller shall pass over the

end of the laid mixture only when a practical necessity.

3. When the operation of laying is interrupted, the end of the laid material shall be left unrolled until such time as work is resumed, in order that there be no joints throughout the project.

4. If it is necessary to roll the end of the laid mixture during construction, thus consolidating

it, the joint so made shall be cut back before resuming the operation of laying, in order to present a fresh, clean surface for contract with the newly placed material.

5. The edges of such joints shall be painted with liquid asphalt (RC-70 or MC-70) and the

use of hot smoothing irons in finishing such joints, shall not be permitted. E. Finished Surface

1. The surface of the top course of the pavement after compression shall be smooth and true

to crown and grade, free from depressions, waves, bunches, overlapping seams and unevenness in surface. All new surfaces shall meet existing surfaces smoothly and evenly.


321200 Page 6 of 6

2. After the compaction of the top course, the Contractor shall check the entire paved area for depressions, using a ten (10) foot wood or metal straightedge. Any depressions greater than three-sixteenths (3/16) of an inch shall be corrected by removing the top course of the affected areas, and replacing with new material to form a true and even surface.

F. Defects: Where defects in composition, compression or finish appear in the completed work,

such finished areas shall be removed to the full depth of the course and the defective material replaced with the required thickness of pavement at the expense of the contractor.

1. Patching: Remove and replace mixtures that become mixed with foreign materials and all

defective areas. Cut out such areas and fill with fresh hot asphalt concrete. Compact by rolling to the required surface density and smoothness. Remove deficient areas for the full depth of the course. Cut sides perpendicular and parallel to the directions of traffic with edges vertical. Apply a tack coat before placing asphalt concrete mixture.


A. Protect all work until acceptance of the project. Replace or repair pavement if damaged prior to acceptance.

B. Clean up all debris from installation procedures, including but not limited to bituminous

concrete and base material overflow into/onto areas indicated to be lawn or other surfaces. Remove from site all excess materials, debris and equipment. Contractor shall dispose of debris material legally.

C. Repair damage resulting from paving operation to other areas of the work.



321313 Page 1 of 10

SECTION 32 13 13 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. “Standard Specifications” shall mean the State of New York Department of Transportation Standard Specifications, its latest edition; and any supplemental specifications.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the materials, labor, installation and incidental costs for the installation of subbase material, base materials, colored Portland cement concrete, reinforcement and concrete stamping as follows:

1. Reinforced concrete pavement

2. Concrete curb

3. Concrete curb ramps

4. Concrete sidewalk

B. Coordinate the work of this Section with Section 32 12 16 - Bituminous Concrete Pavement and Markings.


A. Section 32 12 16 - Bituminous Concrete Pavement and Markings

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, expansive hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.

B. Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mix.

C. Color: Color samples for colored concrete. The contractor must receive approval of concrete colors prior to colored concrete work. See plans for concrete colors.

D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials. Contractor shall pay for all testing of concrete materials.

E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials complies with requirements:

1. Cementitious materials and aggregates

2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories

3. Admixtures

4. Curing compounds


321313 Page 2 of 10

5. Applied finish materials (i.e., traffic paint)

6. Joint fillers

F. Product Data Concrete Stamping/Imprinting: Submit manufacturer’s complete technical data sheets for the following:

1. Dry-shake colored hardener.

2. Powder antiquing release agent and Liquid clear release agent

3. Imprinting/Texturing tools.

4. Curing compound.


A. Materials and methods of construction shall comply with the following standards:

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

2. American Concrete Institute (ACI)

3. The State of New York Department of Transportation Standard Specifications

B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed pavement work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready-Mix Concrete Association's Plant Certification Program.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 shall be paid by the contractor to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant and each aggregate from one source. Do not change source of brands of cement, aggregate materials, or batching plant during course of work.

F. ACI Publications: Comply with all ACI requirements unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents which includes but is not limited to:

1. ACI 301 "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings."

2. ACI 302 IR "Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction."

3. ACI 303.1 "Standard Specification for Cast-In-Place Architectural Concrete."

4. ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing of Concrete."

5. ACI 305R "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting."

6. ACI 306R "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting."

G. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):


321313 Page 3 of 10

1. ASTM C309 "Standard Specifications for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete."

2. ASTM C494 "Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete."

H. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.

I. Concrete Stamp/Imprint Mockup:

1. Provide under provisions of Division 1 Section Quality Control.

2. At location on Project selected by Site Architect, place, and finish 4 feet by 4 feet area.

3. Construct mockup using processes and techniques intended for use on permanent work, including curing procedures. Include samples of control, construction, and expansion joints in sample panels. Mockup shall be produced by the individual workers who will perform the work for the Project.

4. Accepted mockup provides visual standard for work of Section.

5. Mockup shall remain through completion of the work for use as a quality standard for finished work.

6. Remove mockup when directed.

J. Concrete coloring must be used as intended per the chosen manufacturer’s specifications.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FORMS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

B. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, ¾” by ¾”, minimum.

C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

2.02 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars and Tie Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Plain, Cold-Drawn Steel Wire: ASTM A 82.

C. Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185.


321313 Page 4 of 10

D. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

E. Supports for Reinforcement: Chairs, spacers, dowel bar supports and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire fabric, and dowels in place. Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications.

1. Use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair leg.

F. Bending: All reinforcement shall be bent cold. Only competent mechanics shall be employed for cutting and bending, and proper appliances shall be provided for such work. The reinforcement shall be bent to the shapes shown on the plans.

1. Bends for stirrups and ties shall be made around a pin having a diameter not less than two times the minimum thickness of the bar.

2. Bends for other bars shall be made around a pin having a diameter not less than six times the minimum thickness of the bar.

3. For bar larger than one inch the pin shall not be less than eight times the minimum thickness of the bar. Reinforcement shall be formed to the dimensions indicated on the plans before it is embedded in the concrete.

G. Splices: All Splicing shall be as specified in American Concrete Institute (ACI) Building Code.

H. Placing and Fastening: Placing and Fastening shall be as specified in ACI Standards. Before any concrete is placed, all mortar shall be cleaned from the reinforcement. No concrete shall be poured until the Engineer has inspected the placing of the reinforcing metal and permission to place concrete is granted. All concrete placed in violation of this provision shall be rejected and removed.

2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. General: Use the same brand and type of cementitious material from the same manufacturer throughout the Project.

B. Concrete shall be Class C concrete in conformance with the Standard Specifications, Section 501 – Portland Cement Concrete. Concrete shall be 4000 psi. Batch mixing at project site not acceptable.

C. Compressive strength: 4,000 psi at 28 days.

D. Entrained air: 5 to 7%.

E. Reactive aggregates and calcium chloride are not allowed.

F. Water: Potable.

2.04 ADMIXTURES

A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures.

B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.

D. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.


321313 Page 5 of 10

2.05 CURING MATERIALS

A. Curing/sealing compound shall be equivalent to Day-Chem Sil-Cure J13.

2.06 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

B. Premolded Joint Filler Strips: ASTM D-994, premolded, resilient non-extruding joint filler conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M213.

C. Thickness and depth of expansion- and isolation-joint filler as indicated on the drawings.

D. Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, water-base emulsion; ready mixed; complying with FS TT-P-1952.

1. Color: Blue for handicapped requirements, yellow for fire lanes, white elsewhere.

2.07 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116.

1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional compaction. Do not begin concrete work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive concrete.

B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface and excavations immediately before placing concrete.

3.02 FORMS

A. Set, brace, and secure forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 72 hours after concrete placement.

B. Check completed formwork and screeds for grade and alignment to following tolerances:

1. Top of Forms: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

2. Vertical Face on Longitudinal Axis: Not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage.

D. Form recess to receive brick facing masonry in exposed ramp wall as detailed in the Drawings.


321313 Page 6 of 10

3.03 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

D. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

E. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) overlap to adjacent mats.

3.04 JOINTS

A. General: Construct contraction, construction, and isolation joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless indicated otherwise.

1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless indicated otherwise.

B. Contraction Joints: Provide weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as shown on Drawings. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least 1/4 of the concrete thickness, as follows:

1. Tooled Joints: Form contraction joints in fresh concrete by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with a radiused jointer tool.

2. Inserts: Form contraction joints by inserting pre-molded plastic, hardboard, or fiberboard strips into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with paving surface. Radius each joint edge with a jointer tool. Carefully remove strips or caps of two-piece assemblies after concrete has hardened. Clean groove of loose debris.

C. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than ½ hour, unless paving terminates at isolation joints.

1. Provide preformed galvanized steel or plastic keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless indicated otherwise. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.

2. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless indicated otherwise. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip paving unless indicated.

3. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated.

4. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete.

D. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 20 feet, unless indicated otherwise.


321313 Page 7 of 10

2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, not less than ½ inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface where joint sealant is indicated. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface when no joint sealant is required.

3. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together.

4. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with a metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

E. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour, unless pavement terminates at isolation joints.

1. Provide preformed galvanized steel or plastic keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.

2. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated.

4. Use a bonding agent or epoxy bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

F. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcing before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on surfaces that are frozen.

C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and alignment.

D. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

1. When concrete placing is interrupted for more than ½ hour, place a construction joint.

E. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

F. Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete complying with ACI 309R.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices.


321313 Page 8 of 10

G. Screed paved surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to form a smooth surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.

H. Place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the required depth below finish surface. Lay welded wire fabric or fabricated bar mats immediately in final position. Place top layer of concrete, strike off, and screed.

1. Remove and replace portions of bottom layer of concrete that have been placed more than 15 minutes without being covered by top layer or use bonding agent if acceptable to Engineer.

I. Curbs and Gutters: Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete.

J. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306R and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.

K. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete complying with ACI 305R and as specified when hot weather conditions exist.

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to below 90 deg F. Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.06 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. Float Finish: Begin floating when bleed water sheen has disappeared, and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes within a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 10 feet as determined by a 10-foot-long straightedge placed anywhere on the surface in any direction. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to a uniform granular texture.

1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across concrete sidewalk surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform fine line texture finish.

B. Final Tooling: Radius: 3/8 inch. Tool edges of paving, curbs, and joints formed in fresh concrete with a jointing tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges and joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.


321313 Page 9 of 10

C. Concrete Imprinting:

1. Begin imprinting operations immediately after applying powder antique release agent.

2. After the imprinted concrete surface has hardened sufficiently, the remaining unembedded antique release agent should be removed to the degree desired, using high-pressured water, by scrubbing or by buffing.

3.07 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with the recommendations of ACI 306R for cold weather protection and ACI 305R for hot weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Control: In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before floating.

C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

D. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by curing compound, as follows:

1. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TESTING

A. Employ a qualified independent testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement as follows:

B. The Contractor will employ a qualified testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include the following:

1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94.

a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive-strength test but no less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests will be required when concrete consistency changes.

b. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive-strength test but no less than one test for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.

c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens.

d. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless directed otherwise. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test specimens are required.


321313 Page 10 of 10

e. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd. but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. Test one specimen at 7 days, test two specimens at 28 days, and retain one specimen in reserve for later testing if required.

2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

3. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yd., the Engineer may waive strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.

4. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.

5. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

C. Test results will be reported in writing to the Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in paving, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day and 28-day tests.

3.09 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet the requirements of this Section.

B. Drill test cores where directed by the Engineer when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with Portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete paving not more than 2 days prior to date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.


A. Protect work completed until acceptance of project. Replace or repair concrete if damaged prior to acceptance.

B. As work proceeds, maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus material, and debris related to this work.



321413 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 321413 - UNIT PAVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. Under this item, the Contractor shall furnish and install precast concrete unit pavers and 2” stone base setting bed in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications and at the direction of the Engineer

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 31 22 13 - Formation of Subgrade 2. Section 31 23 16 - Earthwork 3. Section 32 11 23 - Processed Aggregate Base

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For concrete pavers.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of unit paver indicated.

C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type of unit paver indicated; in sets for each color,

texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics.

D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting material from one source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed unit paver installations similar in

material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.


321413 Page 2 of 6

C. Mockups: Before installing unit pavers, build mockups for each form and pattern of unit pavers required to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work, including same base construction, special features for expansion joints, and contiguous work as indicated:

1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by

Architect and Engineer. 2. Notify Architect and Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be

constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's and Engineer’s approval of mockups before starting unit paver installation. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the

completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed. 7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial

Completion. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect unit pavers and aggregate during storage and construction against soiling or contamination from earth and other materials.

1. Cover pavers with plastic or use other packaging materials that will prevent rust marks from steel

strapping. 2. Store materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.


A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work damaged by frost or freezing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Preferred Product: Permeable 4.5” x 9” as manufactured by Hanover Architectural Products, 5000 Hanover Road, Hanover, PA 17331 ph: Tel 800-637-0500, https://www.hanoverpavers.com/ as distributed locally by Homer C. Godfrey Co., Bridgeport, CT.

1. Color 1: Tan

https://www.hanoverpavers.com/


321413 Page 3 of 6

2. Color 2: Cream 3. Color 3: Natural 4. Color 4: Charcoal 5. Size: 4 1/2” x 9” x 3” 6. Finish: Tudor

B. Or Approved Equal

2.2 UNIT PAVER STANDARDS

A. Concrete Pavers: Solid, interlocking paving units, ASTM C 936-82, made from normal-weight aggregates in sizes and shapes indicated.

B. Cementitious Material: Portland Cements shall conform to ASTM Specification C0150. C. Aggregates: Fine and course aggregates shall conform to ASTM Specification C-33 for Normal

Weight Concrete Aggregate (no expanded shale or lightweight Aggregates) except that grading requirements shall not necessarily apply.

D. Other Constituents: Color pigments, air-entraining agents, integral water repellants, finely ground

silica, etc., shall be previously established as applicable, or shall be previously established as suitable for use in concrete.

E. Physical Requirements:

1. Compressive Strength - At the time of delivery to the work site, the average compressive strength

shall not be less than 8,000 psi, with no individual unit strength less than 7,200 psi as per ASTM Specification C936-82. Testing procedures shall be in accordance with ASTM Specification C-140.

2. Absorption – The maximum absorption of 5% of less at 50 cycles of freeze thaw testing per

section ASTM C67. 3. Resistance to Freezing and Thawing - The manufacturer shall satisfy the purchaser either by

proven field performance or a laboratory freezing and thawing test that the paving units have adequate resistance to freezing and thawing. If a laboratory test is used when testing in accordance with Section 8 of Method C67, specimens shall have no breakage and not greater than 1.0% loss in dry weight of any individual unit when subjected to 50 cycles of freezing and thawing.

2.3 AGGREGATE SETTING BED MATERIALS

A. Graded Aggregate for Joints: ¼” washed, open-graded, permeable, stone (AASHTO #8)

B. Graded Aggregate for fine setting bed: ¼” washed, open-graded, permeable stone (AASHTO #8). Stone shall be crushed and angular.

C. Graded Aggregate for course setting bed: washed, open-graded, permeable stone, no fines (AASHTO

#57). Stone shall be crushed and angular.


321413 Page 4 of 6

D. Graded Aggregate for base: washed, open graded, permeable stone, no fines (AASHTO #2)

E. Geotextile: Woven or nonwoven geotextile manufactured from polyester or polypropylene fibers, with a permeability rating 10 times greater than that of soil on which paving is founded and an apparent opening size small enough to prevent passage of fines from leveling course into graded aggregate of base course below.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SITE INSPECTION

A. Examine the substrate on which pavers will be laid and the conditions under which the work will be

performed. Notify the owner or consultant of any unsatisfactory conditions. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. All sub drainage or underground services within the pavement area must be completed with subgrade preparation and before the commencement of base construction.

C. Examine curb installation and confirm with owner or owner's representative and Contractor that curb installation is complete. Notify the owner or owner's representative of any unsatisfactory conditions with curb installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION/VERIFICATION OF SUBGRADE

A. The Sub-Contractor and Contractor shall ensure that the prepared subgrade is protected from damage from inundation by surface water and damage by other trades.

B. No traffic shall be allowed to cross the prepared subgrade. C. Repair of any damage resulting shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be repaired in a

satisfactory manner. D. Proof-roll prepared subgrade surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring additional

compaction. Proceed with unit paver installation only after deficient subgrades have been corrected and are ready to receive subbase for unit pavers.

3.3 PAVER VISUAL INSPECTION

A. All units shall be sound and free of defects that would interfere with the proper placing of the unit or impair the strength or performance of the construction. Minor cracks incidental to the usual methods of manufacture, or minor chipping resulting from customary methods of handling in shipment and delivery, shall not be deemed grounds for rejection.

B. Contractor shall not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that

might be visible or cause staining in finished work. 3.4 INSTALLATION, GENERAL


321413 Page 5 of 6

A. Mix pavers from three pallets or cubes minimum, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of

colors and textures. B. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges.

Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting and block splitting is not acceptable.

C. Joint Pattern: Running Bond D. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in

24 inches (3 mm in 600 mm) and 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.

3.5 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED PAVER APPLICATIONS

A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 laboratory density. B. Place geotextile over prepared subgrade, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches (300 mm). C. Place aggregate subbase/base in thickness or thicknesses as indicated. Compact by tamping with plate

vibrator and screed to depth required to allow setting of pavers. D. Place aggregate subbase/base over compacted subgrade. Provide compacted thickness indicated.

Compact subbase/base to 100 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum laboratory density and screed to depth required to allow setting of pavers.

E. Place geotextile over compacted base course, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches (300 mm). F. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25 to 38 mm), taking care that

moisture content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted. G. Treat leveling base with soil sterilizer to inhibit growth of grass and weeds. H. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) and a maximum of 1/8 inch (3 mm),

being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer bars. Use string lines to keep straight lines. Fill gaps between units that exceed 3/8 inch (10 mm) with pieces cut to fit from full-size unit pavers.

1. When installation is performed with mechanical equipment, use only unit pavers with spacer bars

on sides of each unit. I. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to 5000-lbf

(16- to 22-kN) compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Perform at least three passes across paving with vibrator. Vibrate under the following conditions: 1. After edge pavers are installed and there is a completed surface or before surface is exposed to

rain.


321413 Page 6 of 6

2. Before ending each day's work, fully compact installed concrete pavers to within 36 inches (900 mm) of the laying face. Cover open layers with nonstaining plastic sheets overlapped 48 inches (1200 mm) on each side of the laying face to protect it from rain.

J. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate pavers

and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling.

K. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints. L. Repeat joint-filling process 30 days later.

3.7 REPAIR, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement.

B. Cleaning: wash and scrub clean.



01 00 01 Page 1 of 8

SECTION 32 17 26 - DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS



Standard Specifications, January 1, 2018; its latest edition; and any supplemental specifications. 1.02 DESCRIPTION

A. This work shall consist of furnishing and installing a detectable warning surface at sidewalks, or other locations, as indicated on the plans or elsewhere in the contract documents. The surface of the surrounding concrete pavement shall have a coarse broom finish running perpendicular to the curb line, exclusive of the detectable warning fields. The ramp within two feet (2’) of the curb shall be finished with a detectable warning surface meeting the dimensional details and other requirements as noted on New York State Department of Transportation Metric Standard Sheet M608-5.

1.03 RELATED WORK

A. Related work is described in the following sections of the specifications:

1. Section 32 13 13 – Portland Cement Concrete Pavement

1.04 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM C-150 -Specification for Portland Cement. 2. ASTM C-33 -Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

3. ASTM C-140 - Specification for Concrete. 4 ASTM C-293 5. ASTM C-1028 6. ASTM C501, 50 7. ASTM C241

B. Tile Council of America (TCA)

1. TCA F102 - Installation Method Cement Mortar Bonded. 2. TCA F101 - Installation Method Cement Mortar Bonded.


01 00 01 Page 2 of 8

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

1. ANSI A-118.4 - Latex Portland Cement Mortar. 2. ANSI A-118.6 - Grout - Latex. D. Performance Requirements

1. Compressive Strength: At the time of delivery, the average compressive strength shall not be less than 8,000psi with no individual unit less than 7,000psi (48,000kPa) per ASTM C-140.

2. Water Absorption: Shall not be greater than 6% per ASTM C-936. 3. Flexural Strength: Shall not be less than 800psi (5,500kPa) per ASTM C-293. 4. Freeze/Thaw: Durability of the paver shall meet the freeze/thaw tests per Section 8 of

ASTM C-67 and shall have no breakage and not greater than 1 % loss in dry weight of any individual unit when subject to 50 cycles of freeze/ thaw.

5. Static Coefficient of Friction: ASTM C-1028 conditionally slip resistant: a. Wet: 0.50 - 0.60 and Dry: 0.60 - 0.70

6. Sizing Dimensions: Shall not differ by more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) from width, height, length or thickness. Unit shall conform to a true plane and not differ by more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) in either concave and/or convex warpage.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data:

1. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including preparation instructions, installation methods, storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

2. Submit test results from an independent testing laboratory for compliance with performance requirements specified herein.

3. Submit two copies of written instructions for recommended maintenance.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Layout drawings of each paved area showing the pattern of pavers, indicate pavers

requiring cutting, indicate setting bed methods in each area, drainage patterns and drains and indicate and relationship of paving joints. Include details of setting beds, noting all materials and their thickness, show details at curbs and vertical surfaces.

2. Details of custom (nonstandard) curbs and stair tread/risers, include methods of

installation.

C. Samples: 1. Submit two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of

available colors and texture. Color will be selected by Owner / Landscape Architect from manufacturer’s available standard and custom colors.


01 00 01 Page 3 of 8


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All products covered under this Section shall be produced by a single manufacturer unless otherwise specified with a minimum of ten (10) years proven production experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall have a minimum of three (3) years proven specialized

construction experience with this product and be capable of estimating & building from blueprint plans and details, in addition to proper material handling. All Work must comply with local, state/provincial licensing and bonding requirements.

C. Special Consideration: The paver manufacturer shall demonstrate, either by proven field performance or a laboratory freeze-thaw test, that the paving units have adequate durability if they are to be subjected to a freeze-thaw environment.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect Precast Concrete Pavers during shipment, storage and construction against damage. Store a

minimum of 4 inches off the ground on pallets in a dry location and cover with polyethylene to protect from contact with materials which would cause staining or discoloration.

B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in

accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

1. Do not work during freezing weather or on wet or frozen sub-base. 1.8 WARRANTIES / GUARANTEES

A. Tile Tech Detectable Warning Pavers shall remain free from defects for a period of ten (5) years. The contractor shall warrant that his work will remain free from defects of labor and materials used in conjunction with his work in accordance with the general conditions for this project or a maximum of three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion.


01 00 01 Page 4 of 8

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Tile Tech Pavers Inc, 888-380-5575 Phone: (213) 380-5560 Fax: (213) 380-5561

E-mail: [email protected] Website: www.tiletechpavers.com

2. Hanover Architectural Products, 5000 Hanover Road, Hanover PA 17331; Toll Free Tel: 800-426-4242; Tel: 717-637-0500; www.hanoverpavers.com

3. (Or approved equal).

2.2 MATERIALS A. Concrete Pavers: Detectable Warning or ADA Truncated Dome Pavers as manufactured by

acceptable manufacturer. 1. Color: Standard and custom range as provided by manufacturer 2. Size: Nominal 12”x12” 3. Thickness: 2” 4. Surface Finish: Shot-blasted & Sealed. 5. Edge Finish: 3/16” bevel on all four (4) sides.

2.3 PRECAST MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C-150 specifications for Portland Cement.

B. Aggregates: All aggregates to meet ASTM C-33 specifications, cleaned and properly graded to size. Aggregate shall be blended to meet individual project requirements. Aggregates to meet ASTM C241 & HA 10 minimum.

C. Coloring: Pigments used shall be inorganic, resistant to alkalinity and used per manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Color Blending: Factory-blend pre-cast paver that has a natural color range so products taken from one batch will have the same range as products from a separate batch.

E. Cleaner: Liquid neutral chemical cleaner with pH factor between 7 and 8, of formulation recommended by sealer manufacturer for type of precast paver used.

F. Sealer: Colorless, slip and stain resistant penetrating or acrylic sealer with pH factor between 7 and 10 that does not affect color or physical properties of precast paver surface.

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.tiletechpavers.com/

http://www.hanoverpavers.com/


01 00 01 Page 5 of 8

2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Bituminous Setting Bed Method 1. Asphalt Setting Bed Materials:

a. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D-3381, viscosity grade AC-10 or AC-20.

b. Fine Aggregate: Clean, hard sand, free of organic matter, uniformly graded from coarse to fine, all passing the No.4 sieve meeting the gradation requirements when testing in accordance with ASTM-C136.

c. Mixing: Provide plant mixed asphalt setting bed by combining approximately

93% dry fine aggregate and approximately 7% hot asphalt cement and heat to approximately 300 degrees F (149 degree C). Provide each ton of setting bed material apportioned by weight with the approximate ratio of 145lb (66kg) of asphalt to 1,855lb (841kg) of sand.

2. Setting Bed Primer: Cut back asphalt, ASTM D-2028, grade as recommended by

manufacturer. 3. Asphalt Adhesive: Standard neoprene modified asphalt adhesive containing oxidized

asphalt combined with 2% neoprene and 10% long fibered mineral fibers with a softening point of 155 degrees F.

2. Joint Filler Materials: Sand conforming to ASTM C-144 with 100% passing a No.16

sieve. 3. Pre-formed Asphalt Joint Filler: ASTM D-994, 1/2inch (13mm) thick, for expansion

joints which are not sealed, one of the following:

a. Code 1301 by W.R. Grace and Co. b. Asphalt Expansion Joint by W. R. Meadows, Inc. c. Elastite Asphalt Expansion Joint by The Celotex Corporation. d. or approved equal PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to starting work inspect the sub-grade to ensure that it has been properly prepared.

Commencement of work shall imply acceptance of sub-grade conditions. 1. Verify that sub-grade preparation, compacted density and elevations conform to the

specifications. Compaction of the soil sub-grade to at least 95% Standard Proctor


01 00 01 Page 6 of 8

Density per ASTM D-698 is recommended. Higher density or compaction to ASTM D-1557 may be necessary for areas subject to vehicular traffic.

2. Stabilization of the sub-grade and/or base material may be necessary with weak or saturated sub-grade soils. The Architect/Engineer should inspect sub-grade preparation, elevations, and conduct density tests for conformance to specifications.

4. Verify that aggregate base materials, thickness, compaction, surface tolerances, and elevations conform to the specifications.

3. Verify that base is dry, uniform, even, and ready to support sand, pavers, and imposed or anticipated vehicular loads.

6. Verify location, type, installation and elevations of edge restraints around the perimeter area to be paved.

B. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect in writing of deviations

from manufacturer's recommended installation tolerances and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with Tile Tech Pavers Inc. and other contributing manufacturer's instructions. Installation requirements vary for each individual project site. Precast Pavers used, pattern, grid layout, starting point, and finished elevation should be shown on plan view shop drawings, which have been prepared and approved by the designer, installing contractor and/or owner.

F. Placement Tolerance:

1. Maximum of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) height variation between adjacent pavers.

2. Individual pavers shall not vary more than 1/16 inch (1.6mm) from level across width of the paver.

3. Paved areas shall not vary more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) from level in a distance of 10 feet (3m) measured at any location and in any direction.

4. The surface elevation of pavers shall be 1/8 in. to 1/4 in. (3mm to 6mm) above adjacent drainage inlets, concrete collars or channels.

5. Joints between pavers to be 3/16 inch (4.8mm) or 1/8 inch (3mm). 6. Concrete shall not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) from required plane.

Concrete to be steel troweled with fine broom finish. No curing or sealing compound used.


01 00 01 Page 7 of 8

C. Bituminous Setting Bed Method Installation

1. Place solid steel 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick control bars directly on the base or slab. Install shims under bars for minor adjustment of depth and finish paver elevations. Space bars approximately 11 feet (3.4m) apart and parallel to each other to serve as guides for strike-off boards.

2. Place asphalt setting bed at not less than 200 degrees F (93 degree C) in panels between

control bars on the primed concrete slab or binder course to no less than 3/4 inch (19mm) compacted thickness. Spread material and strike off by pulling the material with a 12 feet long by 2 inches by 6 inches (3.7m by 51mm by 152mm) wood board several times to produce a smooth firm and even setting bed. Add fresh material in low, porous spots after each pass of the strike-off board. After each panel is complete remove and advance the first control bar to the next panel position in readiness for placing and striking adjacent panels. Fill in depressions left by the control bar.

3. Roll setting bed with a roller (not over one ton in weight) to a nominal depth of 3/4 inch

(19 mm) thick while it is still hot. Add additional material to adjust thickness required and to allow for setting of pavers to finish elevations and slopes.

a. If setting bed is installed greater than 1-1/2 inches (38mm) thick, place in two

equal lifts. Place the second lift immediately after the first to assure bond between lifts.

b. If pavers are not installed immediately after setting bed, provide protection of setting bed with minimum 1/2 inch plywood sheet laid on the setting bed with butted joints. Repair all damage to the setting bed prior to installing pavers.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed pavers until completion of project. B. Remove and replace pavers which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if

units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment to eliminate evidence of replacement before Substantial Completion.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Wash entire surface with phosphate free neutral cleaner with pH factor between 7 to 10 and rinse with clean water and allow to dry thoroughly.

3.06 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Deliver supply of maintenance materials to the owner. Furnish not less than 1 percent maintenance materials from same lot as materials installed, and enclosed in protective packaging with appropriate identifying labels.


NS-LIJ\div\32 17 23

North Shore – Long Island Jewish 32 17 23-8 Pavement Markings Women’s Hospital Stantec Consulting September 6, 2007 New Hyde Park, New York


ORNAMENTAL FENCE 32 31 19 - 1

SECTION 32 31 19 – ORNAMENTAL FENCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS



Standard Specifications, September 1, 2020; its latest edition and any supplemental specifications.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Under this Item the Contractor shall furnish and supply ornamental steel fencing, gates, accessories, concrete footings and grout in accordance with the plans, specifications and directions of the Engineer.


A. Section 03 30 01 – Cast-in-Place Concrete (Site)

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. Changes in specification may not be made after the bid date.

B. Shop Drawings: Layout of fence with dimensions, details and finishes of component accessories and post foundations.

C. Product Data: Manufacturer’s catalogue cuts indicating material compliance and specified options.

D. Samples: Color selections for finishes. If requested, samples of materials, (e.g. finials, caps, and accessories).

1.5 SPECIAL WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer’s standard limited warranty that its ornamental fence system is free from defects in material and workmanship including cracking, peeling, blistering and corroding for a period of 15 years from the date of purchase.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Ornamental Picket Fence Supplier ‘A’

1. Master Halco, Inc. P.O. Box 365 La Habra, CA 90633; phone (800) 833-8384. Products from other qualified manufacturers having a minimum of 5 years’ experience manufacturing ornamental picket fencing will be acceptable by the architect as equal, if



approved in writing, ten days prior to bidding, and if they meet the following specifications for design, size, gauge of metal parts and fabrication. (Note: fence is carried by a variety of distributors.)

2. Ornamental Picket Fence: a. Style: Imperial b. Heights: See Drawings for Heights c. Color: Black

B. Ornamental Picket Fence Supplier ‘B’

1. Ameristar Fence Products Inc., 60 Maple Street, Mansfield, MA 02048; phone (888) 333-3422; [email protected]. Products from other qualified manufacturers having a minimum of 5 years’ experience manufacturing ornamental picket fencing will be acceptable by the architect as equal, if approved in writing, ten days prior to bidding, and if they meet the following specifications for design, size, gauge of metal parts and fabrication.


C. Ornamental Picket Fence Supplier ‘C’

1. Iron World, 9390 Davis Avenue, Laurel, MD 20723; phone: (866) 310-2747; www.ironworldfencing.com. Products from other qualified manufacturers having a minimum of 5 years’ experience manufacturing ornamental picket fencing will be acceptable by the architect as equal, if approved in writing, ten days prior to bidding, and if they meet the following specifications for design, size, gauge of metal parts and fabrication.


2.2 ORNAMENTAL PICKET FENCE

A. Pickets: Steel square tubular members having a 25,000 psi (172 Mpa) yield strength.

1. Size pickets: 1 inch (19 mm). 2. Minimum gauge wall thickness 14 gauge. 3. Space pickets 3-15/16 inches maximum (100 mm) face to face. 4. Attach each picket to each rail with #6 stainless steel screws or pop rivets.

B. Rails: 1-1/2” (38mm) x 1” (25mm) x 1-1/2” (38mm), aluminum “U” channel having a 35,000 psi (241 MPa) yield strength.

1. Punch rails to receive pickets, screws and or rivets. 2. Attach rails to rail brackets with 2 each, 1/4 inch (6 mm) bolt w/ lock-nut.



3. Minimum gauge wall thickness 11 gauge.

C. Posts: Steel square tubular members (with interior offset bracing) having a 35,000 psi (241 MPa) yield strength.

1. Post Size B (60 inch high fence): 2 1/2 inches (135 mm), having minimum 11 gauge

wall thickness.

D. Accessories: Assembled panels with ornamental accessories attached using industrial drive rivets to prevent removal and vandalism.

E. Galvanizing: All fence steel shall be A-90 hot-dip galvanized prior to application of finish coating.

F. Finish: All pickets, channels, posts, fittings and accessories shall be polyester coated

individually after punching, drilling and layout, to ensure maximum corrosion protection. (Coating of assembled sections is unacceptable).

1. All components shall be given a four (4) stage “Power Wash” pre-treatment process

that cleans and prepares the galvanized surface to assure complete adhesion of the finish coat.

2. All metal shall then be given a polyester resin based power coating applied by the

electrostatic spray process, to a thickness 2.5 (.0635 mm) mils. The finish shall then be baked in an oven at 450 degrees F (232 degrees C) (metal temperature) for 20 minutes.

3. Color: Black

2.3 ORNAMENTAL PICKET FENCE ACCESSORIES

A. Rail attachment with bolt-through brackets

B. Ornamental Picket Fence Accessories: Provide indicated items required to complete fence system.

C. Post Caps: Formed steel, cast of malleable iron or aluminum alloy, weather-tight closure cap. Provide one post cap for each post.

D. Post Cap Style: Flat

E. Picket Top Style: Imperial top (pickets terminate inside of rail).

F. Color: Black



2.4 ORNAMENTAL PICKET FENCE SETTING MATERIAL

A. Concrete: Minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa). B. Flanged Posts: Provide flange type base plates with 4 holes for surface mounting of posts

where indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify areas to receive fencing are completed to final grades and elevations.

B. Ensure property lines and legal boundaries of work are clearly established.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Ornamental Picket Fence

1. Install fence in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Space posts uniformly at 7’ 8-3/4” maximum face to face unless otherwise indicated.

3. Concrete set gate posts: Drill holes in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. Holes shall have diameter 4 times greater than outside dimension of post, and depth approximately 6” deeper than post bottom. Excavate deeper as required for adequate support in soft and loose soils, and for posts with heavy lateral loads. Set post bottom 36” below surface when in firm, undisturbed soil. Place concrete around posts in continuous pour. Trowel finish around post and slope to direct water away from posts.

a. Gate posts and hardware: Set keepers, stops, sleeves into concrete. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and maintain in position during placement and finishing operations.

4. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and maintain during placement and finishing operation.

5. Align fence panels between posts. Firmly attach rail brackets to posts with 1/4” bolt and lock nut, ensuring panels and posts remain plumb.

3.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Install post caps and other accessories to complete fence. 3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean up debris and unused material, remove from site.



REFUSE ENCLOSURE 32 35 00 - 1

SECTION 32 35 55 – REFUSE ENCLOSURE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Under this Item the Contractor shall furnish and install a trash enclosure comprised of aluminum framing, composite wood panels, gates, accessories, concrete footings and all other appurtenances required to provide a complete installation in accordance with the plans, specifications and by directions of the Engineer/Landscape Architect.


A. Section 03 30 01 – Cast-in-Place Concrete (Site)

1.4 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials:

1. ASTM B 221-13 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire Profiles, and Tubes.

B. The Aluminum Association, Inc.

1. AA ADM-1516166 (1994) - Aluminum Design Manual

C. American Society of Civil Engineers.

1. ASCE 7-95 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Criteria:

1. Manufacturer is responsible for the structural design of all materials, assembly and attach-

ments to resist snow, wind, suction and uplift loading at any point without damage or per-manent set adhering to Local and New York State Building Codes.

2. Framing shall be designed in accordance with the Aluminum Design Manual to resist the

following loading as outlined in local codes.



a. ASCE 7-95 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil Engineers.

b. Final design plans must be stamped and sealed by a State of New York Licensed PE before final acceptance

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog data, detail sheets, specification and other data sufficient to indicate compliance with these specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layouts heights, component connection details, and details of interface

with adjacent construction. Final design plans must be stamped and sealed by a State of New York Licensed PE before final acceptance.

C. Samples:

1. Samples of Materials: Plankwall™ (or approved equal) 2. Color Selection: Full range of standard colors available for Landscape Architect's selec-

tion.

D. Certification: Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance certifying that panels supplied meet or exceed requirements specified.

E. Closeout Submittals: Warranty documents, issued and executed by manufacturer, countersigned

by Contractor. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of building authorities having jurisdic-

tion in Project location. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years documented experience producing sys-

tems specified in this section. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packag-

ing, with labels clearly indicating manufacturer and material. B. Storage and Handling: Protect materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent

damage.


A. Field Measurements: Take measurements of supporting paving, footings, or piers. Indicate meas-urements on shop drawings fully documenting any field condition that may interfere with the screen system installation.

1.10 COORDINATION



A. Installer for work under this Section shall be responsible for coordination of panel and framing

sizes and required options with the Contractor's requirements. 1. Request information on sizes and options required from the Contractor.

B. Submit shop drawings to the Contractor and obtain written approval of shop drawing from the

Contractor prior to fabrication. C. Confirm size, type, and location of supporting construction as adequate to resist column supports.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. If any part of the screen system fails because of a manufacturing defect within one year from the

date of substantial completion, the manufacturer will furnish without charge the required replace-ment part(s). Any local transportation, related service labor or diagnostic call charges are not in-cluded.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Products: Covrit Gates and Screening System by CityScapes International Inc, 4200

Lyman Ct. Hilliard, OH 43026. 1-877-727-3367 www.cityscapesinc.com www.covrit.com. (or approved equal)

B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 25 00. 2.2 MATERIALS

A. Plankwall™ ,PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride),

1. Minimum thickness: 3/16 inch (4.7625 mm).

B. Framing: Aluminum Plate, Shapes and Bar: ASTM B 221, alloy6005-T5, 6061-T5 or 6063-T5.

C. Threaded Fasteners: All screws, bolts, nut and washers shall be Stainless steel.

1. Corner assembly fasteners shall be #10-16 x stainless steel TEK screws.

2. Provide lock washer or other locking device at all bolted connections.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Provide factory-formed panel systems with continuous interlocking panel connections and indi-

cated or necessary components: Form all components true to shape, accurate in size, square and free from distortion or defects. Cut panels to precise lengths indicated on approved shop drawings.

B. Fabricate products to the following configurations:

1. Panel Style: Plankwall Vertical

http://www.cityscapesinc.com/

http://www.covrit.com/



2. ToughGate Gate Style: Madison

a. Handle: Classic Handle (one per gate leaf) b. Accessories: Drop Pin (one per gate leaf)

3. Panel and Gate Height: 6 feet

4. Gate Width: Custom (see drawings/details)

5. Decorative Top Rail Trim Profile: Boxed

6. Column Cap Style: Standard Hip

7. Dumpster Layout: Custom (see drawings/details)

C. Trim and Closures: Fabricated and finished with the manufacturers standard coating system, unless shown otherwise on drawings.

D. Framing: Fabricate and assemble components in largest practical sizes, for delivery to the site.

1. Construct corner assemblies to required shape with joints tightly fitted. 2. Supply components required for anchorage of framing. Fabricate anchors and related

components of material and finish as required, or as specifically noted.

E. Gate Hardware: Provide manufacturer’s standard adjustable cradle pipe hinge of size required to fit support pipe provided. Also provide

2.4 FINISHES

A. Aluminum Framing: Mill finish.

B. Panel Coating: Manufacturer's standard coating system, factory-applied.

1. Color: Selected from full range of manufacturer's standard colors.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Installer's Examination: Examine conditions under which construction activities of this section are to be performed. 1. Submit written notification to Landscape Architect and Screen manufacturer if such condi-

tions are unacceptable.

2. Beginning erection constitutes installer's acceptance of conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. Keep perimeter lines straight, plumb, and level. Provide brackets, anchors, and accessories nec-essary for a complete installation.



B. Fasten structural supports to paving, footings, or piers at spacing as indicated on approved shop

drawings.

C. Insert panels into structural supports, except where fixed attachment points are indicated. Butt panels to adjacent panels for uniform fit. Fasten fixed panels in accordance with the shop draw-ings.

D. Metal Separation: Where aluminum materials would contact dissimilar materials, insert rubber

grommets at attachment points, thus eliminating where dissimilar metals would otherwise be in contact.

E. Do not cut or abrade finishes which cannot be restored. Return items with such finishes to shop

for required alterations.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum misalignment from true position: ¼ inch.


A. Remove all protective masking from material immediately after installation.

B. Protection: 1. Ensure that finishes and structure of installed systems are not damaged by subsequent con-

struction activities.

2. If minor damage to finishes occurs, repair damage in accordance with manufacturer's rec-ommendations; provide replacement components if repaired finishes are unacceptable to Landscape Architect.

C. Prior to Substantial Completion: Remove dust or other foreign matter from component surfaces;

clean finishes in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Clean units in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.



32 91 13 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 32 91 13 – TOPSOIL

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, amending, placing and finish grading all on-site and borrow topsoil as shown on the

Drawings and specified herein. 1. Provide all borrow topsoil and compost necessary to properly complete all lawn and

planting operations. 2. Provide all amendments as required by soil testing to meet minimum Standards. 3. Provide 6" minimum depth of topsoil in all restored/seeded areas; or as directed by

Engineer.


A. Section 31 23 16 – Earthwork

B. Section 32 92 00 - Seeded Lawn 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Borrowed and Stockpiled Topsoil

1. Testing: Representative samples of borrow and on-site topsoil shall be completely

analyzed/ tested to determine:

a. Nutrient analysis using the Modified Morgan extractant for soil available P, K, Ca, and Mg.

b. Soil pH. c. Organic content- determined by loss of weight on ignition. Result shall be a

percentage of total. d. Particle size analysis - sand, silt, and clay - analysis shall be determined using

the hydrometer or pipette methods of particle size analysis with size fractions based upon size limits established by USDA.


32 91 13 Page 2 of 5

2. Topsoil testing costs shall be borne by the Contractor. 3. Testing laboratory shall be approved by the Owner and Engineer.

1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit topsoil test results for approval. B. Submit materials certificates and product data for the following items, clearly marked, to indicate

proposed materials. Printed data shall state application rates and amount of product to be added, if applicable.

1. Soil amendments and conditioners 2. Compost

C. Submit batch delivery tickets for the following items, indicating the trade name, the

supplier/distributor's name and the amount of product delivered to the contracting firm/project site.

1. Soil amendments and conditioners 2. Compost 3. Processed sand

D. Submit materials certificate and certified test report for processed sand and gravel.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TOPSOIL

A. Shall be clean, fertile, friable, and well draining; not to contain materials harmful to plant life. All topsoil to be screened free of any subsoil earth clods, sods, stones over 1/2 inch in any dimension, sticks, roots, weeds, litter and other deleterious material. Topsoil shall be uniform in quality and texture and contain specified organic matter and mineral elements necessary for sustaining healthy plant growth.

B. Topsoil shall have a pH of 6.0 to 8.0. C. Organic Matter Content: 4 - 8% D. Nutrient levels shall be achieved by the addition of amendments to the topsoil to meet the

optimum nutrient levels specified in the testing laboratory report. E. Topsoil shall meet the USDA Soils Textural Classification percentage of sand, silt and clay for

"sandy loam” or "fine sandy loam” classifications. F. Topsoil shall be free of any toxic chemical, waste or any material or condition that would prevent

the establishment of a suitable lawn.


32 91 13 Page 3 of 5

2.2 AMENDMENTS/CONDITIONERS:

A. As recommended by the Topsoil Test Report. 2.3 COMPOST

A. Compost shall be either Pioneer Valley Compost or Agresoil Premium Organic Compost as distributed by: Agresource, phone 800-313-3320 or approved equal.

B. Compost shall be derived from organic wastes such as food and agricultural residuals, animal

manures, mixed solid waster and biosolids (treated sewage sludge) that meet all State Department of Environmental Conservation requirements. The product shall be well composted, free of viable weed seeds and contain material of a generally humus nature capable of sustaining growth of vegetation, with no materials toxic to plant growth.

C. Compost shall have the following properties:

Parameters Range pH 5.5 - 8.0 Moisture Content 35% - 55% Soluble Salts 4.0 mnhos (dS) C:N ratio 15 - 30:1 Particle Size less than 1" Organic Matter Content greater than 50% of dry weight Bulk Density less than 1000 lbs./cubic yard Foreign Matter less than 1% (dry weight) D. Compost generator shall also provide minimum available nitrogen and other macro and micro-

nutrients to determine fertilizer requirements. E. Compost shall be added to meet all organic matter requirements.

2.4 SAND: Processed to meet the following particle size criteria:

Description Sieve Mesh Diameter of sieve (mm)

Allowable range % retained

Gravel 10 2.00 0- 5% Very coarse sand 18 1.00 0-20% combined with

Gravel Coarse 35 0.50 at least 60% in this range Medium 60 0.25 at least 60% in this range Fine 100 0.15 10% maximum Very Fine 270 0.05 3% maximum Silt 0.002 5% maximum Clay <0.002 3% maximum

In addition, there shall be 100% passing the No. 5 screen, and no more than 10% combined very fine sand, silt, and clay.


32 91 13 Page 4 of 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TOPSOIL PREPARATION: A. Provide properly amended topsoil to complete the work of this Section.

3.2 SHAPING AND GRADING OF SUBSOIL AT LAWN AREAS

A. At completion of rough grading, shape and grade subgrade areas to lines and levels as noted on the drawings.

B. Shape subgrade areas to allow placement of uniform depth of topsoil. Adjustments may be

necessary due to field conditions. Provide all shaping adjustments at no additional cost to the owner.

C. Harrow or otherwise loosen the subgrade soil to a depth of 4 inches. D. Remove all sticks, stones, or foreign material one-half (1/2) inch or greater in dimension from

surface. Remove debris and stone off-site.

3.3 SPREADING TOPSOIL/COMPOST MIX A. Do not apply topsoil materials to the scarified subgrade or gravel layer without approval by the

Engineer. No vehicular traffic or rubber tired equipment shall be allowed on finished subgrade. Topsoil materials shall not be spread until topsoil has been amended as required. Topsoil materials shall not be worked in a frozen or muddy condition.

B. Uniformly distribute and spread topsoil materials over all graded lawn areas to conform smoothly to the lines, grades, and elevations shown or otherwise required. Maintain consistent depths of material throughout the project area.

C. Manually supply topsoil around all trees to remain. Avoid damage to root systems. Depth of

topsoil around existing trees to be determined by Engineer. D. Spread topsoil mixtures in two (2) equal lifts in all locations scheduled to receive 8" or more total

topsoil thickness. Bottom lift shall be incorporated into the loosened subgrade or gravel layer as applicable, by disking, harrowing, or other approved means.

E. Place topsoil in layers that will provide the scheduled thickness after natural settlement and light

rolling. F. Spread topsoil from edges inward toward the middle of areas receiving topsoil. Do not allow

equipment directly on the loosened subgrade. G. Do not over compact the topsoil. Do not allow rubber-tired equipment on topsoil areas. Use the

lightest weight equipment practicable. Sequence operations to minimize the number of equipment passes required.

H. Track topsoil slopes -parallel to the fall line.


32 91 13 Page 5 of 5

I. Place topsoil materials only when it can be immediately followed by seeding operations. J. Resupply and place topsoil to eroded, settled or damaged areas until all lawn areas are stabilized.

Care shall be taken not to damage grass or pavement areas in the replacement to topsoil. K. Compact subgrade soils where fill is required to 80-85% maximum dry density.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Remove weeds prior to lawn development operations. No weeds shall be allowed to go to seed. B. Keep heavy equipment, trucks, etc. off topsoil areas at all times. C. If over compaction to topsoil occurs, scarify to the full depth of the topsoil and regrade topsoil.

3.5 EXCESS MATERIALS:

A. Excess material, including tailings from screening operations shall be legally disposed of offsite by Contractor.


A. Following spreading of topsoil, and prior to the start of seeding operations, set grades as shown on the plans.



32 92 00 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 32 92 00 – SEEDED LAWN

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Special

Conditions, apply to this Section. B. “Standard Specifications” shall mean the State of New York Department of Transportation



1. Seeding. 2. Fine grade subgrade soil. 3. Distribute and fine grade topsoil in lawn areas where water distribution piping and other

site work for this project are completed, feathering topsoil to match existing grades/lawn.

4. Seed designated areas receiving topsoil 5. Mowing, watering, and maintaining lawn until established and accepted. 6. Protection and security of lawn areas and repair of damage until acceptance of all lawn

areas.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture stating the botanical and common name and percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging.

1. Certification of each seed mixture for seed identifying source, including name and telephone number of supplier.

C. Product Certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Material Test Reports: For existing surface soil and imported topsoil.

E. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for each type of planting.

F. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of lawns during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods.


32 92 00 Page 2 of 6


A. Qualifications of Installers: Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the Work, who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and who shall direct all work performed under this Section.

B. Preventatives and Controls: Prior to the application of the preventatives and controls specified, confirm that each of the materials is permitted in the State of New York.

C. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of topsoil, per specification section 32 91 13 – Topsoil.

1. Report suitability of topsoil for lawn growth. State recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce a satisfactory topsoil.

1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Delivery and Storage:

1. Seed: Deliver seed in original sealed, labeled, and undamaged containers.

2. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site. 1.6 GUARANTEE

A. Duration of guarantee of seed shall be for a minimum of one year after final acceptance. Guarantee shall be for the quality of the seed and to ensure that the seed remains weed free. Contractor will not be held responsible for normal "wear and tear" of the field grass during the guarantee period.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Planting Restrictions: plant lawn between April 1 and June 1 and between August 15 and October 1 or as directed by the City’s representative.

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permits.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 LIME

A. Lime: ground limestone, 95% passing through a 100 mesh screen. Calcium carbonate equivalency of 90% or higher.


32 92 00 Page 3 of 6

2.2 FERTILIZER

A. Topsoil Fertilizer: complete at the ratios recommended in the topsoil test reports. B. Starter Fertilizer: guaranteed analysis of 10.20.10. C. Secondary Fertilizer: guaranteed analysis of 15.15.15.

2.3 TOPSOIL COMPOST

A. Compost shall be either Pioneer Valley Compost or Agresoil Premium Organic Compost as distributed by: Agresource, phone 800-313-3320 or approved equal.

B. Compost shall be derived from organic wastes such as food and agricultural residules, animal

manures, mixed solid waster and biosolids (treated sewage sludge) that meet all State Environmental Agency requirements. The product shall be well composted, free of viable weed seeds and contain material of a generally humus nature capable of sustaining growth of vegetation, with no materials toxic to plant growth.

C. Compost shall have the following properties:

Parameters Range

pH 5.5 - 8.0 Moisture Content 35% - 55% Soluble Salts 4.0 mnhos (dS) C:N ratio 15 - 30:1 Particle Size Less than 1" Organic Matter Content Equal to or greater than 50% Bulk Density Less than 1000 lbs./cubic yard Foreign Matter Less than 1% (dry weight)

D. Compost generator shall also provide minimum available nitrogen and other macro and micro-nutrients to determine fertilizer requirements.

2.4 SEED

A. Provide fresh, clean, new-crop seed; blue tag certified complying with the tolerance for purity and germination established by the Office of Seed Analysis of North America. Provide seed of the grass species, proportions and maximum percentages of weed seed. Provide seed in cleaned, sealed, properly labeled containers. Seed that is wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged will not be accepted. Handle seed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for exposure to extremes of heat, cold, or moisture.

B. LAWN SEED QUALITY:

1. Weed Seed: maximum of 0.50%, no noxious weed seed. 2. Purity: minimum 97% pure. 3. Crop: maximum 0.50%


32 92 00 Page 4 of 6

4. Germination Rate: minimum 80%

C. SEED MIXTURE (percent by weight):

65%-75% TALL FESCUE – Mix of three of the following varieties: Apache II. Arid 3, Cochise III, Coronado Gold, Falcon IV, Jaguar III, Lancer (SH), Master-piece, Rebel IV, Rebel Jr.(SH), Rebel Sentry, Rembrandt, Tomahawk E+

15%-20% BLUEGRASS - One or more of the following varieties: Able I (SH), Blacks-

burg, Glade (SH), Moonlight, Midnight, America (SH), Brilliant, Ram (SH), Touchdown (SH), Warren’s A-34 (SH), Bristol (SH), Lofts 1757 (SH)

10%-15% PERENNIAL RYEGRASS - One or more of the following varieties:

Brightstar II, Manhattan 4, Citation Fore, Elfkin

2.5 CHEMICAL PREVENTATIVES AND CONTROLS: Commercial materials labeled for turf maintenance.

2.6 WATER: Potable 2.7 MULCH: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat,

rye, oats, or barley. PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive lawns and grass for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operation.

B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

C. Determine quantity of approved stockpiled topsoil scheduled to be placed.

D. Based on topsoil testing reports, Contractor shall provide amendments and conditioners to topsoil to bring in compliance with project requirements. Bulk mix to produce a homogeneous product. Only stockpiled topsoil to be used on site is to be amended.

E. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future.


32 92 00 Page 5 of 6

F. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

G. Restore areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting.

3.3 TOPSOIL AMENDMENT RATES OF APPLICATION

A. Refer to specification Section 32 91 13 – Topsoil for recommended amendment rates of application for seeded lawn.

3.4 SPREADING TOPSOIL AND SEED BED PREPARATION

A. Do not apply topsoil materials to the scarified subgrade without approval by the Engineer. No

vehicular traffic or rubber tired equipment shall be allowed on finished subgrade. Topsoil materials shall not be spread until topsoil has been amended as required. Topsoil materials shall not be placed or worked in a frozen or muddy condition.

B. Uniformly distribute and spread topsoil materials over all graded lawn areas to conform smoothly to the lines, grades, and elevations shown. Spread all amended and prepared topsoil over prepared subgrade to a depth of six (6) inches over. Final depth of topsoil after rolling shall be six (6) inches.

C. Spread topsoil and incorporate into the loosened subgrade by raking or other approved means. D. Place topsoil in layers that will provide the scheduled thickness after natural settlement and light

rolling. All areas to receive seed shall be compacted evenly and uniformly using a two-hundred pound (200 lb.) roller. The area shall then be thoroughly watered prior to the placement of seed. After drying out sufficiently, the area shall be considered ready to receive the seed.

E. Do not over compact the topsoil. Do not allow rubber-tired equipment on topsoil areas. Use the

lightest weight equipment practicable. F. Resupply and place topsoil to eroded, settled or damaged areas until all lawn areas are stabilized.

Hollows, depressions, and gullies shall be raked smooth and filled with topsoil, if necessary to achieve a smooth surface. When added topsoil is four inches (4") or more in depth, it shall be compacted to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Care shall be taken not to damage grass or pavement areas in the replacement to topsoil.


A. Finished grade of placed topsoil shall be within a tolerance of +0.1 feet to the design grade elevation. Correct any areas outside of this range until as acceptable uniform grade is obtained.

3.6 SEEDING

A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged.

B. Sow seed at the rate of 3 to 4 lb/1000 sq. ft.


32 92 00 Page 6 of 6

C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of topsoil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.

D. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches in loose depth over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment.

3.7 DISEASE CONTROL

A. Treat any diseased seeded lawn areas with proper disease control product in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations, as required after diagnosis of disease organisms and with the approval of the Owner.

B. Time: Conform to the manufacturer's recommendations. C. Rate: Conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.8 EXCESS MATERIALS

A. Excess stockpiled topsoil is to be legally disposed of offsite by the Contractor. B. Other excess material, including tailings from screening operations shall be legally disposed of

offsite.

3.9 PROTECTION

A. Remove weeds prior to lawn development operations. No weeds shall be allowed to go to seed. B. Keep heavy equipment, trucks, etc. off topsoil areas at all times. C. If over compaction to topsoil occurs, scarify to the full depth of the topsoil and regrade topsoil.

3.10 PROJECT CLEAN-UP

A. Upon completion of all lawn areas, remove all excess soil, debris, and other materials resulting from work operations of this Section. Restore all improvements to original condition. Broom clean all walks and pavements. All clean-up shall be completed at the end of each working day.

B. Upon stabilization of lawn areas, remove all erosion control systems. Re-seed as required.



32 93 00 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 32 93 00 - LANDSCAPE PLANTING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services etc. necessary and incidental for the completion of all landscape work as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

B. The Contractor shall be liable for any damage to property caused by landscaping operations and all areas

and construction disturbed shall be restored to their original condition to the satisfaction of the Director’s Representative.

C. The Contractor shall carefully correlate his work with that of other Contractors. D. The Contractor is required to install and maintain his finished work at his expense as specified.


A. Section 32 92 13 –Topsoil 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit copies of the manufacturer's and/or source data for all materials specified, including soils.

B. Samples: Submit samples of all topsoil. Samples shall weigh 2 lbs and be packaged in plastic bags.

Samples shall be typical of the lot of material to be delivered to the site and provide an accurate indica-tion of color, texture, and organic makeup of the material.

C. Plant Photographs: Submit color photographs of representative specimens of each type of shrub on the

plant list. Photos shall be 3 x 5 in. taken from angle that depicts the size and condition of the typical plant to be furnished. A scale rod or other measuring device shall be included in the photograph. For species where more than 20 plants are required, include a minimum of three photos that show the average plant, the best quality plant, and the worst quality plant to be provided. Label each photograph with the plant name, plant size, and name of the growing nursery.

D. Nursery Sources: Submit a list of all nurseries that will supply plants, along with a list of the plants they

will provide and the location of the nursery.

E. Soil Test: Submit soil test analysis report for each sample of topsoil and planting mix per submittal re-quirements Section 32 91 13 – Planting Soil.

1.4 MATERIALS STORAGE AND CLEAN-UP

A. The Contractor shall keep the premises free from rubbish and all debris at all times and shall arrange his material storage so as not to interfere with the operation of the project. All unused materials, rubbish and debris shall be removed from the site.

1.5 COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE


32 93 00 Page 2 of 5

A. The Contractor shall notify the Director’s Representative when the work of this section is substantially complete. The Director’s Representative shall then review the work and prepare the “punch list” of items remaining or work that is unacceptable. At this time the Director’s Representative may issue the “Notifi-cation of Substantial Completion” if the majority of the work is complete to the satisfaction of said Di-rector’s Representative.

B. The completion of the contract will be accepted and Notice of Completion recorded only when the entire

contract is completed to the satisfaction of the Director’s Representative.

C. Work under this Section will be accepted by City of New Rochelee and Director’s Representative upon satisfactory completion of all work including "punch list" items.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. All plant material (shrubs) and planting supplies (edging, bark mulch, etc.) shall be guaranteed for a peri-od of one (1) year from the date of “Notification of Substantial Completion“ of the landscaping installa-tion.

1.7 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE

A. The Landscape Contractor shall maintain his finished work for a period of not less than one (1) year commencing from the time the installation is complete to the satisfaction of the Director’s Representa-tive.

B. IMPORTANT: It is the Contractor's responsibility to determine water application rates. Water if rainfall

does not exceed 3/4" in any 8 day period. C. The Landscape Contractor shall maintain the landscaping until final acceptance. D. Maintenance shall include weeding, cultivating, edging, pruning, repair of minor washouts, soil replace-

ment and other horticultural operations necessary for the proper growth of all plants, and for keeping the entire area within the planting area neat in appearance.

E. All planting areas shall be cultivated and weeded with hoes or other approved tools within the period

from May 1st to October 31st and such cultivating and weeding shall be repeated at least every three (3) weeks. Under no conditions shall weeds be allowed to attain more than six (6) inches of growth. At the expiration of the guarantee period the area shall be cultivated and weed free.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Planting Soil

A. Refer to Section 32 91 13 – Topsoil 2.2 PLANTING SOIL MIXTURE

A. Topsoil for backfilling plant pits and shrub bed areas shall be mixed with well rotted manure in the fol-lowing proportions:

Seven (7) cubic yards of topsoil to two (2) cubic yards of manure. They shall be thoroughly mixed by

placing the manure evenly over the topsoil piles and turning the piles at least three (3) times or until thor-oughly mixed to the satisfaction of the Director’s Representative.

2.3 PLANT STOCK


32 93 00 Page 3 of 5

A. Plant material shall be first quality stock and shall conform to the code of standards set forth in the cur-rent edition of the American Standards for Nursery Stock sponsored by the American Association of Nurserymen, Inc.

B. Species and variety as specified on the drawings and delivered to the site shall be certified true to their

genus, species and variety and as defined within the current edition of International Code of Nomencla-ture for Cultivated Plants, issued by the International Union of Biological Sciences. Substitutions are not permitted without Director’s Representative's written approval. 1. For plant size and types see Drawings for plant list.

C. Plants shall be nursery grown and shall be of varieties specified in the plant list bearing botanical names.

D. Planting stock shall be well-branched and well-formed, sound, vigorous, healthy, free from disease, sun-

scale, windburn, abrasion, and harmful insects or insect eggs; and shall have healthy, normal unbroken root systems. Deciduous trees and shrubs shall be symmetrically developed, of uniform habit of growth, with straight trunks or stems, and free from objectionable disfigurements. Evergreen trees and shrubs shall have well-developed symmetrical tops with typical spread of branches for each particular species or variety. Plants shall have been grown under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of the pro-ject. Plants budding into leaf or having soft growth shall be sprayed with an anti-desiccant at the nursery before digging.

E. Stock Sizes: All stock measurements - caliper, height branching level, number of canes, ball sizes shall

be in strict accordance with the latest edition of the American Standard for Nursery Stock. Minimum ac-ceptable sizes as specified on the Drawings.

F. All stock shall be balled and burlapped or container grown stock. Bareroot stock of any kind is unac-

ceptable unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

2.4 MULCH FOR PLANTING PITS/BEDS (SHREDDED BARK)

A. Shredded cedar bark mulch shall be a natural forest product composed of shredded bark or wood not ex-ceeding three inches (3”) in length and on inch (1”) in width. Mulch shall be derived from tree material, not from wood waste or by-products like sawdust, shredded palettes, or other debris. It shall be of a uni-form grade and dark brown color with no additives or any other treatment. Mulch with leaves, twigs, and/or debris shall not be acceptable. The pH factor should range from 5.8 to 6.2.

2.5 WATER

A. Water shall not contain elements toxic to plant life. 2.6 ANTI-DESICCANT

A. Anti-desiccant shall be an emulsion that will provide a film over plant surfaces permeable enough to permit transpiration, and not damage the plant.

2.7 ABOVE GROUND SUPPORT

A. Shall be wooden stakes, commercially available product or system developed for supporting trees. Wooden stakes shall be 8 to 10 feet long with a minimum diameter of 2 to 2 1/2:” or stakes 12’ long which shall have a minimum diameter of 3 inches. The maximum diameter of stakes shall not exceed 4 inches. Stakes shall be pointed at one end. All wooden stakes shall be sounds and free from insects and fungi.


32 93 00 Page 4 of 5

a. Tree Tie: Tree tie for guying plants shall HORTtie Tree and Garden Tie (or approved equal. Equal must be of extra strong commercial grade with a 1000 lb. tensile strength. Use of wire for guying plants will not be permitted.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL PREPARATION

A. Contractor shall notify Landscape Architect when trees and larger shrubs are available for tree tagging. The contractor shall provide adequate time for arrangements to be made for the consultant to perform re-quired tree tagging.

B. Prior to beginning the work of this section, verify that site grading and preparation have been properly

completed. C. Clearing shall consist of the satisfactory removal and disposal of brush and rubbish occurring within all

lawn and planting areas.

D. UNDERGROUND OBSTRUCTIONS TO PLANTING 1. If underground utilities, are encountered, other locations for planting may be selected by the Direc-

tor’s Representative. Damage to utility lines shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense at no addi-tional cost to the City of New Rochelle.

2. Remove all miscellaneous debris below the ground surface and dispose of according to the specifica-

tions.

E. PREPARATION OF PLANTING MIXTURE 1. Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps and other extraneous materials

harmful or toxic to plant growth, by screening.

2. To prepare planting mixture mix recommended soil amendments and fertilizers with topsoil at rates specified. Delay addition of fertilizer if planting mixture will not be used within two (2) days.

3.2 PLANTING

A. All planting shall be performed by personnel familiar with the accepted procedure of planting and under the constant supervision of a qualified planting foreman.

B. All planting is to be done as shown on drawings and as specified herein and in strict accordance with

standard horticultural practices. C. PLANTING SEASONS AND CONDITIONS

1. Planting shall be done only when the ground is not frozen, snow covered, or in an otherwise unsuita-

ble condition for planting.

2. Unless otherwise directed by the Director’s Representative, deciduous material shall be planted from March 1st to June 1st and from October 15th to December 15; evergreen material shall be planted from April 1st to May 15th and from September 1st to October 15th, or as approved by the Direc-tor’s Representative


32 93 00 Page 5 of 5

D. LAYOUT 1. Plant material locations and bed outlines shall be staked on the project site by the Contractor and

approved by the Director’s Representative before any plant pits or beds are excavated. Plant materi-al locations may be adjusted by the Director’s Representative to meet field conditions.

E. INSTALLATION OF PLANTS

1. Setting Plants:

a. Balled and burlapped and container-grown plants shall be handled and moved only by the ball

or container. Plants shall be set plumb and held in position until sufficient soil has been firmly placed around roots or ball. Plants shall be set in relation to surrounding grade so that they are even with the depth at which they are grown in the nursery, collecting field, or container. Ferti-lizer in tablet form shall be placed prior to backfilling and in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications.

b. Balled and burlapped stock shall be backfilled with planting soil mixture to approximately half

the depth of the ball and then tamped and watered. Burlap and tying materials shall be carefully removed or opened and folded back from top 1/3 of root ball. The remainder of backfill of planting soil mixture shall be tamped and watered. Earth saucers or water basins shall then be formed around the base of each plant.

c. Container-grown stock shall be removed from containers without damaging plant or root sys-

tem. Planting shall be completed as specified for balled or burlapped plants.

2. Mulching:

a. Shredded cedar bark mulch for planting beds shall be installed to a minimum depth of three inches (3") in all areas specified on the landscaping plans.

b. Prior to the installation of bark mulch all areas to be covered shall be weed free.

c. Mulching shall take place within 48 hours after planting.

d. Mulch shall be kept out of the crowns of shrubs and off buildings, sidewalks, light standards,

and other structures.

e. The top of all areas of cedar bark cover shall be 1" below the top of adjacent curb, walk or edge of pavement.

3. Pruning - New plant material shall be pruned in the following manner:

a. Dead and broken branches shall be removed. Pruning of deciduous shrubs shall be minimal. Evergreen plants shall not be pruned except to remove dead or broken branches.

b. Typical growth habit of individual plants shall be retained with as much height and spread as is

practicable. c. Cuts shall be made with sharp instruments, and shall be flush with trunk or adjacent branch to

insure elimination of stubs. "Headback" cuts at right angles to line of growth shall not be per-mitted.

d. Trimmings shall be removed from the site.



329413 Page 1 of 2

SECTION 32 94 13 - STEEL EDGING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Under this Section the Contractor shall provide and install all steel edging and hardware items including, but not limited to the following: 1. Provide and install steel sections. 2. Provide and install tapered steel stakes.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of steel edging and stakes. Provide fully dimensioned shop drawings (details) for all specified improvements for review and approval by the engineer.

1. Submit specifications for green weather resistant paint.

B. Material samples: Submit metal samples of all actual metal components of steel edging.

Samples shall be of minimum dimension to clearly illustrate all shapes and components as specified. 1. All samples shall be inspected and approved by the Landscape Architect as to

conformance with all requirements and shall be retained as check specimens to establish a standard of quality required. Do not proceed with work without approval of sample materials.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Steel Edging shall be “Ryerson Steel Edge” as manufactured by Ryerson-Thypin Steel Co., Eastern, PA or approved equal. 1. Steel shall consist of lengths of hot rolled steel sections, three eights (3/8”) inch thick by

five (5”) inches depth by twenty (20’) feet in length. 2. Tapered steel stakes, eighteen (18”) long.


329413 Page 2 of 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION A. The steel edging shall be installed true to line and grade in accordance with the designs

indicated on the plans. All bends and curves shall be smooth and uniform. Where bends or curves are of such radius as to makes field bending impractical, they shall be made in the shop. All joints shall be welded as shown on the detail sheet.

B. Upon completion of steel installation, the steel shall be painted using weather resistant paint,

black in color.



331000 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 331000 - WATER DISTRIBUTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


B. “Standard Specifications” shall mean the State of New York Department of Transportation Standard Specifications, latest edition and any supplemental specifications

C. Suez Water Standard Specifications, latest edition, which document shall be considered as a part of these specifications.

1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Work under this item shall consist of the installation of a new cement-lined ductile iron water main, connection to existing water mains and installation of new water services where shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. Work shall also include the installation of blow-offs and hydrants where shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.

B. Work under this item shall include, but not be limited to:

1. Furnishing and installation of new water line

2. Connecting to existing water main

3. Furnishing and installation of corporation stops

4. Furnishing and installation of curb stops and curb boxes

5. Furnishing and installation of ductile iron or copper piping

6. Furnishing and installation of new meter and RPZ and heated enclosure

7. Testing and disinfection

8. Bituminous pavement repair

C. Coordinate the Work of this section with Section 31 23 16 - Earthwork and Section 31 23 33 - Trenching.

1.04 RELATED WORK

A. Section 31 23 16 - Earthwork

B. Section 31 23 33 - Trenching

C. Section 32 11 23 - Processed Aggregate Base

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's data sheets with specifications for ductile iron piping, copper tubing, corporation stops, backflow preventers, and curb stops shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

B. Alternative methods of water service installation shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.


331000 Page 2 of 4

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. All materials including corporation stops, service saddles, couplings, curb stops, curb boxes shall conform to water company and City standard specifications.

2.02 WATER MAIN

A. Water main lines shall be various diameter cement-lined ductile iron pipe as shown on the plans.

2.03 PE FILM, PIPE ENCASEMENT

A. ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105; PE film, tube, or sheet; 8-mil (0.2-mm) thickness.

2.04 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. AWWA C151, Class 56. Fittings shall be ductile iron or cast iron, AWWA C110, 250 PSI, mechanical joint or AWWA C153, ductile iron compact fittings, 350 PSI, mechanical joint.

B. Lining: AWWA C104, cement mortar, seal coated.

C. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

D. Encasement: AWWA C105, polyethylene film tube.

2.05 WATER METER:

Coordinate the furnishing and installation of water meters with the City of New Rochelle and Suez Water.

2.06 FIRE HYDRANTS:

Coordinate the furnishing and installation of hydrants with the City of New Rochelle and Suez Water.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TRENCHING

A. Sawcutting, trenching, bedding and backfilling are covered under Section 312316 “Earthwork.”

B. Minimum cover over pipe shall be 4 feet deep – NO EXCEPTIONS. ALL SERVICES

SHALL BE INSPECTED BY THE CITY OR SUEZ BEFORE THEY ARE BACKFILLED. Services not visually inspected shall be pressure tested before the meter is set. The test will check to see if the service can hold the distribution systems static pressure.

3.2 INSTALLING PIPE

A. Installation shall conform to City of New Rochelle and Suez standard guidelines and specifications.

B. Service taps must be done in a minimum 7’ x 4’ trench. There must be six (6) inches of

clearance below and behind water main. Trench must be dewatered and in compliance with OSHA trench requirements. Service pipes are to be left uncovered so that a representative


331000 Page 3 of 4

from the City of New Rochelle and Suez personnel can make an inspection to see that the installation conforms to the Rules and Regulations.

C. Pipe shall be laid to the lines and grades approved. Water service line shall run

perpendicular to the water main from top to curb valve and in a straight line from the curb valve to the point of entrance to the building. Where the pipe crosses existing utilities, a minimum vertical clearance of 12 inches shall be maintained, except for storm and sanitary sewer pipes, where a minimum vertical clearance of 18” shall be maintained. A minimum horizontal distance of 12-18 inches shall be maintained at all times between the water pipe and sewer pipe. Water pipe shall be laid at least 5 feet away from electric lines and natural gas lines, and shall be 10 feet from leaching fields, oil tanks, gas tanks and any associated lines.

D. In accordance with current state laws, rules and regulations, metallic warning tape is

required on all water service installations. Warning tape will be installed no less than 12 inches and no more than 18 inches above each service pipe.

3.3 FIRE HYDRANT

A. If required, fire hydrant assembly shall be installed according to City of New Rochelle and Suez Rules and Regulations.

3.4 TAP TO EXISTING MAIN

A. Prior to tap, clean outside of existing main thoroughly. Use suitable lubricant to assure proper seal.

B. Install tapping sleeve and tighten bolts in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations. Install tapping valve and test apparatus as recommended by manufacture and required by City of New Rochelle and Suez Water.

C. Support tapping machine during operation. Support new service pipe to be attached to the

valve.

D. Service taps are to be left uncovered so that a representative from the City of New Rochelle and Suez personnel can make an inspection to see that the installation conforms to the Rules and Regulations.

3.5 WATER METER INSTALLATION

A. All meter settings shall be subject to the approval of the City of New Rochelle and Suez Water. Meters must be set in an accessible place which will permit reading and resetting without necessary delay. Coordinate water meter installation with Suez Water.

B. Meters should be located far enough away from street to provide sufficient protection from

traffic.

C. The water table must be at least 3 ½ feet below finish grade of installation.

D. Pressure regulators shall be located inside the building.


331000 Page 4 of 4

3.6 DISINFECTION AND PRESSURE TESTING

A. All water service pipes shall be leakage tested by the installer according to City of New Rochelle and Suez Water Rules and Regulations.

B. All water pipe shall be disinfected by the installer according to City of New Rochelle and

Suez Water regulations.

C. It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to dispose of all cholorinated water used to disinfect a water main. This shall be accomplished in accordance with the federal Clean Water Act and New York D.E.C. standards for disposal. It may involve running the water through a burlap bag containing a dechlorinating agent. The City of New Rochelle and Suez must be notified prior to any dechlorinating operations.



333000 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 333000 - SANITARY SEWER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS



Standard Specifications, latest edition and any supplemental specifications 1.02 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Furnish and install gravity sewer pipe from a point five (5) feet outside of any building construction to the point of tie-in at the existing point of tie-in to the existing public sewer system. This section also includes the following:

1. Trenching, including dewatering and shoring.

2. Backfill and compaction.

3. Connecting to existing sanitary manhole and main line as shown on the Drawings. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 31 23 16 - Earthwork B. Section 31 23 33 - Trenching C. Section 31 25 00 - Erosion and Sediment Controls


A. Environmental Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of local environmental agency regulations pertaining to sanitary sewerage systems.

B. Utility Compliance: Compliance with local utility regulations and standards pertaining to sanitary sewerage systems.

C. All work shall be in accordance with the local/regional sanitary sewer authority.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for drainage pipes and specialty products.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CAST IRON SEWER PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Gravity Pipe: Cast Iron Sewer Pipe and Fittings conforming to the following:

1. Cast Iron Sewer Pipe and Fittings, ASTM A 74.

2. Gaskets: ASTM C 564.


333000 Page 2 of 3

2.02 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) SEWER PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Gravity Pipe: PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings conforming to the following: 1. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 (DN375) and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, for

solvent-cemented or gasketed joints. 2. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.

2.02 CEMENT MASONRY

A. Cement masonry for plugging existing sanitary main shall conform to Article M.08.02, Form 816.

2.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape, 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick, solid green in color with continuously printed caption in black letters "CAUTION - SEWER LINE BURIED BELOW".

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 31 23 16 - Earthwork. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of sanitary sewer piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken

continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line, and pull past each joint as it is completed.

C. Install gravity-flow piping and connect to building's sewer lines, of sizes and in locations

indicated. Terminate piping as indicated.

1. Install piping to grade and elevations as shown on plans. 2. Install piping with minimum cover as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF IDENTIFICATION


333000 Page 3 of 3

A. Install continuous plastic underground warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground water service piping. Locate 6 to 8 inches directly over piping.

3.4 CLOSING ABANDONED SYSTEMS

A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below:

1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8-inch thick, brick masonry bulkheads or with at

least 8-inch thick, cast-in-place concrete plug. 2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, cast-in-place concrete

plugs or other acceptable methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs.

B. Abandoned Structures: Excavate around structure as required and use one procedure below:

1. Remove structure and close open ends of remaining piping. 2. Remove top of structure down to at least 36 inches below final grade. Fill to within 12

inches of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt. Fill to top with concrete. 3. Backfill to grade according to Division 2 Section "Earthwork."


A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed.

1. In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning. 2. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops. 3. Flush piping between manholes and other structures to remove collected debris, if required

by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred.

Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. If inspection indicates poor alignment, debris, displaced pipe, infiltration, or other defects, correct such defects and re-inspect.



334000 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 33 40 00 - STORM DRAINAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL






A. This Section includes the installation of storm drainage catch basins, storm drainage piping, geotextile, drainage stone, rip-rap and other components for a complete installation as indicated on the Drawings.

B. The work of this specification also consists of providing all labor, material, equipment and

services required for all work described herein, to provide and install round solid and perforated polyethylene pipe for storm drainage piping and catch basins to collect and convey subsurface water by gravity flow.

C. Unless otherwise specified, the plans and specifications are intended to include everything

obviously requisite and necessary for the proper installation and completion of the work whether each necessary item is mentioned herein or not.


A. Section 31 23 16 - Earthwork B. Section 31 23 33 - Trenching

C. Section 03 30 01 - Cast-in-Place Concrete (Site)

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments for the following:

1. Precast concrete catch basins including frames, covers, and grates. 2. Cast-in-place concrete catch basins including frames, covers, and grates.

B. Submit pipe and bedding material certifications, including flat drain materials.


334000 Page 2 of 6


A. Do not store plastic structures, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight. B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.

C. Handle precast concrete catch basins and other structures according to manufacturer's written

rigging instructions.


A. Site Information: verify existing utility locations. B. Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under

the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer’s written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE DRAINAGE PIPE

A. Polyethylene Pipe: Corrugated smooth-lined high-density polyethylene pipe (HDPE),

conforming to ASTM F405-05. HDPE shall be Type N-12 as manufactured by Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc (ADS) Staybrook Industrial Area, Ludlow, MA. 01056, or approved equal. Sizes 4 - 18 inch (N-12) shall have a full circular cross-section, with an outer corrugated pipe wall and an essentially smooth inner wall (waterway). Corrugations for these sizes may be either annular or spiral. All sizes shall conform to the AASHTO classification “Type S”, which describes pipe with a smooth waterway.

1. Size: See drawings for diameter pipe sizes.

B. Pipe manufactured for this specification shall comply with the requirements for test methods, dimensions, and markings found in AASHTO Designations M252 and M294. Pipe and fittings shall be made from Virgin PE compounds which conform with the requirements of cell Class 324420C as defined and described in ASTM D3350.

C. The minimum parallel plate stiffness values when tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 shall be as follows:

Diameter Pipe Stiffness 4" (100 mm) 50 psi (340 kPa) 6" (150mm) 50 psi (340 kPa) 8" (200mm) 50 psi (340 kPa) 10" (250mm) 50 psi (340 kPa) 12" (300mm) 50 psi (340 kPa)


334000 Page 3 of 6

D. Pipe coupler connections shall be watertight type "Pro-Link WT" by ADS or approved equal.

The fittings shall not reduce or impair the overall integrity or function of the pipe line. Fittings may be either molded or fabricated. Common corrugated fittings may be either molded or fabricated. Common corrugated fittings include in-line joint fittings, such as couplers and reducers, and branch or complimentary assembly fittings such as tees, wyes, and end caps. These fittings may be installed by various methods, such as snap-on, screw-on, bell and spigot, and wrap around. Couplings shall provide sufficient longitudinal strength to preserve pipe alignment and prevent separation at the joints.

2.2 HIGH-DENSITY PERFORATED POLYETHYLENE DRAINAGE PIPE A. Perforated Polyethylene Pipe: Corrugated smooth-lined high-density perforated polyethylene

pipe (HDPE), conforming to ASTM F405-05. HDPE shall be Type N-12 as manufactured by Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc (ADS) Staybrook Industrial Area, Ludlow, MA. 01056, or approved equal. Sizes 4 - 18 inch (N-12) shall have a full circular cross-section, with an outer corrugated pipe wall and an essentially smooth inner wall (waterway) with perforations. Corrugations for these sizes may be either annular or spiral. Size shall conform to the AASHTO classification "Type SP" (which describes pipe with a smooth waterway and Class 2 perforations).

1. Size: See drawings for diameter pipe sizes.

B. Pipe manufactured for this specification shall comply with the requirements for test methods, dimensions, and markings found in AASHTO Designations M252 and M294. Pipe and fittings shall be made from Virgin PE compounds which conform with the requirements of cell Class 324420C as defined and described in ASTM D3350.

C. The minimum parallel plate stiffness values when tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 shall be as follows:

Diameter Pipe Stiffness 4" (100 mm) 50 psi (340 kPa) 6" (150mm) 50 psi (340 kPa) 8" (200mm) 50 psi (340 kPa) 10" (250mm) 50 psi (340 kPa) 12" (300mm) 50 psi (340 kPa)

D. Pipe coupler connections shall be watertight type "Pro-Link WT" by ADS or approved equal.

The fittings shall not reduce or impair the overall integrity or function of the pipe line. Fittings may be either molded or fabricated. Common corrugated fittings may be either molded or fabricated. Common corrugated fittings include in-line joint fittings, such as couplers and reducers, and branch or complimentary assembly fittings such as tees, wyes, and end caps. These fittings may be installed by various methods, such as snap-on, screw-on, bell and spigot, and wrap around. Couplings shall provide sufficient longitudinal strength to preserve pipe alignment and prevent separation at the joints.

2.3 BEE-HIVE CATCH BASINS

A. Precast Concrete Catch Basins:


334000 Page 4 of 6

1. Precast Units shall conform to Standard Specifications, 706-04 Precast Concrete Drainage

Units, of depth indicated. 2. Precast Units shall be manufactured to size and shape as detailed and indicated on the

drawings.

B. Catch Basin Frames and Covers:

1. Frames and Grates shall conform to Standard Specifications, Section 655 Frames, Grates and Covers.

2. Frames and Grates shall be as detailed and specified on the drawings. 2.4 CONCRETE FOR CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURES

A. General: Use Class A concrete conforming to Standard Specifications 501 and construct in accordance with the requirements of Section 555, Structural Concrete and in conformance with Section 03 30 01 - Cast-in-Place Concrete (Site).

2.5 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC

A. Nonwoven Geotextile Fabric: The geotextile fabric shall be Mirafi 140N by Tencate. 2.6 FREE DRAINING TRENCH STONE

A. Free Draining Trench Stone: Trench stone shall be double washed crushed stone consisting of

inert angular material derived from a stone quarry that is hard, durable, washed stone, free of deleterious materials. Gradation shall conform to the following:

Sieve Designation % Passing by Weight Minimum Maximum

1 in 100 --- 3/4 in 90 100 1/2 in 10 50 3/8 in 0 20 No. 4 0 5

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING

A. Excavation and backfill shall conform to Section 31 23 33 – Trenching.


334000 Page 5 of 6

2.2 PIPE INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.

B. Install geotextile fabric as indicated on the drawings.

C. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert.

D. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream.

E. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions

for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

F. Maintain swab or drag in line, and pull past each joint as it is completed.

G. Use fittings for branch connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

H. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected.

I. Install gravity-flow piping of sizes and in locations indicated. Terminate piping as indicated.

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1/2 of 1 percent

(0.5%), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install piping with 18-inch minimum cover unless otherwise indicated.

J. Join piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this application.

K. Use couplings that are compatible with and that fit both systems' materials and dimensions.

L. When excavated material is used, the trench shall be backfilled to the desired limit (excluding

bituminous or rock material larger than one inch) placed in two layers, and compacted.

M. When either coarse aggregate, gravel, or natural sand is used, the trench shall be backfilled in two lifts and each lift compacted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

2.3 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION

A. Construct bee-hive catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated.

B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.

2.4 FREE DRAINING TRENCH STONE INSTALLATION

A. Install free draining trench stone within the geotextile fabric as detailed and as indicated on the drawings.


334000 Page 6 of 6

B. Compact stone material with vibratory roller to minimum 95% modified AASHTO laboratory density (ASTM D-1557, Method C).


A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed.

1. In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning. 2. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops. 3. Flush piping between catch basins and other structures to remove collected debris, if

required by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has

occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.

2.6 CLEAN-UP

A. Keep the premises on which the work is being done, and the adjoining premises, clean of rubbish

caused by his work. B. Clean up all debris caused by his work and leave the job in a neat and clean condition. All

debris shall be removed from the premises at the Contractor's expense.


City of New Rochelle, New York DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Documents

Transcript of City of New Rochelle, New York DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS